enriti arr TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA _ (INCORPORATED) = % VOL. LIX. ~— [Each Author is responsible for the soundness of the opinions given and for the accuracy of the statements made in his paper.] PRICE: TWENTY SHILLINGS. Adelaide: PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, ROYAL SOCIETY ROOMS, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, DECEMBER 23, 1935. (Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide, for Transmission by Post as a Periodical] PrinTeD BY GILLINGHAM & Co. Lrurtep, 106 aNp 108, Currte STREET, ADELAIDE, SouTH AUSTRALIA, Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from the United States of America can be forwarded through the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED) [Each Author is responsible for the soundness of the opinions given and for the accuracy of the statements made in his paper.) PRICE: TWENTY SHILLINGS. Adelaide: PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, ROYAL SOCIETY ROOMS, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, DECEMBER 23, 1935. [Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide, for Transmission by Post as a Periodical] PrintTen sy GILLINGHAM & Co. Limitep, 106 ann 108, Currie STREET, ADELAIDE, SoUTH AUSTRALIA. Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from the United States of America can be forwarded through the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED), Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY MAJOR-GENERAL SIR W. J. DUGAN, K.C.M.G., C.B., D.S.O. OFFICERS FOR 1935-36, President: C. T. MADIGAN, M.A., B.E., D.Sc., F.G.S. Vice-Presidents: HERBERT M. HALE. JAMES DAVIDSON, D.Sc. Hon. Editor: CHARLES FENNER, D.Sc. Hon. Treasurer: Hon. Secretary: W. CHRISTIE, M.B., B.S. NORMAN B. TINDALE, B.Sc. Members of Council: H. K. FRY, D.S.O., M.B,, B.S., B.Sc. PROFESSOR J. BURTON CLELAND, M.D. ERNEST H. ISING. T. D. CAMPBELL, D.D.Sc. PROFESSOR J. G. WOOD, D.Sc., Ph.D. PROFESSOR J. A. PRESCOTT, D.Sce., A.LC. Hon. Auditors: W. CHAMPION HACKETT. O. A. GLASTONBURY, A.A.1.S., A.F.LA. te CONTENTS. Page Oxiruary Notice: Dr. Robert H. Pulleine. With Portrait v Encianp, H. N.: Petrographic Notes on Intrusions of the Houghton Magma in the Mount Loity Ranges ae a se a om Be 1 Hossretp, P. S$.: The Geology of part of the North Mount Lofty Ranges lo Howcuin, Pror. W.: Notes on the Geological Sections obtained by several Borings situated on the Plain between Adelaide and Gulf St. Vincent te 68 Tinpace, N. B., Fenner, F. J., and Harz, F. J.: Mammal Bone Beds of probable Pleistocene Age, Rocky River, Kangaroo Island a ey a aa .. 103 Davipson, Dr. J.: Climate in Relation to Insect Ecology in Australia... 2. Mean Monthly Temperature and Precipitation-Evaporation Ratio .. “ .. 107 Fenner, Dr. C.: Australites, Part [I]. Numbers, Forms, Distribution, and Origin .. 125 Cuewincs, Dr. C.: The Pertatataka Series in Central Australia, with Notes on the Amadeus Sunkland ye ne: 141 Jounsron, Pror, T. Harvey: Remarks on the Cestode Genus Porotaenia 164 Hosxina, J. S.: A Comparative Study of the Black Earths of Australia and the Regur of India : Le ae Ce A os sa ae 7 168 Cooke, W. TrrNeENT: An Examination of the Brown Coal of Noarlunga, Part II 201 Rocers, Dr. R. S., and Nrcuotts, W. H.: A New Bulbophyllum from North Queensland wa ae ae As < na ie us tei .. 204 Womerstey, H.: On Some New Species and Records of Australian and New Zealand Collembola 207 CiLeLann, Pror. J. B.: Australian Fungi. Notes and Descriptions——No., 11 .. 219 Frxiayson, H. H.: Notes on Some Victorian Mammals .. 221 Fintayson, H. H.: On Mammals irom the Lake Eyre Basin. Part II — The Peramelidae $5 ae ae ma ae ah ae Pe ae el LH CuapMan, F.: Plant Remains of Lower Oligocene Age from near Blanche Point, Aldinga, South Australia a 237 Mawson, Str D., and CHapman, F.: The Occurrence of a Lower Miocene Forma- tion on Bougainville Island .. 241 Istnc, E. H.: Notes on the Flora of South Australia—No. 4 243 Hate, H. M.: Some Aquatic Hemiptera from Western Australia 249 Brack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia—No. 33 252 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS 263 ANNUAL Report 266 Sir JosepH Verco MEDAL 268 BALANCE-SHEETS.. ui ; ie ee Se me ES ae 5 269-270 ENDOWMENT FuND 271 Donations To LIBRARY IN EXCHANGE 272 List or FELLows, MEMBERS, ETC. 278 Past AND PRESENT OFFICERS OF THE SOCIETY 281 INDEX 282 ROBERT HENRY PULLEINE, M.B., CH.M., 1869-1935 Leen Block by courtesy ‘Australian Medical Journal” U OBITUARY NOTICE. ROBERT HENRY PULLEINE, The death of Robert Pulleine on June 13 last closed the career not only of a notable medical specialist, but of one who had gained a high reputation as a naturalist, and had been, for more than a quarter of a century, a pillar of the Royal Society. He joined it in 1907. Two years later he was elected our Honorary Secretary, in which capacity he served for two terms, the first being for three years and the second for five; another five years he served as Vice- President; for eight years he was a member of the Council; and in 1922-24 was President. Robert Pulleine was born at Picton, New Zealand, on June 7, 1869. Pulleine’s maternal grandfather, Canon Butt, was prominently associated in New Zealand religious work with the great Bishop Selwyn ; another uncle, Bishop John Pulleine, held an English see; another relation, Colonel Pulleine, distinguished himself in the Zulu War of 1879. Part of Pulleine’s childhood was spent in T'iji, where he became a favourite of that masterful warrior Thakombau, the “King of the Cannibal Isles,” who ceded his kingdom to Britain in 1874. The boy lived in Hobart in 1880, and next year was brought to Adelaide and attended St. Peter’s College. In 1885 he became a cadet in the Adelaide Public Library and remained there until October, 1886. Fora short time he was a teacher in a Collegiate School at North Adelaide, and then he became a medical student at the University. Before he had com- pleted his course, however, the historic clash between the Government and the medical profession scattered the senior students elsewhere. Pulleine went to Sydney, and there graduated M.B., Ch.M., in 1898. He became house surgeon at the Prince Alfred Hospital. Next year he began practising his profession at Gympie, a Queensland town in gold-bearing country. In 1905 he went to Germany to take a course of study to fit him as a specialist in eye, ear, nose and throat work. In 1907 he returned to Adelaide, and soon won a high reputation for his professional skill. Pulleine was a born naturalist of the type exemplified by Charles Darwin, Alfred Russell Wallace, and, to go further back, John Hunter, the great medical naturalist. Pulleine’s former schoolmates tell how he preferred searching for spiders or beetles on the outskirts of the extensive St. Peter’s School grounds, rather than joining in the school games. A tramp in the Adelaide Hills or on the sea beaches was looked on as a pleasant pastime by him, especially if an uncommon plant or shell could be added to his collection, When his means increased and his energy flagged at his work, the tonic he prescribed for himself was a trip to Broken Hill to visit its outback country in company with his medical friend there, Dr. MacGillivray, another born naturalist. He also found frequent visits to the west coast of Tasmania to search in the unsettled country for artefacts and other relics of the vanished aborigines. He was a member of several of the anthropological expeditions to Central Australia and the southern aboriginal settlements of this State, organised by the University and the South Australian Museum. For many years his residence was a roomy old homestead, surrounded by an extensive garden, at the foot of the Adelaide Hills. In the garden he had an extensive collection of succulent plants belonging to families such as Cactaceae, Euphorbiaceae, and other eremian species which had been sent to him by corre- spondents living near desert regions in Africa and America. His object was to vi acclimatise these alien plants, so that they might be grown in the extensive dry areas of this State. To carry out his desire he persuaded the Education Depart- ment to place him in contact with the teachers stationed in the outlying districts. At considerable expense and trouble, he posted to teachers many parcels of plants to be planted in the school gardens. Tis knowledge of the Australian flora was extensive, and the collections he made were selected with judgment. Only a few years before his death he dis- covered a new species of Mcsembryanthemum in the remote Gawler Ranges. Mr. J. M. Black named it after him, Carpobrotus Pulleinei,; later on a new genus, Sarcozoma, had to be made for this interesting plant. During excursions Pulleine was quick to detect any unusual bird or plant, and had a kind of intuitive know- ledge of the relations of the plants and animals that he collected. In this notice it is not possible, to dwell adequately on the many acts of kindness that he showed to those who came to him for professional aid, or the invincible love of natural history that made up so much of his life, or the eminent services that he rendered to science in this State. The following species of animals and plants, most of which he was the first to discover, were named after him:-— Pecten (now Chlamys) pulleineanus Tate, 1887, a scallop shell. Flammulina pulleinet Tate, 1899, a snail from Carrieton. Latirus (now Latirofuscus) pulleinei Verco, a gasteropod shell from Largs Bay. Hesperus pulleinei Blackburn, 1888, a staphilinid beetle from Burnside. Diaea pulleinei Rainbow, 1914, a spider from our North-west. Leptocoma pulleinet Hale, 1928, a cumaceous crustacean. Carpobrotus (now Sarcozoma) Pulleinei Black, 1932, a mesembrianthe- mum from the Gawler Ranges. To the Transactions of this Society he contributed the following papers :— “Arachnida from Central Australia,” vol. xxxviii, 1914, page 477; New Species of Aganippe from Kangaroo Island,” vol. xliii, 1919, page 74; “Two New Species of Lycosa from South Australia,” vol. xlvi, 1922, page 83; “Cylindro-Conical and Cornute Stones from Darling River and Cooper Creek,” vol. xlvi, 1922, page 304; “On the Discovery of Supposed Aboriginal Remains near Cornwall, Tasmania,” vol. xviii, 1924, page 83; “Cylindro-Conical Stones from Arcoona and Pimba, South Australia,” vol. 1, 1926, page 179; “Rock Carvings (Peteroglyphs) and Cave Paintings at Mootwingee, New South Wales,” vol. 1, 1926, page 180. The following articles were published elsewhere :— “Australian Trap-Door Spiders,’ Records of the Australian Museum, vol. xii, page 81; “The Botanical Colonisation of the Adelaide Plains,” Proc. of the Royal Geographical Soc. of Australasia (S.A. Branch), vol. xxxv, 1933-34, pages 31-65; “Rock and Alpine Gardening on the Plains,” South Australian Naturalist, vol. i, 1920, page 56; “The Tas- manians and their Stone Culture,” Report of the Nineteenth Meeting of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science, Hobart, 1928, page 294. A list of his medical publication and an account of his life are given in the Medical Journal of Australia, September 14, 1935, page 362. Adelaide, November 26, 1935. B. S. R. and J. B. C. PETROGRAPHIC NOTES ON INTRUSIONS OF THE HOUGHTON MAGMA IN THE MOUNT LOFTY RANGES BY H. N. ENGLAND, B.SC. Summary Elucidation of the Pre-Cambrian complex of schists, gneisses and intrusive igneous rocks which form the core of the Mount Lofty Ranges presents one of the most interesting problems of South Australian petrology. Knowledge of the petrology of these rocks is due, in considerable measure, to the work of W. N. Benson (1) who, long ago, came to the following conclusions :- "The sedimentary rocks have a marked petrological relationship with each other, and the intrusive granites, diorites and syenites present the closest similarities in all points and are obviously all derived from a single Pre-Cambrian magma, for convenience termed the Houghton magma. An examination of the published descriptions of rocks in other portions of the State shows the similarity of many of these to those derived from the Houghton magma, and points to the probability of South Australia being a petrographic province (in Judd’s sense) in which the chief characteristic is the presence of a large amount of titania and, to a less degree, the rather high soda percentage. These chemical features give rise to unusual rock types in the form of pegmatites, and diorites with very acid plagioclases." Transactions of The Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated) VOL. LVIII. PETROGRAPHIC NOTES ON INTRUSIONS OF THE HOUGHTON MAGMA IN THE MOUNT LOFTY RANGES. By H. N. Encianp, B.Sc. [Read November 8, 1934.] INTRODUCTION, Elucidation of the Pre-Cambrian complex of schists, gneisses and intrusive igneous rocks which form the core of the Mount Lofty Ranges presents one of the most interesting problems of South Australian petrology. Knowledge of the petrology of these rocks is due, in considerable measure, to the work of W. N. Benson (1) who, long ago, came to the following conclusions -— “The sedimentary rocks have a marked petrological relationship with each other, and the intrusive granites, diorites and syenites present the closest similarities in all points and are obviously all derived from a single Pre- Cambrian magma, for convenience termed the Houghton magma. An examination of the published descriptions of rocks in other portions of the State shows the similarity of many of these to those derived from the Houghton magma, and points to the probability of South Australia being a petrographic province (in Judd’s sense) in which the chief characteristic is the presence of a large amount of titania and, to a less degree, the rather high soda percentage. These chemical features give rise to unustal rock types in the form of pegmatites, and diorites with very acid plagioclases.” Benson based these conclusions on an examination and detailed microscopic investigation of rocks in several localities of the Mount Lofty Ranges, particularly in the Houghton district, and on a chemical analysis of the Houghton diorite executed by himself, It was felt that Benson’s work could, with advantage, be amplified by a study of these rocks, particularly the igneous rocks, in localities other than the Houghton district. For this purpose geological examinations were made in six other localities where rather similar igneous rocks were known to occur, a considerable number of slides of both igneous and sedimentary rocks were prepared, and a number of rocks submitted to chemical analysis. No account of any microscopic descrip- tions of sedimentary rocks appears and, of the igneous rocks, the descriptions are far from complete. Reference should be made to Benson’s work for a detailed account of the general petrography of certain of the rocks of the Pre-Cambrian complex, and of the optical properties of their component minerals. Eleven complete analyses are recorded herewith: eight of intermediate igneous rocks, and three of associated basic rocks, 138° 30° wy 733" \& AN ge — 34°36) ‘KR 8 aT & north Para anunda f° EIS 4 Gawler Ei4 & Gawler. Ne. Si - yor Cane NS \ R S (2 ® Mars S WNesie. fl eek S tks ADELAIDE & alt Crawford S Ss SS AY PLAINS 5 \ ‘B, N pout? Mt.Pleasant Re 7] SV S Je) kj N ADELAIDE A” Tt N & = Sf & EI S e & Ew S 35 aw x SS S&S ps 38° VINCENT eS, FPA gate S SS E12 & S nde oMt.Barker Goolwa 35°30 ——— 203.646. 2s, ee” ES cA Es2 aaa : Lo 35°30" f a a Victor Harbour EP 9 cS AS ASSEN eS : y SSS SSS SS ° 5 to mile ONG SSS Sle ett les. oF Sue 138°30" ° 8 we kiloms. 13g CaN Fig. 1—Locality Map. 3 YANKALILLA-NORMANVILLE DISTRICT. One and a half miles to the south-east of Yankalilla township a small out- lier of Barossian (Houghtonian) rock forms a hill on Sections 1,185 and 1,186, Hundred of Yankalilla. It is surrounded by the debris of Permo-Carboniferous glaciation, but the Barossian rocks of the Myponga Tiers outcrop a short distance away to the north-east. The schists and grits of this outlier have been intruded by a syenitic magma (Analysis I) and numerous ilmenitic pegmatites and quartz veins, which have strongly silicified the grits and converted the pelitic sediments into augen schists. The main body of the intrusion which outcrops irregularly over an area about 300 yards in diameter, is a syenitic rock consisting mainly of felspar, epidote and actinolite, but two interesting varieties containing unaltered diopside, one with garnet and scapolite in addition, occur on Section 1,186. The shape of the intrusive body is irregular, and its type undecided. Three and a half miles to the west a macroscopically similar felspar-epidote- actinolite rock is intruded into similar schists and silicified grits. These sedi- mentary rocks form the cliffs for some three or four miles along the coastline, and are deeply dissected by two gorges: that of the Yankalilla River, two miles south of Normanville, and the Little Gorge, one and a half miles further down the coast, The junction of the western side of the gorge of the Yankalilla River with the coastal cliffs is in the form of a steep hog-back, and at a height of about 150 feet above stream level the syenitic rock outcrops strongly. On the other side of the gorge it is met with at a somewhat lower level, and can be traced over the hill for a distance of three or four hundred yards to the north-east. A little further on (Section 1,002) a small bar of schistose mica syenite is exposed in a creek bed (3). To the south-east of the gorge of the Yankalilla River the syenitic rock can be followed along the flat top of Yankalilla Hill beyond its summit. The outcrop is approximately 14 miles in length, is quite narrow—seldom more than 200 yards wide—and covers parts of Sections 81, 82, 1,001, 1,002, 1,080, 1,081, 1,100, 1,101 and 1,102, Hundred of Yankalilla. It runs roughly parallel to the direction of schistosity (and apparent strike) of the country rock, suggesting a sill-like form for the intruded body. The surrounding rocks have been much intruded by massive, schlieric and lit-par-lit injected pegmatites, most of which are orthoclastic and carry biotite, occasionally muscovite, and sometimes ilmenite and schorlaceous tourmaline. A large body of pegmatitic biotite granite occurs high up in the face of the gorge on Section 1,101. Half a mile further upstream the country rock, here a quartzite, is still heavily veined with pink orthoclastic pegmatites. At either end of the syenitic intrusion, however, pegmatites are markedly different; they occur as narrow veins, often rather aplitic in character, and consist mainly of white acid plagioclase and actinolite, presenting similarities to the yatalite type described by Benson from the Houghton district. In contrast to these syenitic rocks are the diorites and amphibolites of the Little Gorge. A small area of these rocks is exposed on the northern face of the gorge about 70 feet above stream level, a little upstream from the bridge by which the main road crosses the creek. The main variety is a pyroxene diorite, but a quartz diorite and two types of melanocratic amphibole rock occur also. The remarkable monazite-bearing pegmatite described by R. G. Thomas (4) occurs on the south side of the gorge a few hundred yards to the west, and is almost certainly a product of this dioritic intrusion. The intruded rocks are micaceous and sericitic schists and grits which have been much altered in places by thermal metamorphism and pegmatisation with the formation of augen-gneisses and augen-schists. IIlmenitic pegmatites are commonly encountered for half a mile further down the coast. 4 2,800.0) Syenitic rock, Section 1,001, Hundred of Yankalilla; Analysis II. Macroscopically a handsome rock consisting of pink orthoclase, yellow-green epidote and dark green actinolite, The felspathic and ferromagnesian minerals are roughly concentrated in separate bands; a moderate amount of quartz ig aSso- ciated with the actinolite. Sphene in small crystals is plentifully distributed, and occasional crystals of pyrite can be distinguishcd. Microscopically a granular to granulitic rock, original grain-size about 2 min, The banded structure is not apparent in thin section. The felspars are all much decomposed, and are mainly potassic—orthoclase and microcline, both perthitic in some cases. The host is partially altered to kaolin and sericite, and the perthitic member to calcite, The orthoclase usually has a moiré appearance, often partially obscured by decomposi- tion, A small amount of felspar shows fine twinning on the albite law, but decomposition prevents determination of other optical properties. Surrounding many of the felspar grains and filling up interstices are fine granular masses of quartz, a mineral resembling an untwinned felspar, epidote and calcite. Actinolite is plentifully distributed as irregularly shaped grains in association with granular masses of epidote. Its Pleochroism and cleavages are well developed, and it shows no sign of pseudomorphic structure. The edges of the grains are some- what chloritised. Small grains of calcite showing slight secondary twinning are often associated with the epidote, and moderate sized grains of strained quartz are fairly common. Anhedral grains of sphene are plentiful, and euhedra of pyrite, the only iron ore present, occur sparsely. Apatite in rods and prisms is present in fair quantity. 2801. Syenitic rock, Section 1,185, Hundred of Yankalilla; Analysis I. Macroscopically this rock is very similar to 2,800. It is, however, somewhat finer in grain, not so noticeably banded, the felspar is less highly coloured, and quartz is present in somewhat greater quantity. Microscopically also it is similar to 2,800, with the following differences:—A smaller grain-size; some development of a banded structure—felspar bands alternating with bands composed of epidote, actinolite and quartz; development of a schistose texture in places; a higher calcium content of the minerals of the epidote group; a fresher condition of the felspars; and the presence of small quantities of scapolite, garnet and ilmenite. The minerals of the epidote group present are zoisite, clinozoisite and epidote. The epidote is in large irregular grains often optically continuous over large areas, and including grains of actinolite and quartz. The zoisite and clinozoisite occur with the granular interstitial quartz and felspar. A few grains of an intermediate scapolite are present and are considerably altered to zoisite. In one slide a few anhedral grains of garnet and one of ilmenite were observed. 2,803. Syenitic rock, Section 1,186, Hundred of Yankalilla. Occurring in association with 2,801. Macroscopically a fine to medium-grained rock of pale buff felspar, yellow-green epidote, dark green pyroxene and red garnet. Micro- scopically a medium-grained allotriomorphic granular rock consisting of micro- cline and moiré orthoclase; large masses of garnet often enveloping grains of quartz and diopside; diopside often approaching ididmorphism; large slabs of a scapolite with a birefringence corresponding to a calcic wernerite, and consider- ably altered to zoisite; quartz; and numerous small anhedra of sphene. E46. Diopside syenite, Section 1,186, Hundred of Yankalilla. Occurs in association with 2,801. Macroscopically a fine-grained rock showing pinkish felspar and a dark green pyroxene with epidote and actinolite in patches. Micro- scopically it is rather similar to 2,801 and consists of partially kaolinized micro- cline and moiré orthoclase; grains of diopside, some almost entirely altered to () Numbers refer to catalogued Rock Nos. or Slide Nos. in the Department of Geology, University of Adelaide. 5 epidote and some partially uralitized; scapolite largely altered to zoisite and a fibrous or platy mineral; and a little quartz, sphene and iron ore. E58. Diallage hornblende diorite, Section 80, Hundred of Yankalilla; Analysis III. Macroscopically a medium-grained saccharoidal rock consisting of white plagioclase, olive green pyroxene, greenish-black amphibole, a few biotite flakes, ilmenite and a little raditaing fibrous actinolite. Microscopically it is a medium-grained hypidiomorphic to allotriomorphic rock, the pyroxene showing a tendency towards idiomorphism. The bulk of the felspar is a plagioclase with optical properties indicating a composition Ab75 An25—an oligoclase-andesine. Orthoclase is present in much smaller quantity; both are kaolinised to a certain extent, and have inclusions of decomposition products arranged as. small needles along the cleavage planes. The pyroxene occurs as hypidiomorphic crystals possessing a well-developed diallaginous cleavage and a maximum extinction in the ab zone of 38°. The optical properties and colour suggest a diallage with some content of titanium. It is mostly fresh, but in some cases altered to actinolite, Dark brown pleochroic primary hornblende is plentifully distributed as allotriomorphic grains with chloritized edges and possessing the typical cleavages and a maximum extinction in the ab zone of 20°. A few plates of dark brown, pleochroic, somewhat chloritised biotite are present and show a web of sagenitic inclusions, Irregular grains of ilmenite surrounded by decomposition rings of leucoxene are plentiful, and apatite is fairly common. One grain (1°5 mm. X 1 mm.) of a faintly yellow mineral of high refraction and double refraction was observed in this slide, and gave a biaxial positive interference figure and a double refraction of ‘047 or greater; it is almost certainly monazite. The near-by monazite pegmatite (4) is evidently a product of this intrusion. E52. Quarts diorite, Section 80, Hundred of Yankalilla. Associated with E58. Macroscopically a fine-grained somewhat gneissic rock in which white striated felspar, quartz, actinolite and ilmenite can be distinguished. Micro- scopically it is a fine-grained allotriomorphic granular rock consisting of partially decomposed acid oligoclase; fresher orthoclase; plentiful quartz; chloritized actinolite showing no trace of pseudomorphism; greenish-brown biotite typically associated with ilmenite, which is present in quantity and extensively altered to leucoxene ; and numerous grains of apatite. E49, Amphibohte, Section 80, Hundred of Yankalilla, Associated with E58. A medium-grained melanocratic rock mainly composed of dark green amphibole with some white plagioclase and a few biotite flakes. Macroscopically it is a medium-grained allotriomorphic granular rock consisting of green, mar- ginally chloritised, fibrous actinolite after pyroxene; brown primary hornblende; kaolinized basic oligoclase in fair quantity and orthoclase in small quantity ; scattered flakes of biotite; and numerous grains of ilmenite and apatite. E54, Amphibolite, Section 80, Hundred of Yankalilla. Associated with E58. Macroscopically a dark-coloured medium-grained rock of dark green elongated prisms of amphibole resembling actinolite, smaller grains of white plagioclase and a few biotite flakes. Microscopically it is a medium-grained allotriomorphic granular rock consisting largely of anhedra of an amphibole pleochroic between green and yellow-brown. Although it is different in colour to the primary amphiboles in the associated rocks E49 and E58, and its macro- scopic appearance suggests actinolite, there is no reason to doubt its pyrogenetic nature. It is massive and homogeneous, its cleavage is well developed, and it has no trace of relic shape or cleavage. It is altered in one case to a serpentinous ageregate. Other minerals are an andesine partially altered to kaolin masses or laths of zoisite, and a little biotite and apatite. 6 Analysis I, II, and III, The similarity of analysis I and II is striking, and there can be no doubt about the similarity of origin of the rocks. The compositions are unique and cannot represent normal igneous rocks (in Daly’s sense), Extensive mineralogical alteration has taken place since intrusion, and may have been accompanied by considerable changes in chemical composition. However, rocks of similar appearance, if not composition, occur in associa- tion with the basic diorite (analysis VIL) from South Kuitpo and the acid diorite (analysis X) from the Tanunda district, and suggest that this type may be a normal differentiation product of the diorites of the Mount Lofty Ranges. In addition, the possibility of assimilation, particularly of calcareous rocks, must not be overlooked. It is noteworthy in this regard that the Yankalilla rock contains scapolite and garnet, and that continuation of the Rapid Head and Dela- mere limestones along their lines of strike would bring them into close proximity to the sites of rocks I and II, respectively. Indeed, the Rapid Head limestone has been traced to within a comparatively short distance from the Little Gorge and appears to underlie the intruded sediments. However, there is a distinct possibility of a reversal of dip at this point and, indeed, throughout most of the Fleurieu Peninsula (5). ‘The chemical and normative compositions of the diorite (analysis III) are not unusual; the acidity of the modal plagioclase (Ab75 An25) relative to the normative plagioclase (Ab57 An43) is worthy of notice. Myponca TIERs. The only area visited in this locality was in the vicinity of the “Grey Spur” (Section 361, Hundred of Encounter Bay), where the country rock underlying the Adelaidean basal conglomerate is in general a contorted gneiss composed mainly of felspar and mica. Rocks of assured igneous origin occur in small quantity and are markedly gneissic or schistose in character, Ilmenite is a common constituent, particular of the numerous pegmatites. Sir D. Mawson (7) reports a narrow bar of syenitic gneiss in a creek bed on Section 84. Microscopic examination reveals blastoporphyritic felspars in a fine granulated ground mass. The felspars are comparatively fresh soda-microcline and microcline together within smaller quantity a plagioclase extensively altered to small laths of epidote and zoisite, or almost entirely replaced by vermicular quartz. Aggregates of epidote grains and flakes of greenish decomposed biotite possibly represent original pyroxcne. Small grains of quartz, ilmenite and apatite occur plentifully in the ground mass, together with odd grains of zircon. Further north in the same section the creek cuts through a fair width of schistose ilmenitic mica diorite. It is a fine-grained greenish-grey rock present- ing a very micaceous schistosity plane, but in other planes it is saccharoidal in appearance. Microscopically the rock consists mainly of small grains of plagio- clase—an andesine of composition Ab7O An30—which, together with grains of strained quartz, form a mosaic in which are set parellel flakes of green chloritized biotite, numerous grains of ilmenite and a few zircon crystals. Another patch of schistose mica diorite occurs about a half-mile west of the Grey Spur near the boundary of Sections 361 and 84. It is similar in texture and structure to the previous rock, but different in colour, the felspar being pink and the mica black. Microscopically, also, it is similar to the previous rock except that the felspar is not granulated, the mica only partially arranged in one plane, 7 and plates often show a sagenitic network and pleochroic haloes surrounding small zircons. An ilmenitic pegmatite from Section 361 was also examined, The felspar consisted of decomposed perthitic anorthoclase and an acid plagioclase in about equal proportions. Reported outcrops of granite in the neighbourhood are apparently massive pegmatites, The titania content (4°6%—5:2%) of iron ores from near Mount Cone (8) is noteworthy, as is also the composition (Na,O, 811%; K,O, 1:01%) of the felspar (9) from a massive pegmatite on Section 60, Hundred of Myponga. Mount Compass—SoutHern Kutreo Disrrtcr. .This area of Barossian (Houghtonian) rocks is divided in an east-west direc- tion by an ancient glacial valley partially filled with glacial debris, through which the headwaters of the Finniss River now flow. The Barossian rocks to the south comprise the Mount Compass—Mount Moon—Mount Effie ridge; to the north they extend as far as the Kuitpo Forest area and, according to Mawson (7) and Teale (10), are bounded on the east and west by the valleys of Blackfellows and Meadows Creeks, respectively, Over the whole of this area, particularly the southern portion, the country rock is highly metamorphosed and is much decom- posed near the surface. The Mount Compass—Mount Moon—Mount Effie ridge is mainly of con+ torted sericite and talcose schists with siliceous variations. A syenitic rock carrying considerable ilmenite and distinctly resembling the Houghton type is intruded into the schists on the southern slopes of Mount Compass (Section 314, Hundred of Nangkita); with it are associated ilmenite pegmatites and large numbers of ilmenite quartz veins. The nature of the intrusion relative to the intruded rocks is unknown. ‘The shape of the outcrop is irregular; it is about 4 mile across in a north-south direction and somewhat wider east and west. It is evident from the description (1) that the specimen received by Benson from this source was definitely more dioritic than that described below, Sir Douglas Mawson has collected an interesting variation containing mica and a mineral resembling a sodic scapolite, A mile to the east of Mount Compass, in the south-western corner of Sec- tion 15, Hundred of Myponga, a dyke-like outcrop of a dark-coloured basic rock was observed. Another basic dyke occurs near the south-east corner of the same section, but is much finer grained than the former. Ilmenite quartz veins are again common further east along the ridge. On the northern side of the Finniss Valley the Barossian rocks have apparently suffered less shearing and contortion. Teale (10) has described the slightly pegmatised siliceous and phyllitic schists of the northern and western portions of this area, and Mawson (7) the gneisses of Blackfellows Creek. The gneisses, including a zircon syenite-gneiss with resemblances to rocks of the Houghton type, are confined to the eastern and south-eastern portion of this area; the rocks on the Meadows Creek side and of the plateau between the two creeks conform to Teale’s descriptions. The contrasts in flora reported by Teale are striking; an abrupt change from stunted scrub to open park-like country known as the Government Farm on Section 287, Hundred of Kuitpo, is particularly noticeable and is due to variation in the country rocks. Small outcrops of diorite occur here among gneissic rocks of granitic composition. The gneisses appear to have been formed by the felspathisation of contact rocks; they often grade imperceptibly into aplites, which are very common. An interesting variant of the diorite containing diopside and 8 sphene was obtained ; also a banded felspar-epidote-actinolite rock which, although more felspathic, resembles strikingly the syenitic rocks of Normanville and Yan- kalilla, Unfortunately, is was too rotten for sectioning. T he country rock to the west is a spotted mica schist with a foliation strike slightly east of north, To the north-east, right down to Blackfellows Creek, felspathic gneisses differing from the above contact rocks, but similar to those reported by Mawson, occur without much variation. 2,802. Ilmenitic syenite, Section 314, Hundred of Nangkita; Analysis IV. Macroscopically a highly felspathic banded rock of pink felspar, ilmenite, epidote and actinolite. Much of the ilmenite is in fine layers or bands at an angle to the coarse banding of the rock, suggesting introduction during the later stages of crystallization. Microscopically it is a fine-grained allotriomorphic granular to granoblastic rock consisting mainly of felspathic minerals, The dominant mineral is a perthite showing a variable development of microcline twinning. The perthitic inclusions are in some cases present to almost as great an extent as the host itself. The larger inclusions show polysynthetic twinning but no determination could be made. Some orthoclase is present and often has a moiré appearance. Other than the perthitic inclusions there are a few small grains of plagioclase, presumably an acid variety. Quartz is present in moderate quantity as small interstitial grains and as inclusions in felspathic and ferromagnesian minerals. Small anhedra of titaniferous iron ore partially arranged in bands are abundant. It has a dark steel-grey lustre and is slightly changed on the edges to a reddish-yellow product. Pale green pleochroic actinolite occurs as small anhedra evidently secondary after diopside ; in one case the remains of a pyroxene cleavage net were still noticeable. Epidote occurs as very small irregular grains and granular aggregates for the most part in association with actinolite. Apatite as rods and prisms is fairly plentiful. 1,158. Ilmenite pegmatite, Section 214, Hundred of Nangkita. Macro- scopically a moderately coarse-grained pegmatitic rock consisting mainly of white felspar with a little pink felspar, quartz and a considerable quantity of ilmenite. Microscopically it consists of large grains of fresh microcline perthite partially granulated, and of quartz, grains and masses of ilmenite, a few flakes of decom- posed biotite and odd grains of apatite, set in a fine granulated mass of quartz. 1,160. Dolerite (diabase), South-east corner of Section 15, Hundred of Myponga; Analysis V. Macroscopically a dense dark greenish-grey very fine- grained rock. The only distinguishable minerals are deep green amphibole and occasional small whitish patches of felspar. Microscopically a fine uneven-grained holocrystalline much altered rock consisting in general of laths of felspar and grains of actinolite in a fine ground mass of saussuritised felspar. The laths are short and broad and brownish with decomposition; optical properties indicate plagioclase of composition Ab45 An55—a labradorite. Green pleochroic actinolite is present in quantity; it is probably secondary after pyroxene, although no traces of the latter remain, .A little epidote as small grains occurs in association with the actinolite, Ilmenite is present in quantity, and a few grains and prisms of quartz and apatite are noticeable. 1,165. Dolerite (diabase), South-west corner of Section 15, Hundred of Myponga; Analysis VL. Macroscopically a fine-grained dark grey-green rock, but coarser in texture than 1,160. Dark green amphibole and white laths and small patches of felspar can be distinguished. Microscopically it is coarser grained than 1,160, has a tendency to intersertal texture, and is rather more decomposed. The plagioclase laths are more basic—Ab40 An60—and largely altered to zoisite. ‘The actinolite is partially chloritised. Otherwise the rock is similar to 1,160. 9 1.161. Dolerite-—-A rounded boulder picked up on the surface 200 yards east of the summit of Mount Compass. Source unknown, possibly transported by glacial action. Macroscopically a fine-grained greenish-grey rock in which small grains of dark green amphibole and buff-coloured felspar are distinguishable. Microscopically a medium to fine-grained rock with textural and mineralogical properties intermediate between the dolerites of Mount Compass-Mount Effie ridge (1,160 and 1,165) on the one hand, and the Government Farm diorrte (1,164) on the other. The fine groundmass has disappeared, except for a little interstitial saussuritised felspar. The bulk of the felspar is present as irregular grains, having optical properties indicating an andesine of composition Ab63 An37. It is somewhat saussuritised along the edges, but is otherwise quite fresh and exhibits well-developed albite, carlsbad and pericline twinning. A little fresh microcline is present also. Green pleochroic fibrous actinolite associated with small grains of epidote is present in quantity, and is probably secondary after pyroxene. Ilmenite occurs in quantity, and apatite in limited amount. 1,164. Diorite, Government Farm, Section 287, Hundred of Kuitpo; Analysis VII. Macroscopcially a dark-coloured, fine, even-grained, rather saccharoidal rock, in which can be distinguished buff plagioclase and both dark- greenish, black and light green amphibole. The rock is banded with aplitic veins of buff-coloured felspar. Microscopically an even medium-grained allotrio- morphic granular rock. The bulk of the felspar is a comparatively fresh plagio- clase of composition Ab7O An30; the remainder is microcline and, possibly, a little orthoclase. Primary hornblende pleochroic between dark green and light brown is well distributed throughout the rock, and is sometimes marginally chloritised. More common than the hornblende is green pleochroic actinolite in confused masses secondary after diopside, of which some traces remain, The actinolite is also partially chloritised. A few grains of quartz are scattered throughout the rock. Ilmenite as irregular grains superficially altered to leucoxene is present in fair quantity ; also a number of rods and prisms of apatite. E4. Diopside sphene diorite, Section 287, Hundred of Kuitpo. Macro- scopically a grey-green, fine-grained, banded and rather schistose rock. The distinguishable minerals are buff felspar, green pyroxene and numerous small grains of sphene. Microscopically a medium uneven-grained rock, possibly not wholly primary in character ; it appears to have undergone some degrees of crush- ing, and there is a fair amount of intergranular granulated quartz. The felspar is mainly a decomposed plagioclase with a higher refraction than Canada Balsam ; other optical properties could not be determined. A little microcline is also present. Diopside is in quantity as shapeless partially uralitised grains. A con- siderable amount of sphene is present as moderate size anhedra; also a little apatite. Analyses IV, V, VI and VII. Considerable difficulty was experienced in the determination of ferrous oxide in rock 2,802 (Analysis IV), owing to the highly refractory nature of the iron ore. Similar difficulty was encountered by Benson with the iron ore from the Houghton diorite. A number of determinations were attempted using Washington’s rapid method on the finely-ground material, the most satisfactory giving results of 1:03% and 104%, but still a little iron ore was undecomposed. More prolonged heating over a water-bath and in an atmosphere of carbon dioxide was tried without success. The regrinding mcthod recommended by Hillebrand finally gave concordant and apparently satisfactory results. The amount and composition of the iron ore are striking features of the mode and norm. A Delesse-Rosiwal estimation of this mineral in the slides gave a volume percentage of 4°6. Assuming the specific gravity to be within Dana’s limits (4°80-5°20) and 10 that all the titania is present in the iron ore, the weight percentage of this mineral and its titania content will lie within the limits 8-1-8°8% and 9°4-8:6%, respec- tively, The composition of the normative iron ore is Fe,O, 81%, FeO 11%, TiO, 8%, but some proportion of the iron oxides will be present modally in the ferromagnesian minerals. Specimens of ilmenite from ilmenite quartz veins, the first from near the intrusion and the second from the western shoulder of Mount Effie, were subjected to partial analysis with the following results :-— Total iron oxide as Fe,O, = - - 83°10 81-70 ‘Litania - - - - - 18°65 19-80 Chromic oxide = - - - - present present Vanadic oxide - - - - present present Magnesia - - - - - nil nil It will be seen that these ilmenites have a higher titania content than the iron ore of the syenite. The compositions of the dolerites 1,160 and 1,165 (Analyses V and VI) are very similar, and except for the low alkali content, especially potash, are not unusual, The latter rock has considerably less felspar, but the normative com- positions of the plagioclases are almost the same. ‘The Government Farm rock (1,164) is a basic diorite very similar in composi- tion to that from Little Gorge, Normanville (E58). Like the dolerites, it is low in alkalies; 4°5% normative orthoclase and normative plagioclase composition Ab56 An44. As is usual with these (Houghton-type) rocks, however, a consider- able proportion of the normative anorthite is present modally in the ferro- magnesian minerals, resulting in comparative acidity of the plagioclase—Ab70 An30 in this case. The relation between the diorite, syenite and dolerite (1,160) is apparently quite simple and is strikingly illustrated by the similarity of the figures below; the upper line represents the composition of a mixture of three parts of the dolerite with one part of the syenite, and the lower the composition of the diorite ©) :— Sio, ALO, FeO, FeQ MgO CaO Na,O K,O TiO, P,O, MnO 51°65 17:21 3°63 6°60 5°53 8-76 2°52 1°76 1:83 +36 °15 51°78 15°53 4:77 6°91 5:42 8:42 2°82 +72 1:94 +51 +23 It is obvious that the syenite and dolerite are simple differentiation products of the dioritic magma. The only serious discrepancies are in the figures for potash, alumina and ferric oxide. It is obvious in the field, however, that a con- siderable amount of potash and alumina have left the dioritic magma in the form of orthoclastic aplites, and the deficiency of the mixture in iron oxides may be due to the large amounts of ilmenite in the apophyses of the syenite. ALDGATE Districr. The Barossian (Houghtonian) rocks of this district have been described by Tlowchin (6) and Benson, and, apart from variations of rocks described by them, no additional igneous rocks were observed. The mica diorite which Benson has described from Section 1,133, Hundred of Onkaparinga, was examined, and is rather similar to schistose mica diorites from near the Grey Spur. Diorites, macroscopically very like the Houghton diorite, occur at and around Aldgate Pound (Res. No. 2, Hundred of Noarlunga). Three varieties were collected from this locality, and are all more basic and more dioritic than the quartz diopside syenite described by Benson. The variety chosen for analyses was not the least decomposed, but is probably more typical of the intrusive body. It is a poikilitic ©) The compositions have not been calculated to a water free basis. 11 variety similar in many respects to the rock described by Benson, and is inter- mediate in composition between the more basic fine-grained diorite also occurring on the pound reserve and the more acid coarse-grained diorite on the hill to the east (Section 44, Hundred of Noarlunga). E12. Poikilitic diopside diorite, Aldgate Pound, Res. No. 2, Hundred of Noarlunga; Analysis VIII. Macroscopically a greyish-green rock, in which the only distinguishable minerals are felspar and a pale green ferromagnesian. The felspar is sometimes poikilitic over comparatively large areas—cleavages faces up to 2 cm. in length, speckled with small grains of a ferromagnesian constituent, are sometimes encountered; otherwise the rock is fine-grained. Microscopically an irregular medium to fine-grained rock, in which moderate size felspar crystals often poiki- litically enclose numerous grains of diopside and its decomposition products. The bulk of the felspar is a plagioclase—an oligoclase-andesine of composition Ab72 An28—somewhat cloudy with decomposition. Fresh diopside is uncommon; most of it is altered to pale green fibrous actinolite, the fibres of which extend beyond the original crystal boundaries; small grains of epidote are associated with the actinolite. Interstitial microcline is present as small grains not in any great quantity. Quartz is scattered sparsely throughout the rock, and iron ore, sphene and apatite are comparatively plentiful. Ell. Diopside diorite, Aldgate Pound, Res. No. 2, Hundred of Noarlunga. Macroscopically a greyish-green, very fine-grained rock, apparently consisting mainly of felspar. Small grains of epidote and a green ferromagnesian can be observed. Microscopically a fine even-grained rock differing from E12 in its texture, the fresher condition of its component minerals, and in the absence of quartz. The bulk of the felspar is a plagioclase of similar composition——-Ab72 An28—and is comparatively fresh. A smaller proportion of microcline is present and occurs more or less interstitially, Pale green diopside in small grains is altered in the same manner, but not to the same extent. Small anhedra of sphene are numerous; iron ore and apatite are well scattered throughout the slide. E10. Diopside quartz diorite, Section 44, Hundred of Noarlunga. Macro- scopically a coarse to medium variable grained banded rock consisting mainly of whitish plagioclase and green pyroxene. Some quartz, a little epidote and numerous grains of sphene are noticeable. The felspar and ferromagnesian constituent are roughly concentrated in separate bands. Microscopically it is coarser grained and more acid than the poikilitic variety; the plagioclase is more decomposed, but the diopside less so. The optical properties of the plagioclase indicates a composition of Ab75 An25, and it is kaolinised to a fair extent. Interstitial microcline in fair quantity is quite fresh. Quartz is present in much greater amount than in the poikilitic rock. The diopside is altered to fibrous actinolite and associated epidote only in a few instances. A fair amount of sphene is present, and lesser quantities of ilmenite and apatite. Analysis VII, The composition of this rock is not unlike those of other diorites of this series. The lime-soda ratio is rather lower than in some cases, and the dominance of soda over potash is rather more marked. More lime enters into the plagio- clase, so that the difference between the modal and normative compositions of the plagioclase is not great (Ab/72 An28 and Ab67 An33, respectively). Mount Crawrorp District. The eastern portion of the Hundred of Barossa consists of a series of meta- morphosed grits, pelitic sediments and limestones—the original Barossian Series of Woolnough (12). However, the succession of beds eastwards from Williams- town suggests similarities to the Adelaide Series, and on this account Professor 12 Howchin (13) considers them to be metamorphosed equivalents of Adelaidean sediments. On Section 257, Hundred of Barossa, three-quarters of a mile north of the summit of Mount Crawford, there is a small outcrop of a banded diopside diorite intruded into mica schist. It extends from the Williamstown-Springton road southwards for about 80 to 100 yards, and its width is considerably less; a small quantity at the northern end has been cut away for the road. There is consider- able jointing normal to the banding, and the joint planes are covered with actino- lite needles up to 1 cm. in length. The mantle of soil obscures the contacts with the country rock. The nearest exposed mica schists show little sign of contact metamorphism. According to Howchin’s section, these mica schists are inter- mediate between the metamorphic equivalent of the “thick quartzite” of the Adelaide Series to the west and the metamorphic phase of the overlying “upper limestone” to the east. Ei. Diopside diorite, Section 257, Hundred of Barossa; Analysis IX. Macroscopically a fine to medium-grained banded rock consisting of pale pinkish felspar, apple green ferromagnesian, sometimes rather fibrous, a little epidote and numerous small grains of sphene. Its resemblance to the Houghton diorite is striking. Microscopically it is a medium-grained rock which has been subjected to some degree of crushing—adjacent felspar crystals are more or less dove-tailed together. The fclspar is mainly a plagioclase, so much decomposed that accurate determination of its composition is impossible; it appears to be a basic oligaclase or an acid andesine. A little microcline also is present. Diopside is present in quantity as almost colourless, irregular grains of varying size, partially altered to green pleochroic actinolite and associated epidote and zoisite. In rare cases it is entirely replaced by a mosaic of epidote and zoisite. Veins of epidote occur as infilling of cracks. Apatite is plentiful as rods and prisms, and numerous grains of sphene are present. Two variants were obtained, one from the road cutting and the other from the southern end of the outcrop. The former (2) is a fine granulated mosaic of felspar, diopside and quartz. The felspar is a decomposed plagioclase, apparently an oligoclase. In places numerous small, apparently separate, grains of diopside are orientated in the same crystal plane over comparatively large areas. The latter rock (E3) is texturally similar to the typical rock, but differs in that more microcline, a little quartz and less apatite are present; also, the diopside is extensively altered to actinolite. Analysis IX, It is quite obvious that this rock is considerably decomposed; no modal quartz is apparent and yet a considerable quantity occurs in the norm. The amount is far too large to be accounted for on the assumption that portion of the silica in the normative anorthite occurs modally in the metasilicate of the diopside molecule. Obviously it must be derived mainly from the felspars, and indicates an extremely decomposed condition of those minerals. This accounts for the very low content of alkalies compared with the high lime content. TANUNDA DIsTRICcT. The igneous rocks of this district, with special reference to the Tanunda Creek granite, have been described, and their occurrence mapped, by P. 5S. Hoss- feld (13). Specimens of two rocks from this locality were analysed; a diorite , @) P. Hossfeld’s exhaustive field work in this area, however, indicates that rocks in this area are pre-Adelaidean.—D. M. 13 (tonalite) from Section 738, Hundred of Moorooroo, and a dolerite from the road between Sections 738 and 653. The diorite covers portion of Sections 738, 644 and 653, and is intruded into quartzites and siliceous schists of approximately meridional strike. The country rock to the east is heavily veined with pegmatites containing epidote, actinolite and iron ore. Banded orthoclase-actinolite-epidote rock similar to that in the contact zone of the South Kuitpo diorite, and recalling the Yankalilla-Normanville syenitic rocks was encountered in places near the edge of the intrusion. The syenite recorded by Hossfeld occurs on Section 653 and appears to be a somewhat orthoclastic variation of the dolerite, The dolerite occtirs as a small rounded outcrop about a chain in diameter on the road between Sections 653 and 738 in close association with the diorite. Other igneous rocks, mainly basic in character, occur in the neighbourhood, notably at Black Hill —Section 82—but were not examined in any detail. E14. Quartz diorite (tonalite), Section 738, Hundred of Moorooroo; Analysis X. Macroscopically a medium-grained speckled rock of pinkish felspar, confused black micaceous aggregates and some quartz. Microscopically a medium variable grained rock which has undergone some degree of crushing and developed almost a granoblastic texture. The dominant felspar is a plagioclase with a maximum symmetrical extinction of 21°—an andesine of composition Ab60 An4O0. It is altered to a moderate extent to a scapolite with double refraction of -023, approximately—a wernerite. In one instance calcite was observed as a decomipo- sition product of the plagioclase. A fair amount of dusty orthoclase is present and has developed a moiré appearance. Quartz occurs in fair quantity as strained grains, often rather granulated. Green pleochroic hornblende occurs as much corroded granular aggregates in conjunction with irregularly arranged books and plates of brown pleochroic mica and small grains of quartz. In some cases the hornblende is altered to granular masses of epidote and the biotite to chlorite. Although the highest extinction shown by the hornblende is 18°, it nevertheless appears to be of pyrogenetic origin. Probably these aggregates of hornblende, biotite and quartz are the result of the breaking down, during crystallization of the magma, of aggregates of pyroxene molecules, in which case the rock may be described as a tonalite instead of a quartz diorite. A fair amount of apatite in rods and prisms is present; also a smaller quantity of leucoxenised ilmenite, a little sphene and a few grains of pyrite. E15. Dolerite, road between Sections 653 and 738, Hundred of Moorooroo ; Analysis XL, Macroscopically a dense fine-grained black rock in which the only distinguishable mineral is a black pyroxene. Microscopically a fine to medium- grained holocrystalline rock of typical doleritic texture—pyroxene and iron ore in a coarse network of broad plagioclase laths made up the whole of the rock. The pyroxene is anhedral, almost colourless, and often encloses grains of iron ore. It is probably an augite rich in the diopside molecule. It is often uralitised on the edges, and somctimes wholly replaced by a confused chloritic mass, both changes resulting in the separation of small grains of iron ore. The plagioclase is slightly decomposed and shows the usual albite twinning; pericline twinning is frequent, and some carlsbad twins are noticeable. The maximum symmetrical extinction of the albite lamellae is 29°, corresponding to a labradorite of com- position Ab40 An60. Iron ore is present in quantity as irregular grains showing no change to leucoxene, but is probably titaniferous. A few grains of pyrite and apatite were observed. A coarser grained variety in which laths of plagioclase are apparent in the hand specimen is associated with this rock in the field. Microscopically, except for the grain size and the frequent alteration of the plagioclase to zoisite, it is similar to the above rock. “O%g % 10° Sepnpour ¢ ForD yo sen ospy $ “payanpap [) 40} 0 10" « (asc/euoz) asousiaany aso[eUuoy, asos0RTg asos90R[ asopuy asous1any asousiaany asolauepy asoyprqio0g _ — sTIEN onemseyy ¢ ‘b ‘S ‘III y ‘€ “py ‘II ge ‘bp IT s‘e ‘ep Tr ip ‘e ‘(hy STI] + ‘pS TT | § ‘p's “TIT *g'@‘b ‘IT “g fe *S ‘IL z ‘e “be ‘IL ‘e‘e‘p ‘IT worroyis SUL Md PO = v4 a = a¢ -_ | “ eo als ots os ot aaBTRD £o° 8oL Bol £v ped TOT “9° TOT Ly TOL a ayiedy Iv’ ev ww eon in, a os ne = Lv ero ons er? +0"! eat Z£9°T gore Or Ose 90°T aepoc7 ayustUayy = os = i << a ss -; 80°S erp “sen 84% 60°C 9VT r6'E 96°9 It'b coe £6 LBP i Tee 7 aeeuaeyy £31? fC ET 6be ou". gered 65°61 | Sate e201 tet — “ anaqisid4Ayy = a nat = me! i | — — = 60°% : ES'h * BITTOISETTO AA £9°“T aa E'9g Té"8 0¢°8 98st 6OrT BLS 6T'6T Debt 676 "" — aprsdorcy i Te’ = —_ a = = — paca — — — wmpuniog OL 9F EDS £5°0E OF 6T eSle sore! 60°8E £69 OPES ss"ee sesz "7 Sou £9'bT 89°Se FETE ER'6E SSfe LO +1 93°81 €8'8¢ 56'Te e's Teg 7 STG 49°T 06°ET co’ St'b Shr 820 £9°T 0OL9e St'P Bose eos asepOTyIAIO Sr e@ct SLL cevel 89°42 OS" 9g" Fr Or O6E cL°6 oger 7" zy1en} if POrE Ose 88°Z OL 66°C Z0°¢ eve | CL?e bas S6'¢ 66° AiATaN oyroeds | of! eee | 82°66 feO0r $6°66 ¥6°66 TOOT ss"001 4rS°00T b2'66 c3'00E e8E00L 121OL wa : a bil, Em cana 4 = a “pu “pu : “pu ‘pu ‘pu pu yu pu ‘pa pu £0" Hip itt Adee Ty pu ou" pu ‘pu ‘pu ‘pu ‘pu pu ‘pu 90° | 90° wide teal Ort st" £0" 90° te fo 6 ge" To +0" Lo" ay soo OCA IU aU ‘pu u “pu pu ‘pu “pu ‘pu iv sro oo Fgag 6c" el” of ee" ts° sy ee laa be OF" | ot 7 oT Fo%a ee ma pre pa 5 ied pu ‘PS pe ‘Pe [ra | ta w+ Baz £07 8S°1 62° £s° F6'T Os"E sve on Og $s of oo FORL — ‘pu “pu “pu yu ye “a qu tag “2 | rz 7 205 or 89° 90° Bu 0c" oI" 6V ev ca" 81° tev -OFH £8" BL | st ts 69° 68° Le fe" ica es is oo 08H +e Te? 9° | ef cL fF or 919 9L° Ter ste ceo OFF bat 90°¢ eLe 69°F CSS PL'T eee Ore Le 66° ror wo OFeN 6UET 6ls ZOU : cP9 crs Str T8"ar Ove 600i BPEL wet ORD PSS Boe Zorg ei g zP's T9"9 cL£9 96T 90°S e9'% oe 929 ofS 62°C 4£'t 169 rr's FES Z0°T sas 9£L'T cre 067 OFT SZ f F6'S LLP Z0° eve evs 30° Bes eve vo FO%oa £991 Z£S°ST LO'hT | S2°ST fast PSST 66°4T Po'PT gas £9°ST est ow Pot fU6h 9$°09 £6°6S 60°19 82°TS 666+ 99°SP 29°09 c6'rS 80°%S ives 7 ov FOIS -ooxo01n0fy | ‘oot00100Jy Jo/essoreg Jo ‘pH] “Exunpeon jodymy jo ‘pH) -esuodéyy jo ‘eSuodépy jo [epysuey ‘rrz] epeyeea Jo) -eyyeyueA Jo | ‘eye yTe A JO 39 “PH "PH ‘8eZ (9S ‘LEZ “IPS 30 "PH “£82 99S “pH ‘st ‘29S | ‘PH ‘st “99g | 09g ‘aiTuedg | “PH ‘08 "99S | PH “TOOT 22°S PH ‘OBIT 98S ‘gez pue ¢¢9 ‘(aqipeuo yy) *Z "ON ‘S3RT ‘oPIOT(l JIUIOD "AAS A3uI09 “W'S SIRS UT, ‘ay IoId Sspoy oTWAdS|PoY IATUAAG pSos5 WaSMed ator ‘ayorq TIA ‘(aseqzicy) “(aseqeiq]) AI Wir Ls I ‘peoy ‘o1s9foq| mg \ TITA atsjod stTOTO, ‘ TX i IA A _— ds — “SNOILISOGNO7) AZAILVWUOKN UNV SHSATVNY 15 Analyses X and XJ. Analysis X is typical of a rather basic tonalite. Its normative composition, however, is essentially different to those of the other intermediate rocks of which analyses are reported, in that the latter possess lime in considerable excess over alumina available for the “formation” of anorthite with the consequence that a considerable amount of diopside always appears in the norm, whereas this rock has rather more than sufficient alumina to convert all the alkaline and alkaline- earih bases to normative felspar. The slight amount of corundum appearing in the norm, if significant, may be accounted for by the rather decomposed condition of the felspars. There is a certain similarity in composition to the tonalite from the Palmer district, which A. R. Alderman (15) has shown to be related to the granites of the eastern Mount Lofty Ranges and the Murray Flats. The com- position of the dolerite is not unusual, except for its comparative paucity in alkalies, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. The author is indebted to Professor Sir Douglas Mawson, Dr. C. T. Madigan and to Messrs. A. R. Alderman and P. S. Hossfeld for assistance in field and laboratory, and to the University of Adelaide for grants by which he was enabled to carry out the work. LITERATURE CITED. (1) Benson, W. N. “Petrographic Notes on Certain Pre-Cambrian Rocks of the Mount Lofty Ranges, with Special Reference to the Geology of the Houghton District.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. xxxiii (1909). (2) Howcuin, W. “The Geology of the Victor Harbour, Inman Valley and Yankalilla Districts, with Special Reference to the Great Inman Valley Glacier of Permo-Carboniferous Age.” Jbid., vol. 1 (1936). (3) Maprean, C, T. “The Geology of Fleurieu Peninsula, Part I.” Ibid., vol. xlix (1925). (4) Tuomas, R.G. “A Monazite-bearing Pegmatite near Normanville.” Ibid., vol. xlviii (1924). (5) Mapican, C. T. “The Geology of the Willunga Scarp.” Jbid., vol. li (1927). (6) Howcnin, W. “The Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges, Part II.” Jbid., vol. xxx (1906). (7) Mawson, Str D. “Notes on the Geological Features of the Meadows Valley.” Jbid., vol. xlvii (1923). (8) Jack, R. L.: “The Iron Ore Resources of South Australia.” Bulletin No. 9, Geological Survey of South Australia. (9) Mininc Review, No. 43 (1926), South Australian Department of Mines. (10) TxaLe, E.O. “Soil Survey and Forest Physiography of Kuitpo.” Bulletin No. 6, Department of Forestry, University of Adelaide. (11) Woornoucu, W. G. “Notes on the Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. xxxii (1908). (12) Howcun, W. “The Geology of the Barossa Ranges and Neighbourhood in Relation to the Geological Axis of the Country.” Jbid., vol. i (1926). (13) Hossrerp, P. S. “The Tanunda Creek Granite and its Field Relations.” Ibid., vol, xlix (1925). (14) Atperman, A. R. “Petrographic Notes on Tonalite from the Palmer Dis- trict and Biotite Norite from South Black Hill.” Jbid., vol. li (1927). THE GEOLOGY OF PART OF THE NORTH MOUNT LOFTY RANGES. BY PAUL S. HOSSFELD, M.Sc., F.G.S., F.R.G.S. Summary A paper entitled "The Geology and Physiography of Part of the North Mount Lofty Ranges” was read before the Society in April, 1928. It was found impossible to print the paper in the form presented owing to the cost involved. The author's departure for New Guinea made it impossible at the time to re-write and subdivide it into separate papers, one dealing with the geology and the other with the physiography. This has now been done, and the present paper presents the geology of the above area with as much of the physiography as is necessary for the solution and explanation of the various problems involved. 16 THE GEOLOGY OF PART OF THE NORTH MOUNT LOFTY RANGES. By Paut S. HossFerp, M.Sc., F.G.S., F-R.G.S. [Read November 8, 1934.] CONTENTS. I Inrropuction . 1. Description of the Area Sve 2. Reasons for Investigating the ‘Area... 3. Methods Adopted in the Investigation 4. Previous Geological Work in the Area II] PuystocrapHy nA mah aye _ 1. The Hilt Region 2. The Plains . III Srrucrure ann STRATIGRAPHY - 1. Structural Features 2. The Barossa Series m (a) The Humbug Scrub Arex Yo See (6) The Barossa Ranges and Adjacent Areas ist (1) The Schists (2) The Gneisses (3) The Quartzites “ rn (t) The Mount Kitchener Area (ii) The Area near Mount Crawford Post Office ... (4) The Marbles 3. The Adelaide Series (a) The Para Scries (b) The Narcoota Series (1) Basal Beds .... < (i) The Beds West of the Barossa Ranges ven (ti) The Beds East of the Barossa Mates on (2) Glacial Deposits . on a (i) The Tillite Horizon .... (u) The Tapley’s Slate Horizon | (3) The Marbles . . 4, Other Formations (a) Proterozoic Formations. which have been Correlated tentatively with those of Other Areas .... (b) The Belvidere Grits ot nas (c) Deposits of Laterite .... (d) The Fluvatile and Marine Gravels and Sands (e) The Tertiary Limestones. (f) Lacustrine Deposits (g) Breccias es 5. The Igneous Intrusions (a) Pre-Narcoota and Post- “Barossiati zs , (1) Augen Gneisses of the Humbug Serub Area (2) Houghton Diorite and Mount Kitchener Granite (3) Pegmatization of the Barossian Sediments (4) Tanunda Creek—Palmer Granite (5) Basic Intrusions (b) Post-Narcoota. .... (1) The First Post- Narcoota ‘Acid ‘Tntrusion (2) Rasic Intrusions _.... aan (3) The Second Post- Narcoota Acid Intrusion _ IV Economic GeoLocy P : 1. Metals 2. Non-metals ms 3. Precious and Semi- ~precious Stones oe 4, Monumental and Building Stones 5. Road Metal me oa V History oF THE REGION 4 —_ VI TasLe SHOWING THE CHRONOLOGICAL Succession fan) VIL SumMMaRY 7 4 VIII Noves ox Mars anp Section — IX Appenprx 17 PREFACE. A paper entitled “The Geology and Physiography of Part of the North Mount Lofty Ranges” was read before the Society in April, 1928. It was found impossible to print the paper in the form presented owing to the cost involved. The author’s departure for New Guinea made it impossible at the time to re-write and subdivide it into separate papers, one dealing with the geology and the other with the physiography. This has now been done, and the present paper presents the geology of the above area with as much of the physio- graphy as is necessary for the solution and explanation of the various problems involved. The following pages are a contribution to the study of the geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges. The writer has felt that detailed geological maps of the area under review would materially advance the knowledge of the geology of the State, assist future workers in their investigation, and perhaps lay the founda- tions of a detailed survey of the whole of the Mount Lofty Ranges. The area described comprises approximately 1,400 square miles. Over twelve (12) months of actual field work were necessary to complete the work. The author has attempted to make the survey as complete and detailed as was practicable. Owing to the size of the area and the limited amount of time available, and since the main object of the research was the elucidation of the general structure, the boundaries of some areas and formations have not been mapped in detail, but sufficiently so to enable their relation to their surroundings to be determined. The writer desires to express his thanks to the University of Adelaide for its financial assistance by twice granting to him the John L. Young Scholarship for Research, and for the permission of the Council of the University to incorporate in this paper the subject matter of the thesis presented by the author for the degree of Master of Science in 1926, and to the following for their assist- ance and advice:—Professor Sir Douglas Mawson, University of Adelaide; Dr. L, K. Ward, Government Geologist of South Australia; Dr. W. G. Woolnough, Geological Adviser to the Commonwealth Government; Dr. R. L. Jack, former Deputy Government Geologist of South Australia; the officials of the South Australian Government Departments of Mines, Lands & Survey, Waterworks, and Railways; Mr. G. Warren, Mount Crawford; Rev. Sabel, Nairn: Mr. B. Lindner, Krondorf, and to many others who by their assistance have facilitated the examination of the area. Pau. §. Hossrexp, Assistant Geologist, Dept. of the Interior, October 15, 1934. Canberra, F.C.T. 18 I—INTRODUCTION. 1. DescripTion or THE AREA, The area investigated comprises that part of the Mount Lofty Ranges which is situated between Marrabel, Eudunda and Bower in the north, and Carey’s Gully Charleston and Rockleigh in the south. It includes the whole, or parts of the following Hundreds :—Gilbert, Waterloo, Julia Creek, Neales, Brownlow, Light, Kapunda, Belvidere, Dutton, Anna, Nuriootpa, Moorooroo, Jellicoe, Bagot, Munno Para, Barossa, Yatala, Para Wirra, Jutland, Talunga, Angas, Onkaparinga and Tungkillo. The extreme distances are -—From north to south, 56 miles; from east to west, 32 miles. The area consists of ranges of hills with several alluvial plains of small extent. Both to the east and west the ranges are bounded by extensive plains, the Murray Plains on the east, and the Adelaide-Gawler-Port Wakefield Plain on the west. The ranges are composed of ancient sedimentary rocks, divisible into several series. The greater part of these has been affected by metamorphic action to varying degrees. Igneous rocks are very numerous in parts of the area, and have contributed largely to the metamorphism exhibited by the sedimentary rocks. The plains consist chiefly of Tertiary and Recent deposits. The area is well supplied with roads and railway lines, it having been settled for the most part as early as 1840. 2. REASONS FOR INVESTIGATING THE AREA. Much of our knowledge of the geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges is based on sections, unsupported by detailed maps. It has long been desirable to produce a detailed map of an area large enough to permit of the relations of the different formations composing the Mount Lofty Ranges being elucidated. Further, although from time to time attempts have been made by various geologists to explain the many apparent anomalies both physiographic and geo- logical, no agreement has been reached owing largely to the fact that no detailed examination of the area had been made, and hence no geological maps were avail- able. Neither the age, order of succession nor the relationship of the rocks of the eastern part of the Mount Lofty Ranges had been determined. Moreover, metamorphism is so intense in parts of the area that it has tremendously increased the difficulties of mapping the region. It was held by the author, however, that if a geological survey were begun sufficiently far to the north to be outside the more metamorphosed region, and to begin where the sedi- ments retain their original characteristics to a degree sufficient to enable them to be recognised, the southerly extension of such beds might enable one to trace them to their metamorphic equivalents, and to solve the stratigraphy of a region hitherto regarded as one of the most difficult of interpretation in South Australia. 3, Metruops ADurrepD IN THE INVESTIGATION, The geological survey is based on the maps of Hundreds issued by the S.A. Department of Lands and Survey. Wherever possible, rock outcrops have been located on the maps by means of pacing and other methods of measurement, from road intersections or other easily identified landmarks. Over a considerable part of this region this is not feasible, either owing to the rough nature of the country, or to the existence of sheep stations, so that neither roads nor section boundaries are identifiable. In such cases creeks or rivers were utilized, but with some degree of caution, as it was found that many of them were mapped either incompletely or approximately only. 19 These factors have introduced a certain amount of error, which could have been avoided only by a detailed topographical survey, which was impossible. More- over, many of the rocks, especially those beds belonging to the glacial horizon, present no well-defined borders, grading into each other so that it is difficult to determine their exact boundaries. A considerable part of the region is covered with soil, both residual and alluvial, in some districts covering the rocks for miles. Where the scale of the maps makes this possible, broken lines are employed in cases of doubt as to the exact location of outcrops and other geological features, In addition, in 1932, the author hired a cabin plane, and with the aid of a drawing table placed there for the purpose, was enabled to check many of his field observations. 4. Previous GEOLoGIcAL WorRK IN THE AREA. Comparatively little work has been done in this region, The most important contribution of recent years is a paper by Prof. W. Howchin, entitled: “The Geology of the Barossa Ranges and Neighbourhood in Relation to the Geological Axis of the Country” (14). Prof, Howchin’s explanation of many of the geo- logical features is not in accordance with the facts observed by the writer. A number of papers have been published in the S.A. Royal Society’s volumes, and elsewhere, dealing with the geological features of small parts of the area, or with those of adjacent areas. These will be dealt with in the text and in the bibliography. In addition, the S.A. Department of Mines has issued reports on mines and quarries, in special Bulletins and in the half-yearly Mining Reviews. An examination of the bibliography discloses the fact that it supplies only very scattered or vague information about small parts of the area, while nothing what- ever has been published hitherto on the greater part of the region. Tt is to supply the long-felt want of a systematic geological survey of this area, which contains the key to many of our stratigraphical and structural problems, that this work was undertaken. The size of the area examined pre- cluded a detailed investigation of the whole region; the author’s chief object was to determine the structural and stratigraphical features, and to do as much detailed work as was necessary to trace their development, if this were possible. II—PHYSIOGRAPHY. 1. Tue Hirt Recron. This region forms part of the Mount Lofty Ranges. Northwards it extends to the Flinders Ranges, and southwards to Cape Jervis. Its greatest width in the area described in this paper is at the northern and southern ends, where it measures approximately 36 miles from west to east, It is bounded by the Adelaide-Gawler- Port Wakefield Plain on the west, and by the Murray Plains on the east. The Hill Region consists of a number of fault blocks, elevated above the plains on either side, and separated from them by meridional fault boundaries. Along the eastern edge of the region, the boundary is sharp and well defined by fault escarpments from near Frankton to the southern limits of the area described in this paper. The same may be said of the boundaries on the western side, south of Gawler. North of Gawler and north of Frankton the partial burial by recent sediments of the fault blocks tilted towards the west and east, respectively, has obscured the fault boundaries. A number of fault basins were produced. The deposition in meee of recent sediments has resulted in the formation of a number of alluvial plains. 20 A study of the area shows that before the region was dismembered by fault- ing, it consisted of a huge, almost perfect, peneplain, with a much greater east- west extent than at present. The complete maturity of the topography, the deep secular decay, the great accumulation of alluvium and the existence of duricrustal rocks in those areas which have not been rejuvenated, are indisputable evidence of the former existence of a continuous peneplain. The tilting and differential elevation of the fault blocks has resulted in their partial dissection and the obliteration of much of the former peneplain surface. As a result the drainage system is complicated and presents unusual features. They may be enumerated, briefly, as follows :— 1. All of the longer streams run meridionally for some distance from their sources, their courses being concordant with the strike of the rocks of the area. At some distance downstream, however, every one of them changes its direction, disregarding the structure of the country entirely, crossing, impartially, ridges and valleys, igneous or sedimentary, hard or soit rocks, 2 In the meridional sections of their courses the valleys are broad, gently graded, and approximately straight, and possess numerous highly mature tribu- taries. In the easterly or westerly sections, however, these streams flow through steep, narrow gorges, over waterfalls and rapids, and pursue meandering courses, irrespective of the structure or topography of the country. Furthermore, in general they have few long tributaries in this section; of these, most are mature in their upper reaches and some for the greater part of their courses. The shorter streams pursue an easterly and westerly course along the whole of their length, and are in the juvenile stages of development. The physiography of the area will be described in detail in another paper, and it will suffice to state that the author considers the drainage system to have developed as follows — The mature meridional sections of the streams are antecedent, and represent the dismembered drainage of the former peneplain, probably dating from the Miocene period. Subsequent uplift, and cast and west tilting, produced easterly and westerly meanders, grafted on the dismembered antecedent strcams. The gradual elevation of the area resulted in the entrenchment of the meanders, and the rapid removal of Tertiary deposits, residual soils, and alluvium, revealing the superimposed character of the east and west drainage. Rejuvenation of the upper sections and dissection of the remnants of the peneplain surface is going on rapidly. 2. THR PLAINS. (a) The Murray Plains. These extend from the foot of the ranges eastward into New South Wales and Victoria. They slope gently towards the River Murray, but become almost level a few miles from the ranges. They are covered with travertine limestones in many places, except near the ranges, where gravel and sand predominate. They receive a considerable amount of water from the hills, which probably supply much of the underground water obtainable almost everywhere by boring. Occasionally, inliers of the older rocks, such as the North Black Hill, rise above the almost level surface. These hills may rise to a considerable height, but their slopes are very gentle. They represent islands or shoals in the former “Murray Gulf.” (b) The Gawler Plain, This plain is part of the extensive Adelaide-Port Wakefield Plain, which extends from the western edge of the ranges to the shores of Gulf St. Vincent. Like the Murray Plains, it was covered at one time by the Tertiary Sea, Owing 21 to the higher rainfall on this side of the ranges; and the fact that most of the important streams of the Hills Region traverse these plains, their marine deposits are generally covered by a much thicker layer of recent alluvium than are those on the eastern side. III—STRUCTURE AND STRATIGRAPHY. 1. SrrucrurAL FEATURES, Over a comparatively large part of the area, few or no rocks are exposed. Many of the the outcrops, when they do occur, consist of slates and schists, from a large proportion of which little or no evidence can be obtained as to the earth- movements which they have undergone. From such facts, however, as have been secured, certain general features emerge. In the vicinity of Dutton and to the northward, they exhibit comparatively gentle folding. They are repeated by anticlines and synclines, possessing a meri- dional strike. One small anticlinorium was discovered, and pitching is respon- sible for some of the interruptions in the continuity of outcrop of the beds. Towards the south-east, south, and south-west, particularly so in the latter direction, the amount of folding and degree of metamorphism rapidly intensify, A gradual transition from slate to a coarse schist can be noted, culminating near Angaston in a’ coarse-grained crenulated andalusite-schist, containing crystals up to an inch in length. This particular rock was compared with some of the rocks of other areas, and is believed to be the “Paringite” of Dr. Woolnough. Practically the whole of the Barossa Ranges and the country to the eastward to a distance of several miles past Eden Valley and Springton have been affected by intense folding and metamorphism, accompanied by a certain amount of crush- ing. In the Humbug Scrub area the crushing that accompanied the folding was so severe that narrow pegmatite veins have in many cases been reduced to “Augen.” To the east of Angaston and Eden Valley the folding and metamorphism decreases, the beds marginal to the Murray’ Plain consisting of fine-grained schists, phyllites and hornstones. Between the Humbug Scrub and the Barossa Ranges a large extent of country, including a large part of the Hundred of Nuriootpa and parts of the adjoining Hundreds, and extending southwards as a roughly triangular area with its apex near Mount Gould, exhibits comparatively little evidence of the severe folding and metamorphism so marked in the areas on which it borders. Earth movements, however, have been sufficiently powerful to have produced large isoclines with an easterly dip, This has had the effect of making the newer beds dip underneath the older rocks, In general, with the excep- tion of the disturbed area in the vicinity of Angaston, the severe folding and crushing, as well as the intense metamorphism, are confined to the rocks of Barossian age. Faults have undoubtedly played a prominent part in the development of the topography of the area, and while many have been mapped, faulting probably is more prevalent than the maps indicate. Two sets of faults occur—meridional and transverse. Some of the meridional faults observed are of great extent, while many of the transverse ones do not extend far.. Some of the more important faults are :-— The long meridional faults along the eastern and western escarpments, and a number of step faults parallel to the above, hidden by the alluvium of the plains, their existence and location indicated by the information derived from bores. A series of faults along the castern boundaries of the Hundreds of Onka- paringa and Talunga. The faults which produced the various fault basins. 22 The faults of the Angaston Marble area, between Angaston and Dutton. The Barossa Quartzite Faults. The Williamstown Quartzite Faults. The Mount Pleasant Fault. The faults in the Kersbrook district. Other faults are shown on the maps, and the reader is referred to these for further details. While the existence of many of the faults cannot be proved definitely, suffi- cient evidence has been collected to indicate not only the existence of those shown, but of many others also. The maps show their position and extent, as interpreted by the author. While further reseatch may result in the modification and possible elimination of some of the faults postulated, it is certain that many more will be discovered, The Pre-Cambrian rocks of the area belong to at least three distinct periods. The oldest series occurs in two separate areas, and will be referred to as “Baros- sian.” The middle series consists of the lowen beds of the Adelaide Series, while the youngest Pre-Cambrian rocks of the area probably are identical in age with the upper members of the Adelaide Series, as described by Prof. Howchin (9, 10 and 15). 2. Tue Barossa SERIES. This term was first used for the oldest rocks of the Mount Lofty Ranges by Dr. Woolnough, in 1908 (28). Since that time the name has been used and referred to by various writers, and has become a part of our geological literature. In a paper read before the Royal Society in 1925, Prof. Howchin (14) suggested that the name be altered to Houghtonian. The term applied by Dr. Woolnough has the claim of priority, and the writer is unable to agree with the reasons given in favour of alteration. The term “Barossian” for the oldest rocks of the area is, therefore, retained. The Barossian rocks are exposed in two areas, separated by the lower beds of a newer series. Whether these old rocks belong to more than one period is still undetermined ; they will be regarded as members of the same series during their discussion in this paper. These old series form the core of the ranges, and have not, as far as can be ascertained, been submerged since the Cambrian Period, with the exception of part of the area, which may have been submerged during the Tertiary Period. The rocks of the Barossa Series are everywhere highly meta- morphosed, folded and contorted, Igneous intrusions and pegmatisation are common features. Metasomatic replacement by silica and iron oxides occurs. In spite of all these changes, however, the sedimentary origin of most of the rocks is evident. The only important exceptions to this are certain areas of augen gneiss in the Humbug Scrub, and of foliated gneisses on the eastern side of the Barossa Ranges. The Barossa Series are overlain unconformably by rocks much less metamorphosed and folded, which latter probably are the local representatives of the Adelaide Series. The latter, especially that part of it which lies between the Humbug Scrub and the Barossa Ranges Massifs, has been thrown into isoclinal folds possessing an easterly dip. This has tended to obscure the relationship of the different series, and has resulted in the newer beds dipping beneath the older rocks. This fact was not recognised by previous observers, and has led to serious errors in their interpretation of the stratigraphy. (a) THE HUMBUG SCRUB AREA, The Barossa Series outcrop over an extensive area in the part known as the Humbug Scrub. In the Hundred of Barossa they occur in a narrow tongue 23 extending northwards of the Barossa Weir for several ‘miles. They continue southwards into the Hundred of Para Wirra, where they reach their greatest extent. They continue to the south of Mount Gawler and Kersbrook, joining the LEGEND KECINT Alluvial ~~ MARCOOTA SERIES: ~ OK LYNDOCH PLAIN | Quarieies rast Shales» shales Toes Dep basal Beas FARA SERIES 1) /iyliles, guateles wed Lumesfones basal Beals Lreossa JERIES BAROSSA RESERVOIR Nees Gnersstc £83; BEI HUGE? GOSS rit — cr) oo, ‘Peo \ parte pra it a7 \t - — rat The small area of isolated grits, faulted on both sides, lying to the left of north from the Barossa reservoir, consists of basal beds of the western (Para) series, and not of the eastern’ (Narcoota) series. The distinction is an important one. 24 rocks in the vicinity of Houghton and Inglewood, described by Benson (1). A fault cuts them off to the cast of Chain of Ponds, where a triangular area of the Adelaide Series has been faulted against them. With the exception of this faulted area, this section of the Barossa Series is bounded along the whole of its periphery by the basal beds of newer series; by those of the Para Series on the north, west and south, and by the Narcoota Series on the cast. Over a large part of the area, in the Hundreds of Barossa and Para Wirra, Tertiary gravels and sands obscure the outcrops, so that it is often difficult and frequently impossible to determine the actual boundaries (29-31). Where the surface of the original peneplain has been preserved, secular decay is so advanced and of such a depth that, when outcrops occur, they are often difficult to recog- nise, The gorge of the South Para supplies an excellent section through this series, and enables one to procure tunweathered specimens. Following the gorge of the South Para from Section 1,526, Hundred of Barossa, phyllites outcrop in the banks. In Section 1,527, these are replaced by grits and conglomerates, containing fine-grained micaceous haematite, which is so abundant in some parts as to be a valuable deposit of iron ore. These grits continue, interrupted by small inliers of pegmatized schist, as far as the junction of the Victoria Creek (per contra, vide 14). Here they are dipping to the east, and do not exhibit any signs of folding. A few yards to the west highly contorted pegmatized schists appear, and continue down the river as far as Section 177, Barossa. A gradual increase in pegmatiza- tion is observed, many of the veins being so closely spaced as to suggest lit-par-lit injection. Pressure effects are very noticeable, so much so, that many of the small pegmatite veins are reduced to “augen” consisting solely either of felspar or of quartz. Between the weir and the old footbridge a sudden increase in the number of eyes occurs, and for a considerable distance down the river the rocks are a remarkably well-developed augen-gneiss. Macroscopically, the bulk of the rock appears to consist of closely-spaced pegmatite veins with some interstitial material resembling chlorite. The tunnel to the Barossa Reservoir has penetrated this gneiss, and good specimens can be picked up from the spoil-heap. The quarry which supplied the stone for the wall of the weir is on the north side of the river, and has exposed large faces oi the gneiss, in which the augen- structure is very well shown. The augen-gneiss outcrops continuously as far as Section 180, Barossa, where pegmatized schists take ils place. Several small exposures of the gneiss are seen further down the river, alternating with out- crops of the pegmatized schists. In Section 3,280, Para Wirra, the limit of the older rocks is reached near the Devil’s Nose, where the basal beds (grits and conglomerates) of a newer series appear. ‘The pegmatized schists, referred to above, exhibit varying degrees of pegmatization, In general, this becomes more marked as the typical augen- gneiss is approached, the number and size of the eyes increasing gradually. In the schists all stages in the production of “augen” from pegmatite veins can be observed. The augen gneisses, on the other hand, consist of a closcly-spaced aggregate of eyes of felspar and quartz, separated by some interstitial matter. Prof. Howchin regards them as extreme instances of pegmatization (14). In a per- sonal communication, Mr. A. R. Alderman, B.Sc., who has examined specimens of these rocks, states that both chemically and mineralogically their composition indicates the sedimentary origin of portion of the rock. While agreeing that the chemical composition and the suite of minerals developed suggest that the rock is one which was intruded by pegmatite veins, the author does not wholly accept 23 this view. Neither the chemical nor mineralogical composition of a rock is an absolute guide to its origin, although it may indicate the changes which it has undergone. The field-evidence appears to indicate that some of the rocks are of igneous origin, while others were sediments which have been injected by numerous small pegmatite veins. Most of the rocks of the area consist of injected schists or gneisses, in which some of the pegmatite veins have been reduced to “augen.” All intermediate stages between the injection and the final “eye” can be observed. As one approaches the areas of “augen-gneiss proper” the number of injected veins increases, and they are spaced more closely. A sudden increase in their number, and decrease of interstitial matter occurs when the actual “augen gneiss’ is reached. An actual and excellent contact between it and the surrounding injected schists can be seen in Section 3,279, Para Wirra, on the south side of the bed of the River South Para. The author believes that the augen-gneisses may repre- sent an altered igneous intrusion, changed partly while still in the plastic condition. The injected schists, on the other hand, were affected by the intrusion, generally according to their distance from it, and have also been subjected to crushing effects which have produced some of the eyes of felspar or quartz which occur in these rocks; while the others, especially those consisting of a mixture of minerals of varying hardness, were formed at the time of the injection. Coarse pegmatites occur at a few places, and consist of large crystals of a white felspar, and smaller crystals of quartz of a pale amethyst tint. To the south-east of Kersbrook, titaniferous magnetite or ilmenite occurs in moderately large quantities ; several holes have been sunk on reefs of this mineral. In conclusion, it should be pointed out that the rocks of the Humbug Scrub area are entirely different from the rocks of the Barossa Ranges and adjacent areas, both lithologically and mineralogically. This difference in character does not seem to have been recognised, as several authors disctiss the two areas as one. This is not advisable, for not only the rocks of. sedimentary origin, but also the associated pegmatites, and most of the minerals and igneous rocks are of a totally different character. The two areas are separated also from each other by the lower beds of a newer series. (b) THe Barossa RANGES AND ADJACENT AREAS, The Barossian rocks of this division occupy large areas in the Hundreds of Moorooroo, Barossa, Para Wirra, Jutland, Talunga, Tungkillo and Monarto, and small parts of the Hundreds of Jellicoe and Onkaparinga. They form practically the whole of the Barossa Ranges, and extend to the south-east at least as far as Palmer and Rockleigh. In a former paper the writer postulated a Barossian age for the rocks of the Barossa Ranges to the east of Tanunda, a view apparently shared by Prof. Howchin (15, p. 334). In a recent paper, the latter attempts to correlate the rocks of the Barossa Ranges to the east of Williamstown with those of the lower Adelaide Series (14, p. 10). At the same time he assigns a Barossian age to the rocks of Forreston and Gumeracha, and apparently to the whole of the beds between the Warren Reservoir and the Devil’s Nose, Section 3,280, Para Wirra. That these views are inconsistent is shown by the maps accompanying the present paper. The additional facts observed by the writer have resulted in a different interpretation of the evidence quoted by Prof, Howchin. In the writer’s opinion, almost the whole of the Barossa Ranges consist of rocks older than those of the Adelaide Series. The evidence in favour of this view is as follows :— 1, The whole of the rocks to which a Barossian age has been assigned are bordered by a peripheral zone of newer sediments, which lie unconformably above B 26 them. These newer sediments have been correlated definitely with the beds of the Adelaide Series. The lowest of these beds consists of grits, sandstones and conglomerates. These beds contain ilmenite in many localities, exhibit current LEGENO = TANUNDA ~~ RECENT <. MUTT NARCOOTA SERIES 7 Ww-~ Seales JIASCHISIS — m= MARBLE Basal Beals BAROSSA SERIES ~~ 3] SChists 3 3 =z Cc 4 9 > 3 ; 3 ana Quartzifes ~~ Moorooroe Grell IGNEOUS Acicl pegirat'tt¢ Grey Gnerss -},| Tonatife “0800 ae LAS] ae I Znundla Ch Grape Ff ae | 3 3& Mt Kitchener Grenples 3 bedding to a marked degree, are unconformable to the highly contorted and meta- morphosed rocks on which they lic, and conformable to the sediments above them. Their constituent particles vary in size from place to place. Owing to the fineness 27 in grain-size, their high degree of metamorphism and faulting, and the relative scarcity of outcrops, the portions of these beds situated to the east of Rowland’s Flat and between Angaston and Eden Valley, have not been mapped in detail. Elsewhere, however, their continuity is unbroken, 2. In general, the high degree of metamorphism exhibited by the Barossian rocks is not a characteristic of the newer sediments. In the vicinity of Angaston, Eden Valley, and Rowland’s Flat the newer beds have been metamorphosed intensely; but elsewhere the metamorphism, although considerable, is not suffi- ciently severe to cause them to be confused with the older rocks. 3. The older rocks in most localities have been pegmatized considerably ; this feature was not observed anywhere in the rocks above them. 4. Except in the Angaston and Rowland’s Flat districts, folding of the rocks, although severe in some areas, nowhere shows the degree of intensity exhibited by the Barossa Series, which are highly crumpled and contorted. 5. The gneissic granites are confined to the Barossa Series and do not occur in the newer sediments. Detailed Description of the Rocks.—The most important types occurring are:—(1) The Schists, (2) The Gneisses, (3) The Quartzites, (4) The Marbles. (1) The Schists, These are the predominant Barossian rocks in the area. Owing to their great diversity, and to the rapid changes they undergo within a short distance, the strati- graphy of the region cannot be determined from their study without minutely observing all the occurrences. Over large areas of country, outcrops are few, and faulting and intense folding have increased the difficulties of determining their relations to each other. In general they are intensely folded and contorted, the resulting structure being shown exceedingly well where pegmatization is intense, as at the spillway of the Warren Reservoir, the head of the Jacob’s Creek, at many places in the Hundred of Tungkillo, on the River Marne in Section 521, Jutland, and in many other localities. A great variety of types occur, including :—Talc-, hydro-mica-, muscovite-, biotite-, chlorite-, kyanite-, quartz-, actinolite-, magnetite-, and pegmatized schists. Some of the schists contain large crystals of tourmaline, magnetite or garnet, and rutile and ilmenite occur in them in some areas. Perhaps the most prevalent are the biotite-schists which are found from the south of Springton to the vicinity of Williamstown. Good examples of kyanite- schist occur on both sides of the Warren Reservoir, and magnetite is a frequent constituent of the schists of that locality. A belt of hydro-mica-schist, with an approximately north and south strike, also crosses the reservoir, and is generally associated with the rutile mines of the district. In Sailor’s Gully nests of fine, large, black tourmalines occur in this schist. Much detailed work needs to be done on these interesting rocks, in order that their relations to each other may be determined. (2) The Gneisses. Gneisses outcrop over a considerable area. One only of the outcrops demands special attention, as the other ones are so clearly examples of pegmatization that they properly belong to the pegmatized schists. The main gneissic area extends from Section 82, Moorooroo, in an uninterrupted outcrop to Section 70, Para Wirra. Part of this area was mapped, and the rocks described in the previous paper. 28 Several alterations and additions have to be made to this map, but the former description will suffice. Near the southern extremity of the outcrop the ancient peneplain surface still exists and the gneisses are decomposed to such a degree that fresh specimens are very difficult to secure. The writer cannot subscribe to the view that these decomposed gneisses are to be correlated with the Mitcham- Glen Osmond Quartzites. In this locality some of the gneisses have developed a fibrous mineral, bearing some resemblance to sillimanite. Superficial silicification of the gneisses is a feature in this locality, and polygonal (generally hexagonal) weathering is common. Except where intruded by the Tanunda Creek Granite they are buff-coloured, and consist mainly of quartz, biotite and microcline. In the paper referred to above, the writer suggested as a possibility that these gneisses were the remains of a series much older than the surrounding rocks. The gneisses are remarkably uniform throughout most of their extent. They owe their existence probably to extreme pegmatization and subsequent dynamic metamorphism. They may belong either to the same age as the surrcunding Barossian schists, or may represent the remnant of an older series. Mt. Kifchener Mogrooroo Fapunag Ck Narcoots Ww LESS LATVITE a0 Basal Beds Murray Plans Afliviam and fertrary Limests “O o ra Pont, 5 Section G-G. St Fig. 3. The facts observed which may have a bearing on this point are:-— 1. The surrounding schists have been subjected to an intense and widespread pegmatization, and consequent crumpling and crushing. 2. In Section 952, Moorooroo, a gradual transition from pegmatized schist to gneiss appears to exist from west to east. 3. A white, gritty quartzite, saccharoidal in places, outcrops along the edge of the gneiss in several localities. It may represent a part of the unaltered, original rock, or it may be the basal bed of a newer series. 4. The strike of the outcrop does not appear to be conformable to the other beds of the area. 5. Small occurrences of highly altered schist are to be found in the gneisses. 6. Small outcrops of gneiss occur south of the Warren Reservoir in Para Wirra, and to the east of Keyne’s Till, along the boundary of Jutland and Jellicoe. Taking all these facts into consideration, it appears more likely that these gneisses represent rocks which belong to the same period as the surrounding schists, and have been subjected to a more extreme pegmatization. It would be very instructive to compare them, in the field, with the gneisses recorded from other areas in the Mount Lofty Ranges. 29 (3) The Quartzites, While thin and lenticular beds of quartzite occur in a number of localities, only in two areas are the quartzites sufficiently massive and continuous to merit description in this paper. The areas referred to are:—(i) The Mount Kitchener Area, and (#1) the area north and south of Mount Crawford Post Office. (i) The Mount Kitchener Area. These quartzites were mapped and described in a previous paper. A more detailed examination has disclosed an error in the previous map, which is corrected in those accompanying this paper. The broken lines employed in the former map indicate that there was some doubt as to the true boundaries of the quartzite. At the time of writing the previous paper the writer was unaware that a specimen of the rock from the vicinity had been described both macro- and micro- scopically by Dr. Woolnough (27). This omission is rectified in this paper. The quartzite north of Mount Kitchener, and presumably that described by Dr. Wool- nough, is dense, white and saccharoidal, It is much silicified in places. It is a thick formation, forming practically the whole of the hill known locally as the Little Kaiserstuhl. On the northern half of Mount Kitchener it exists as a roof pendant only, being underlain by the Mount Kitchener granite, To the south of this a siliceous rock occurs which is very much epidotized, and frequently consists of bands of minerals, amongst which felspar and actinolite appear to be predominant. A much narrower band of quartzite occurs to the west, and is much silicified and partly epidotized. To the north these quartzites terminate at the fault escarp- ment of the Barossa Ranges, while to the south they grade into arenaceous mica schists. (See text fig. 2.) (it) The Area North and South of the Mount Craavford Post Office. The quartzites in this locality form the most prominent and highest part of the Barossa Ranges. They are comparatively narrow bands, at least eight in number, with a tendency to occur in pairs. Not only are the pairs of quartzite beds similar lithologically, but their thicknesses are constant. These features, in addition to the dips observed, lead one to the conclusion that the same bed has been repeated by folding. At the top of the Victoria Creek Gorge, in the locality known as The Blue Rocks, the quartzites at the surface dip at 45 degrees to the east, but nowhere do quartzites outcrop at the bottom of the gorge. The whole of the rocks in the creek bed consist of mica schist. Some distance up the side of the gorge the quartzites are encountered, and here they are practically horizontal. They have been displaced several times by strike-faulting, but can, neverthe- less, be traced for a distance of at least 12 miles. ‘They first appear south of Section 1,036, Barossa, as siliceous bands in the mica-schist, gradually widening until reaching their full development in Section 3,128, Barossa, and the adjacent Sections. It 1s obvious that they represent a temporary arenaceous phase, definitely limited in area, in the Barossian Seas. They continue unbroken and remarkably uniformly to Tweedie’s Gully, where they are displaced to the east by a fault. A displacement to the west occurs north of Section 46, whence they are continuous to the Victoria Creek, where the Blue Rocks form a prominent fault escarpment. The Victoria Creek fault has displaced them to the west. South of this all but two of the pairs of bands gradually disappear, partly due to a southerly pitch of the folds. - The most easterly outcrop culminates in Mount Crawford, continuing across the River South Para to Little Mount Crawford, and gradually loses its identity in the alluvial plain. The most westerly outcrop also continues to the south across the river, its elevation decreases gradually until, like the Mount Crawford 30 quartzite, it merges into the plain. These quartzites are exceedingly dense and silicified, some of them being subtranslucent, and apparently consisting of pure ~ LEGEND - RECENT. Mhuviwwn "Dn lets, tert Be I~ an §=JACOBS CK: NARCOOTA SERIES) Quartziles neeat Jandstones Shalesy sfales. | basal Beals BAROSSA SERIE. ~Eéorn ms oer ems x BA a oa eae Quartziles. CH Mor bles FE] Sthists Meg na PL | Wee SCH SESS C44) Gress /GNEOUS KOC: Act Bery/ beating. FCQMAHNES. | Lorie. Fig. 4. silica. On Section 22, Barossa, a small deposit of amorphous graphite occurs in the quartzite. These rocks have been referred to as “The Thick Quartzite” (14, pp. 8 and 9). It would appear that they do not merit this term, since, as stated above, closer 31 examination reveals that they consist probably of one thin bed repeated. eight times, the successive outcrops being approximately parallel for a long distance. The fact that they are interbedded with mica schist, which weathers more readily, makes the disposition of the quartzites easily discernible. Mount Crawford is not in alignment with the quartzite to the north, as may be seen at once if the ascent of Mount Crawford ‘or of the range to the north is made. Mount Crawford is in alignment with Little Mount Crawford to the south, but is apparently displaced by a fault between it and the northern quartzite outcrops. In Sections 512 and 513, Barossa, a narrow bed of quartzite occurs, cut off to the north and south by the basal grits. Owing to the resistance to weathering these rocks stand out in high relief, and are consequently exceedingly useful in a determination of the structure of the district. The high relief of the range is due largely to the fact that both on its western and eastern borders the beds dip into the range, and thus have pro- duced steep escarpments on both sides, While the above pictures the structure as a whole, the detailed structure of the area is probably far more complex. (4) The Marbles, Several beds of marble of Barossian age occur. The most extensive of these occur in the Hundred of Barossa, and extend for some distance into the Hundred of Para Wirra. The most westerly bed begins in Section 510, Barossa, and extends to the Victoria Creek, where it is cut off by the basal grits. Another bed occurs just to the east. It passes through Sections 974 and 967, Barossa, and terminates just before reaching the Victoria Creek. A triangular area of outcrop, having the Victoria Creek as its northerly base, is exposed on Sections 1,521 and 965. To the south of this the bed does not appear for some distance. The marbles outcropping in the Victoria Creek, and to the north, are highly crystalline and contain secondary minerals. The two separate outcrops probably represent the same bed repeated by folding. Beyond the break south of the Victoria Creek these beds reappear and can be traced until they are cut off by the Mount Crawford Plain, in the centre ofthe Hundred of Para Wirra. Indications of highly altered marble beds are to be found on Sections 8 and 6,602, Talunga, approximately on the line of strike of these beds, and possibly on their continuation. South of Section 959, Barossa, these marble beds are very difficult to follow, as they are intensely altered, and often completely replaced by pegmatites or siliceous solutions. Occasionally small outcrops of the unaltered marble occur, as in Section 958. The marble is sometimes replaced by silica in such a manner as to have produced a rock resembling quartzite in macroscopic appearance. Opal of various colours, coated with thin crusts of travertine, occurs in, or near, the cdge of the marble, this feature enabling one bed to be traced as far as the main road, Section 335, Para Wirra. Specimens were obtained by the writer containing both marble and opal, and showing clearly the replacement of the marble by the opal. A frequent alteration product of the marble is a green trans- lucent serpentine, which has been utilized to some extent for making polished ornaments. The serpentine can be traced, with interruptions, as far as the south- eastern corner of Section 112, Para Wirra, In Section 950, Barossa, a hill of impure serpentine occurs, much of it replaced by silica. Calc-silicate minerals occur near the junction of the marble with a large body of pegmatite. The bed of marble which is responsible for the outcrops just described is repeated again on the eastern side of the quartzites, outcropping in Sections 674 and 649, Barossa. To the south of this it is cut off by a fault, and subsequently 32 by the Mount Crawford Plain. This bed also is very much altered, and has beerr changed partly to opal and partly to float-stone or “honey-comb rock,” as it is. known locally. Other outcrops of marble, or of rocks which very probably represent altered marble beds, were noted. On Section 3,131, Barossa, a small outcrop is exposed but appears to be an isolated occurrence. No definite position has been assigned to the marble to the east of Tungkillo. The same may be said of those discovered in Sections 8 and 6,602, Talunga, none of which could be correlated definitely with any other occurrence. mest Mot SCHISTS TES este me PEGMATITE ———*-_— Solutions MARBLE Dolomite Silica RUTILE TOUR- FELSPAR MUSCOVITE MALINE KAOLIN SERPENTINE — ASBESTOS CALC- SILICATES SILICIFIED SERPENTINE OPAL SILICIFIED MARBLE Fig. 5. Viewed as a whole, the marble beds south of the Victoria Creek have been much more highly altered than those to the north, South of this creek they traverse a zone of intense igneous activity and metasomatic replacement. They appear originally to have been limestones with a high magnesia content, and have been altered to serpentine at a number of places. Asbestos occurs occasionally, and opal is a frequent product of local silicification of the marble. The various alteration products of the original limestone and the suggested methods of altera- tion are indicated in fig. 5. 3. THe ADELAIDE SERIES, Those Pre-Cambrian rocks of the area which are younger than the members of the Barossa Series are regarded either as members of, or equivalent in age to, the different beds of the Adelaide Series, which was first described by Prof. Howchin (9 and 10). Since the type locality near Adelaide has not been mapped in detail, and because of certain apparent anomalies which have been discovered elsewhere, the following questions present themselves :-— , 1. Has the order of succession of the beds in the type locality been inter- preted correctly? 33 2. If it has, are the beds near Adelaide typical of other localities? There is evidence to show that in some respects at least they are not. 3. Do the members of the “Adelaide Series” belong to more than one period ? — Ktireof, Section — - &f the - — Loerossa Serves tr the tyoe locatily the aes 1 the — — “eetaty oF Lhe Marren Kesevorr ~ Mica schists. Cuartule Mar schists largely Ltofle St Chi sl. i Magnetile biotile schist Mica schist. Kyonile schisl. Nyoto mice schist Meorble Nice schists: Fig. 6. To the last question the author is in a position to reply that they are divisible at least into two periods. The Adelaide Series has been divided in this paper 34 into an upper and lower section. ‘These two sections are distinct and separate series, which are unconformable to each other and have certain lithological differ- erices. The lower division has been named The Para Series, while to the upper one the name Narcoota Series has been given. (a) THE PARA SERIES, This embraces the lower members of the Adelaide Series, possibly as far as the Upper Phyllite horizon, just below the Mitcham-Glen Osmond Quartzites. The beds of this series have been recognised only along the western edge of the area, extending from the south-east of Adelaide to beyond Gawler. North of the River Torrens they occupy the foothills of the range, North of Gawler the foot- hills grade imperceptibly into the plain and, secular decay being very advanced, outcrops are few and inconclusive. Time did not permit of the examination necessary to determine the continuation of the Para Series north of Gawler. Prof. Howchin has given a description of the beds of the Para Series as they occur from their junction with the Barossian rocks in Section 3,280, Para Wirra, for some distance down the River South Para (14, pp. 10-11). The writer has examined them also along the whole length of their exposure in the Little Para River. Since they outcrop for a considerable distance in the gorges of these rivers, and occupy the eastern part of Munno Para and the western part of Para Wirra, the name “Para Series” appears to be an appropriate one. As far as they were examined, the beds consist of basal grits, phyllites, limestones and quartzites, all of which have suffered repetition. The importance of the basal grits as a key to the structure of the area depends not only on their deposition unconformably on the Barossian Rocks, but also on their striking lithological characters, These grits vary considerably in character, but contain ilmenite in most localities. They rest unconformably upon the injected schists, gneisses and diorites of the Humbug Scrub-Houghton area, In nearly every case the dip is directed away from these rocks. In several localities a repetition of this bed, due to synclinal folding, was observed. The bed has been traced from the confluence of the Kangaroo Creek with the River Torrens around the “Houghton Complex” to the north, through the Lower Hermitage to The Devil’s Nose, Section 3,280, Para Wirra, at which place its unconformable junction with the older rocks is well exposed. It continues to the north, turning to the north-east near Malcolm’s, Barossa, In the east part of Section 1,003, Barossa, it is faulted to the south, and is overlain by the basal bed of a newer series. To the east of Chain of Ponds, a triangular area with its apex pointing north, has been faulted against the Barossian rocks. The beds consist of phyllites, and have been included, tentatively, in the Para Series. It is possible that the phyllites and quartzites to the south-west of F reeling also belong to this series. (b) THE NARCOOTA SERIES. The members of this series occupy almost the whole of the Hundred of Dutton, and their outcrops along the Narcoota Creek are typical of the less metamorphosed districts examined. Rocks of this period occur along the eastern side of the ranges as far south as Palmer, and form practically the whole of the region between Angaston and the Burra. The term Dutton Series was proposed initially for these beds. The term would have been a suitable one as the outcrops of these beds in the Hundred of Dutton are typical of the series, and the Hundred of Dutton has been selected as the type locality, The writer’s attention, however, was drawn by Prof. L. A. Cotton, of Sydney University, to the use, some years previously, of the term Dutton Series for some beds on Southern Eyre Peninsula. 35 SLOTS x _ae| AC ditrasr Beye? 28952 $5 230%, &aso/ Siofesand Merkles Beals Keak t. Yosaftd. SLES ————, o? K* oS ° S208 Glsctal flower Sanatsiones, ‘ ‘ ay? ta Marbles 8 DUTTON aTRURO 0 NARCOOTA [M::«STAFSH Gee) OO Ca hile Attuvivin Tapley's iyi! Searles RECE, xa) Fig. 7, 36 As the beds outcropping along the Narcoota Creek near the northern boundary » of the Hundred of Dutton are typical of this series, and are exposed particularly well along that creek, the term Narcoota Series has been adopted. Rocks of . this period occur along the eastern side of the ranges as far south as Palmer, and form practically the whole of the region between Angaston and the Burra. They have been divided into three groups:—(1) Basal Beds, (2) Glacial Deposits, (3) The Marbles. (1) Basal Beds. With the exception of the short section occupied by the basal beds of the Para Series, these beds are exposed along almost the whole of the border of the hercoota CL Zz, WE See level Section A-A Miles Fig. 8. Barossian rocks. They vary considerably in texture, composition and degree of metamorphism, and for purposes of description will be divided into two sections :— (i) The beds west of the Barossa Ranges; (ii) The beds east of the Barossa Ranges. (i) The Basal Beds West of the Barossa Ranges. These can be followed along the whole length of the exposure of the Baros- sian Rocks. Their outcrops are of variable width, following the borders of the older rocks, and are distinctly unconformable to them. Where they border on the newer beds (the slates and quartzites), their boundaries are morc regular and generally meridional. It is evident from the maps that they were deposited along an irregular shoreline, and are filling ancient bays and inlets. Leakes Lookout Nercoors laphys Hill ales : Basal sands; 77 a“ SECTION B-B Miles Fig. 9. The Humbug Scrub-Houghton area forms an inlier of Barossian Rocks surrounded by beds belonging to the Para and Narcoota Series, a narrow belt of sedimentary rocks of the Narcoota Series separates the Humbug Scrub area from the rocks of the Barossa Series in the Barossa Ranges. The basal beds of the Narcoota Series are exposed on both sides of the belt separating the two areas of Barossian Rocks. It is probable that during the deposition of the Narcoota Series, a narrow strait separated the Humbug Scrub area and the country to the west from the other area of Barossian rocks to the east. For purposes of reference this strait has been named the “Williamstown Strait.” As the basal beds on the 37 western side of this “strait” differ remarkably from those on the eastern side, they will be described separately. In general, the basal beds on the eastern side of the “Williamstown Strait” consist of grits containing quartz, felspar, mica, and in most localities high percentages of ilmenite, which in many places gives the rock a black colour. Some of the quartz veins occurring in these beds contain ilmenite, which, in some cases at least, they appear to have absorbed from the country-rock. Current bedding is marked, being rendered very prominent by the ilmenite which has preserved the old bedding planes, even where the rocks are highly metamorphosed. In the area to the south-east of W illiamstown, in Section 124, Barossa, and the sections to the south, these beds contain numerous boulders, some up to nine inches in diameter. These boulders are rounded and sometimes flattened by pressure, Practically the only rock types represented by them are quartz and a very dense quartzite. The only specimen of another rock observed was a boulder of a very decomposed pegmatite. ‘These boulders are distributed very irregularly. When they occur they generally form a single line, parallel to the bedding planes, the adjacent rock being free from them until the next zone is reached, In their vicinity the bedding planes are far less distinct than usual. These lines do not occur at regular intervals, for they may be adjacent, or far apart, and the boulders in each line are seldom close to each other, As the beds on the eastern side of the “Williamstown Strait” are followed northwards from the south side of the South Para to Victoria Creek and beyond, the number and size of the boulders diminish, the constituent particles of the grits become finer, and the amount of ilmenite becomes less, until the beds contain very little or none of that mineral. We have an almost exact parallel along the shores of the present Gulf St. Vincent. To the south, where cliffs face the sea, the boulders strew the beach, decreasing in size and number towards the north, grading into sandy beaches, and, finally, mud-flats. The prevalent south-west winds are perhaps the dominant factor in this dis- tribution, and it appears possible that the prevailing winds at the period of deposi- tion of the basal beds were in the same direction relatively to the land as they are at the present day. Professor Howchin, who has cxamined these beds, has given an excellent description of those occurring on the eastern side of the “Williamstown Strait” (14, pp. 5-6). The fact that quartz and quartzite are practically the only types represented by the boulders is probably accounted for by the selective action of the waves, which destroyed any but the most resistant rocks, Similar examples occur on the pebble beach near Sellick’s Hill today, These basal beds exhibit intense meta- morphism at some places between Williamstown and the Warren Reservoir, and have been changed to a coarse micaceous grit, which still shows its lines of bedding. In this area they haye been intruded by numerous pegmatites, some of which carry beryl. Their junction with the Barossian rocks can be studied in the Vic- toria Creek in the north-west part of Section 3,156, Barossa, in Section 941, Barossa, where they dip beneath them, and at the unconformity exposed in a cutting on the road to the wall of the Warren Reservoir a little to the west of the main road, The basal beds on the western side of the “Williamstown Strait” consist largely of grits and conglomerates, They follow the western shores of the “Strait,” approaching the basal beds on the eastern side near Mount Gould. They do not, however, exhibit the same characteristics as the beds on the eastern ‘side. They have evidently not been subjected to the same degree of wave-action. Boulders and pebbles are numerous in restricted areas only. They include many varieties of rocks, most of which are sub-angular in shape. IImenite is not very plentiful, O92 yg ee o.°" a? doh? 9 O48 9 RIVER || Aicumezacna ||| RESON a. nam + 3 RECENT NARCOOTA JERIES BAROSSA SERIES 0 co Mauviel Schists ¥ shales. Schists CE] Hat bosefild. Querlzites basal Beals Marbles: ++ Acid beryland feurmaline aplits + pegmal les x / — Fig. 10. These differences between the two beds on opposite sides of the “Williams- town Strait” are easily accounted for if the assumption as to the prevailing wind direction is accepted, as in that case the beds on the western side would be on 39 the shore protected from the wind, and would, therefore, not be subjected to the wave-action so evident on the eastern side. The unconformity between the basal beds and the Barossian Rocks is exposed at the confluence of the Victoria Creek and South Para River, and was cut by the tunnel from the river to the Barossa Reservoir. A remarkable feature of the basal grits on the western side is the occurrence near the base of enormous quantities of micaceous haematite. In many of the specimens examined the original structure is well preserved, the current bedding of the grains and pebbles of quartz being indicated by lines of micaceous haematite, The occurrence is very irregular, and is practically confined to the lower parts of the beds. Micaceous haematite, as well as the massive variety occur. R. L. Jack has described the northern sections of the haematite outcrops in detail (49), They extend to the south of the River South Para as far as Section 1,549, Para Wirra. The micaceous haematite apparently owes its presence primarily to the deposition of iron oxides derived from the adjacent rocks when the basal grits were being formed. It occurs near the base only, in pockets which may, or may not, be connected, and probably marked former depressions. It shows current bedding very clearly, and follows the bedding around pebbles and other obstruc- tions. It is possible that subsequent thermal activity has caused a certain amount of consolidation of the iron oxides, but it evidently has left them substantially unchanged. The dip of the basal beds in the South Para is consistently to the east, both in the two sets of basal beds and in the superior quartzites and phyllites. This is explained by the existence of isoclines possessing an easterly dip, produced in these beds by being squeezed between two resistant areas, “The Barossa Ranges” and “The Humbug Scrub.” (ti) The Basal Beds East of the Barossa Ranges, These occupy a large area. The outcrops of these beds are roughly parallel and are due to their repetition by folding along north and south axes. They form the highest part of the range, and continue in a long ridge, unbroken except for occasional creek-or-river-gorges, for about 44 miles. In character they remain remarkably uniform, although metamorphism has somewhat affected them to the south, They are somewhat coarse arenaceous beds of variable composition, but relatively uniform grain size, Quartz is the predominating mineral, but biotite, muscovite and felspar occur. Ilmenite and titaniferous iron are present in variable amounts, being comparatively abundant in restricted areas only, and then generally near the base of the series. Current bedding is exhibited in a marked degree over a great part of the area. Towards the south, eastwards of Springton and Eden Valley, intrusions of veins and larger masses of granite become more and more plentiful, especially in the lower portions of the beds. At their junction with the Barossian Rocks they dip to the east, at an angle frequently in the neighbourhood of 45 degrees. As a rule they are not metamorphosed to a high degree. Although no actual junction of the sandstones and the underlying schists was observed, they are, nevertheless, believed to be the basal beds of a newer series for the following reasons. : In many places their composition resembles that of an arkose, and they contain ilmenite near the base. The current bedding so commonly exhibited is proof of their deposition in shallow water. Their easterly dip demonstrates that they overlie the schists which outcrop to the west. Although acid igneous rocks are intruded into them, these are confined in many instances to these beds, and occur in the beds ahove them in certain areas only, 40 Further, the gneissic granites, of which the Tanunda Creek and Palmer granites are typical, are not intruded into these beds, although they outcrop over large areas and have intruded the Barossian schists in the immediate vicinity. Such granites as have invaded these grits and sandstones are not gneissic, and it may be assumed are younger than those granites which have been gneissified. In general, the outcrops of the basal beds coincide with an abrupt decrease in the metamorphism so prominent to the west. Even where the lower portions of these beds have been altered to a coarse gneissic schist as in Section 218, Jut- land, bands of ilmenite can still be seen showing the original bedding at right angles to the present foliation, and the beds intmediately to the east are less metamorphosed. The district in the immediate vicinity and to the south of Angaston appears to provide the only exception to this statement. However, as will be shown later, the metamorphism in that area, though very marked, is of local significance only, and does not affect the general statement that metamorphism of the Narcoota Series ig much less than that of the Barossa Series. The sandstones have been repeated by folding, and their outcrops widen or are constricted by pitching of the folds and by faulting. Northern limits of their outcrops appear to be near the northern extremity of the area examined, and they apparently cease to the south near Palmer. The continuation of these beds to the south of Eden Valley, and thence to the west of Angaston, is not well defined. Owng to the relative scarcity of outcrops, due to the highly mature topography, the high degree of metamorphism, the generally fine texture of the sediments, and the faulting and intense folding in that locality, their outcrops are few in number, difficult to recognise, and apparently disconnected, In this arca the beds may be white sandstones or grits consisting of about equal amounts of quartz and felspar, or arenaceous mica-schists, which occur also in the beds above the basal beds, or micaceous quartzites. Ilmenite is scarce. Dips and strikes are very variable. The boundaries of these basal beds in this area are very difficult to define, and the author is not certain about their exact position. They are faulted and displaced considerably, and it is very probable that future research may result in some modifications of the maps. They are, however, mapped as correctly as was possible in the time available and the uncertainty as to their exact position is indicated. (2) Glacial Deposits. These beds lie conformably above the basal beds. Their boundaries are not always distinct, owing to the great lateral variability in grain size of the particles of which they are composed. They consist of slates, grits and conglomerates. Arenaceous slates predominate. Grits are much less common, and conglomerates occur in few localities, but increase in number to the north, In many places the beds have the appearance of water-sorted glacial deposits, weathering in some areas to rocks closely resembling varve-shales, as on Section 301, Belvidere. Microscope sections of these show that the finer-grained bands consist largely of angular splinters of quartz. The formation is composed of a large number of bands of variable thick- ness, and of very variable grain-size. The bands themselves often consist of a large number of fine laminae. Layers of coarse material alternate with finer sediments, and occasional bands of conglomerate occur, containing boulders up to a foot in diameter, of igneous and sedimentary rocks foreign to the district. Exposures of banded slates resembling those of Tapley’s Hill cover large areas, and generally are in a position superior to the gritty and boulder beds. The 41 features enumerated suggest a glacial origin for this formation, which is con- tinuous with the tillite recorded from Eudunda by Prof, Howchin. It is apparently a glacial horizon, and will be referred to as such by the writer. The boulder-clay can be seen, in situ, in the creeks crossing Sections 430, 196, 149 and 415N, and in Sections 370 and 380, Hundred of Dutton; in this locality many of the finer-grained bands contain occasional rounded pebbles, generally of quartzite. Erratics occur to the east of Greenock on Section 1,817, Nuriootpa, and boulder beds in Section 1,431 Belvidere, in several areas in the Hundred of Kapunda, and to the north. A number of roughly parallel areas of the glacial beds are shown on the maps. Some difficulty was experienced in delimiting the boundaries accurately between these beds and the underlying sandstones and overlying slates, as there is a gradual passage {rom one group to another, and not only is lenticularity of the beds common, but they increase in thickness towards the west of the area. Added to this, outcrops are often scarce. The beds were mapped as accurately as possible under the circumstances, For purposes of description and reference the beds will be divided into two sections :—(i) The Tillite Horizon; (ii) The Tapley’s Slate Horizon. (i) The Tillite Horizon. The lowest part of the beds belonging to this horizon rests directly on the upper portions of the basal beds. In the Hundred of Dutton it consists of three well-marked portions. The lower one is a fine argillaceous, thin-bedded slate, varying in colour from dark-blue where fresh, to purple where decomposed. This is followed by a thin bed of impure marble, which will be described in a later section. This marble passes upwards into calcareous slates, which are followed by a scries of greenish-grey arenaceous slates, which assume yellow and red colours where oxidised. In a few places thin beds of short extent occur, containing erratics of variable size. In the Hundreds of Moorooroo, Barossa, Para Wirra, Nuriootpa, Belvidere, and increasingly so to the north, grits occur at irregular intervals. They have been changed to quartzite in many places in Para Wirra, Barossa, and to the north- ward, and are reliable indicators of the strike of the adjacent glacial slates, which in many places are not exposed. The beds belonging to the Tillite horizon contain one or more calcareous zones which are remarkably persistent southwards. A line joining Sheaoak Log and Frankton forms the approximate northern limit of these calcareous zones ; to the north-west of this line grits and quartzites increase in size and number, and boulder beds make their appearance. A thick bed of impure marble occurs on top of the Tillite horizon, and is limited to the north by the latitude of Dutton and Kapunda, beyond which points its place is taken by a thick series of banded slates of the Tapley’s Hill type. This marble has been correlated with the Brighton limestones and the Tapley’s Hill slates. In the area discussed in this paper the Tapley’s Hill slates and Brighton limestones are contemporaneous, the beds deposited being either calcareous or argillaceous according to their geographical position, The beds are wholly caleareous in the vicinity of Angaston, and wholly atgillaceous north of Dutton, while near Kapunda the lower beds only are calcareous, while Tapley’s Hill slates form the upper beds. It is obvious, therefore, that beds of the same age exist as marbles in some localities and Tapley’s Hill slates in others, and the division by Prof. Howchin of the upper beds of the Adelaide Series near Adelaide into ‘Yapley’s Hill slates and Brighton limestones does not apply in the area described in this paper. 42 The separate areas of the Tillite horizon, which have been mapped, are repetitions of parts of the same beds due to folding. This is proved by the measurement of the dips and strikes, as well as by the lithological similarity of the rocks along the same parallel. They exhibit, however, an increasing degree of metamorphism to the south-east, south and south-west, particularly in the latter direction. This metamorphism is regional in character, the shales changing to slates with a well-developed vertical cleavage, which has a north and south strike, In the vicinity of Angaston the glacial beds have been highly folded and metamorphosed. They have been changed to a coarse mica-schist containing abundant crystals up to an inch in length, of andalusite, and are the “Paringite” of Dr. Woolnough (28). Good outcrops of these occur near Penrice and the Lindsay Bridge. It may be stated here that the development of “flecken,” “knoten,” and of “andalusite crystals” is restricted definitely to certain bands, and is dependent on a certain composition of these bands. Examples of such restriction in occurrence are exceedingly plentiful. The “andalusite crystals,’ which are developed so pientifully near the localities mentioned, are developed only in beds belonging to the glacial group, that is, within the areas described in this paper. The writer suggests, therefore, the probability that the same holds good for adjacent areas in the Mount Lofty Ranges, and that the development of similar andalusite crystals may perhaps be found to furnish a method of recognition of the Nar- coota glacial beds, where other criteria are lacking, A gradual decrease in the degree of metamorphism can be traced through all stages to the original shales and slates. Good examples of “knotenschiefer” and of “fleckschiefer” are observable in the River North Para almost anywhere between Sections 1,800 and 749, Hundred of ‘Nuriootpa, in Section 207, Moo- rooroo, and in numerous outcrops to the north, in the Hundred of Belvidere. This metamorphism persists, although to a less degree, in the whole of the Hundred of Nuriootpa, a large part of Kapunda, and the eastern parts of Dutton, increasing south of this to the end of the beds near Palmer. A number of ridges and isolated hills are formed of these beds, capped, and partly replaced by limonite, the slate being decomposed in parts to kaolin. Hawker’s Hill, Hundred of Dutton, and part of the boundary between Jellicoe and Moorooroo, south of Mount Despond, furnish good examples. They occur also on both sides of the Gilbert Range, and in other localities. There is no doubt that these occurrences are the residuals of the former peneplain, and are fragments of the “Duricrust” which once formed a continuous capping over the whole region. Although this capping was continuous, it was not uniform, however, and consisted of material which varied with the subjacent rocks. The recognition of these residuals permits of a rough reconstruction of the former peneplain surface, an estimation of the amount of subsequent erosion and a means of estimating the differential movement of the fault blocks subsequent to peneplanation. The sediments composing the glacial beds show a gradual decrease in the size of the particles as they are followed to the south-east. The boulders rapidly decrease in number and size, the rocks tend to become more and more homogene- ous, and calcareous beds make their appearance. Occasionally, however, gritty bands occur as far south as Section, 354, Hundred of Moorooroo. These facts indicate that the edge of the ice-sheet existed somewhere to the north-west of Dutton, or that the currents carrying the sediments and floating ice came from that direction, The former supposition appears the more likely, since it was shown that in all probability the prevailing winds of that period came from the south or south-west, relatively to the present orientation. 43 (ii) The Tapley’s Slate Horizon. These beds consist of thin bedded slates similar, lithologically, to those of the area near Adelaide. The argillaceous phase which they represent did not éxtend further south than the latitude of Dutton. They outcrop to the west ot that locality with a meridional strike. To the south their place is taken by the Angaston marble, and the phase south of Dutton is wholly calcareous. Most of the transition phase is lost, however, as a strike fault west of Dutton has faulted the marble against the banded slates. At this fault junction, however, the marble is very impure and contains a few erratic boulders. ‘The slates have undergone much alteration in places. On Section 320, Belvidere, and on adjoining Sections, they have been changed to a bluish-black spotted schist by the igneous intrusion on Sections 322 and 320, Belvidere. On Section 319, Belvidere, they occur as a blue-banded chert, and a silicified hornfels. Further to the north, extensive infiltration of silica and iron, as well as injection of quartz veins, have locally hardened the rock, so that, assisted by the existence of a syncline, the highest parts of the range are found here, e.g., between Sections 114 and 147, Dutton, To the north of Leake’s Lookout the slates resume their normal character, exhibiting the characteristic banding, but in places are studded with crystals of pyrites, weathering out as cubes of limonite, which are restricted to certain bands, and more numerous in some than in others. The beds to the north of Dutton have been much disturbed, and exhibit constant changes of strike and dip, Banded slates occur in many localities both to the west and east of this area, as in the east of the [Hundred of Dutton and north-west corner of Anna, and in the Hundred of Belvidere. They are believed to be the representatives of the Tapley’s Hill slates. Owing to the gradual transition of these beds to those of the Tillite horizon, it is very difficult to define their boundaries. The beds referred to the Tapley’s Hill slate horizon are those which consist predominantly of banded slate. The Tillite horizon, on the other hand, consists of a great variety of beds, from boulder beds to grits, sandstones, thick-bedded slates and varve beds. Banded slates, while they occur, represent only a small percentage of the total thickness. With the exception of the area just described in detail, the Tapley’s Hill slates and Tillite horizons have not been mapped separately, as that was impossible in the time available. (3) The Marbles. These occur both interbedded with and above the glacial beds, and, together with the banded slates, form the highest members of the Narcoota Series. They vary considerably in their composition from practically pure calcium carbonate in Sections 506 and 339, Moorooroo, to dolomite in Section 38, Dutton, and are represented by calcareous slates in many areas, In many localities they exhibit earthy partings, especially in the Hundreds of Jellicoe and Jutland. On Section 586, Belvidere, near the base of the formation, a band of impure marble occurs, containing a few boulders of quartzite from three to four inches long. This is evidently a final product of the glacial phase. The main marble bed, which occupies a large area, extends from Dutton in the north to the south-east of Angaston. It has been faulted and metamorphosed considerably. While much of the faulting in fig. 11 has still to be proved, it expresses the author’s inferences from the available evidence. It is certain that actually the faulting of the area is far more complicated. Fig. 11 is illustrative of the faulting in the Angaston district. There are other areas faulted just as severely probably, but evidence is more difficult to obtain. 44 LEGEND Atluviem Upper and Lower Marbles of the Nercoola Series \ ANGASTON 4 Py Fig. 11. Its stratigraphical position appears to be identical with the Tapley’s slate beds to the north, against which it is faulted to the west of Dutton. It occurs in the form of a syncline, which appears to be repeated in the west of Belvidere where the “Kapunda” marbles are exposed. The two synclines appear to be close 45 together just to the north of Angaston, but owing to a northerly pitch they separate more and more to the north. Owing to the local variations in the metamorphism and the original com- position of the beds, many types occur :—Comparatively pure marble of various colours, including pink, white and blue, is a special feature of the beds in Sections 506 and 339, Moorooroo, although exposed in small outcrops in other areas as well. Ags a rule these beds are very coarse-grained, consisting at times of crystals up to three-quarters of an inch across. These beds have been described in detail by Dr. R. L. Jack (50). Other varicties occurring in the marble beds are:— ‘Falcose-, white siliceous-, yellow saccharoidal-, actinolite-, and tremolite-marble. qe eT ART | Er HH (| Es aeaty Soil Travertine Argillaceows frown five Mie LimesT Ore YLanets(ore. Golemile Markt. Lge st a Lor BJO — SECTION EXPOSED IN ROAD- METAL QUARRY. SECTION 38, — — HUNDRED OF DUTTON — Fr Norizonta)| andl kerlteat Scale Fig. 12. wv A number of minerals have been developed, including asbestos, both white and blue, talc and biotite. Descriptions of some of these are to be found in publications of the S.A. Department of Mines, Phosphate rock occurs in many places, and has been quarried extensively. In the south-eastern part of the Hundred of Belvidere, and in other areas, replacement of the limestone and underlying glacial beds by siliceous solutions has in places been so complete as to have produced rocks closely resembling quartzites. In many places, especially in the Hundred of Moorooroo where the marble attains a great width, and in an area of regional metamorphism, silica is a conspicuous constituent, forming a network in the rock. On weathering the calcium carbonate is removed by solution, and leaves a siliceous skeleton, locally known as honey- comb rock. This rock is very typical of the area. It is brown, very light, and closely resembles pumice in the hand-specimen, It is an unfailing guide in the tracing of the limestone beds which frequently are not exposed at all, the “honey- comb” rock being the only remnant on the surface. Those marbles which are interbedded with the beds of the Tillite horizon are not of great thickness, and generally impure. They are repeated by folding, Fa = — ae wo rm N MARBLES OR i vest Soi reer Dias BANDED SLATES. sre NaN i 9 y N re 8 Q WES iis an mee! AICKNESS a N N aT) eAser vee SSOOFE. = ELA aii ee % S wi Tapes Sn CYRS NS = Qs inh Nan = ie ae ik “S ARENACEOUS SLATES = 7 N N 8 =| ANO THLITES. Qw mas e N NI | Mavneum lhickness SO0fE ar me % =| CALCAREOUS SLATES Oz RN Saimin ee v Q Frck ness GOOF. >= NY x aK; N LOWER MARBLES as § R Thickness LOOP}. eee ees nO g§8 as & igre) eo® VPs Ae ess ). The present section deals with the distribution of temperature in Australia, month by month, and the efficiency of precipitation as determined primarily by atmospheric water vapour satura- tion deficit. The twelve maps have been prepared from the latest meteorological data available, which have been obtained from sources referred to in Part 1. ‘TEMPERATURE. The temperature lines on the maps have been drawn through stations daily max. + min. having the same average monthly temperature, average —————_____-- 2 Interpolations have been made for altitude where practicable, on the basis of 1° F. for 300 it. of altitude. Particular features of temperature in Australia have been discussed by previous writers.) The distribution of monthly temperatures is useful in ecological studies, but more detailed analysis of temperature data, such as the diurnal range and the true value which can be assigned to the mean, will be necessary for particular investigations. The actual temperature in local situations inhabited by insects at different stages of their development is an important consideration. It is necessary to take into account the humidity of the air at given temperatures; the behaviour of insects may be ascribed to temperature, whereas moisture may be the dominant factor. In this respect it is of interest to note the importance of different combinations of temperature and humidity in relation to the physical comfort of man. Water loss from insects, under the influence of evaporation, doubtless plays an important part in relation to the actual temperatures experienced by insects; this is an aspect of their physiology which merits detailed investigation. Records of wet bulb tem- peratures may be helpful in field observations, particularly with soft-bodied insects associated with a moist environment, since the readings record the temperature at the evaporating surface.(?? @) Vide Griffith Taylor, Year Book, Comm. of Australia, 1918, No. 11, p. 85; also Bull, No. 1 (revised edn., 1931), and Bull. No, 19 (1914), Comm, Bureau of Meteorology, Melbourne. @) The experimental studies by Dr. P. A. Buxton and his colleagues at the London School of Tropical Medicine, during the past few years, have considerably advanced our knowledge regarding the water requirements of insects, 108 MoNnTHLY PRECIPITATION-EVAPORATION RATIO. ‘he efficiency of rainfall in maintaining moisture in the soil and at the soil surface is greatly influenced by water loss due to evaporation. Various authors have devised formule for the purpose of assessing the efficiency of rainfall in this respect, by taking into account particular elements of climate affecting evaporation, These formule have been critically reviewed by Prescott (1934). The ratio proposed by Meyer in 1926 appears to be the simplest and most useful, and has been applied by Prescott (1931) in dealing with the distri- bution of native vegetation and soil types in Australia. The Mcyer ratio cory is obtained by dividing annual precipitation, in inches or centimetres s , by the atmospheric water vapour saturation deficit, also expressed in inches or centimetres. With studies in insect ecology, consideration of annual values of climatic elements allows the investigator to make broad generalizations only. On the other hand, monthly values may have a wide range of usefulness in the inter- pretation of the scasonal occurrence and geographical distribution of insects. Monthly values for the Meyer ratio (>) may be calculated for stations $s where records are available for precipitation, air temperature and humidity. Where records for precipitation and evaporation are obtainable, the ratio P of the former to the latter, month my month (E to the degree of wetness or dryness in the area. This ratio has been employed by the writer in a recent ecological study of the Collembolan, Smynthurus viridis L. (Davidson, 1933, 1934). Evaporation records, over a long period of years, are available for the capital cities of Australia. Unfor- tunately, however, compared with other meteorological data, there are very few stations which record evaporation, P When the monthly values for — at each of the capital cities of Australia E ), affords a valuable index P are plotted against the calculated monthly values for —, a linear relationship sd P P is obtained; the line passing through the points has the formula — = m — E sd where “m” is the value for the slope of the linc; the value for “m” varics ? ‘ . : ; ‘ P slightly with the station. Therefore, at these stations, the Meyer ratio (=) P used as a monthly index, may be expressed in terms of —. E Krom the remarks in the previous paragraph, it follows that a linear relationship obtains when monthly values for recorded evaporation at these stations are plotted against monthly values for atmospheric saturation deficit. This relationship has been discussed by Prescott (1931) and by the writer 109 (Davidson, 1933). With the aid of this basal principal, the writer defined the areas and months in Australia in which recorded precipitation exceeds the computed evaporation, as determined by atmospheric saturation deficit; the information was embodied in a map of Australia given in an earlier paper (Davidson, 19344). The same method has been employed in the preparation of the twelve maps now presented. Areas have been defined for Australia where monthly P values for — exceed unity, and areas where the values lie between unity and E 0-5. Compared with the earlier map, a few slight modifications have been made in the boundaries of the areas; certain small sections were unavoidably smoothed out in the earlier map. With the aid of additional rainfall data, some modifications of the areas in Victoria have been made in the present maps. The maps give a general picture of the degree of wetness or dryness over the continent month by month. When compared with the maps in Part l of this paper, they emphasise the influence of the winter and summer rainfall types in this respect. In the summer rainfall zone, high temperatures during the summer months result in relatively high evaporation. This offsets the P continued efficiency of rainfall and results in relatively low values for — E over the southern portions of this zone. In the winter rainfall zone, on the other hand, low temperatures in the winter months result in relatively low evaporation and effective rainfall over a large area. P The lowest value for which may be selected as providing adequate E moisture for general plant growth will vary according to whether the particular value occurs during a definite rainy period; soil type will be also an important consideration. When the February map is superimposed on the June map it will be seen that the inner boundary of the hatched area encloses the central portion of P the Continent. In this region the average monthly values for — are less than E 0-5 throughout the year. ‘he vegetation of this region is characterised by acacia semi-desert, shrub steppe and porcupine grass, climax associations as shown in Prescott’s vegetation map of Australia (Prescott, 1931). For the purpose of mapping the moisture zones of Australia, I have P tentatively considered the average monthly value — = 0-5 as the lower limit at which adequate moisture will be available for plant growth. Fluctuations about this mean value will result in lower values occurring from time to time in certain areas, thereby producing temporary drought conditions; the inten- sity of desiccation will depend upon the value of the ratio and its duration. 110 By superimposing the twelve maps here presented, Australia may be mapped into moisture zones having different degrees of favourableness for vegetation, according to the number of months in which moisture is effective P ‘ : ‘ for plant growth -( E> 0-5 or over). For instance, in the area bordering on the arid central portion of the Continent referred to above, moisture is effective for one month only.@) The number of effective months increases progressively towards the coast. Over a large belt along the eastern coast P and in the highlands of Victoria and Tasmania, the — ratio exceeds 0°5 in E every month of the year. The period when moisture is effective may be considered as the growing P period. Temperature and the duration of particular values of — during this i period will influence the kinds of plants and crops which may become permanently established. The intensity of aridity and its duration, during the months in which , P j : : moisture is not effective ae less than 0°5), will also influence the kinds of plants and crops which may become established in an area, owing to the different degrees of drought resistance exhibited by them. It is evident that the moisture zones defined, as explained above, are closely correlated with the zones of vegetation types shown in Prescott’s vegetation map. From the specialized vegetation of the arid central region of the Continent (= less than 0°5 in every month) the type of vegetation changes as we pass to the coast; the rain-forest type is dominant along the warm, eastern coastal districts, and the high moorland type in the cold high- P lands of Victoria and Tasmania; in these zones — exceeds 0°5 in every month. E The insects in these various moisture zones, to a large extent, are closely associated with the vegetation. During the months in which moisture is adequate, the habits and responses of particular species will be favoured according to the range of temperature in the area. During the dry months, the intensity of aridity and its duration will influence the species which can survive in the area, by favouring those which have a low moisture require- ment and, resist loss of body water, and those which are able to aestivate successtully. P Andrews and Maze (1933) used the de Martonne formula cae asa T 10 monthly index of aridity in Australia. They give index figures obtained by this formula for January, March, June and October at the capital cities. () It will be understood that plants are able to utilize sub-soil water, and adequate moisture will be available from this source, for a time, after the value of — falls below 0:5. 111 P These figures are shown in Table 1, column 1. Values for — and — for sd these months are given in Table 1 for comparison. P When the values for — are plotted against those for —, the linear E sd relationship is evident. When the index values given by Andrews and Maze are plotted against those for —, several points are scattered irregularly. TARLE 1, Showing monthly index figures for various climatic elements at the capital cities of Australia. Andrews & Maze P P Station Month ok ¥en T +10 E sd Adelaide = ~— January 0°54 0-08 1-36 March 0°86 0-17 2°55 June 3°60 2°50 31-10 October 1:64 0°36 6°30 Perth January 0°26 0-03 0-80 March 0-62 0-10 2-40 June 7°50 3°98 70-40 October , 2-10 0-42 10°95 Melbourne January 1-61 0-29 6°75 March 2°03 0°55 9:60 June 2°60 1-80 34°00 October 2-70 0°78 14°60 Sydney January 2°90 0-68 13-9 March 4:10 1°37 24°83 June 5-40 3°39 48°5 October 2°67 0-75 12:7 Brisbane January 4°70 0-99 20°3 March 4-40 1-17 23°8 June 2°78 1-17 20°9 October 2:07 0°45 8:4 Andrews and Maze give four charts showing the distribution of the de Martonne monthly indices in Australia for January, March, June and October. There is some agreement between particular index lines and the P boundaries of the —- areas shown on the maps presented here. The agree- ment does not hold for all the months, and in the different States. For instance, index line 3 approximates closely to the boundary of the area P — = 0:5 in January, but not in March, where the index line 2 appears to be a better fit in Victoria and New South Wales. The calculated values for evaporation employed in preparing the present maps are to be considered only as a general approximation to the actual values. In some instances, as in the case of South Australia, a good approxi- 112 mation is obtained (zzde Davidson, 1933). In the case of the extensive region of Northern Australia, values for evaporation have becn based on records for Alice Springs; this is the most convenient station available which possesses an adequate series of records. Although atmospheric saturation deficit is the major factor influencing evaporation, wind is an important additional factor. The effect of wind on evaporation may vary considerably over large regions, due to changes in direction and velocity. Owing to the few stations at which wind records are kept and the present state. of know- ledge regarding the effect of air movements on evaporation in nature, it 1s not possible to assess adequately the influence of this factor, It is considered, however, that, where data for air temperature and humidity are available, the P monthly — ratio is to be preferred to the de Martonne ratio, used as a monthly sd index (vide Prescott, 1934). Where records for evaporation are available at a P LP convenient station, values for — may be converted into values for -— sd d E The value to be assigned to mean rainfall data is an important considera- tion, since a high degree of variability obtains over a large part of Australia (cide Barkley, 1931). : REFERENCES. Anprews, J., and Maze, W. H., 1933. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.SAV., vol. Iviil, pp. 105-120. BARKLEY, H., 1931. The Pastoral Review, vol. xli, pp. 146-148. Davinson, J., 1933. Austr. Journ. Expt. Biol. Med. Sci., vol. xi, pp. 59-66. —_———— _ 1934. Coun. Sci. Ind. Res. (Austr.), Bull. 79. ——-———— 19344, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. Iviii, pp. 33-36. ——_——— 1934». Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. lviii, pp. 197-210. Prescott, J. A., 1931. Coun. Sci. Ind. Res. (Austr.), Bull. 52. ——_—____——- 1934. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. Iviii, pp. 48-61. 113 09. EN VINYNSVE fy iM Kaanqu91 50 Sy y sD ‘weer Or WAN «GO HUY SOUL. UNOYS * 4BAQ vO] LOLA *(pareinge) u01yedlodeas pure (papi) Pyesurwet AVPUCU UBS UvaMIeg dyYSUCTTVyeI sy] Pus fadnyeiadwal AYYUOW UBIU SUIMOUS VITIVELSAVy | pepeysun ‘¢-O ueYyi Sse] NoOSavanne © OLLVY Eoyzusyya WH Wed * VVIVULSOAV A 2 arg eqeeyt A \\ fy \. mM) »») \Y YY, 7 114 ! , yy ato8peme coe Sa 40 ZIWIS ST sacieeniaicaceiatc ipa rene aaa’ ‘ete Or oF ee ry pepeysun ‘GQ UW) 3307 AWA ge Fong O ce } NOlNBORWAS yo OLY THY FOUL UNOYS " JBAQ JO] UBYAK, * (partelngyfe) uopeIodersd pues (papiora)TPOSUT el AUOW UvswW UuvaMjeq dyYysuone]I1 sy] Pus Sauntyeuaduiar AYYUIUOW UBsSW SUIMOYS VITVeLsSnvy Key yuna SRE \t VITVULSNY 'S WARIO APH ® (nn an hae mee VIIVULSOV A aNV ISNESND " * VIIVULSAW'D uewuiy 506 molTUug, fo outer re AAAS WAY " Auvnaddd 115 mt \ \ \ . 832TH 40 FIWlS “oe oe ooo Pepeysun ‘¢.o ueY ra NOlLWuOd WAZ WAAAY 6 FO 6s > MOUNHOEWAS Jo OL wel MUSA UnoYs * J2KQ 20] RUA, (paleingzes) uo eIodeAs pur (papiocadypeyuyed ATUUOU! wesw Us9aMjeq drysuoIeysu sy pus Saunyedaduia AyyUOW UBaW suWMOYS WIiVetLsnvy SQIVM’S'N sieeosey" VIIVULSAV'S a MYgSEyy QNV'ISNOAND 08: Suradg ee oD VPITVULSAV'D SAA \S SAR N 116 2 euegeta ap S32UAW 40 2IVIS ee ee ey “cE! ar pepeysun ‘GO “ey. 9597 NOUV HOdDvA WAAAY 18 GO ee) NOMBBOEYAR Yo OF Ly HEE FGA UMOYS * JBAQ JO] UBYM * (PaleINae) UOPVAOT SAD pure (paplosa)TyBsured AUOUW UvaW Usamieq dIYysuC}eys1 ay1 pus Saunteuedwar AyYUIUOW UBsWl SUIMOUS VWITVELSAV aNV ISNGGND Patties suds oofy umopeyang f 117 j Sow 40 savas VINVASYL SSS “ oy f //} a ° eer ar i Sy pepeysun ‘g.co ueys ssaq ° y AA FO GO 66) NOUUHORWAT o_O) Ly} MUU SOU UMOYS §5BAQ YO] LRU, ‘ * (palejnyed) UONVICd VAS pue (paptoaa)yyesuyet dali APNUCU UvIU UdaMjeg drysuoIeje4 ay pus if Yip: Mii, Saunyeuadwa AyyUOW uUBaW UIMOUYS WY Ay, : VIIVELSAW f YY My CU MIG TY); Ds A = SS ; wry. WITWULSAY'S QNVISNGGND Aujadg saye? ) VITWULSNV'D Jerry usuuay « VITVULSAV'N 118 iN eee cael ‘ Tha pepeysun ‘gO vey S535 AAA ae 208 GQ ce} MOUNEEYAT Jo OF yy HHI SAGA UROYS © FAQ UO] USUAL + (pape) UoNBIedsrs pus (papsoad)ypesuyedd AYWUOU Uesw usemieg dyysuCpVeped sy. PUB Salnyeiaduial APYIUOU UBIU SULMOUS VWITVetSsnvy ~_ er . 1 AAS yee? SY TTY GLLsay '§ wee4D AIH VITVULSNV'N ' ' l 4 nl ‘ 119 SIUN JO BIwos peer 7 Oot o0e 008 ° eG ar WA «oe pg \ HHMI EU, strous * Jang sO] VU, *(pareinged ueletodeas pure (papiooadpeyuyed AMNUOU UBaW usamieg drysuoneyes au] pus faunivesedwia AyYyUOW UBEU SUMOUS VWIIVeELSnvy N hd NO aE © OlLWe iy dame eee nen ee oof} ere SAP Tee eps y 5: Nv TISNGGND yeweutue ge Vi? |: f OL: f VEIVULSNV'3D - i i t t t t 1 1 ' H i 5 1 t ‘ y eran eee ee SITW 40 31995 PEYEUN ‘G-O YEU! SSe7q NOLLWHOdVAS wayne 2 Ol.lwd CH GY BOUL UMOYS §JBAQ YO] YEU ACdBAS pre (paplorat 21 dy] PUB \ ApNucu uvau Usamieq dyysucys vuaduel AYUOW UBS [IVE LSNAY VIIVHLSAV'S 120 VVIVYLSAV A ENV ISNAIND bevipsn ge pao Fob! Fe OL | ; Lsnonv | 121 GNVISNGEAD AWA «1 GO ee HES UMOYS JAAD uO] URUM * (pareIngyed Uo}jVVIoders pue (papsorad TVOJUreat AYUCW Ua Usamieq CrysuOTIEed ay pus faunyguadwei Ayyuow uBew UIMOUS VITIVELSNVY NOI YOdVAT THanivy 2? OILVY pepeysuy ‘s.9 ueYL | up wweae ye VIIVYULSOAV 'M 122 GRY ISNEENO pusunet yy VITV HLS “ HEGEL POA PROS | BAD YO] UBUM oan stias sean ues cmtadetinaition} ™ “‘etér ar on g0z On o papeysun 'S-O Yeu S597 *(DETEINLYUSIPRIOAVAS Pure (papsooe) Wepre me ANVUOU Weal UIIM10Q ATYSUGNB ISA dy] DUB oS \ Sttw 40 20795 GO « \ NONAv HORA? DOLLY Saunyedaduier APUTUCI Wes Ul SUIMOUS | v rv oS VIIVULSAV 377 VIIVULSAV'N ' 1 ‘ nes wenn ena hive LSsav apeniirae Reva sang seu Lf SS 123 a \ SIH 40 DIVSOS ANG rasa <, NonedvAs 9 OLY WMA “a a 1%Go ss HEME SOUS UNOYD * FAQ JO] URL, *(palenqyepuopesodera pure (paplorad Ty esuyet APUOU Wesw usamiaq drysuop eyed sy pues Saunyeuaduiai AjUCW Weal SUMOUS VrivelLsnavy pepeysun ‘go LEY ah W ‘eter or WAMA\ ae 8 GO ce} NOEENBEETS yo OL HEY SO4L UMOUS * JOAQ JO] UOUAA *(palegey uo ve jodeVrs pure (peploa)yesuyet Ajo UvsW useMmIeg dTYSUCNB]si sy Pus Sa.lnyeuadway AyYIUTW UBsU SUIMOUS VITIVELSAVy pepeysur ‘¢. ueys = tebe dh a Bl ROX LENS WW ‘WITWULSOW'D Meakte yj Wy yy YoadANdOdg | AUSTRALITES, PART II. NUMBERS, FORMS, DISTRIBUTION AND ORIGIN. BY CHARLES FENNER, D.SC. Summary It was thought that a contribution towards the tektite controversy might be made by a compilation of a census of all the australites in accessible collections, with a view to analyzing the form types and preparing a map showing the distribution of recorded finds. This work was accompanied by a personal examination of more than 5,800 of the specimens in the collection referred to. In the course of this enquiry the W. H. C. Shaw collection of australites came under notice, and a preliminary paper was published, giving a classification of that collection. (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. lviti, 1934, pp. 62-79, with 6 plates.) Frequent references will be made to this paper, which will be indicated in such references by the symbol F34. The present paper is a continuation of the enquiry. A vast amount of information still remains to be collected. It is particularly desirable that the external forms and internal structures should be closely studied as physical problems. 125 AUSTRALITES, PART II NUMBERS, FORMS, DISTRIBUTION AND ORIGIN. By Cuartes Fenner, D.Sc., University of Adelaide. [Read May 9, 1935.] CONTENTS. Page I Inypropuction .. . ik £3 i At 3 os 125 II Numsrrs i ry bes he a . t4 126 (a) Museum Collections i 4 we Pe oh + ae 126 (b) Private Collections .. .. 2: a te rat ws 127 (c) Unrecorded Collections an oa ae a if a, 127 (d) Estimate of Total Numbers it a's ia fg 28 128 IJ] Forms anp STRUCTURES hs ate ee = Ki i 129 (a) Common Forms ay se xt a oc Ret a 129 (b) Flanges and Rims .. wt re it ie 3a i 129 (c) Cores... Li ia ne ae We 130 (d) The Two Atmospheric Phases. He 44 1 shy 131 IV DyisrrisvuTion .. = x . ai r 133 (a) General Considerations os 29 i a be So 133 (b) Marginal Occurrences x; at iA er i ae 135 (c) Compilation of the Map... Le a wm a 135 (d) Conclusions Concerning Distribution .. a is is 136 Vo Moone or Oricin ‘ a ae i nt - it A 136 (a) General Account ala i Pe! ae a Aw: 2 136 (b) A Variety of Theories bi As a mn oe a 137 (c) The Theory of ConinN E Falls .. 4 2 Pe Mi 138 VI Note sy Pror. F. E. Sugss .. . _ a et at ae 140 VII Summary anp Conclusions et ma an aA 3 be 140 I—INTRODUCTION It was thought that a contribution towards the tektite controversy might be made by a compilation of a census of all the australites in accessible collections, with a view to analyzing the form types and preparing a map showing the dis- tribution of recorded finds. This work was accompanied by a personal examina- tion of more than 5,800 of the specimens in the collection referred to. In the course of this enquiry the W. H. C. Shaw collection of australites came under notice, and a preliminary paper was published, giving a classification of that collection. (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. viii, 1934, pp. 62-79, with 6 plates.) Frequent references will be made to this paper, which will be indicated in such references by the symbol F34. The present paper is a continuation of the enquiry. A vast amount of information still remains to be collected. It is particularly desirable that the external forms and internal structures should be closely studied as physical problems. The account of numbers here presented is the first that has been made avail- able; it suggests that australites are more abundant than has been previously realized, and are more numerous than are other forms of tektites studied, namely: billitonites, moldavites, schonites, queenstownites (Darwin glass), rizalites (Philip- pine Islds., Beyer, 1926), and the forms from Columbia and Peru. The discovery of a new tektite series (indochinites) has brought forward forms that are generally larger than australites, are strewn over a vast area, and occur in some places in astonishing abundance; according to Suess“) and Lacroix, indochinites may @ F. E. Suess: Zur Beleuchtung des Meteoriten Problems. Mitteilungen der Geologi- schen Gesellschaft in Wien; Band xxv, 1932. (?) A, Lacroix: Les Tectites de !’Indochine, Archive du Museum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Tome viii, 1932, Paris. 126 be as widespread and as abundant as australites, perhaps even more abundant ; they are found on the surface and in alluvial deposits, as are the Australian forms. In shape the indochinites have occasional resemblances to the Australian droplet types, but more so to the potsherd and pancake (fladen) forms of moldavites.(%) i The map of distribution of australites presented in this paper shows how widespread are the australite forms within the limited area of their occurrence, and emphasises their absence from northern Australia. A brief account is given of the various theories of origin that have been put forward. It is desired to show that the established facts of chemical composition, physical form, and geographical distribution emphasise the unity of the australites, so far as their origin in time and space are concerned, and thus to confirm their association with the tektites of other areas as a special and individual swarm of glass meteorites. JI—NUMBERS. An effort has been made to arrive at the actual numbers of australites that are in museum and private collections, and therefrom to estimate the numbers that have possibly been collected. These facts, taken in conjunction with other records concerning numbers on a given area, enable an estimate to be made of the probable total numbers of australites that fell over the whole area of Southern Australia and Tasmania. These numbers refer to “pieces”; owing to the fact that little or no value has hitherto been placed upon broken fragments, the greater number (possibly 60-80%) of the pieces named are whole, or nearly whole, australites, (a) Museum CoLections. British Museum, South Kensington — - - - - 483 Dr. F. E. Suess, Vienna, Austria - - - - 30 Australian Museum, Sydney - - - - - 153 Mines Department Museum, Sydney - ~ - - 116 University Museum, Sydney - - - - - 172 University Museum, Melbourne - - - - 551 National Museum, Melbourne (Estimated) - - - 520 Mines Department Museum, Melbourne - - - 39 Western Australian Museum, Perth - 2 - aa University Museum, Perth, W.A. - > - - 12 South Australian Museum, Adelaide - - - - 372 South Australian Museum, Shaw Collection, 1935 = - 3,833 South Australian Museum, Adelaide (Ethnological) - - 55 University Museum, Adelaide - - - - - 137 University Museum, Brisbane, Queensland - - - <@W7 Brisbane Museum, Queensland - - - - 5 Mines Department Museum, Hobart, Tasmania - - 6 Queen Victoria Museum, Launceston, Tasmania - - 64 Hamilton Museum, Victoria - - - - - 8 Portland Museum, Victoria = - - - - - 10 Warrnambool Museum, Victoria ~ - - - di Auckland University College, New Zealand - - - 6 Total Number of Pieces in Museums - > - 7,393 (@) Lacroix has recently reported another tektite region in the Ivory Coast area. Comptes Rend. Acad. Sci., Paris, 1934; t. 199, p. 1,539. 127 (b) PRIvATE COLLECTIONS. S. F. C. Cook, Kalgoorlie, W.A. (Estimated) - - - 3,000 Dr. E. S. Simpson, Perth, W.A. - - - - 200 Student of Prof. De C. Clarke, Perth, W.A. - - - 200 Prof. Sir Douglas Mawson, Adelaide - - - 36 Prof. W. Howchin, Goodwood Park, S.A: - - - 54 Prof. Kerr Grant, St. Peters, S.A. - - - - 62 Dr. T. D. Campbell, Adelaide, S.A. - - - - 45 Dr. C. Fenner, Rose Park, S.A. ~ - - - 60 G. F. Dodwell, Observatory, Adelaide, S.A. - - - 86 eNwatl ol: Peake, Adelaide, S.A. - - - 5 Dr. L. K. Ward, Kensington Park, Shh - - - 300 George Aiston, Mulka, via Marree - - - - 20 IL Bussenschutt, Angaston, Sioa pa - - ole Dr. C. T. Madigan, Blackwood, S.A. - - - 2 OY, P. Ifould, Burnside, S.A. - - - - - 24 A. S, Kenyon, Heidelberg, Victoria - - - - 50 E. G. Austin, Borriyalloak, Victoria - - - 48 H.R. Balfour, Henty House, Melbourne, Victoria - - 80 R. H. Croll, Camberwell, Victoria - - - 50 deel Brooke, Nundoora, New South Wales - - - 58 Dr. F. W. Whitehouse, Brisbane, Queensland - - 100 H. Stuart Dove, Devonport, Tasmania - 2 - 67 Total Number of Pieces in Private Collections - 4,593 Grand Total - - - - = 11,946 (c) UNRECORDED COLLECTIONS. The foregoing are the total numbers for which it has been possible to obtain documentary evidence. It is undoubted that much larger numbers have been collected, and the following facts and statements are put forward as evidence. Some of the statements have also a bearing upon the problem of distribution :— 1. Mr. G. F. Dodwell, Government Astronomer, South Australia, informs me that he and his party collected about 250 pieces over an area of a square mile on the Nullarbor Plains. This must be admitted as an estimate only; the area was not measured, nor were the numbers counted (vide F34, p. 64). 2. Mr. George Aiston, of Mulka, via Marree, part author of “Savage Life in Central Australia,’ informs me that he “has collected and distributed many hundreds, perhaps thousands,” and the evidence of other collections bears this out. Under date 5/3/35 Mr. Aiston writes that specimens “are getting scarce” around his Central Australian locality ; the aboriginal children originally collected them at the rate of one lolly per australite, but at the present time the older blacks are asking one shilling for each whole specimen. 3. Mr. E. J. Dunn, F.G.S., late Government Geologist of Victoria, and one of the leading collectors and investigators of australites, writes under date 7/12/33: “So far as I am aware, australites are found in greater abundance at Mount William, in the Grampians (western Victoria) than anywhere else in Australia. Years ago, when the alluvial gold mines were being worked, I was assured that some claims yielded as many as would fill a four-gallon kerosene tin.” (A kerosene tin would hold some tens of thousands of australites.) eC 128 4. One of the most significant accounts concerning both numbers and dis- tribution is given by Professor Walter Howchin, F.G.S., under date 6/3/34. The two localities he refers to are about 20 miles apart on the broad alluvial plains that lie north of Adelaide, a locality which is regarded as a very barren area for australites. The account runs: “Mr. John Alexander, deceased, farmer, of South Gawler, with his sons collected from their ploughed fields (about 600 acres) 15 australites. The family moved to Wasleys and there obtained a similar number of specimens from (a similar areca of) their own land.” Mr. Louis Kurtze, Portland, Victoria, informs me that he has found three specimens while cultivating the smal! garden adjoining his home. 5. Mr. T. Hodge-Smith, of the Australian Museum, Sydney, New South Wales, mentions in a letter (9/7/34) a collection of 1,000 specimens that he examined some years ago, also “a large number collected for Dr. Goldschmidt, of Heidelberg,” and another collection sent to Dr, Fritz Paneth, of Kénigsberg, for helium determination. Mr. Hodge-Smith mentions also that most of these specimens were much weathered or abraded. They are referred to here as. evidence of the numbers of australites that circulate outside of museum collections. 6. Mr. Solomon Williams, of Glenelg, S.A., testifies (Burra Record, 12/9/34) that australites were abundant at Kooringa (Burra) in the copper- mining days 70 years ago; he and other boys called them “petrified apricot stones,” and were accustomed to break them in the hope that they might some day discover a petrified kernel within. It is likely that none of these was ever preserved. 7. Rev. W. B. Clarke records that these forms were common on the alluvial gold diggings of New South Wales in 1855, and were known as “button stones.” (Q. J. G. S., 1855, p. 403.) 8. Mr. A. S. Kenyon, of Heidelberg, Victoria, naturalist and historian, who has a collection of about 50 specimens, states (22/1/34) that he has had about 200 from the East-West line and Central Australia, and has known about 100 to 150 from north-west Victoria. 9. Dr. Charles Chewings, a South Australian geologist with an exceptionally intimate knowledege of the MacDonnell Range country and the vast areas to the northward, informs me (12/4/35) that at Blood’s Creek and the country south of Charlotte Waters australites abounded on the surface. He added that in all his wanderings north of the MacDonnells he had neither seen nor heard of a single specimen. 10. Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, for many years Government Geologist of South Australia, states (“Record of Mines,” 1908, p. 372) that these objects are “found in alluvium and on the surface generally all over the State, although most frequent in the stony downs and table-hill country of the Far North.” 11. The writer can recall seeing, some thirty years ago, at Hamilton, Vic- toria, a bag containing possibly 500 australites, of which no trace can now be found. A cloth bag of australites, said to contain about 2,000, was known to he in the possession of the late W. W. Weidenbach, of Adelaide, but efforts to dis- cover its whereabouts have proved unsuccessful. The aborigines along the trans- continental line (Kalgoorlie-Port Augusta) sell australites to travellers, and appear to collect and distribute a large number of specimens, In 1917 the writer saw a cigar box almost full of australites in the window of a Kalgoorlie jeweller, possibly two or three hundred specimens. Considerable numbers have been polished and mounted as mourning brooches. (d) Estimate or Tora NuMBERs. It is generally agreed that only a small proportion of the australites collected are in the collections listed in the foregoing table. One would need to be familiar 129 with the vast area of country (nearly 2,000,000 square miles) over which they are distributed, and with the variety of climate, relief and vegetation presented —all of which factors affect the possibilities of collection—in order to realize that over the greater part of this area only a small proportion of the austra- lites have been collected. The evidence of Howchin (4), Dodwell (1), and Dunn (3) given above, support this suggestion. We are, therefore, in a position to make some tentative estimates of numbers :— (1) Minimum: There are 11,946 specimens in known collections, most of them catalogued. There are probably as many again in private, minor museum and foreign collections. A reasonable minimum estimate of the number of austra- lites that have been collected and have come under the notice of interested authorities is, say, 20,000. (ui) Maximum: Ii australites were distributed fairly evenly over the 2,000,000 square miles where they are found, and if the estimated collection made by Mr. Dodwell’s party in 1920-21 (250 pieces to the square mile) were made a basis for calculation, this would give a maximum estimate of 500,000,000 australites. No account is here taken of the numbers that must in any case have fallen into the adjoining oceans and seas. (iit) Intermediate Estimate: Anticipating a conclusion reached later in this paper to the effect that the distribution was irregular, more abundant in some places than in others, and giving due weight to all the available evidence, including that of the farmer John Alexander (5, supra), it seems fair to assume that the number of australites that fell in southern Australia, in the area shown in the map (fig. 3), was at the least one million, and at the most ten millions. II—FORMS AND STRUCTURES Since writing the account of the australites forms contained in the W. H. C. Shaw collection (loc. cit.) the author has had the opportunity of examining several other collections, notably that in the National and University Museums, Melbourne, and in various country museums and private collections. (a) Common Forms. This experience serves to confirm the conclusion that almost the whole of the australite forms may be classified in what Professor Suess calls “a rather small number of well-defined types of shapes.” The common shapes are those set out in the previous paper (F34) of this series, namely: (1) Round (buttons and lenses) ; (2) Oval (ovals, boats, and canoes) ; and (3) Dumbbells and teardrops. Of these the round forms are everywhere in the great majority (more than 60 per cent.), and the dumbbells and teardrops the most rare (usually less than 10 per cent.). Among these is a large number of “cores” (round, elongate and dumbbell-shaped), the original forms of which are separately discussed in this section. (b) FLANGES AND Ris. One of the most characteristic features of australite forms, in contrast with those of any other tektite group, is the almost invariable equatorial rim or flange that encircles each form, dividing the top (back) from the bottom (front) and thus separating two surfaces of distinctly different character. No two rims or flanges are quite alike, but in an examination of a large number of specimens the fact emerges that there are two fairly well-marked types. These were so recog- nised in a previous paper (F34), where the structures are well illustrated, but the distinction was not made quite clear. The commonest of all forms are the rownd ones. Leaving the “cores” for later discussion, two groups may be identified: (1) Buttons, which have a 130 strongly-developed equatorial projection, distinguished as a “flange” and illustrated in section in fig. 1 (c,d). (2) Lenses (more abundant) have a sharp, equatorial projection, not developed beyond the meeting of the two surfaces, which is dis- tinguished as a “rim” and is illustrated in section in fig. 1 (a, b). Thus, the possession of a “rim” or a “flange,” respectively, determines whether a round form is a lens or a button. Rare intermediate examples are found, in which one must arbitrarily determine whether the feature is a strong rim or a weak flange. On elongate and dumbbell (hourglass) forms, flanges and rims occur also. Here, as with the round forms, rims preddminate over flanges, but so far this feature has not been used in the classification of other than round forms. It is possible that, as each bleb of glass spun through the air, with the material melting on the forward part and flowing backwards, a succession of rims and flanges, with all their intermediate stages, was formed on the equator of the australite; when the flange reached a certain size or stage, it may have been shed as a ring. Examples are not uncommon where the connection between the flange and the main body had become very thin indeed at the moment of consolidation; one specimen in the Melbourne Museum collection appears to have solidified almost at the moment of parting with its flange. (c) Cores. Most Australian writers of these matters have described and figured the very common form called “cores.” The term is possibly anthropological in origin, having reference to the central piece of rock that remains when aboriginal man has flaked off his required pieces of quartzite, flint, etc. In australite collections cores (which in this case are natural, and not artificial) are common and charac- teristic. The “equatorial zone’ of cores (see figs. E 1, 3, 7, pl. ix; also Alf, Nos. 1-12, pl. iv, F34) is an unmistakeable belt of flaking. The question is: What has flaked off? Many have considered that all of the round cores were originally buttons-with-flanges, and that the flange together with some of the adjoining part of the button had flaked off. Such flaking is doubtless due to the tension in the rapidly-cooled glass itself, aided by the extreme temperature variations of desert areas, by bush and grass fires, percussion, and so on. The clue to the original shapes of cores was found in two large specimens in the Melbourne Museum collection, Nos, 11,391 and 11,392; sketches were made of these specimens by the kind permission of the Museum Director, Mr. D. J. Mahony, M.Sc. This has been supported by smaller similar specimens from S. F. C. Cook’s Kalgoorlie collection, and gives a much more rational explanation of core specimens generally. Fig. 1, e and f, represent two rough sketches of specimen 11,392, which is 4 cm. in diameter, not including the adhering cracked parts; f shows the core in section, the part that usually remains is shaded vertically, the portion of the rim that has not flaked away is shaded horizontally, and the part that has disappeared is dotted in outline. Fig. 1, g and h, shows specimen 11,391, 4 cm. in its longer diameter; the original surface with “rim” is clearly to be seen on that part of the equatorial zone that has not flaked off. In this specimen, as in a dozen or so others that have been examined, there is a reddish-brown glassy substance, wax-like in appearance, that appears to be stuck in cracks and crevices of the australite; it has never been analysed. An ordinary core may thus represent two-thirds, perhaps less, of the original unflaked lens from which it was formed. The evidence suggests that the majority of cores were originally lenses (with rim) and not buttons (with flange). It would appear that almost all australites originally had either a flange or a rim at the moment of cooling. But certain forms, such as the “aerial bomb” anda few of the other specimens of group A7e (F34) have neither flange nor rim; they 131 may not have “spun” during the latter part of their flight. As extreme cases, there are also the “crinkly tops” (F1 to F12, pl. ix, loc. cit), where the melted glass appears to have flowed up over the rear of the australite, while in one remark- able specimen in the Melbourne University collection there is a unique and exten- sive development of the flange. Lenses Buttons <-> Core with portion of original _ ange Tats La rim. Fig. 1. Sketches to show the distinction between rims and flanges (a, b, ¢, d); also the manner of formation of cores (e, f, g, h, i). These definitions will affect the scheme of classification of australites put forward in a previous paper (F 34). “Cores,” sub-class Alf, should be placed with the lenses as sub-class A2h; sub-classes Blf, Blg, and Bih should be termed “lens cores” and not “button cores.” (d) Tae Two ATMOSPHERIC PHASES, Emphasis has elsewhere (F34) been placed upon the fact that the internal and external forms and structures of australites bear witness to two distinct and separate phases, so far as form and origin are concerned. These enquiries emphasise also the excellent choice made by Suess when he selected the name tektite (Greek: tektos, melted) for these and related forms; in the case of the australites, there is indisputable evidence of two periods of melting. In the first phase each bleb of glass took its primary form, and in the second phase this form was modified and made smaller by the fusion and flowage of the material from the forward face of the spinning body, giving us the secondary and final form. 132 In Suess’s last paper (Wien, 1932) seven distinct phases are set down as occurring in the origin and development of meteorites (including australites), namely :—astral, apostaktic, kathartic, porotic, diathraustic, perihelic, and atmo- spheric phases. This conception takes us back to the distant time when the tektite (or other meteorite) was born from some star (sun), perhaps by dis- ruption, onward through its “cleansing” and hardening stages, its explosion and subsequent wandering as a member of the solar system, to its final entrance into the earth’s atmosphere. yous ats 2% \ CRON SU REC / Fig. 2. Sketch to illustrate the primary (shaded) and secondary (dotted) portions of an australite. But such an hypothesis carries us much further back in time and space than here concerns us. For the present it would appear that the two phases we are dealing with in this section come within the last of Suess’s phases, the atmospheric. It is perhaps possible to imagine that the blebs of glass entered our atmosphere in their primary forms, and that only the secondary forms were imposed in their brief flight through the air. It has been suggested as a justification for intensive studies of these objects that their “flow-ridged surfaces” were impressed upon them for the most part as they traversed the stratosphere, and their shapes might therefore have a bearing upon the problems of stratosphere aeroplane flight. The external shapes and structures of the primary portions of australites are quite different from those of the secondary portions. The primary parts are more stable—perhaps because they cooled less quickly. ‘The surfaces that helong to the primary forms are more lasting than the secondary surfaces, which tend to flake away. Fig. 2 has been drawn to make this conception more clear. It is based on an actual section of a flanged button (E. J. Dunn, Department of Mines, Vic- toria, Bull. 27, pl. x). The suggested outline of the original primary form is shown by the broken line; the shape approximated in this case very closely to a sphere. In its forward spinning motion through the atmosphere, more than 133 half of this sphere fused and flowed backwards, a portion of this material remain- ing adhering to the margin of the final form as a flange. The rear surface, characteristically pitted and flow-lined, is primary surface; the forward surface, with its flow-ridges, together with the whole of the flange, is secondary. So far as internal structures are concerned the horizontally-shaded portion was formed by consolidation from the primary melting, and the dotted portions by consolida- tion from the secondary melting. Much work is waiting to be done in the investigation of these structures by means of thin sections; so far the work of E. J. Dunn in this connection remains unequalled. The melting of the glass blebs woul, under this hypothesis, be produced by the heat of combustion of the parent light-metal meteorite, and the various primary blebs (spheres, dumbbells, teardrops, etc.) would be liquid. In this physical state they would at once set out upon their rapid earthward journey, during which the secondary forms were acquired. The amount of additional (frictional) heat necessary to cause the front portions to flow would not be great. External and internal flow phenomena support this hypothesis, and further bear witness that in each case the whole of the glassy material had cooled to a solid condition before it reached the earth’s surface. The primary forms, as elsewhere suggested, are those taken by molten blebs propelled through a gaseous medium, as rarely exemplified in Pele’s hair, artificial “glass wool” blebs, and fused silica pellets resulting from meteorite impact; such forms are most commonly and characteristically known from the “smoke bombs” of slaggy material ejected in the smoke of locomotive engines. These primary forms do not occur as australites, or, rather, they do so with the considerable alteration that is impressed upon them by a secondary fusion and flowage, with consequent reduction of bulk and alteration of shape, caused by the friction of the atmosphere during their final flight. The formation of the primary forms might have been an almost instantaneous phencmenon, occurring at the moment they came into existence as discrete blebs of glass, Nor is it likely that the development of the secondary forms occupied more than a few moments of time—sufficient for the melting, flowing, and solidifi- cation of the material between the time of origin of the primary forms and the arrival of the australites upon the earth’s surface. The outstanding fact that arises from a consideration of the forms of australites is their conformity to a small number of types, all of which can be referred to the forms that would develop from molten glass moving rapidly through a gas.“) This uniformity of types is evidence of a unity of conditions at the period of the formation of the australites, and supports the hypothesis that all the australites were formed at one time. IV—DISTRIBUTION. (a) GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. With a cheerfulness and confidence that have not been justified by the results, the writer set out to collect the information necessary to compile a map of the distribution of known australites throughout Australia. Two previous attempts have been made to map the distribution of australites: (a) that by E. J. Dunn (Department of Mines, Victoria, Bull. 27, 1912) shows 70 locality spots, and (b) that by C. G. Thorp (Journal of Natural History and Science Society, W.A., 1914) shows 85 locality spois. On Dunn’s map thére was not one record between Port Augusta and Kalgoorlie, Questionaires were sent to heads of departments of geology in Australian universities, to Government geologists, and to museum directors. These gentle- ) Kerr Grant: “Obsidianites—their Origin from a Physical Standpoint.” Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., vol. xxi, n.s., 1909, Melbourne, p. 447. 134 men courteously supplied the information asked for, so far as it was within their power, provided maps of localities where possible, and went to a great deal of trouble to give a definite census of the labelled material in their care. Still, the difficulties of compiling a satisfactory map have been great, MAP OF AUSTRALIA SHOWING DISTRIBUTION OF AUSTRALITES. : COMPILED 1935. A0— © wo 200 300 440 So0miles. 6.2 SC ppp | il ° \ 200 400 pil soo hilainetres. | us? 110° 195° 130° 136° Fig. 3. Map of Australia, showing the “strewn-field” of the australites. In the first place, australites are very much alike wherever they may have been found, and in many collections (most of the private ones and some of the official ones) specimens have been placed together in one or more boxes, with a general label; in some cases separate lots were labelled “Central Australia” or “Kalgoorlie,” etc. Few series have been completely catalogued, numbered, and connected with definite localities. In the second place, the distribution as suggested by recorded specimens is not necessarily the distribution as originally determined by the cosmic or other occurrence that brought about that distribution. Not that any very large pro- portion has been transported by blacks or by natural forces from their original localities, but that the numbers found depends upon the places that have been searched, and upon the methods and ability of the searchers. For instance, a great many were found in the early days in the alluvial gold- mining areas of Victoria and New South Wales, and in the alluvial tin-mining 135 areas of Tasmania. Later, the gold-seekers on the south-western part of the Westralian plateau collected large numbers. Until the transcontinental telegraph line and the transcontinental railway line had been put down across the Nullarbor Plains, no australites were recorded therefrom. Since then it has proved to be one of the richest collecting areas. In the arid plains of Central, Southern and Western Australia, a considerable amount of collecting was carried out by the aborigines, because they thus obtained small rewards from interested white men. In mountainous and grassy localities fewer have been found than on open plains and claypans. Where the keen eyes of prospectors and miners have been at work, and where station-owners and others have encouraged the blacks to collect australites, the numbers found have been greater than elsewhere. Despite these difficulties, it has been possible to construct a map that con- stitutes an advance upon previous knowledge. One fact that has been further confirmed is the way in which these objects are confined to the southern and western portions of Australia. More particularly, it may be said that the northern boundary is approximately a line joining Kyogle, New South Wales, with Derby, Western Australia. (b) MarcinaL OccURRENCES. Few, indeed, approach the boundary line shown in fig. 3. Scattered pieces have been found in northern New South Wales, three just within the south-western Queensland border, with a doubtful record a little farther north along the Diamentina. There are other dubious Queensland records. Dr, Simpson records four along the Fitzroy River, Western Australia, and there are two anomalous and puzzling ones farther north in the Ord River basin. One of these two is in the Western Australian Museum collection, and is labelled “Turkey Creek”; but Dr. Glauert considers that this specimen is from another creek of the same name farther south towards Kalgoorlie. The other Ord River specimen, which is very far out from the general australite streufelde (strewn-field), is more difficult to explain. It was collected by Mr. G. F. Dodwell, B.A., in 1921, when he was fixing the 129th meridian as a boundary line; he found the australite on a path near a house on Argyle Downs Station, and he has the latitude and longitude of his find. It is a flat oval of a normal type, somewhat abraded, without fange. He believes it was im situ, but under the circumstances the possibility of transport by whites or blacks must be considered. The australites are found from east to west across Australia, and down to the southern bottndaries, even to the south of Tasmania. The most southerly australite recorded is from Cox’s Bight, on the south coast of Tasmania; they are found on Kangaroo Island and upon the islands of Bass Strait, (c) COMPILATION OF THE Map. The map presented with this paper (fig. 3) includes a greatly increased number of spots, and these are necessarily of two types of significance. A single isolated spot may be taken to indicate a definite record of a single specimen; a cluster of spots indicates areas from which such a large number of definite records have been made that it has not been possible to indicate each specimen by a separate spot. The collections represented in the information given in this map comprise more than ten thousand specimens, The map suggests what many authorities believe to be the case, namely, that while australites occur over the whole of the area, they were much more abundant within certain areas, such as the Kalgoorlie district, Israelite Bay, the Nullarbor Plains, Charlotte Waters, Lake Eyre district, the Grampians, the “Western District” of Victoria, and certain parts of eastern New South Wales. The total area of the australite strewn-field is approximately two million square miles. 136 Some portions of the area, as already suggested, present special facilities for easy collecting, while others were worked over by the alert eyes of prospectors or aborigines, It is quite likely that if the vast desert area north of the Nullarbor Plains were worked over in the same way that the Plains have been, similar numbers of australites might be found. The areas where few or no australites have been found in Australia may be summed up thus :-— (a) Places north of a line joining Kyogle to Derby. (b} The Desert Basin of north-west Western Australia, unfrequented. (c) The great plateau of Western, Central, and South Australia, where it has not been frequented by white men, (d) The Mallee areas of Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, and New South Wales; these are relatively small, but they are well worked over by farmers and graziers, and it is peculiar that so few specimens have been discovered. fe) The wide grass plains of the central Murray-Darling Basin. (f) Mountain areas of high rainfall, rugged topography and limited alluvial mining, (d) ConcLustons CONCERNING DistrtIRuTION. In concluding the section on distribution, emphasis must be placed on the fact that the whole of the australites, with their unity of composition and unity of form-types, have fallen within one limited area of the earth’s surface, namely, upon Southern and South-western Australia and Tasmania. All other tektites differ from the australites (notably or subtly, as the case may be, but always definitely) in composition, form, and distribution. Nothing resembling australites in form or composition has been found outside Australia. Here we have a third argument in favour of the unity of origin of australites, both in time and space. That is to say, there must have been one vast shower of australites, and one only. For if not, then these particular glass bodies may be still occasionally reaching the earth, and we may enquire how it is to be explained that they do not fall, or have not fallen, anywhere except in Southern Australia. V—MODE OF ORIGIN, (a) GENERAL ACCOUNT. It is just about 100 years since Major Thomas Mitchell, at Sydney, presented to Charles Darwin an object that had been found on the wide alluvial plains of the Darling River, and which had greatly aroused his curiosity. Darwin was equally fascinated by the strange object, and he figured and described it in his journal. With a mind largely engrossed by problems of volcanic phenomena, and recognising that the material of the object was obsidian-like, Darwin suggested, with some doubt, a volcanic origin, assuming that the “button” (an oval, with beautifully marked flange, pits, and flow ridges) represented one-half of a burst volcanic bomb that had changed its direction of movement after bursting. There may be some significance in the fact that Darwin assumed two distinct phases in the history of the australite, for the story revealed by the forms of these objects is one which suggests that there are indeed two distinct and separate chapters. During the intervening century there have been published some 8&6 papers having reference to australites. These have been put forward mainly in Europe and Australia, the former referring to australites as part of the general tektite problem, and the latter mostly to australites alone. There is some likelihood that the enquiry into the origin of tektites may be considerably assisted by a study of australites, since the latter are very abundant and widely distributed; they are 137 for the most part fresh in outline, and definite and uniform in form and structure. Professor F. E. Suess, of Vienna, shares with Professors A. Lacroix and H. Michel the honour of being the leading authorities upon tektites. In a recent letter (4/11/34) concerning the classification of the Shaw collection of australites, Professor Suess expressed his interest in seeing “that the great number of pieces show themselves restricted to a rather small number of well-defined types of shapes, thus very clearly expressing their common origin by one definite process, different from that which has created the other kinds of tektites.” (b) A Variety or THEORIES, We shall deal bricfly with some of the theories of origin of australites (and tektites generally) that have been put forward in print, looking at the matter from an Australian viewpoint. The first theorist on australites was not Charles Darwin; for the aborigines of the interior of Australia (Dieri and adjacent tribes) knew them by the names ooga-and muramurd, with accompanying legends concerning these “staring eyes” and “emu’s eyes.” This might be taken as constituling stone-age man’s theory of their origin, These objects would appear to have been known to the aborigines throughout Australia south of the line shown on fig. 3, and to have been treasured as objects of mystery and magic, particularly for their use in the arts of healing and of rain-making.‘”) Then came Darwin’s theory of the volcanic bomb. Clarke (Sydney, 1855) said they looked as if they had been “cast in a mould.” Walcott (Melbourne, 1898) records suggestions that they were “pressed by a saucer-shaped mould.” The name “emu stones” preserves a belief that they were dark-coloured pebbles that had becn smoothed in the gizzards of emus; there was a European suggestion that moldavites were relics of a prehistoric glass factory. Twelvetrees (Hobart, 1897) and Verbeek suggested they were volcanic blebs from the mountains of the meon, a definite move towards a rational explanation. Suess (1898) powerfully advocated the theory of cosmic (meteoritic) origin. Ifllebrand (1905) was more conservative; he asserted that tektites were artificial products, formed by man, savage or civilized, either by accident or by design. Dunn (Melbourne, 1912)‘ came forward with his famous “bubble” hypothesis, claiming that the australites originated from terrestrial volcanoes ; this theory, with some variations, was supported by Thorp (Perth, 1913). Various writers have, from time to time, suggested that these bodies were formed by fusion of dust in the earth’s atmosphere by lightning. Spencer (“Nature,” 28/1/33) refers to a theory that tektites were colloidal bodies formed by the action of humic acids on the underlying rock in certain climates. Jensen (Bull. Northern Territory, 1915) suggests the origin of australites as concretions in limestone. Later on Lacroix and Michel put forward theories that tektites were formed in the earth’s atmosphere by the friction and oxidation of meteorites that were composed mainly of the lighter metals. Spencer (London, 1933) suggested that tektites were formed by the fusion of siliceous rocks at the earth’s surface, due to the impact of meteorites. The “great circle theory,” described by David, Summers, and Ampt (Melbourne, 1927) has proved suggestive and stimulating. Dunn’s 1912 paper stimulated workers in Australia, whereupon Summers, Kerr Grant, and others entered the field. Long-continued, detailed, and thorough @) Mr, X. B. Tindale, of the South Ania bration IMusduta, fells me that aborigines of the Wadikali tribe (Yandama Creek, Lake Frome basin) call the australites mindsiunindsil- para, which may be translated: “eyes that look at you like a man staring hard.” (@) Mr. Dunn returned to the controversy this year with evidence concerning the natural occurrence of bubbles in glassy masses. The Geological Magazine, No, 849, Lon- Se 1935. To this Professor Suess has replied in the same journal, June, 1935, p. A 138 petrological work by Summers,“ as well as by Suess, Lacroix, Michel, Skeats, David, Ampt, and others have established the fact that the material of the australites is of one type, related to, but different from, the general body of tektites, and quite distinct in composition from any terrestrial rock known. The unity of composition that has thus been proved, taken in conjunction with the unity of form-types, provides evidence of very high value towards the ultimate solution of the australite problem. The veteran worker, Professor F. E. Suess, in a personal communication previously referred to, which is a resumé of part of his last (1932) paper, writes: “I could imagine that a large meteoric body, consisting of unoxidized, easily combustible metal—as for instance aluminium, calcium, or magnesittm—when entering the atmosphere would take fire, and its casual content of silica would burst into a million molten glass drops, which during the spinning fall to the earth acquired their characteristic forms. The origin of the hollow spheres among the australites could be easily conceived by such a process. I think that the other kinds of tektites originated in the same way, but in these cases the glass must have been more viscous, and has kept the forms of more compact, slaggy lumps and shreds which, when on the ground, have fallen to more or less angular pieces.” (c) Tum Tueory oF CONTINUING FALLs. While few if any Continental authorities entertain any doubt whatever of the unity of origin of australites in time and place, and while some of them are indeed considering the possibility that the whole of the eastern tektite groups fell in one great shower, there are many in Australia who retain a belief that the australites did not fall all at once, and that they may still be falling, perhaps one at atime. For instance :— (a2) Specimen 1,068 of the British Museum collection, a button from East Coolgardie goldfield, is indexed: “supposed to have been seen to fall 10/5/19.” (b) One specimen in the writer’s collection, a very perfect button, found near Watukaringa, South Australia, was said by its finder to have “presented every evidence that it had fallen recently.” (c) Vhe late Dr. C. G. Thorp, whase writings and collections are well known, recorded his opinion that “in all probability they are falling today as they have fallen from time to time through all these many years.” (d) In an account in the “Australian Musetrm Magazine,” 16/7/34, T. Hodge-Smith, of the Australian Museum, Sydney, writes: “If only a competent observer could verify the statement that they are still falling today, the mystery would be solved.” This writer’s difficulty appears to he that so many forms are greatly worn and abraded, while others appear perfectly fresh and clear-cut in outline. (e) At the meeting of the Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science, held in Melbourne in January, 1935, two or three speakers expressed their belief in the possibility that australites were still falling. (f) On October 9, 1934, a paper was read by Dr, E. S. Simpson, of Perth, on “An Australite observed to fall in Western Australia” (Journal Roy. Soc. W.A., vol. xxi, pp. 37-38). The fall in question is stated to have taken place near Lake Grace, Western Australia (about 33° S., 118° E.), which is within, or adjacent to, one of the well-known australite localities. ‘The account has been compiled with much care and caution, but is not convincing. ©) H, S. Summers: “On the Composition and Origin of Australites,” AAAS. xiv, Melbourne, 1913; also Proc, Roy. Soc. Vic., vol. xxi, ns., 1908. 139 By the courtesy of Dr. L, J. Spencer, of the British Museum, the writer has been permitted to examine a cast and photographs of the Lake Grace australite. It is a fairly large specimen of the “boat” type (A4a), with suggestions of an equa- torial zone from which a “rim” has flaked off. The most remarkable features are the shallow surface markings, described by Simpson as “vermiform grooves and circular pits.’ These markings are astonishingly like those on some billitonites (cf. fig. 3, pl. Ixi, Merrill, Proc, U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xl, pp. 481-486). Merrill’s description of “elongated, curvilinear, and lunar crater” types of grooves on the weathered faces of obsidian seems to apply to the Lake Grace specimen in a striking way. The writer suggests that these definite grooves and flutings on tektite surfaces may occur where specimens have been buried in moist soil for long periods, having thus been subjected to a type of corrosion not suffered by those exposed on the surface or buried under dry sands or dusts. The whole appearance of the Lake Grace australite, with its flakings, abrasion and apparent ‘corrosion, suggests that it has been upon the earth’s surface for a very long time —that it is by no means a freshly-formed glass meteorite. One may respectfully suggest that this belief in continuous falls, which has but one small item of evidence in its favour, and so comprehensive a volume of evidence against it, may be in some cases an example of “the wish that is the father of the thought.” Most of those who favour the belief that australites are still falling are supporters of the theory of their cosmic origin. It has been ‘suggested that the only possible positive evidence of a meteoritic origin would be ‘an observed fall. The evidence adduced in favour of falls at different times is that many forms ‘are much abraded and worn, while others are bright and fresh of outline. But this is perhaps a matter than can be accounted for according to the history of each specimen. Some have been exposed to sand blast or to stream erosion; some have been protected from attack under a cover of water-borne or wind-blown ‘material; others have had a varied history of alternate protection and exposure. This will account for all the observed differences of external abrasion and ‘corrosion, evén in specimens from the same general locality. The Shaw collection is notable for the fresh, jet-black appearance of the specimens and for their well-preserved surface sculpture; only a small proportion exhibit abrasion or corrosion. So far as known, none of the supporters of the theory of continuing fall would carry their idea far back into geological time. They must admit a starting- point, and one that is relatively late. For although these australites are very ‘durable and resistant bodies, of unmistakeable shape, yet none have been found in any formation except upon the surface or in aeolian and alluvial drifts. The preceding sections of this paper have included evidence of the unique character of australites in three ways :— (i) Their chemical composition, quite distinct from any terrestrial rocks, and from other tektite series. (i) Their small series of curious form-types, unlike any other known petrological objects, even those of other tektite series. (wt) Their definite restriction to Australia, and to that part of Australia south of a particular line. These three series of established facts are incompatible with the theory of continuous fall, If we could imagine these remarkable bodies as still being ‘prepared in the cosmic laboratories (or formed in the earth’s atmosphere), what ‘chance would there be that they should invariably fall upon one limited area of this swaying, spinning, speeding earth? The only satisfactory explanation of the limited distribution of these unique bodies appears to be that they all fell in one grand meteoritic shower. 140 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. The author is deeply indebted for information given and assistance rendered by the authorities controlling the various museuts, etc., concerned, more par- ticularly to the Curator of the National Museum, Melbourne (Mr. D. J. Mahony), the Curator of the Melbourne University Geological Museum (Mr. F. A. Single- ton), and the Assistant Curator of the Launceston Museum (Mr. E. O. G, Scott). VI—NOTE BY PROFESSOR F. E. SUESS. Since the completion of the foregoing paper the following letter has been received from Professor Franz Ed. Suess, of the University of Vienna, In view of the difficulties of circulation of original Continental papers in Australia, Pro- fessor Suess was asked for permission to include here this brief account of Con- tinental opinion as he interprets and elaborates it, and such permission was kindly granted :— “The molten glass has acquired the original spherical form at the moment of the blasting of the silica content of an inflamed light-metal meteorite, Friction in flight has molten the surface sheet in the front and pushed it backwards to form the rim, as it has been repeatedly described. As the velocity very likely surpassed that of sound in the air, a vacuum and consequently an exceeding cold must have been produced at the back side. According to my opinion there is no doubt that all the australites have been produced by one single incident. As you remark, the evidence is given by the uniformity of their physical and chemical constitution and by their geographical distribution. If the theory is correct that tektites are derived from the silica content of burned light-metal meteorites, it is easily intelligible that they can only occur in very large quantities. It is generally assumed that the material of which shooting stars consist is combustible metal, as, for instance, magnesium, natrium. If they contain some silica, the quantity will be too small to become perceptible. It would evaporate or be blasted to dust. It seems improbable that a single and sporadic tektite would originate at all. Only the silica content of an enormously large body of the named kind could be kept sufficiently well together to form compact, individual drops.” VII—SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION. A census has been made of the australites in both public and private collec- tions, so far as contact could be effected with collectors. An estimate has been prepared of the total number of australites that fell, and this figure is placed at between one and ten millions, Further consideration is given to the form-types of australites, particularly to the two phases of formation. A map of distribution has been drawn, based on the information available in British and Australian Museums; this emphasises the limited nature of the distribution and its apparent irregular character. A brief account is given of the various theories of origin of tektites including australites, that have been advanced during the past 100 years. A note is included from Professor F. E. Suess. The question of time of fall is discussed; the available evidence suggests that it was in a period geologically recent but historically remote—perhaps carly post-Pleistocene. From the evidence of their unity of (@) chemical composition, (b) physical form, and (c) geographical distribution, it is concluded that australites arose as a unique shower of glass meteorites (tektites). Whenever or however they came, the evidence suggests that they came but once only, and in Southern Australia only—not before, nor since, nor elsewhere. THE PERTATATAKA SERIES IN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA. WITH NOTES ON THE AMADEUS SUNKLAND. BY CHARLES CHEWINGS, PH.D., F.G.S. Summary The purpose of the present paper is to show the former extensions of the Pertatataka (newer Proterozoic) series in Central Australia. Residual portions of this series are scattered over a large portion of the interior, and more errors appear to have been made by geologists in their attempts to assign these residues to their proper place and age than with any others. They have variously been referred to Tertiary, Mesozoic, Permo-Carboniferous, Devonian, Ordovician and Cambrian. The reasons for such diversified opinions lie principally in the fact that, notwithstanding its great age the beds, being so widespread, of necessity present very diversified appearances. Over immense areas the beds either gently undulate or lie nearly horizontal, and show only slight faulting, fracturing, or disturbance. For such reasons they present a young appearance. 141 THE PERTATATAKA SERIES IN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA, WITH NOTES ON THE AMADEUS SUNKLAND. By CHArLes CHEwINGs, Pu.D., F.G.S. [Read May 9, 1935.] CONTENTS: Page I Intropuction, witH REFERENCE TABLe or ForMATIONS - A 14{ II Foreworp ann EXPLANATION OF TERMS - - - - ~ 144 Tl] Tue Founperinc or THE SUNKLAND- - - - ~ ~ 147 IV Ace or tHE Mount PALMER LINE of RESIDUES - - - = 151 V Former EXTENSIONS oF THE ForMATIONS— (a) The Pertaknurra Residues - - - - - 154 (b) The Pertatataka Residues - - - - - 157 (c) The Pertaoorta Residues - - - - - - 161 (d) The Larapinta Residues - - - - - - 162 VI Maps anv SEcTIons— (a) Geological Map, Fig. 1 - opp. p. 14? (b) Section from Mount Olga to Murchison Range, Fig. 2 ie 1 (c) Sketch Sections, Fig. 3 - - = > (d) Geological Sketch Map, Fig. 4 - - - - - 155 VII List or Works to wHIcH REFERENCE IS MADE - - - ~ I—INTRODUCTION. The purpose of the present paper is to show the former extensions of the Pertatataka (newer Proterozoic) series in Central Australia. Residual portions of this series are scattered over a large portion of the interior, and more errors appear to have been made by geologists in their attempts to assign these residues to their proper place and age than with any others. They have variously been referred to Tertiary, Mesozoic, Permo-Carboniferous, Devonian, Ordovician and Cambrian. The reasons for such diversified opinions lie principally in the fact that, notwith- standing its great age the beds, being so widespread, of necessity present very diversified appearances. Over immense areas the beds either gently undulate or lie nearly horizontal, and show only slight faulting, fracturing, or disturbance. For such reasons they present a young appearance. The Pertatataka series is only known to rest upon the crystalline meta- morphic rocks or the Pertaknurra sediments, and no wmarks of dynamic or pneumatolytic metamorphism have been noted, or fossils found, in the beds. In North Australia and Western Australia contemporaneous basic volcanic rocks help to build up the formation, but the granitic dykes, or the quartz recfs, of the gold-bearing rocks do not traverse the beds. The problem is to formulate some reliable tests, other than Palaeontological —for of fossils there are none—to be able to distinguish one series from another in the residues that occur sporadically over Central Australia. The residues assume very different forms. They occur sometimes in the form of continuous sheets, as for example the Winnecke Creek Tableland; at others as isolated hills or groups or lines of hills, like Central Mount Stuart, Foster Range, Mount Palmer, Kintore Range, or Mount Barkly; or again as low-lying, almost unnotice- able beds of shale, sandstone or conglomerate, like that at Kelly Well, Halcombs Creek, ete. The tests took into account matters like the rigidity of the shields, and how deep the Pertaknurra peneplanation had gone, because the Pertatataka beds are only found on that plane, and the schists have been eroded much deeper since 142 TasBLe No. 1 REFERENCE TABLE OF FORMATIONS IN CENTRAL AUSTR (Compiled from the writings of H. Y. L. Brown, Prof, R. Tate, J. A. Watt, Dr. L. K. Series ARLTUNGA .... DESERT SANDSTONE ROLLING DOWNS FINKE RIVER PERTNJARA .... (= Many stones) Evident unconformity LARAPINTA .... (A corruption of Lerrapeenta = Spring Creek) PERTAOORTA (= Blue Limestone) PERTATATAKA .... | (= Red stone) Great unconformity | PERTAKNURRA .... (= Big stone or range) Great unconformity ARUNTA or Aranda (Name of tribe) Age, or supposed Age Equivalent terms in W.é MESOZOIC? UPPER CRETACEOUS LOWER CRETACEOUS .... (Marine shales) (Same in Q. and S.A.) (Same in Q. and S.A.) JURASSIC?, PERMO-CARB? | .... POST-ORDOVICIAN _.. .... (it antedates the folding of the sunkland) ORDOVICIAN CAMBRIAN NEWER-PROTEROZOIC .... OLDER-PROTEROZOIC .... AZOIC-ARCHAEAN Lyons?, Wallarobba? glomerates of W.A N.S.W., respectively, been suggested. It pr followed close on the throw of the sunkland Unrecognised in W.A. (Toko Ranges in Q. Chandler and Johns i are probably Ordovi Redlichia Beds in Kin (Duchess-Glenormisto Q.; Archaeocyathinae stones, S.A.) Nullagine Series, Elvire (In 8. Aust. A Series and Broken region = Poolamacca | Mosquito Series Yilgarn 143 Taste No. 1 WING RECENT DIVISIONS AND DOMINANT CHARACTERISTICS W. Howchin, Sir Edgeworth David, Sir Douglas Mawson and Dr. c. T. Madigan) Notable Physical Features ind Characteristics uee-shaped, flat-topped isolated hills and mesa-like residues of comparatively young formations are ound in the valleys of older formations on the eastern slope of the Arunta Shield and in the sunkland. rs as capping on Rolling Downs hills; has not been recognised many miles north of Mt. Daniel. its northern limit on the northern slope of the Mt. Daniel Range. Dense blue shale, with calcareous ossiliferous thin beds, nearly horizontal, and marine. Near the base is a glaucous sandstone band. ids from Mt. Daniel’ to [dracowra along the Finke, and to Percy Hills along the Hugh. Upper ortion conglomeratic-sandstones, often false-bedded; middle portion fluvio-glacial beds; lower portion Iternating thin bands of pink and white shales with pebbly-grit base. Between Horseshoe Bend nd Idracowra the shale beds gently undulate, elsewhere horizontal. seen at Indemba Well, then at 8 miles south of Templebar Well, from where it is probaly continuous o the Marena Escarpment. Consists of alternating beds of sandstone. and conglomerate, 9,000 feet hick. With the exception of being present on both sides of the Ooraminna Range no residues have cen observed outside of the Missionary and Emily Plains’ syncline. na Red Sandstone and quartzite beds, 400 to 900 feet thick, form the upper portion of the Larapinta eries. These rest upon na Valley shales and mudstone, 400 to 700 feet thick, with calcareous fossiliferous bands at the base vhere the quartzite starts. way Quartzite and sandstone, over 1,000 feet thick. These beds weather into serrated forms thet uggest the name. way Valley beds are fossiliferous at the top, immediately under the quartzite, in thin calcareous bands, low which are 400 feet of shale and slate. 4 Quartzite, the basal beds, at Ellery’s Creek over 3,000 feet thick, with a narrow flagstone band in ne place. -ote.—Larapinta beds are the special feature of the sunkland, and owe their preservation to having been faulted down “en masse.” Subsequently the beds were folded, and erosion has exposed many fossil localities, | limestone, with Cryptozoa? fossils, in the upper beds, resting on slates, shales, thin limestones and uartzite-grit, the 3,000 or so feet of strata terminates with the No. 3 Quartzite, a dark-red sandstone nd quartzite band over 500 feet thick. In the Loves Creek locality the limestone beds are 3,500 feet nick, and contain Archaeocyathus and Salterella fossils. iguishing features of the Pertatataka Series are the liver-coloured slates, shales and sandstones that orm the basal beds over such immense areas—chiefly in the north—and the conglomerate that occurs ither alone or in conjunction with the above—chiefly in the south. There are 3,000 fcet of strata, ne basal 1,000 feet is the No. 2 Quartzite. Quarizite is the base of the Pertaknurra Series. It forms most of the highest ridges in Central ustralia, The series was involved in the Pertaknurra Revolution, and in some localities was partially bsorbed by the Arunta Complex. Disturbance, and the distinguishing feature of carrying quartz eefs, characterise this series. ? \runta Complex is composed of ortho and para-gneisses, a great variety of schists, and metamorphic lates, also garnetiferous and quartz schists, granite, pegmatite, and basic dykes. The axes of the olds run east-west and north-west. The Arunta and the Pertaknurra are the only reef-carrying ormations, and igneous intrusions are confined to them also, with the exception of the contemporane- us basaltic irruptions into the Pertatataka beds at Banka Banka, Renner Springs, Victoria River, \ntrim Plateau, etc. 144 then. One of the crucial tests was the metamorphosed and disturbed state the Pertaknurra series was in at the close of the Pertaknurra revolution. Being the only quartz reef-bearing series the Pertaknurra presents strong contrast to all younger beds, hence the name “Newer Series” for the three that succeed it. With the exception of their counterparts in the sunkland the “newer series,” owing to the extreme rigidity of the shields since the Pertaknurra peneplanation, appear to have remained nearly horizontal or gently inclined, and have undergone no metamorphism since their deposition. It is remarkable how free from orogenic disturbances of any magnitude the great shield areas have been since the dawn of life upon the earth. The one portion of the interior that did not remain rigid was the Amadeus Sunkland. ‘That portion of the interior receives attention below. The conception of a sunkland in lieu of a down-warped valley between the Arunta and the Pitjentara shields originated while delineating on the. map the areas occupied by the different formations. They showed that the Larapinta series was bordered by more or less straight lines in localities far removed from the great fault that runs east-west a little south of Alice Springs. The great disparity in age of the opposing formations on either side of the postulated faults, in the writer’s opinion, justifies the definition, as also does the abysmal drop, and the more intense folding it underwent. The detail work done by Mawson and Madigan in first partitioning the writer’s Cambrian into Cambrian and Proterozoic, and by Madigan later into Cambrian, Newer-Proterozoic, and Older Proterozoic, has been most helpful in the preparation of this paper. Madigan’s triple dissection is applicable, as what follows will show, all over Central Australia. Furthermore, it is evident that similar geological conditions obtained over much of Western Australia during the same periods, The nomenclature proposed by Mawson and Madigan for the different series of sediments, etc., and others now suggested for significant occurrences that are listed in this paper, may prove distracting at first, but the ready-refcrence table (Table No. I,) may be found helpful. The necessity for severe compression throughout this paper, it is hoped, may mot have caused lack of lucidity. II—FOREWORD AND EXPLANATION OF TERMS. The following terms are grouped together at this place for reference. What they signify is briefly stated, but it will become more apparent if preceded by a few remarks on the Palaeography of the region with which this paper deals, viz.: At the earliest decipherable period in Central Australian geology the Arunta and the Pitjentara shields were one shield. That “greater” shicld consisted of normal schists, gneisses, metamorphic slates, conglomerates, quartzite, etc. These com- ponents had apparently been eroded to a fairly flat surface. This peneplaned surface sank, slowly at first, as indicated by the basal beds of the next-ensuing sediments, the Pertaknurra series, the basal beds of which are largely composed of grit and conglomerate. According to Tindale (31, p. 215), near Mount Liebig these conglomerate beds are 1,500 feet thick, and the total thickness of the series at the same place, he estimates, cxceeds 10,000 feet. If one may judge from the very widely distributed residues, the Pertaknurra formation must have covered most, if not the whole, of the area dealt with in this paper. It extended beyond it in certain directions. The Pertaknurra is the oldest sedimentary series we are able to gather a clear conception of, but there is nothing in the Arunta complex rocks that suggests that previous geological conditions differed greatly from those in Pertaknurra time. We see the formation in rags and tatters, so to say, fragments only remain upon the shields that have resisted denudation through at least two peneplanations of 145 immense length. A ridge here and a block there, but always in very close asso- ciation with the foundation rocks, While the formation remained horizontal it appears to have everywhere rested upon crystalline rocks. During its deposition there was volcanic activity in the Murchison Range region, but elsewhere tran- quillity reigned. The Pertaknurra Revolution (aptly so named by Madigan) followed the Pertaknurra sedimentation. It was a time marked by colossal orogenic dis- turbances, and by the in-folding and partial absorption in the schists of the Perta- knurra sediments. The irruption of acid and basic magmas, the former principally granite, was on a gigantic scale. The irruptions appear to have accompanied, or closely followed, the folding. It was a reef-forming time, the only one yet noted in Central Australia, and sediments that carry quartz reefs, gold, wolfram and bismuth are of Pertaknurra age. [The Newer Series sediments do not contain reefs. Madigan confirms this (19, p. 115). Herein lies the crucial test for the Pertaknurra series. | The Pertaknurra Peneplanation took place under quiescent conditions of immense length; it followed on the Pertaknurra revolution, and when it came to an end only a few residues of the Pertaknurra formation remained upon the shield. Whole mountain-chains had been swept away, and great areas of up- turned schists and granites, which had been bared, were reduced to flat surfaces. While it lasted, a mountainous region of great, but unknown, extent had been converted into one of low reliefs and wide plains. Its span may have equalled that of all subsequent time. It can be best seen in localities where Pertatataka residues remain. The Newer Series, as used herein, is an “abbreviation-term,” designed to cover the period of the Pertatataka, the Pertaoorta and the Larapinta sedimenta- tions combined. At the close of the Pertaknurra peneplanation nearly all Central and North-west Australia subsided beneath the ocean and, with possible sub- aerial intervals, remained there under quiescent conditions until the building up of the 12,000 feet or so of the sediments that compose the newer series was complete. (The measurements are Madigan’s.) The elevation of all Central and North-west Australia ensued. The foundering of the sunkland during, or soon after, the elevation preserved that portion of the newer series largely intact but erosion must be held accountable for the removal of all but the basal portion of the newer series, viz., the Pertatataka residues, from the more elevated parts of Central Australia outside the sunkland. The term “Shield,” for the purposes of this paper, includes, among others the writer has seen, areas like that near and east and west of Ryan’s Well, and that near and east and west of Winnecke Battery, where portions of the Pertaknurra series have become so altered as to virtually belong to the Arunta Complex (vide 6, pp. 73/4). [It now seems clear that we must modify the view, wiz., that the Arunta Complex, or Shield, rocks are all Archaean. During the Pertaknurra revolution absorption of the Pertaknurra series occurred at several places on an extensive scale on the original shield, more especially where the dips suggest that the overlying sediments were “nipped” in synclinal folds, or as down-faulted blocks, in the schists adjacent to outcrops of coarse-grained, uncrushed granite. The twin effects of heat and regional pressure have produced a multifarious variety of schists, evidently from these sediments. The evenness in width of the layers, and beds, over long distances, sometimes several miles, notwithstanding their highly metamorphosed state, stamps them as having originated from sediments. Madigan has suggested that the Almandine garnet-bearing schists of the Harts Ranges may have resulted from the absorption of Pertaknurra limestone (20, p. 77).] 146 The Pitjentara Shield represents the southern portion of the former “ereater shield’”—mentioned early in the foreword to this paper—that was severed from the northern or Arunta shield portion when the Amadeus Sunkland foundered. It is so designated (following the Arunta plan) to perpetuate the name of one of the native tribes that own the area, which is of the order of 30,000 square miles. Starting about 100 miles west of Charlotte Waters, it runs west- north-west for 350 miles, with an average width of 100 miles. In section the area is a very flat dome, the base of which stands about 1,400 feet above sea level, The most elevated portion runs through the Musgrave Ranges to a point a little south of Sladen Water, in the Rawlinson Ranges. W. R. Murray’s heights show that this “highest portion” averages 2,000 feet. Hills and ranges, usually 300 to 800 feet high, rise abruptly from this peneplaned dome, but in exceptional cases, like the Musgrave Ranges, ridges rise 2,000 fect, and peaks 3,000 feet. The Musgrave, Mann and Tomkinson Ranges are almost wholly composed of crystalline rocks, The Petermann and Rawlinson Ranges are the same, but are capped by, or are interfolded with sediments of Pertaknurra age. Others, like the Mount Olga line of residues, or the Townsend Range, belong to ancient sedi- ments, the beds of which lie nearly horizontal, and rest upon either the crystalline rocks or sediments of Pertaknurra age, or both. Or an ancient sedimentary series may succeed a still older one that rests on the crystalline complex, as at Mount Chandler, at the head of Indulkana Creek, mentioned by Jack (15, pp. 20 and 23). The Pitjentara shield possesses many features in common with the Arunta shield; the crystalline complex and the residues of sedimentary formations upon it are very similar—mineralogically and structurally—in both cases. (Vide Farquharson’s resumé, 25, p. 123, et seq.) The Pertnjara Folding—This folding appears to be, for the most part, con- fined to the sunkland, and to have resulted after the downthrow, and after the deposition of the Pertnjara series, within the sunkland area. This indicates a lengthy time between the. downthrow and the folding. The downthrow happened in post-Ordovician time, possibly at its close, during the great uplift that followed the deposition of the newer series. The Pertnjara conglomerate and sandstone beds, the newer series, and, in places, some of the Pertaknurra beds, like those mentioned by Madigan at Ross River, were all involved. The Finke series was not involved. The Pertnjara was the youngest series involved, hence the name. The minor disturbances in the Pertatataka beds on the shields possibly represents the small effects felt on the rigid shields. The Post-Ordovician Peneplanation—The time covers two cycles of erosion, both of great length, with an uplift between them. The first cycle ranges from the great uplift that followed the deposition of the newer series tintil the whole of Central Australia was planed down to a nearly common level, represented by the even flat tops of the majority of the ranges that are found, both in the sunk- land and on the shields—for by that time the great inequalities of level caused by the downthrow had been adjusted by the planing off of the shields’-margins. The second cycle starts from the minor (?) uplift, as suggested by Dr. Ward, when the planed-off surface, represented by the tops of the hills, began to be dissected by streams, and continued, with possibly two breaks, to the present time (34, pp. 82-84). The Finke series sedimentation happened after the plateau, left by the first cycle, had been dissected to near the present base-level, This also was pointed out by Ward (op. cit., p. 80), The cretaceous invasion followed. These sedi- ments represent a hiatus in the process of erosion, but the maximum height to which these beds originally ascended the slopes has still to be determined. Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., ~ © yp = + + cia t sf 4 + + n + 3s «183° + + @ hs 7 oe + + .Y/ oe a . + + + + Me ty MH MG wie PS + ° + + ® g / = * Mt. Chapple 274 27 Staton = Beaty Pye ad 3 rhea AS pecites” pe ene, + Segesecsee Siac + Haasts Blutf(Gosse’s) i. . Pe ee ae i ~ oh ae “SSIES ESS 606 oie “AS 5 + tt ccaeucalai careey- ae uf + 3X ia - +/ + + “SOLS S Coe SF ge ret a Stan oye Sede ee +o + + ee, ae + 2525 Xo ; ° = . + = iy a) P a + aa r * Wy i é, ™ -. gees is * C D 2% mnee + yo o+ a «i = se mbs + mr ; $\ Sy tog + + ky it » + Halcd G Sho + + yack + + Ag t a . wy \ Te AG HT SIS CS x02 8 + « Mt.Udor(Gosse’s) g Mt. Reena mH My. Pa WH EAP SEF aa) + + a 4 eg xX ton. F Noe “p BWV nF il) Fs SINS cal ; + N F: = eh e . \yaor rs a re oy AZ A hgh: ‘Sy Via: ‘Si + Mt.sot AY en + + W , Sandstone Ridgeases"™ of ; oo Q Ei A D Daverfiie + vader wes = ‘ + " + ctl 7 BIN, Spe NGO Sips Sandstone Ridgee™ Ly des eat O° ins eine en + oe ms ae ees are ; ‘ Ng - Sof I2S* f5 . Mt. Winker The Deering aul Deering Ck, sa : LLl4 STS nes os LEY, AR UE pS Nel Quattzites> ° Us ke - sR: SRY 185° ST a 27 TNS ee a. 7 as’ yh - E Rsv aS , WY =, ‘ “4 SLieSM, Sy 3 homie S/H mrsoitary "775 SRN ASR, ONL st a4 reset . SE NBUSV SSSR 4 L850 MOS OAL Stairway Ridge SR eee wb Yj se eho OO Marena Ridge Is WK SRN SOY LIL 7 SR nae et oe “pty came ZASR rs C7 “J ey, se ae ith a} Wgsrd Z tae LG 93 oan * v= x . Edit “7 mv Stop SR en fete “nb, Gien va Js, Ay y L wT _» yy tite A WY; 1g A 4; A “NO. _ - % Oe, G Wy y i EO a oe gi xe Y Y/Y oN © Lutheran Mission Stn. ° 4g, My 2a x a, i, BAT ty Yj YY : Z-Nshag ie Le koe Yt fs auft oF My So MIST lidline AMY, s me LIZ Ks , ry WS M mi ps 4 y ‘ VEN - haf Ke ZMSR a MS=the Marena sandstone beds, ‘tes aie Spike My 7M Wp ee MV=Marena Valley beds(fossiliferous); Sf HEM, James; RangesS\~ SR =Stairway Ridge beds; CRE “fy : ye 7 us\° SV = Stairway Valley pension hing Ms gor fi wtpates 4 = No.4 Quartzite beds(possibly fossiliferous). Uy es ck- ‘ Re Zalramatta Sin 3_ SR . : ty, 7 V ois 4 : yr at re Cree siz Pertaoorta Series =P.0. as sh ooo Downs Ee tig eee VAZSV WH, o6 me ste : i) 4 OD A yy, yA ? Pertatataka Series =PT. Loy “Mea AR “Stn page Y YUL, . . El WEA, MEN LA VL rah Middleton Ponds S55 Pertaknurra Series =PK. Seal “| Gigs Tipps CLevisa Ra ge OW INIRSIY . Cale -— miles. ? LYS SA LAT WG NN y . Arunta complex or Shield. o 8 aA: on PA as Ta UMYE hh thusiigg jt ial SS | Fig. 1. Geological Sketch Map of the Western MacDonnell and James Ranges, to show (1) how the formations mapped by Dr. Madigan between Alice Springs and The Finke River carry on farther west and south- west, and (2) how the age of the Mount Palmer line of residues was established. The two fault-lines define a portion of the northern boundary of the sunkland, and the southern margin of the Arunta Shield, the rift being complete in both places; but along that portion where the two ends do not meet the throw-line is indicated by the No. 4 Quartzite (of Mount Tate) and the Pertatataka beds (of the Mount Palmer line and Halcombs Creek) bending over it from the higher platform of the shield to the sunken beds. The Pertaoorta beds doubtless do likewise, as shown. The writer has seen the ridges in the distance. The basal portion of the Pertatataka series, the No. 2 Quartzite, being highly conglomeratic, is easily traceable from the sunkland to Mount Palmer, of which mountain conglomerate forms the base. 147 The present drainage systems may have originated at different times. Streams, like Ellerys Creek, that flow south and through gaps in the Chewings and Heavi- tree Ranges appear to date from when the newer series, in horizontal position, and some thousands of feet thick, drained from far away to the north of the Alice anticline. They may represent erosion during the first cycle, but the fact of drain- ing south indicates that the sunkland had already foundered. The courses of the streams from the shield, being across the folded newer series, require that the folds—arches and troughs—had been planed off to a level surface, which suggests the second cycle. The Walker, the Palmer and other streams in the sunkland all started their careers during the second cycle, and so did others flowing north, like the Darwent. These latter appear to have been forced north by the uptilting of the durable quartzite in the Larapinta, and the conglomerate in the Pertnjara series, for the latter forms the N.-S. watershed from the Finke to Stokes Pass, and the former beyond that. [Abreast of Stokes Pass the Pertnjara series is made up of alternate layers of conglomerate and sandstone, aggregating probably a greater thickness than at Ellery’s Creek; 9,000 feet (Madigan), all dipping south like the Larapinta series. It there rests on the Marena sandstone, but the angle of dip appeared to be less. } All the broad valleys, gorges, and plains we see today below the horizon of the level tops of the ranges represent erosion during the second cycle. The uplift that ushered in the second cycle appears to have been general, The nate indicates that the planation is restricted to post-Ordovician time. The first cycle nearly wiped off the newer series from the shields, and the second cut up the remainder, and gouged deep into the schists below the Pertaknurra peneplanation plane on which the Pertatataka series everywhere reposes, II—THE FOUNDERING OF THE SUNKLAND.( The Mount Blatherskite wall-like range and the Heavitree Gap Range near Alice Springs are striking features, and may help to convey some idea of the magnitude of the earth-movements now to be dealt with. They belong, respec- tively, to the Pertatataka series and the Pertaknurra series, Notwithstanding that both ranges dip south and may readily be regarded as of the same formation, it has already been shown that the original disposition of the newer series, of which the Mount Blatherskite beds is the base, was a nearly horizontal sheet that spread itself over the Heavitree Range and the schists. and granite upon which Alice Springs stands. [If the height above sea level of the plane upon which the Mount Palmer beds, and the shale beds at the Harry Creek (?) stand be applied here, then the base-level at that time was about 400 vertical feet above. the present base-level of Alice Springs. ] Seeing that all the other beds required to complete the newer series outcrop in the ranges farther westward, it may be taken for granted that they are also present to the south of Mount Blatherskite Range, although their “combs,” or “basset edges” happen to be covered by the Emily Plain alluvium. To present a realistic picture of the conditions that obtained immediately prior to the foundering of the sunkland is not an easy matter, but the Mount Palmer line of residues and the triangular area of which Stokes Pass, Mount Tate, and Halcombs Creck (the head of) may represent the corner-points, show very clearly that originally a sheet of newer series beds, several thousand feet thick, stretched far away from that locality, apparently in every direction, That is the impression one would get by looking around from the top of Mount Palmer; (1) Throughout this paper Dr, Chewings uses the term “sunkland” with a tectonic rather than a physiographic significance.—Ed, 148 but if one stood on the Mount Musgrave Range he would see the beds plunging south, one after the other, until the whole series were below the base upon which they reposed at Mount Palmer. The Mount Palmer base is on the schists and granite of the Arunta shield, and the corresponding portion of the same base-level has dropped more feet than the total thickness of the newer serics. The block of land that foundered, and which it is proposed to call “The Lake Amadeus Sunkland,” or “sunkland” for short, is distinguishable from the shields by its surface being almost wholly composed of the Larapinta series. With the exception of the sunkland, Mount Tate, and the Mount Ultim Tableland the Larapinta series is unknown in that part of Central Australia with which we are dealing. No doubt the series had wide distribution in former time, but the post- Ordovician peneplanation has apparently stripped both it and the Pertaoorta series from the shields west of the Mount Ultim and Mount Chandler meridian. Had the sunkland not “dropped” the Larapinta beds would probably have been swept off of that area also. The above-mentioned triangular area and Mount Tempe Downs No.l. Glen jHelen Stn. \ Petermann Ck. MtLewis a, Mt Hay LokeAmadeus Geo Gills Range \ | Misston Fait | Ny ‘ CMa ene D Marte cegeeatecce : mee, AN} ; ia if WW AN z Ay —— ac PK on AC (tenting PT on PK on PC—“G | at =| Pere Serrerr rrr terete References: AC=Arunta Complex. PT=Pertatataka. PK= Pertaknurra Scnta-hriles PC=Pitjentara Complex. +++++=PT base level. oD © 2% % 40 50 The sunken portion 1s diagrammatic. = ioc" ; Foster Range ‘soca! Hanns Ridge Woadforde W. Central Mt.Stuart Barrow Creek TS, The Marbles ate 4 Panes Weil | ae Well } SfirlingStny $ Taylor esnting Nts Well | Mcebiste Rae. + 00% Saese NE. ‘es NS ere Xac’Px onge? ———— Ac SECTION FROM MOUNT OLGA TO MURCHISON RANGE, Fig. 2. Section from Mount Olga to Murchison Range; the sunken portion is diagrammatic. Palmer leave small room for doubting that originally the entire newer series stretched far north over the shield, and what is most striking is that the Pertatataka series forms the uppermost 500 feet of the highest mountain in the far western MacDonnell Ranges, viz., Mount Liebig. The mount is composed of gneiss. Gosse states that the height above the base is 2,050 fect (13, p. 5), and Tindale that the capping consists of the Mount Palmer beds (32, pp. 216-217). If the rest of the newer series beds also extended from Mount Tate to Mount Liebig, and beyond, in undiminished strength—and there is nothing visible to the contrary—then we may estimate that the post-Ordovician peneplanation has denuded the Mount Liebig locality of 12,000 to 13,000 feet of rock since it started. The western end of the MacDonnell Ranges is the best locality known to the writer that illustrates the long period from when the Pertaknurra sedimentation 149 commenced to the downthrow of the sunkland. Much that appears to be quite undecipherable elsewhere regarding the conditions that obtained at the down- throw are made apparent there. The great rift appears to follow the southern quartzite limb of the Alice anticline throughout, which suggests that there may have been a line of weakness there—a relict of the Pertaknurra revolution. To find the “vertical throw,” or displacement, of the beds it was necessary to discover the average height above sea level of the base of the Pertatataka series on the Arunta shield. The spot selected was at Halcombs Creek. Winnecke’s height of the plain at the foot of the eastern bluff of the Haasts Bluff Range (Colonel Warburton’s Haasts Bluff) is 2,155 feet above sea level (35, p. 16). The base of the Pertatataka series at the head of Halcombs Creek would probably be 300 feet higher than the above plain, or say 2,455 feet above sea level. Win- necke’s height of the Hermannsburg Mission Station is 1,643 feet (op. cit., p. 18), or 812 feet below the basal bed at Halcombs Creek. The Mission Station is situated in a shallow synclinal fold, the first south of the rupture-zone. The station stands on the Marena sandstone, the top of the Larapinta series, so if we add the difference in height between the Mission Station and the basal bed of the Pertatataka series at Halcombs Creek to Madigan’s measured thickness of the newer series (18, p. 693), we shall get some idea of the downthrow. The sum may be set out as follows :— (1) Difference in height of base of Pertatataka Series at Halcombs Creek and Hermannsburg Mission Station - - - 812 feet (2) Total thickness of Larapinta Series - - - - 5,986 __,, (3) Total thickness of Pertaoorta Series - - - - 3,151 ,, (4) Total thickness of Pertatataka Series - - - 3,204 ,, The vertical throw = 13,153 feet There is another place on the Arunta shield where beds that may represent the base of the Pertatataka occur, and the height above sea level is known. The reasons for so thinking are given below. The spot is the Six-mile Creek, about 16 miles north of Alice Springs, and the formation is the low-lying red shale seen at intervals from the Six-mile Creek to six miles south of Connors Well, The identity of the beds needs confirmation, but the results work out surprisingly near those from Halcombs Creek. II. Y. L. Brown’s height of the Burt Plain, a little north of the Six-mile Creek, is 2,520 feet (7, vide map). The railway survey height at the Six-mile Creek is 2,363 feet. Brown’s height is on the shale beds, and the survey probably that of the watercourse. Brown’s height for the basal bed above the Mission Station, therefore, would be 877 feet, and the survey’s 720, which, if the thickness of the newer series be added, give 13,218 and 13,061 feet, respectively, as the downthrow. And again: If we postulate that the Mount Olga conglomerate beds are the basal portion of the Pertatataka series, resting on the Pitjentara shield, and Longs Range is Larapinta, in the sunkland, and that the newer series were intact, and of similar dimensions over the Lake Amadeus terrain as at, say, Hermannsburg, some idea of the displacement of the southern side of the sunkland may be deduced from W. R. Murray’s heights (23, pp. 30-32). The base of the Mount Olga conglomerate beds ahove sea level corresponds with that of Longs Range, for Ayers Rock base is 1,590 feet and Mount Olga 1,580 feet. Lake Amadeus is 1,485 feet, and Murray’s two camps on the north side of the lake near Longs Range are 1,500 and 1,550 feet, respectively. The conglomerate beds are believed to be south of the fault, and Longs Range north of it. At Longs Range probably 150 one-third of the Larapinta beds have been denuded, so the vertical throw at Lake Amadeus appears to be of the order of 10,000 feet. Excepting the stretch from, say, Loves Creek to Alice Springs and on to Mount Tate, there is no very direct evidence anywhere of the postylated fault- lines connected with the foundering of the sunkland; the reason being that the lines are masked by a mantle of sand or loam, consequently one has to rely wholly upon the exposures of rocks that outcrop every here and there along the two margins, taken in conjunction with the larger rock-masses that stand back some distance from the fault-lines to follow them. Taking the north line first: Back (north) from the line, along its eastern half, crystalline rocks border it the whole way. These may be, and often are, associated with Pertaknurra quartzite, limestone and shale beds (Madigan). West of Mount Tate there is a run of isolated exposures of crystalline rocks that under- lie the, always nearly horizontal and always highly conglomeratic, residues of the Pertatataka formation, viz., Mount Crawford, Mount Palmer, Mount Udor, Mount Rennie, Mount Leisler, and so forth. South of Lake Macdonald is the Bonython line of dolomitic limestones, sandstone and flint hills. That combination suggests either Pertaknurra or Pertaoorta exposures, and the line may run either north or south of the Bonython Hills. West of that the line is in doubt. The exposure of limestone beds, and a ring of ranges on the west side of Lake Hopkins, hints to the western end of the sunkland being there. F. Hann, in 1904, visited that part and named the lake, but his journal is not available. The south line of fault appears to run from, say, Goyders Springs, west of Erldunda, to Lake Amadeus, and from there it skirts Bloods Range on the south side to the Western Australian border, from where it may, as suggested above, run around on the western side of Lake Hopkins and end there. On the south side of the line we have granitic rocks—with or without Pertaknurra quartzite, etc., capping them—probably the whole length of the line, in the Pitjentara shield, in which the Ayers, Petermann and Rawlinson lines of ranges may be mentioned. The descriptions of Mount Conner by George and L. A. Wells, that it is “a high table-top hill composed of quartzite and pudding-stone, with cliffs of quartzite, 300 feet high, like that which caps the granite,” does not accord with the Larapinta series, as Brown supposed. Michael Terry has stated that there is much slate there. Probably it is an outlier of the Ayers Rock—Mount Olga line of residues. Frank George’s description of the slope from the Musgrave and Mann Ranges to the north side of Mount Olga (11, pp. 6-8) shows that the Pertaknurra quartzite is present, principally in the form of cappings on granitic hills. ‘The quartzite apparently forms the floor upon which Mount Olga reposes. The Pitjentara shicld, therefore, extends north of the Mount Olga line of residues. The Mount Olga Range, he states, consists of about 30 immense dome-like masses of boulder and pebble conglomerate, Mount Olga, the highest dome, rises 1,420 feet above the base (W. R. Murray). Photographs by the Horn Scientific Expedition, H. H. Finlayson, and Michael Terry show the domes to be separated by deep chasms, that apparently originated from fractures, and the bedding planes in adjacent hills to dip at differing angles, as if slightly disturbed by ruptures. No dykes ot quartz reefs have becn observed to traverse the formation, nor has any folding been noted in it. The beds, George states, dip west at 10° to 15°, while the, apparently, underlying Pertaknurra quartzite dips north at 55°, and strikes S.75° W. The several descriptions we have of the Mount Olga line of residues accord better with the Mount Palmer line, in the western MacDonnell Ranges, than any other, and with confidence it is placed as the basal portion of the Pertatataka series. The writer recants his former placing of these residues (6, p. 80; and 7, pp. 4-7). 151 On the downthrow (north) side of the southern fault-line we, almost for certain, have a continuous line of Larapinta residues in the Erldunda, Basedow, and Kernot Ranges. They all appear to be outliers of the “Marena” red sandstone of Levis and George Gills Ranges. Between the Kernot and Longs Range are a number of ridges and low hills (not placed on the map) of the true Larapinta type, among which H. H. Finlayson has informed the writer Ordovician fossils are plentiful in one place. Longs Range, on the north-west end of Lake Amadeus, appears to be north of the line which, as before stated, follows along on the south side of Bloods Range. Bloods Range, according to George, Tietkens, and Basedow, appears to be the southern limit of the great sandstone and quartzite area of Larapinta rocks that extends westward from Gardiners Range, Glen Edith, and Laurie’s Creek, apparently without a break to the Western Australian border. Along its southern edge the Bloods Range and Souths Range beds are upturned in the same way that the Larapinta series are seen to overlook the Glen Helen Valley, on the opposite (north) side of the sunkland, only in the opposite direction, for Bloods Range and Souths Range dip north. The sunkland has been caused by the foundering of a huge block, 200 miles long for certain, and probably much more, cast and west. At the Western Aus- tralian border it is 50 to 60 miles broad, at Lake Amadeus 100, and at Alice Springs 130. It appears to have been formed as a result of isostatic depression, and the cause probably the great load of sediments, Neither the nearly-horizontal Per- tatataka beds on the adjacent shields, the lack of discordance in the newer series, nor the thickness of the Larapinta beds within the sunkland terrain point to a down-warped valley, but rather to a peneplaned surface of schists and Pertaknurra residues, as the floor upon which the newer series sediments accumulated. As a rule the evenness in habit of the Larapinta series, even to the several narrow fossiliferous limestone beds over quite extensive areas, is remarkable. Another remarkable thing about the sunkland is that it is the only part of Central Australia that has undergone serious folding since the great Pertaknurra revolution. The folding is referred to in another place, but it is well to mention here that the whole of the sunkland appears to have been folded, more in places and less in others, East of Tempe Downs and the Mission Station the axes of the folds trend east- west, but west of those places west-nor’-west. At Tempe Downs the two lines meet. The Petermann anticline trends nearly east-west, while the Tempe Downs or Mount Lewis anticline runs west-nor’-west (vide map, p. 147).' The time of folding can only be surmised, but it was later than the formation of the great Pertnjara conglomerate and sandstone formations, for these beds participated in the folding. To distinguish it from others we will call it the Pertnjara folding. IV—THE AGE OF MOUNT PALMER LINE OF RESIDUES, Towards the close of Pertaknurra time the repeated foldings and crushings to which the “greater-shield” portion of the interior had been subjected had pro- duced such a rigid mass that subsequent earth movements have made no very important changes in its configuration. This is evident from the extant residues of sediments that were subsequently laid upon its peneplaned surface. These latter show faulting and fracturing, more or less, in every district, with gentle folding, but everywhere with the exception of in the sunkland, and Throssel and Albert Edward Ranges in Western Australia (26, p. 26) there is a noteworthy absence of serious orogenic disturbances. This is the more remarkable because everywhere the residues show that the beds were thrown into gentle undulations, the axes of which usually trend cast-west. The dips seldom exceed 20°, and over extensive areas the Pertatataka beds—the only ones that remain—lie very nearly horizontal. The slight folding just referred to has nothing to do with regional 152 warping. The latter is not noticeable as one travels through that country, the grade being so small, but the folding has resulted in controlling the denuding forces to the extent that the hard beds form the arches, and the softer the troughs. That rule obtains wherever the Pertatataka series forms the surface on the shields. On account of the rigidity of the shields over such a vast period, during which the denuding forces have had full play, and notwithstanding that not less than 12,000 feet of newer series sediments covered portions at anyrate of the shields, nearly the whole of this has been removed, so that the shields’ surfaces today largely consist of gneiss, schist, and granite. With the sunkland an altogether different state of things prevails. There one has to deal wholly with the newer series, and mostly with the upper portion, the Larapinta series, and also a still younger series, the Pertnjara conglomerates. A still more remarkable thing about the sunkland is that the whole of it 1s more intensely folded than are the same series, or what remains of them, on the shields. The reasons for such abnormal conditions, as stated elsewhere, are that it is a portion of the original shield that foundered, and that subsequently was com- pressed between the two shields and folded. In some parts the beds actually stand vertical over stretches of fifty, and even one hundred miles, ¢.g., between Tempe Downs and the Finke, and between Alice Springs and Stokes Pass. Going west from Alice Springs we have, so to say, an admixture of sunkland and shield conditions. On the north side we have the “irresistible” Arunta shield with its fracture-face, down along which the sunkland beds dragged in their descent to lower levels. This gave the impinging beds an upward tilt, and sub- sequent pressure (against the fracture-face) uprighted the lower 6,000 or so feet of beds, and induced the upper 6,000 or so feet of strata to assume a dip to the south that gradually decreases from 90° to, say, 20° at the surface, Disposed in that way, the newer series run on west from Alice Springs for 120 miles to Stokes Pass. These uprighted and tilted beds have been so well described by Dr. Madigan (18 and 19) that further comment seems needless. An epitome of the beds will be found in ihe table herewith, Madigan’s four quartzite ridges con- stitute the dominating physical features throughout the stretch, but we have need to notice No. 2 and No. 4 only. At the Finke Gorge the No, 4 quartzite overhangs the big waterhole on both sides. About one mile north of the waterhole the No. 2 quartzite is seen in the range under which, and on the north side, the first Glen Helen Station stood, on the bank of the Ormiston. Both ridges at the Finke, as elscwherc, trend east-west. Madigan’s aerial view carried the No. 4 quartzite on from the Finke to Stokes Pass, He also saw that the newer series, as a whole, extended in uniform lines over the same stretch; with which the writer is in perfect agreement. Madigan traced the No. 2 quartzite from Mount Blatherskite, near Alice Springs, to the old Glen Helen Station, at the Finke. [This ridge was first discovered to be largely composed of bands of conglomerate by Mawson and Madigan when on a journey from Alice Springs to the Finke in 1930.| Madigan’s second visit was noteworthy, for be then (1932) established the fact that the No. 2 quartzite and conglomerate stratum was actually the basal portion of the newer series. Being compressed against the rigid shield face (at that place com- posed of Pertaknurra limestones, shales, etc.), he saw no discordance between the Pertatataka series and the older (Pertaknurra) series, but had he traced the conglomerate band on to the shield, to either Halcombs Creek or Mount Palmer, he would have noted very wide angles of discordance. On the top of Mount Liebig the discordance between the newer-Proterozoic and the older-Proterozoic must be about 80°; at Berrys Pass about 45°, and at Halcombs Creek the same (6, p. 79, vide section). The top of Mount Liebig Tindale found to be capped by the Pertatataka beds (32, p. 216). 153 But to continue: From the old Glen Helen Station to beyond Stokes Pass the conglomerate bands have not actually been traced, but as all the other mem- bers of the newer series, as we have seen, run on in perfect order to beyond Stokes Pass, there seems no reason to doubt that the conglomerate band, the No. 2 quartzite, is continuous also. From Stokes Pass, still going westward, the newer series as a whole (the Larapinta portion is a big range) gradually take on a list to the north, and at South Creek all the beds have a decided southerly dip, and at Mount Tate, 33 miles from Stokes Pass, the No. 4 quartzite, which there forms the range, and apparently Bettys Pass Ridge Ridges babes e Amunurunga Ridge | Mt.Crawford nN Mt Tote Range Fa Gardiners Range NW. 3 Sectian No, through Mt-Tate+ Mt. Crawford. (for References & Situation Vide Map) Gardiners Range Stokes Pass ¥ Fault at Fault Section No.2 through Stokes Pass (for References & Situation vide Map) Fig. 3. Sketch-sections: The upper one shows how the residues occur on the shield, and the lower one how they are up-tilted against the shield-face. Between Mount Tate and Stokes Pass the beds bend over the rupture-zone, Farther south they are cut off by the Deering Fault, against which they are turned downwards. all the beds below it, are nearly horizontal. Frank George, when rounding the western end of the Mount Tate Range—more often called the Mount Musgrave Range—found that the quartzite beds lay nearly flat (12, p. 17). A glance at the map (fig. 1) and the two sections, one through Stokes Pass and the other through the Mount Tate Range, will convey some idea of the way the different beds in the newer series spread themselves out. The Larapinta beds terminate in great escarpments. They end in that manner because the newer series between South Creek and Mount ‘late are rising and actually passing from the sunkland to the shield. The line of fault that bounds the newer series on the north (always north of the No. 2 quartzite) having extended from Loves Creek through Alice Springs toa few miles beyond Stokes Pass, 180 miles, appears to die out near South Creek ; but the fault line only jumps, so to say, from the north side to the south side of the Musgrave Range, where the nearly parallel Deering Fault is seen to have cut off the beds, some of which have actually scaled the shield. The beds that now lie north of the rupture-zone, 7.e., on the shield, are the No. 4 quartzite and probably the whole of the Pertatoorta and the Pertatataka series. Doubtless the rest of the Larapinta beds that lie above the No. 4 quartzite, and that are represented by the great Marena and Stairway Escarpments, in former time extended far to the north over the Arunta shield as well. F 154 From the top of Mount Musgrave Range—which is composed of the No. 4 quartzite—to the head of Halcombs Creek there is a continuous northerly slope, the vertical drop of which is (as calculated from Winnecke’s height) about 1,400 feet in ten miles. On this slope one would expect to find the outcrop of every bed between the No. 4 quartzite and the No. 2 quartzite-conglomerate bed, for the latter actually outcrops on the south and west sides of Halcombs Creek, as shown on the map (fig. 1). The slope has several ridges running across it; they evidently represent some of the harder beds, W. C. Gosse noted them (13, p. 7), and the writer has seen them from the top of Haasts Bluff ridge. It is a stony, scrubby slope that every traveller avoids. Frank George crossed it, but his untimely death shortly afterwards deprives us of an account of what he saw. The foot of the slope is very stony all the way from Stokes Pass to Hal- combs Creek, which probably indicates the course of the conglomerate bed. Many years ago the writer traced the conglomerate, and the sandstone and shale beds with which it is associated, from Halcombs Creek to Mount Palmer, and, still farther west, to Mount Udor. Now, seeing that the fault lies south of Mount Tate, and that the beds that form the Mount Musgrave Range bend over the space between the two faults, any of the newer series beds that lie north of the Musgrave Range are, for certain, resting on the Arunta shield. It is the only place known where the newer series can be seen to pass from the shield to the sunkland, or vice versa. While the con- glomerate beds, the base of the Pertatataka series, have not actually been traced all the way between old Glen Helen Station and Halcombs Creek, there is no reason to doubt the continuity; the line it follows is shown on the map. The Halcombs Creek—Mount Palmer line of residues are the basal portion of the Pertatataka series (Newer Proterozoic), The writer had formerly suggested that the Mount Palmer line of residues, and other residues also found upon the Arunta shield, might be Devonian (6, p. 78; and 7, pp. 4-5), like Gardners Range, near Tanami. Gardners Range was formerly supposed to be Devonian. It is a coincidence that in both cases fossiliferous Cambrian limestone has been found to supersede the supposed Devonian con- glomeratic beds. [The age of Gardners Range is accepted as Nullagine on account of its striking lithological likeness to the Elvire (Nullagine) series. ] There is every reason to believe that the Pertatataka series in Central Aus- tralia is contemporaneous with the Nullagine series in Western Australia, and the Pertaknurra series with the Mosquito series is also evident. The discovery that the Mount Palmer residues belonged to the Pertatataka series became apparent upon reading Madigan’s description of the No, 2 quartzite ridge. The linc the ridge follows from old Glen Helen Station to Halcombs Creek, as above described, is shown on the map (fig. 1), The section through Stokes Pass shows how highly inclined the beds are while in the sunkland, and the section through the Mount Tate Range shows them nearly horizontal on the shield. V—FORMER EXTENSIONS OF THE FORMATIONS. (a) Tr PERTAKNURRA RESIDUES, The Pertaknurra peneplanation left the “greater shicld” a region with com- paratively low reliefs, and the highest ranges and hills upon it, with a few notable exceptions, are capped by Pertaknurra residucs. In very many places the residues are seen to have been interfolded with the gneisses and schists, and to have under- gone both hydrothermal and dynamic metamorphism; they carry quartz reefs, which reefs carry gold, wolfram, scheelite, bismuth, etc. The heavy cappings of quartzite offer the greatest resistance to weathering—greater than any other class of rock, Hence we find residues when upturned forming long east-west or north *239.Warburton AMt. Davidsor Pls 7 eee “nT ipo is sy ee “Davidson Fossil hill sage E Singleton eof app eeeapafige a se iat TM enartete pheeel hn, : Ratt ww + tf, L. Bennett Reertahm Magloomtoqtion Sebietid hehe alut Palme! Rn meh see” Se taht So Sonder. wie racjoelt Ha ntol MACE NEL yyy YYZ ey WY YY a4. Sarshpe wh is D AN mS Mh | ened, Zi "sina. ep Ayers Rock -. oo | , ute conner” ‘a j|— Sos rating ¥ Mann eo sll % | Musgrave) , | Ranigr REFERENCES: a=Peak. O=HeadStation. o#Well. ns 130° iai*. Mt,Woodratfe =Pertatataka. [7J=Larapinta. [__ ]=Gneissiccomplex, Seale: a eee ae Sis [WR =Pertacorta. [ida] =Pertaknurra. [2==]=Finke series. Fig. 4. Geological Sketch Map of portions of Central and North Australia: The white portions are chiefly shield, or foundation rocks. Some of the more important Pertaknurra residues are shown as ranges. Reposing horizontally on these are Pertatataka residues, shown by heavily-dotted patches, and the probable area covered by this formation is shown by lighter dotting. The central and northern parts of the map portray The Arunta Shield, and the south-western portion a part of the Pitjentara Shield. The shields are separated by a sunken area, shown by the shading. Larapinta rocks predominate, but Pertnjara, Pertaoorta and Pertatataka form part of the sunkland terrain as well. Greater detail is given in fig. 1. 156 of west ridges, having more prominent peaks here and there; or as mesa-like blocks intersected by lateral valleys carved out to base-level by streams that head from them, or pass right through them. Examples of the “ridge type” are, perhaps, best developed throughout the entire length of the MacDonnell Ranges, and always north of the rupture zone. Typical examples of the ‘mesa type” occur in the Georgina, Davenport, Murchison, and probably also the western end of the Treuer Range, near Mount Davenport. It is not proposed to list the residues, they are many, and are so closely asso- ciated with the Arunta complex, through interfolding and metamorphism, that, for the purposes of the present paper only, it suits to regard the Pertaknurra and the complex as together forming the plane on which the great Pertatataka series was laid down. While it is true, as Dr. Madigan pointed out (19, p. 106), ziz., that the Pertaknurra is thin or absent (in many places) to the west and north of the MacDonnell Ranges, the writer accounts for that by the immense length and rigour of the Pertaknurra peneplanation. Over immense areas where it certainly previously extended, e.g., north of Mount Liebig, where the formation is estimated to be 10,000 feet thick by Mr. Tindale, the whole was swept away prior to the deposition of the Pertatataka series. The white portions of the map may contain Pertaknurra residues in addition to those with hachures, but the hachures will probably indicate the more prominent occurrences. W. R. Murray mentions that quartzite was seen in a couple of places on the north side of, and near to, the Musgrave Ranges; possibly ribs of quartzite are there interfolded with the schists. He also mentions quartzite at Mount Davis, 20 miles north of the Tomkinson Ranges. These occurrences suggest that ihe Pitjentara shield area may have been covered by the Pertaknurra scries prior to the Pertaknurra revolution, both being situated along the crest of the dome. On the western half of the northern slope, along the 200 miles stretch occupied by the Petermann and Rawlinson Ranges, extensive areas of Pertaknurra residues still remain, The south-eastern end of the Petermann Ranges is composed of isolated granite and gneiss hills capped with Pertaknurra quartzite, etc., and the main portion of the ranges appears to be a jumbled mass of granitic hills on the south, and the same capped by quartzite, and also quartzite ridges, on the north. The prevailing strike of the Petermann ridges is north-westerly, and the dip north-easterly, but as the Pertaknurra series was involved in the Pertaknurra revolution the dips and strikes vary greatly, (The geological information anent these ranges was gleaned from reports by F. R. George, W. R. Murray, H. Basedow and M. Terry.) The above conditions extend north-easterly for a few miles and then appear to terminate abruptly upon reaching the sunkland. The Rawlinson Range is largely a replica of the Petermann. It continues on to the westward from where the Petermann ends, but the trend is more east-west. ‘The nearly-uniform height of the tops of the ranges indicates a former pene- planed surface, or base-level. It is also worthy of note that the streams on the Rawlinson and Petermann areas take their rise back on the granitic, higher land to the south and flow transversely over and across the Pertaknurra quartzite ridges, through which gaps have been worn down to the flat-bottomed valleys, in precisely the same way as do the Ormiston, Ellerys Creek, the Todd and other streams in the MacDonnell Ranges. [ike those mentioned in the MacDonnell these streams are of great antiquity, and immense erosion has taken place since they originated ; probably on the surface of one or other of the newer series under which this part of the Pitjentara shield was then buried. The base-level was sufficiently elevated for the streams to pour their waters over the top of Bloods Range. They, like those above-mentioned, appear to have originated immediately after the truncation of the folded-sunkland had been effected. 157 As numerous quartz reefs occur in the quartzite and slaty beds in both the Rawlinson and Petermann, they are confidently referred to the Pertaknurra series. (b) Tue PERTATATAKA RESIDUES. From the time Tate and Watt placed on record that the Pertnjara con- glomerates were of Post-Ordovician age it was recognised that there were two well-pronounced breaks in the Palaeozoics or older sediments in Central Australia, the other break being represented by the basal conglomerates of the Pertaknurra series. When conglomeratic residues were found, efforts were made to connect them with either one or the other, and in the event of those not fitting the case then with some known discovery farther afield. The Mount Palmer line of residues was a case in point, and on account of the lithological similarity and nearly-horizontal disposition it was placed with the Gardner Range formation, in the Tanami district, The age of the latter at that time was regarded as Devonian. The writer suggested also that the Mount Barkly conglomeratic residues, on the Lander, and the Mount Olga conglomerates, on the Pitjentara shield, might belong to the same formation (7, pp. 4-6). The discovery by Mawson and Madigan that another conglomerate horizon, intermediate between the Pertnjara and the Pertaknurra existed (21, p. 423) was interesting, but when Madigan later on definitely placed it at the base of the Pertatataka (Newer-Proterozoic) series (18, p. 698), and the writer, as already stated, perceived that the discovery actually proved that the Mount Palmer beds were Pertatataka also, it thus became apparent that preconceived ages of many residues on both shields must undergo revision. In his travels the writer had noted that, in addition to conglomerate (which, by the way, is not always present) the basal beds of the formation [that rests upon the schists and Pertaknurra residues over so much of the interior] was composed of liver-coloured slate and shale, and that these graduate, upwards, imperceptibly into purple and red sandstones, flaggy at first, surmounted by quartzite and grey sandstone. A typical example may be seen from the Ilumbardna waterhole to the head of that creek, in the Foster Range, near Barrow Creek. At Mount Palmer coarse conglomerate predominates at the base, in the Foster Range slate, but the shale is ubiquitous, as also is the fine red sandstone. When exposed in bold headlands, like Mount Palmer, or the Foster Range, or in hills with more rounded form, like Central Mount Stuart, or where streams head from it or run through it, like Winnecke Creek, Victoria River, the Taylor or many streams between Tennants Creek and Powell Creek, the formation is quite unmistakable to one familiar with it. There is none other like it in Central Australia. But in other places, like Halcombs Creek, Kelly Well, along Gilbert Creek, at the Red Ilills, or between Cattle Swamp Well and Winnecke Creek, and between Tennants Creek and Caraman its presence is discernible only by a floor of shale, with hillocks of shale, sandstone, or pebbles from the conglomerate in places. Between Tanami and Victoria River the formation, as shown on Brown's and Davidson’s maps, is represented by a few scattered hills. These gradually merge into the Winnecke Creek Tableland, and from there the formation appears to be continuous to the Overland Telegraph Line, as previously stated (7, pp. 7-9). Since that paper was written the discovery had been made that the Mount Palmer residues belonged to the Pertatataka series, and it became evident by recounting all the residues per gradus along the Overland Telegraph Line, and to Victoria River, that the residues throughout were all of the same (Pertatataka) formation. No option then remained but to wipe out the Permo-Carboniferous idea formerly held, and to write Pertatataka across all that stretch from Gardners Range and 158 Tanami to the Overland Telegraph Line. The Devonian age of Gardners Range had previously been altered to Nullagine (Newer-Proterozoic) by the Western Australian geologists. The Tanami to the Overland Telegraph Line area is one of the largest additions in Central Australia to the Pertatataka series. Much of the area is covered by loam and sand, but the map (fig. 4) indicates its probable southern limit as a continuous sheet. The writer is not familiar with its northern margin. The next largest Pertatataka area is that of Foster Range and Central Mount Stuart. The formation appears to underlic the sandy-loam plain between the Stirling Station, at Foster Range, and the Two Hills, at Skull Creek, near Teatree Well. At anyrate outliers extend as far south, for a Pertatataka hill is visible to the north-east from the well, say five or six miles distant, and other hills of the same formation lie between it and Foster Range. Central Mount Stuart was for a long time very difficult to place. No fossils could be found either there or in the Foster Range. The writer had expressed the opinion that the Murchison Range and Foster Range belonged to the same formation (vide 6, p. 70, ef seq.), At that time all of the oldest sediments on the shields passed as Cambrian. Madigan’s triple dissection of the beds included in that comprehensive term places the Murchison Range in the Pertaknurra division, for the sediments carry quartz reefs; and Foster Range and Central Mount Stuart in the Pertatataka division, for the sediments carry no quartz reefs, and are not metamorphosed. They repose on the planed-down surface of crystalline rocks, Icft by the Pertaknurra peneplanation; the beds lying nearly horizontal, whereas the Murchison Range sediments participated in the Pertaknurra revolution, The high conglomeratic-sandstone residues of Mounts Leichard, Denison and Barkly certainly belong to the Pertatataka series. They occupy the Lander Valley, some fifty miles west of Central Mount Stuart, from which they are plainly visible. Between the two erosion has removed the connecting beds and exposed the crystalline rocks. Several patches of residues, mostly shale and slate, that occur along the Overland Telegraph Line are placed on the map (fig. 4). The one just north of Alice Springs, between the Six-mile Creek and six miles south of Connor Well, is more doubtful. It bears close resemblance to other undoubted patches of the formation. The writer has no knowledge of any younger beds of like character on the shields and therefore, tentatively, marks it as Pertatataka. As stated in the “Foundering of the Sunkland” division, the plane on which the shale reposes is very nearly the same height above sea level as that on which the Mount Palmer residues lie, and may well represent the Pertaknurra peneplanation level, Between this six-mile shale and opposite Halcombs Creek Post-Ordovician erosion has not only removed the newer series from the Burt Plain area, but has also lowered the schists hundreds of feet below the Pertaknurra peneplanation plane, which accounts for the absence of Pertatataka residues on the Burt Plain, other than the above. The rule is universal so far as the shields go: Wherever Pertatataka residues are found they rest for certain upon the Pertaknurra pene- planation plane, and where erosion has gone below that plane no residues can remain, The elevated positions some of the Pertatataka residues occupy show beyond question that the formation formerly spread far over the surrounding terrain; e.g., Mount Palmer and other hills to the westward stand on a ridge of schists that forms the north-south watershed of that part. Away to the north lies the Treuer Range. The portion of Central Australia west of Treuer Range is largely a terra incognita, or was until Donald Mackay, in 1930, made an aerial survey of part of it, and Michael Terry visited other portions in 1932-3, The result of a 159 close study of the literature has led the writer to conclude that the Pertatataka series occupies practically all the country north of Lake Macdonald to where the sedimentarieés commence south of Gardners Range, and south-west of Tanami, along the border of Western Australia. On the south the formation is limited by the Amadeus sunkland; the map (fig. 4) shows the lake to lie athwart the border, and a few miles north of the sunkland. Mackay’s aerial survey placed Lake Macdonald 25 miles east of Tietkens’s position. From Tietkens’s description of the Kintore Range, and Mount Leisler, near Lake Macdonald, and also of Mount Rennie and Laura Vale, both a few miles east of Kintore Range, it is evident that the Mounts Palmer and Udor line of residues continues westward. It is quite obvious, too, that the Mount Leisler group of residues are not Larapinta (Ordovician) residues, as suggested by Brown, and Tate and Watt. Tietkens’s descriptions show that the beds at Mount Leisler are largely composed of conglomerate, quartzite, sandstone, with shale at the base, all resting on granite (30, p. 30, et seg.). The Larapinta series, on the other hand, cannot be described as “highly conglomeratic”; and in no case, either on the shields or in the sunkland, are the Larapinta beds known to rest on the Arunta complex rocks, but always upon the Pertaoorta (Cambrian) beds. Lake Mackay lies 50 miles north of Lake Macdonald on the boundary, and due west of the Treuer Range. It measures 60 miles long and 30 broad—one of the largest salt lakes in Central Australia. On the north side of the lake is the Alec Ross Range. Terry’s photo shows that the range is one leg of a gentle anticlinal arch, the axis of which trends east-west. ‘Terry mentions sandstone, of which rock the range, apparently, is mainly composed (29, p. 507), he fact that the beds are folded shows that they do not belong to the Permo-Carboniferous series that occupy the Desert Basin, for those beds everywhere, Talbot slates, lie quite horizontal (24, p. 45). Three other smaller salt lakes lie north of Lake Mackay, on the eastern sides of which the sandstone formation, which appears to be horizontal there, is seen in the cliffs, below which there is quartz-rubble and (?) red shale. On the eastern side of one of these depressions is the Sydney Margaret Range, also composed of horizontal sandstone, but showing faulting and displacement. Terry’s descrip- tion (29, p. 507, ef seq.) is exasperatingly deficient in geological details, but there seems no reason to doubt that the boundary beds join up on the north with the Gardners Range and Tanami hills formation (Nullagine), and on the south with the Kintore Range—Mount Rennie—Laura Vale (Pertatataka) residues. The “border beds” appear to emerge from beneath the eastern rim of the Desert Basin (Permo-Carboniferous) area near the 128th meridian and to extend eastward to the 130th meridian, where they have been thinned to an edge by erosion, and a few miles still farther east the formation (Pertatataka) was com- pletely removed from the Ehrenberg—Treuer Range portion of the Arunta shield. Judging from the height hills like Gardners Range, Mount Dennison and Mount Palmer stand above the schists they rest upon, it seems certain that the Pertatataka formation formerly covered nearly all of the western portion of the Arunta shield. The “border beds” evidently represent the attenuated eastern edge of the great Nullagine formation which covers such large areas north and round to north-west of Wiluna, in Western Australia, David’s map extends the formation eastward to Lake Wells and Lake Disappointment. As no orogenic movements of note are known to have disturbed the foundation rocks between those points and Lake Macdonald since the Nullagine sedimentation, and seeing that all of that part of the continent was previously reduced to a peneplain, it seems reasonably fair to assume that originally the Nullagine formation stretched from the Pilbara coast to the MacDonnell Ranges. 160 Dr. Madigan has shown that the Pertatataka beds extend east of Alice Springs. to beyond Loves Creek, and are found north-easterly from there to about the 136th meridian, at Jervois Range. This suggests that the formation flanked the eastern side, and being so well developed at Barrow Creek it probably not only flanked but covered all but the higher portions of those eastern ranges. David- son’s “fossil hill,” 40 miles south-east of Elkerdra, containing the genus Agnostus and genus Microdiscus (middle-to-lower Cambrian of Dr. Whitehouse), suggests that the Pertatataka beds may not have covered the south-eastern portion of the Murchison Ranges; but the residues along Gilbert Creek and at Kelly will prove that the basal beds hugged the Murchison Ranges on the north-west side. North of Tennants Creek, as the map shows, sporadic patches of the Pertatataka beds occur between the telegraph station and the Caraman, but from there to near Powell Creek it may be traced around the heads of all the creeks. Davidson’s experience west of the telegraph line, along the stretch indicated, was that it was covered by a shect of unmetamorphosed rocks (the Pertatataka series). The sandstone and quartzite beds around the head of Attack Creek, he remarks. (10, p. 7), are very flat, and show no evidence of disturbance through the introduction of eruptive rocks. (A few miles north of Attack Creek there is scoria—the spot is two or three miles north of Banka—and near Renner Springs. and eastward of that basaltic intrusions in the Pertatataka are common enough.) Where not worn through to the underlying Pertaknurra series, the Pertatataka beds are seen to dip flat to the east and apparently underlie the Pertaoorta lime- stone beds that have such great development on the Barkly Tablelands. Great areas in the Kimberleys, in Western Australia, and in the north of North Australia, are shown on David’s map as Nullagine. The present map (fig. 4) will show that some of those areas may be extended, for the Pertatataka series. occupies quite a large portion of Central and Northern Australia. There are three localities on the Pitjentara shield where residues that con- form to the following conditions are found, viz.: They are very ancient sediments; are largely composed of conglomerate; rest directly on the crystalline rocks or on the Pertaknurra series; beds lie near the horizontal; are not intruded by granite or diorite dykes; do not carry quartz reefs and are practically free from meta- morphism. Probably the best known of the three is the Ayers Rock—Mount Olga—Mount Currie line of residues (to which possibly Mount Conner must be added. The situation, as shown above, is near the northern margin of the Pitjen- tara shield, where they appear to repose, unconformably, on the Pertaknurra and crystalline complex. : Then there is the Townsend Range, with an extension east-south-easterly of the same beds for an unknown distance, all resting upon the crystalline rocks, and masking them in all southerly directions, These residues, which W. H. B. Talbot and E. de C. Clarke regard as Nullagine (26, pp. 26-29), are compared with similar occutrences in the great stretch of country between Lake Wells—200 miles west- south-west of the Warburton Range—and Kimberley (25, pp. 103/4). The reasons why the Flvire serics and the Townscnd series—both now regarded as Nullagine—first came to be regarded as Devonian, and how the Townsend Range and Kintore Range—both now regarded as Pertatataka—were later on correlated with the Larapinta series, are discussed at length by those authors (26, pp. 23-29). They handled the subject in a masterly way, and then spoilt the whole by correlat- ing the Townsend Range beds with the Larapinta series. The third occurrence lies a few miles east of the Everard Range, on the extreme south-eastern end of the Pitjentara shield. Two separate residual blocks occur there, a few miles apart, and Dr. Jack regards them as having been pre- served by being down-faulted into the crystalline complex, They are 17 and 161 23 miles long, respectively. Dr. Jack supposed these residues to be of Cambrian age, but his description of the beds, their position relative to the complex, and the absence of fossils accords much better with the Pertatataka series. It may be of interest to noté that while the base of the three occurrences on the Pitjentara shield average about 1,600 feet above sea level (Murray) those cited on the Arunta shield are over 2,400 feet (Winnecke and Brown), a difference of 800 feet or more, the sunkland lying between them. The difference in the base-level of the Pertatataka series—or we may call it the Pertaknurra peneplana- tion level— may have come about during the foundering of the sunkland, in Post- Ordovician time. ‘ If the writer’s version, viz., that the three separate occurrences of residues be of Pertatataka age, then the Nullagine, or Pertatataka, sea must have sur- rounded the Pitjentara shield. It covered the 200 miles stretch between the Townsend Range and Lake Wells in all probability. It certainly covered the whole of the sunkland, but how much of what is known as the Petermann and Rawlinson Ranges area one cannot say, for no residues have been noted there. There is nothing to show that the Nullagine fonmation ceases to run east of Lake Disappointment, or that the few hills along Ernest Giles’ route, between the Can- ning Stock Route and the Rawlinson Range, are suggestive of some other forma- tion. From Kintore Range the same formation apparently, in the Angus and Baron Ranges (Tietkens), extends away to the westward but, as already stated, in going north-west it passes under the Permo-Carboniferous beds of the Desert Basin, probably somewhere near the arbitrary line drawn on Sir Edgeworth David’s map. The map herewith (fig. 4) shows many Pertatataka residues in areas hitherto unsuspected, and these, taken in conjunction with those farther afield, already known, prove that the Pertatataka sedimentation extended over nearly the whole of the north-western quadrant of Australia, say roughly, north of about the 26th parallel, and west of the 136th meridian. The tableland country to the west of Port Augusta and Lake Torrens bears striking likeness to the Pertatataka series in parts of Central Australia, much more than to the Larapinta. (c) THe PERTAooRTA RESIDUES, Much interest centres in the Pertaoorta series on account of the phenomenal development and continuity of the limestone beds. To what extent the formation originally extended over the shields areas will probably never be known, for while areas like the Barkly Tablelands, Mount Ultim, Toko Range, Mount Tate, and possibly Bonython Range, all indicate that the formation formerly extended over much of the shields areas, they show at the same time, as also do the residues of the Pertatataka formation, that the Post-Ordovician peneplanation practically swept the shields areas clean, or nearly so, of the Pertaoorta series, The Mount Ultim—-Jervois Range, Davidson’s Fossil Hill, and the Mount Tate—Halcombs Creek slope are about the only spots on the shields proper where one might be sure of finding Pertaoorta rocks. In the sunkland, on the other hand, there is a continuous run of the forma- tion from South Creek to beyond Loves Creek, say 180 miles. Dr. Madigan discovered Archaeocyathinae and Salterella fossils in the limestone near Loves Creek, which definitely settled the age, according to Dr. Whitehouse, as Lower Cambrian, Prior to Madigan’s discovery at Loves Creek, Mawson and Madigan had discovered Alga fossils in the same series of beds in the Western MacDonnells, and Dr. Ward near Ooraminna. Considerable exposures occur between Deep Well and Maryvale along the Mount Burrell anticlinal arch. While the beds have not yet been observed along the southern rupture-zone of the sunkland, there is 162 every probability that the Pertaoorta series underlies the Larapinta series right across the sunkland. Forty miles north-east of Deep Well, and away east of Loves Creek, large limestone areas are reported. All over the Pitjentara shield erosion appears to have gone well below the original surface of the Pertatataka series, so the chances of locating Pertaoorta residues there seem remote. (d) Tue Larapinta RESIDUES. Notwithstanding that the Larapinta series has such great development in the sunkland, and that undoubtedly it had extensive development originally on the southern and eastern slopes of the Arunta shield, it is remarkable how little of the formation remains upon the shields. This the writer ascribes to the enormous amount of denudation the shields have undergone since the newer series became dry land. Under the preceding caption stress was laid on the fact of the Per- taoorta series having been removed from the shields by erosion since the newer series became dry land; as that series had the Larapinta series superimposed upon it, still greater stress may be urged here. The only Larapinta residues known on the Arunta shield are the Mount Tate—Mount Musgrave Range, which borders the sunkland, and the Mount Ultim Tableland, on the eastern slope. In the former the beds are traceable from the sunkland to the shield, and Tindale found Ordo- vician fossils in the latter. Less than half of the original thickness of the series remains in the Tate—Musgrave Range, and possibly half, or maybe less, at Mount Ultim. On the Pitjentara shield we have, in the Mount Chandler neighbourhood, residues of probably the Larapinta series, reposing unconformably upon what appears to be Pertatataka residues which were faulted, tilted, and degraded prior to the Larapinta sedimentation (R. L. Jack, 15, p. 23). The placid conditions that obtained elsewhere during the deposition of the newer series evidently did not reign at the extreme eastern end of the Musgrave Ranges. The sequence is broken, the Pertaoorta limestones and apparently much of the Pertatataka series are missing there. The Larapinta series rest upon the crystalline rocks, a thing unknown elsewhere. The beds are horizontal and also gently inclined. They appear to have been denuded off the slope above the 1,500 feet above-sca-level horizon, but they persist down the slope both to the east and south beneath the Upper-Cretaceous beds, Bloods Range is probably Larapinta, but if the writer’s survey be correct that range lies within the sunkland. Victor Streich’s line of quartzite and sandstone outcrops on the south side of the Pitjentara shield, between the Everard and Townsend Ranges, seems more likely to be a continuation of the quartzite beds. in the latter range, and, if so, they are not Larapinta. .VIT—LIST OF WORKS TO WHICH REFERENCE IS MADE, (1) Brown, H. Y¥. L., 1909—The Tanami Gold Country. Parliamentary Paper. Govt. Printer, Adelaide. (2) Basevow, IL, 1926—Geological Report on the Petermann Ranges, Central Australia. Geographical Journal, 1929, pp. 259-265. (3) Cuewines, C., 1885—The Sources of the Finke River, with map. Reprinted from the “Adelaide Observer.” W. K. Thomas & Ca., 1886. (4) Cuewincs, C., 1891—Geological Notes on the Upper Finke River Basin. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. xiv, pp. 247-255. (5) CuHewrnas, C., 1914—Notes on the Stratigraphy of Central Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. xxxvili, pp. 41-52, (6) Cuewrnes, C., 1928—Further Notes on the Stratigraphy of Central Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. lii, pp. 62-81. (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35) 163 Cuewinecs, C., 1931—A Delineation of the Pre-Cambrian Plateau in Central and North Australia, with Notes on the impingent Sedimentary Formations. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol, lv, pp. 1-11. Crarke, E. pe C., 1930—The Pre-Cambrian Succession in some parts of Western Australia, Report of the A. and N.Z. Assocn. for Adv. of Sc. Brisbane meeting. Davin, Sir T. W. E., 1932—Explanatory Notes to accompany a New Geological Map of the Commonwealth of Australia. Aust. Medical Publishing Coy. Ltd., Sydney. Davinson, Attan A., 1905—Journal of Explorations in Central Australia by the Central Australian Exploration Syndicate Ltd., under the leadership of A. A. D., 1898-1900. S, Aust. Parl. Paper, No. 27, Adelaide. Grorcz, F. R., 1904—Prospecting Operations in the Musgrave, Mann and Tomkinson Ranges, by L. A. Wells and F. R. George, with plans. S. Aust. Parl, Paper, No. 54, Adelaide. GeorceE, F. R., 1907—Journal of the Govt. Prospecting Expedition to the south-western portions of The Northern Territory, prepared by W. R. Murray, S. Aust. Parl. Paper, No. —, Adelaide. Gossr, W. C., 1873—Explorations. S. Aust. Parl. Paper, No. 48, in 1874. Howcuin, W., 1914—The Occurrence of the Genus Cryptozoon in the Cambrian of Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol, xxxviii, pp. 1-10. Jack R. Locxuart, 1915—Geological Survey of South Australia, Bulletin No, 5. Govt. Printer, Adelaide. (Deals with country south of the Musgrave Ranges.) Mackay, Donatn, 1930—The Mackay Aerial Survey Expedition, Central Australia, Geographical Journal, 1934, pp. 511-514, with map. Manican, C. T,, 1931—The Physiography of the Western MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia. Geographical Journal, vol. Ixxviii, No. 5, pp. 417-433. Manican, C, T., 1932—The Geology of the Western MacDonnell Ranges. Q.J.G.S, vol. Ixxxviii, pp. 672-711, Mantiean, C. T., 1932—The Geology of the Eastern MacDonnell Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., val. lvi, p. 71, et seq. Mantcan, C. T., 1935—The Geology of the MacDonnell Ranges and Neighbourhood, Central Australia. From the Report of the Australian and New Zealand Assocn. Advet. Science. Melbourne meeting, vol. xxi, pp. 75-86, Mawson, Sir D., and Manican, C, T., 1930—Pre-Ordovician Rocks of the MacDonnell Ranges (Central Australia). Q. J. G. S., vol. Ixxxvi, pp. 415-428, Murray, W. R.—See George, F. R. Murray, W. R., 1902—~In Extracts from Journals of Explorations, by R. T, Maurice— Fowlers Bay to Rawlinson Ranges and Cambridge Gulf. S. Aust. Parl. Paper, No. —, 1904. Tarzot, W. H. B., 1910—Geological Observations on the Country between Wiluna, Halls Creek and Tanami. Geolog. Survey of W.A, Bulletin, No. 39, Perth, Tarot, W. H. B., and Crarxe, E. ve C, 1917—Reconnaissance of the Country between Laverton and the S.A. Border. Geolg. Survey of W.A, Bulletin, No. 75, Perth. Tarsot, W. H. B., and CrarKe, E. pr C., 1918—The Geological Results of an Expedi- tion to the South Australian Border, etc. Journal and Proceedings of the Roy. Soc. of W.A.,, vol. xiii, pp. 1-29, Tate, R., and Warr, J. A., 1896—Report on the Work of the Horn Scientific Expedition to Central Australia. Pt. iii, Geology and Botany, London, Terry, Micnarr, 1930—Two Journeys Westward from Horseshoe Bend and Oodna- datta, Central Australia. Geographical Journal, 1931, pp. 341-346, Terry, Mrcwarn, 1932 and 1933—Explorations near the Border of Western Australia. Geographical Journal, 1934, pp. 498-510, TirtKENS, W. H., 1889—Journal of the Central Australian Exploring Expedition, with map and section. C. E. Bristow, Govt. Printer, Adelaide, 1891, Tinpate, N. B., 1931—Geological Notes on the Iliaura Country, north-east of the MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust., vol. Iv, pp. 32-38. Trinpate, N. B. 1933—Geological Notes on the Cockatoo Creek and Mount Liebig country, Central Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., vol. lvii, pp. 206-217. Wanr, Artuur, 1924 Petroleum Prospects, Kimberley District of W.A,. and N.T, Parliamentary Paper, Commonwealth of Australia, Warp, L. K., 1925—Notes on the Geological Structure of Central Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. Aust., vol, xlix, pp, 61-84. Wiwnecke, C., 1896—Journal of the Horn Scientific Exploring Expediti Australia. S. Aust. Parl, Paper, No, 19, 1896. si id oiftice, x: Coates REMARKS ON THE CESTODE GENUS POROTAENIA. BY PROFESSOR T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A., D.SC. Summary The genus Porotaenia was erected by Szpotanska in 1917, and a number of new species from Procellariiform bird attributed to it. In 1925 (701-2) it was again described as a new genus and many "new" species placed under it, most of these having been already described in 1917. In some cases, as Fuhrmann (1932, 26) has pointed out, specific names were changed without indicating the fact or the reasons for such action. 164 REMARKS ON THE CESTODE GENUS POROTAENIA. By Proressor T. Harvey JOHNSTON, M.A., D.Sc., University of Adelaide. [Read July 11, 1935.] The genus Porotaenia was erected by Szpotanska i in 1917, and a number of new species from Procellariiform bird attributed to it. In 1925 (701-2) it was again described as a new genus and many “new” species placed under it, most of these having been already described in 1917. In some cases, as Fuhrmann (1932, 26) has pointed out, specific names were changed without indicating the fact or the reasons for such action. In discussing the genus Chaetophallus Szpotanska (1925, 694-5) stated that three characters were associated in the species: a short canalis masculinus (male atrial canal) ; a cirrus provided with long setae; and a genital atrium, weakly or non-muscular. These features were used in giving an amended diagnosis for Chaetophallus Nybelin, 1916. In many places in her paper the name appears in error as Chactophallus, An account is given of two species, C. wbrella (Fuhr- mann) and C. musculosus Szp., both from southern albatrosses. She went on to state (p. 694) that these three characters appeared also in certain species of Porotaenia, but they were always accompanied by another feature, the presence of uterine pores and canals. This genus was characterised especially by the occurrence of a uterine opening in the middle of the dorsal surface of the ripe segment (p, 701). This canal was stated to be formed externally by an invagina- tion of the cuticular region and was surrounded by cuticle and subcuticular muscles, the circular fibres of the latter becoming modified to form the longitudinal musculature of the tube, while the longitudinal fibres changed direction to surround the canal as a kind of circular sheath. Along the canal were seen abundant cells, probably connective tissue cells or myoblasts. The diagnosis (p. 702) included a number of characters which are common to Telrabothrius and most other members of the Tetrabothriidae, the only additional feature being the presence of the dorsally-placed uterine canal and pore, In the original account (1917) P. setigera Szp. was named as type, but in the larger description (1925) no genotype was mentioned, though P. siedlecki was the first of the series, In a brief communication later (1931), this latter species was definitely designated.as type. The forms described as new in 1917 were P. setigera, P, kowalewskii, P. fragilis and its varieties exulans and fult- ginosa, P, siedleckit, P, brevis, P. fuhrmanni and P. longissima. Yn the account given in 1925, P. setigera and P. kowalewskii were not described; P, fragilis became P. fragilis var. capensis, while P. fragilis exulans became typical P. fragilis; P. macrocwrosa was described as a new species; and P. stedlicku (1917, nec. 1925), according to Fuhrmann (1932, 26), seems to have been suppressed or else incorporated in some other species without any mention of it, since P. stedleckit (1925) is a different species. Fuhrmann stated that the last- named was really a renaming of P. setigera, and that P. macrocirrosa was a synonym of the suppressed P. kRowalewskit, In the same papers, Szpotanska described a number of new species of Tetrabothrius from southern petrels and albatrosses. The 1917 list included T. magnus, T. minutus, T. polaris, T. intermedius var. exulans, T. pseudoporus, and T. valdiviae, In her later paper (1925) the following were not mentioned amongst those described :-—T. polaris, T. intermedius exulans, and T, pseudoporus; 165 but the following new species was added:—T. kowalewskii; and T. heterochius Dies was listed by her (1925, 724) as a Porotaenia. Fuhrmann (1932, 29) stated that T. intermedius exulans Szp, 1917, T. kowalewskti Szp. 1925, together with T. antarcticus Fuhrm. 1921, were all synonyms of T. polaris Szp. 1917, Porotaenia, according to the diagnosis, differs from Tetrabothrius and Chaetophallus only in possessing uterine pores in its ripe segments, these structures being indicated in Szpotanska’s figures (figs. 9a, 12, 13b). The genus must, of course, stand or fall on the characters exhibited by its genotype, P. setigera (syn. P. siedleckti Szp. 1925). An examination of the account given in 1925 (p. 702-6) of specimens from Diomedea melanophrys and Phoebeiria fuliginosa, indicates that the characters possessed by the atrium and cirrus are those of Chaetophallus. As undoubted species of the latter genus all possess either uterine pores or a rudiment of the dorsal uterine canal, P. setigera must be assigned to Chaetophallus, of which genus Porotaenia must be now regarded as a synonym. In her account of P. siedleckit, the author referred to Chaetophallus robustus var. fuliginosa as having the vas deferens and ejaculatory canal similarly lined by cilia or by setae. She also mentioned that the specimens from Phoebetria fuliginosa possessed anatomical features suggesting the assignment of such material to Porotaenia setigera. If we compare P, siedleckii (1925) with Chaetophallus setigerus Fuhr- mann (1921, 509) from Diomedea sp. collected by the “Gauss” Expedition, it seems to us that, in spite of a few small differences, they must be regarded as belonging to the same species. At any rate, C. setigerus Fuhrmann cannot now remain valid because it is a homonym, if not a synonym, of C. setigerus (Szp. 1917). I would suggest that the latter has as synonyms Porotaenia setigera Szp. 1917, P. siedlecku Szp. 1925, Chaetophallus musculosus var. fuliginosus Szp., and C. setigerus Fuhrmann 1921, Two other species described as belonging to Porotaenia are now assigned to Chaetophallus because of the characters of the cirrus and atrial region:—C. fuhr- manni (Szp.) and C. longissimus (Szp.). The remaining species of Porofeenia are now allotted to Tetrabothrius, as several species of the latter possess either uterine pores and dorsal canals, or vestiges of the latter:—T. fragilis (Szp.) and its varieties fuliginosa and exulans (her var. capensis 1925 being the type form of T. fragilis 1917, according to Fuhrmann 1932); T. kowalewsku (Szp. 1917) syn, Porot. macrocirrosa Szp. 1925, nec. T. kowalewskii Szp. 1925; and T. brevis (Szp.). Porotaenia heteroclita (Dies) Szp. 1925, cari be added to the synonymy of T. heteroclitus. Fuhrmann (1932) has already stated that her Chaetophallus musculosus is a synonym of C. uwmbrellus (Fuhrm.). The first to call attention to the presence of the uterine structure was Spatlich (1909, 573, pl. xxviii, fig. 31), who referred to a string or strand of cells with numerous nuclei and extending from the dorsal side of the most anterior part. of the uterus between the transverse and longitudinal musculature to reach the cuticle, Its structure did not allow him to conclude definitely what it was, but he thought it probably represented the rudiment of a uterine duct. He found the structure in two out of three species of Tetrabothrius investigated, viz.: T. laccocephalus and T. macrocephalus (i.e., T. imimerinus). Fuhrmann (1921) reported that in most species of Tetrabothrius there was a dorsal median cell-strand extending from the uterus to the cuticle (p. 504), but apparently not forming a canal in T. diomedea (p. 501), T. pseudoporus (p. 504), and T. antarcticus (p. 505), In the case of another member of the letrabothriidae, Chaetophallus wmbrella, he gave a figure (p. 508, fig. 91) of a longitudinal section 166 showing the cell-strand communicating with the exterior, but without developing any lumen in the segments examined. The outer part of it came into relation with a definite depression in the cuticle. In the closely related C. setigerus, Fuhr- mann (1921, 510) mentioned that the strand was developed early and that in quite ripe segments there was a relatively large dorsal aperture lined by invaginated cuticle, such segments being found empty. He could not determine whether the canal was formed by a tearing of the strand, such as is known to occur in certain of the Ichthyotaeniidae, or whether it became hollowed out normally, the former view being more probable. The opening appeared very late. Nybelin (1922) referred to this cell-strand or to the uterine canal when deal- ing with certain Tetrabothriidae, and in his diagnosis of the latter stated (p. 194) that a uterine dorsal opening might be present, rudimentary or absent. In his account of Priapocephalus grandis he stated that from ten to twelve, or even more, such cell-strands were present, penetrating between the median longitudinal muscle bundles, and that in oldest proglottids the dorsal wall of the uterus possessed diverticula reaching almost to the cuticle. This multiplication of open- ings was similar to that found by LaRue, Beddard and Rudin in some Tetra- phyllidea. The presence of numerous rudimentary uterine pores was mentioned as one of the generic characters of Priapocephalus. He did not know whether the actual pores were developed in this genus. In regard to Chaetophallus (p. 199) he stated that only one such rudimentary opening was present in proglottids, but that, as far as known, the strobila always developed a uterine canal and pore in very late segments. In his diagnosis of Tetrabothrius, Nybelin (1922, p. 202) mentioned that the rudimentary uterine opening was sometimes fairly definite and provided with a lumen, somctimes there was only a parenchymatous cell-strand, and sometimes the structure was absent. He stated that the genus occurred in birds and in toothed whales. It is, however, met with in baleen whales as well, e.g., T. affinis, T. wilsont and T. rundi in species of Balaenoptera. He reported the presence of the structure in T. polyorchis (pp. 201, 202, 203, and figure) where it developed a lumen in old segments, as it did also in T. erostris and T. triangularis, he latter species was made subsequently the type of a new genus, Strobilocephalus, by Baer (1932). Szpotanska’s findings in the case of species of Porotaenia (1917; 1925; 1929) have already been referred to, the genus being erected on account of the presence of uterine pores in ripe proglottids. In 1929 Nybelin erected Neotetrabothrium for N. pellucidum Nyb. and N. eudyplidis Lonnberg from certain penguins, his diagnosis (p. 508) indicating that the uterine opening was rudimentary, but penetrating to the surface exception- ally in final segments. Fuhrmann (1931, 408), in his diagnosis of Tetrabothriidae referred to the presence ol a dorsal uterine opening which was usually rudimentary, and gave a figure of the condition present in Chaetophallus umbrella (fig. 382). In 1932 (fig. 3) he reproduced the same figure. In this latter work, he drew attention to the confusion regarding Szpotanska’s nomenclature and indicated much of its synonymy. He regarded Porotaenia as valid, giving as its features the presence of a dorsal uterine pore, all other characters being those of Tetrabothrius. In my recent examination of Antarctic material, ripe segments of the species identified by Leiper and Atkinson (1915) as T. cylindraceus, from the skua, Catharacta maccormicki, were found to possess very definite uterine pores varying in size, such segments containing less eggs than younger proglottids, no doubt due to their escape through the aperture. 167 No information is available as to whether the structure is represented in Anophryocephalus, while Baer’s paper dealing with Tetragonocotyle is not avail- able for reference. Apart from these two, the remaining genera of the Tetra- bothriidae all exhibit it in some degree of development, either in ail known species of the genus, or in some of them. No doubt if sufficiently late proglottids, especially those normally detached and lying free in the intestine, were examined, many more species would be added to the list of those known to possess a definite pore. In view of: the above remarks, there can be no justification for the retention of the genus Porotaenia, and its species have therefore been distributed to Chaetophallus and Tetrabothrius, according to the structure of the genital atrium, the type becoming Chaetophallus setigerus (Szp.). REFERENCES. 1932. Baer, J. G—Contribution a l’étude des cestodes de cétacés. Rev. Suisse Zool., 39, 1932, 195-228. 1921. FunrmMann, O.—Die Cestoden. Deutsche Stid-Polar Exp., 16 (Zool. 8), 1921, 469-524, 1931. FunrRMANN, O.—Cestodes (Cyclophyllidea)—in Kukenthal and Krum- bach, Handb. d. Zool., 2, 1931, 335-416. 1932. FuurmMann, O.—Les Tenias d’oiseaux. Univ. Neuchatel Mem. 8, 383 pp. 1922. Nypetin, O.—Anatomisch-systematische Studien iiber Pseudophyllideen. Goteborg Kgl. Vetensk. Handb., 26, 1920 (1922), 1-228. 1929. Nype.in, O.—Saugetier und Vogelcestoden von Juan Fernandez. Nat. Hist. Juan Fernandez and Easter Island; 3, 1929, 493-523. 1909, SpaTLicH, W.—Untersuchungen tuber Tetrabothrien. Zool. Jahrb. Anat., 28, 1909, 539-594. 1917. SzpotansKa, I—Un nouveau genre, un sous-genre, et quelques nouvelles espéces de la famille Tetrabothriidae. Spraw. Pos. Towarz. Nauk, Warsz. Wyd. Mat. Pr., 10, 1917, 909-921. 1925. SzpotansKka, I—Etude sur les Tetrabothriides des Procellariiformes. Bull. Acad. Polonaise Sci. Lettres. Sci. Nat., 1925, 673-727. 1929, SzpotansKa, I—Recherches sur quelques Tetrabothrides d’oiseaux. Bull. Acad. Polonaise Sci. Lettres. B. Sci. Nat., 1928 (1929), 129—152. 1931. SzpotansKa, I.—Apropos du genre Porotaenia. Ann, Parasit, hum. comp., 9, 1931, 484. A COMPARATIVE STUDY OF THE BLACK EARTHS OF AUSTRALIA AND THE REGUR OF INDIA. BY J. S. HOSKING, M.Sc Summary The possible relationship between the true black earths or Chernozems and the Regur or black cotton soils has long been recognised by the Russian school of pedologists (Glinka, 1914)) and it was shown by Prescott (1931) from a consideration of climatic conditions that the black earths of Australia in all probability belonged to the same soil group, with a greater affinity to the Indian than to the Russian group. It seemed of interest, therefore, to make comparisons, so far as soil samples were available, between the Australian black soils and the corresponding Indian types, and to determine their points of difference and resemblance. For this purpose a number of soil samples were secured, respresenting soil profiles from various localities in the black soil zones of New South Wales and Queensland and from localities selected by the local agricultural chemists in the Presidencies of Bombay and of Madras and the Central Provinces of India. 168 A COMPARATIVE STUDY OF THE BLACK EARTHS OF AUSTRALIA AND THE REGUR OF INDIA. By J. 5. Hosk1Nc, M.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute. {Read August 9, 1935.] I-INTRODUCTION. The possible relationship between the true black earths or Chernozems and the Regur or black cotton soils has long been recognised by the Russian school of pedologists (Glinka, 1914), and it was shown by Prescott (1931) from a con- sideration of climatic conditions that the black earths of Australia in all probability belonged to the same soil group, with a greater affinity to the Indian than to the Russian group. It seemed of interest, therefore, to make comparisons, so far as soil samples were available, between the Australian black soils and the corresponding Indian types, and to determine their points of difference and resemblance. For this purpose a number of soil samples were secured, respresenting soil profiles from various localities in the black soil zones of New South Wales and Queensland and from localities selected by the local agricultural chemists in the Presidencies of Bombay and of Madras and the Central Provinces of India. The Australian samples have been obtained partly through the interest of the Division of Animal Nutrition of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, and through the courtesy of the Queensland Department of Agriculture. In addition a number of profiles have been collected by officers of the Soils Division during visits to Queensland. The Indian soils were obtained partly through the courtesy of Dr. B. A. Keen, at that time Director of the Research Institute at Pusa. II—GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE AUSTRALIAN BLACK EARTHS AND REGUR SOILS. The Australian black earths (Prescott, 1931 and 1933) develop to any con- siderable extent only in New South Wales and Queensland and the Indian regur soils (Schokalsky, 1933) in Peninsular India, in regions of summer rainfall, on heavy parent material most frequently of basaltic origin, either from the rocks themselves in situ or over alluvial deposits formed from them. The Australian soils extend from subtropical to tropical latitudes, while the regur soils are essentially tropical in their devclopment. The limitations to the geographical distribution of both types can be shown to be imposed by the geological exposures of both countries and by climatic factors. A first limiting factor in the more extensive formation of the Australian soils, under presumably favourable climatic conditions, is the restricted distribu- tion, not only of basalt but of geological formations such as calcareous clays and shales, the weathering and subsequent disintegration and transport of which would give rise to suitable fine-grained material. The Australian black earths find their best-known development on the Darling Downs, to the west of the Great Divide as a practically continuous formation, except where replaced by red to chocolate soils of the red loam type. [Extensive black earth plains are also developed over basalt or basaltic alluvium on the Peak and Meteor Downs to the north. Although widespread, the soils here are by no 169 means so continuous as they are on the Darling Downs, their continuity being interrupted by numerous ranges. The, black soils are here associated with soils of the red-brown earth and other reddish-coloured sandy types. Where soils are formed over alluvium from both basaltic and sandy carboniferous formations, grey to grey-brown soils, intermediate in character between the typical black earths and weakly podsolised soils, are to be found. Mr. R. G. Thomas, who has made detailed observations on these soils in the field, reports that in New South Wales shallow soils, similar to those at Meteor and Orion Downs, are to be found at Dalkeith. At Merriwa, Murrurrundi and Glen Innes the soils are also formed over basalt, but are much deeper and show more similarity with those of the Darling Downs. In New South Wales the black earths find their greatest development over the alluvial deposits on the Liverpool Plains to the west of the Dividing Range. The soils are here greyer in shade and are associated with extremely sandy, weakly podsolised soils which cross the plains in the form of low ridges. The Callide and Upper Burdett Valleys afford examples of black soil formation mainly on > ete OX ates 7.9 SOY reece SATURATION DEFICIT (INCHES OF MERCURY) UL] Initen Hager. ESSE) ausivalion Bleck Earths. RAINPALL (THCHES) Fig. 1. Showing the climatic limits of black earths in Australia and regur of India. alluvial deposits derived from carboniferous slates, clays and shales. In the Dawson valley they are formed over somewhat coarser grained alluvial deposits, a fact which is reflected in the lighter texture of the soils. Towards the northern boundary of their occurrence the black soils become more limited in extent, being restricted to plains of relatively small dimensions. The extensive basaltic outflows associated with the so-called Great Basalt Wall to the north-west of Charters Towers and at the head of the Burdekin valley have been observed by Prescott (privately communicated) to be covered with gravelly ironstone soils, and only occasionally to give rise to typical black earths as observed at Mount Emu plains and at Chudleigh Park. This occurrence further confirms the theory put forward by Prescott (1931) that the further possible extension of this zone into tropical Australia is restricted by the existence of much tableland country, representing an uplifted peneplain surface, which is still in the process of dissection. This tableland and “desert” country of lateritic character dominates the surface features in Cape York Peninsula,.in North Australia, and in the Kimberleys in Western Australia, 170 The extension of the black soil zone to the west is limited by the more arid conditions, conducive to the formation of the grey and brown soil type. The soils of the Victoria River, the Barkly Tableland and the Fitzroy and Ord Rivers, often. referred to as black soils are, in the light of present information, regarded as belonging to this more arid group. Black soil plains, probably of true black earth character, are reported by Easton (1922) as being frequent in the North Kim- berley region. ‘To the east of the main zone occurrences of black earths formed directly over basalt are common in isolated areas in the vicinities of Brisbane, Maryborough, Bundaberg and Rockhampton, although podsolised soils are the normal development on the more sandy parent materials in the region. A more complete understanding of the association and distribution of the regur soils has been made possible by the work of Schokalsky (1933), which was published during the course of this investigation. Following an intensive survey of the literature, and after consideration of reports from India, Schokalsky divided the black cotton soils of India into three classes, dependent mainly on the texture and depth of the profile: (1) Black soils, thick and heavy; (2) black soils, medium and light; (3) soils in valleys of rivers flowing through regur area. Of these the first class may be considered true regur, the second to include the more shallow and immature profiles, whilst the third embraces thé more sandy soils of a more purely alluvial nature. From a study of the geology of India (Wadia, 1926) and the soil map of Schokalsky, the extensive development of the regur soils throughout Peninsular India would appear to owe its origin to the widespread occurrence of the basaltic rocks of the Deccan traps which today cover an area of 200,000 square miles, apart from large tracts of country in Gujerat, Kathiawar, Central India and the Central Provinces. Over an area, therefore, stretching south from the Satpura ranges to the Bellary uplands and from the Western Ghats to longitude 80° and extending down the valley of the Godavari almost to the coast, there is an almost continuous area of regur soils, broken only by salinised soils, by lateritic soils occurring as cappings in the more elevated regions and by soils of coarser texture. The lateritic capping is more frequent in the southern part of this area than in the north, and plays an important role in the soil development of Peninsular India. The most typical deep profiles of the regur occur in this area on the alluvium of the river valleys and on the plains of Berar, Khandesh and Khandwa. The southern extension of these soils along the coast below Broach is limited. by the rapidly increasing rainfall conditions conducive to the formation of red soils on the hill slopes over heavy parent material, and of podsolie soils on the more sandy deposits of the coastal margin. North of the Vindhyan ranges the country is composed mainly of crystalline rocks and unaltered and metamorphosed sediments, with only occasional basaltic intrusions. The black soils are here confined to the basaltic plateaux and to plains, watered by the tributaries of the Ganges which rise in, or transverse, these basaltic outcrops, On the plateaux the associated soils are mainly of lateritic character. The further possible extension of the black soils to the north-east is restricted by the existence of the crystalline and gneissic rocks of the Bundelkhand tableland, and to the north-west of the Aravalli mountains, into the Rajputana State, by the increasing conditions of aridity, giving rise eventually to the development of the desert sands of Thar. South of latitude 15° the regur soils become extremely limited in extent, owing to the widespread occurrence of the crystalline and gneissic rocks of the Archaean system and of various unaltered and metamorphosed sediments. Red gravelly ironstone or lateritic soils, presumably of a similar character to those developed in Northern Australia, dominate the surface features here. On the 171 Bellary uplands and the plateau of Mysore black soils are restricted to isolated areas over intruded basaltic rocks or the more fine-grained syenite gneisses, and to certain of the valleys over heavy parent alluvium. To the east of these high- lands, in the Cuddapah and Kurnool districts, the regur soil is again widespread and is seen to develop over limestone and calcareous clays and shales in addition to alluvium of a trappean origin. Along the Coromandel coast the soils develop primarily over metamorphic sediments of the clay and shale variety, as well as over alluvium which is somewhat coarser in texture than that of true trappean origin, a fact which is reflected in the lighter texture of these soils. ITI—CLIMATIC FACTORS AFFECTING THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE SOIL TYPES. In the consideration of the climatic control of soil type, three main factors are generally considered to have a bearing on its distribution: the mean annual rainfall, the control of its efficiency by evaporation, and the seasonal incidence of the rainfall. The first two controls are treated graphically in fig, 1, where the climatic limits of the Australian black earths, as imposed by rainfall and atmospheric saturation deficit, are considered. The rainfall varies in the extreme from 15 inches to 40 inches, although more generally from 20 inches to 35 inches, with corresponding saturation deficits ranging from 0-40 inches to 0-15 inches. These figures show a corresponding variation in the annual Myer P/sd. ratio from approximately 50 to 230. When these two controls are treated in a similar manner for the regur soils (based on their distribution as mapped by Schokalsky), a variation in the rainfall from 17-5 inches to 53 inches with saturation deficits ranging from 0°55 inches to 0°15 inches was found. Although the rainfall figures are so much higher there is, owing to the higher temperatures, a similar control in its efficiency by evaporation, and the limiting values for the Mycr P/sd. ratios are almost identical. The affinity between the two types is strikingly brought out when climatic limits are considered on an annual basis (see fig. 1). Sight, however, must not be lost of the fact that these limits are exceedingly wide, The seasonal influence of the rainfall is, in both cases, one of summer maximum, but whereas in India this incidence varies from 75 to 98 per cent. during the summer months (May to October), it is very much less in Australia, varying from 55 per cent. in the southern latitudes to 84 per cent. at Mount Emu plains, during the summer months (November to April). These soils are thus seen to develop under climatic conditions of rather wide limits, when the latter are considered on an annual rather than on a seasonal basis. IV—MORPHOLOGY OF THE PROFILE. These soils are characterised by their grey to black colour, their extremely heavy texture, and by the presence of calcitim carbonate in the form of streaks, irregular spots and isolated concretions, not only throughout the profile but frequently concentrated in a more or less definite layer (Kunkar) below the surface (A) horizon. That this calcium carbonate owes its origin almost entirely to the action of existent soil-forming processes is assured, since the parent material is most often quite free from it. The characteristic black colour of the regur soils has attracted the attention of many investigators, and various theories have been put forward to account for this property. Leather (1898) attempted to explain the colour on a purely mineralogical basis, while Annett (1909) came to the conclusion, from a study of similar soils, of a purely trappean origin, that while organic matter did play a part, the role of the titaniferous magnetite was the more important. Harrison 172 and Ramaswami Sivan (1912) discounted this theory, owing to the almost entire absence of magnetite from those regur soils formed over metamorphic rocks in the Madras Presidency, and suggested a modified mineralogical basis in which “colloidal hydrated double iron and aluminium silicates” and “an organic com- pound of iron and aluminium” were the direct cause of the colour. In a recent discussion of similar soils commonly occurring in East Africa, Vageler (1935) suggests that the black colour is not due to humus but to the presence of iron oxides at a low degree of oxidation. Since the above investigations the use of hydrogen peroxide to remove organic matter from the soil, developed by Robinson and Jones (1925), has become general, and it is now possible to show that the organic matter alone satisfactorily accounts for the black colour. These heavy alkaline soils require pre-treatment with acid (Hosking, 1932) to make the peroxide treatment effective. The treat- ment results in a change from black to a colour ranging from light grey to brown. These black soils have not only the characteristic texture of a medium to heavy clay but also the corresponding secondary physical properties, such as a high water-holding capacity, stickiness when wet, and a high shrinking and swell- ing capacity. During the dry season of the year they crack considerably, fissures up to 4 inches or even 8 inches wide and over 3 feet deep become common, and the soils develop a distinctly columnar structure which persists throughout the year in the deeper layers, The surface is frequently self-mulching, and when dry has a distinctly granular structure, the clods breaking up into smaller-sized grains of about pea size. The soils become markedly cloddy in the sub-surface, with a distinct nut structure which passes down into the characteristic columnar formation. The soils developed over alluvium in both countries and over certain of the metamorphic sediments in India are usually deep, whereas those formed over decomposing basalt or other parent material im sitw are much shallower. These deeper profiles usually average about 6 feet and upwards of 15 feet in depth. The shallower profiles averaging 3 feet in depth and as shallow as mere surface covers are representative of the basaltic tablelands and plateaux. Soils intermediate in character are to be found in both countries. Although the soils are typically black in the surface horizon, the subsoil colour in both types is modified not only by the occurrence of calcium carbonate but also by the nature of the parent material, and varies generally from grey through grey-brown to brown. On hill slopes there is a general gradation from deep mature profiles in the valleys to mere skeletal soils over basalt a situ, Frequently the surface soil on the hill slope is completely removed, and the subsoil, often quite brown in colour, is exposed over wide areas. This succession is typically illustrated by the three profiles from Ilparran in New South Wales, which appear to compare with the similar succession in the regur soils developed on the plateau slopes in India. Where soils of either type show in the mature profile a high proportion of the sand fraction, the admixture of material from coarse-grained sediments or crystal- line rocks is evident. his is illustrated in the samples from the Dawson Valley in Australia and those from Hoshangabad in the Nabada Valley and certain soils from the Madras Presidency. ‘l'ypical profiles are described in detail in the tables. of the appendix. V—LABORATORY INVESTIGATION. In all, the soils from 18 Australian and 13 Indian sites have been examined for mechanical and chemical characteristics. Unfortunately, from only four of the Indian sites were profile samples taken, the remainder representing merely the surface horizon, 173 While the data are recorded in detail in an appendix to this paper, the main characteristics of all surface samples are summarised in Table 1], and those for typical profiles in Table III. (1) MecnaAnicaL ANALYSIS. All the samples, both of the Australian black earths and of the Indian regur profiles, fall into a highly characteristic grouping with respect to the mechanical composition of the mineral fraction, free from calcium carbonate. ‘The main characteristic is an extremely high clay content, ranging from 50 per cent. to 80 per cent., samples from less developed and skeletal profiles only showing less than 50 per cent. There is a low to moderately high silt content, which varies in the complete range from 11 per cent. to 33 per cent. cLaY CLAY + STILE @ Surface sample. @ Subcurface sampte. @ Subsesl sample. FINE SAND COARSE SAND Sut gann baka gap FANE Say CCARSR SAND Fig. 2. Distribution triangles illustrating the mechanical analyses of the Australian black earths (A. & B.) and Indian regur (C. & D.). In figure 2 the mechanical analyses of all samples are plotted on distribution triangles. It will be seen that the texture of these soils places them in a restricted range of classes. The fully mature samples fall into the heavy clay class, while the texture for the remaining soils which are more or less admixed with the parent “AWOO[IA Buy}as IY} JO wWYyUIVsoT “A BOT » 174 1-8Z P62 Pet 9-Sp TIP +65 £25 2-29 | OS WL AeIQ [eI0y | PS > | i I aecea £9 0°8 Z-02 1-02 | 9 2-61 $-€2 1-02 | 0-92 000-Z PS 99 00-§ 6-2 | 9-02 | OFE-0 00:$ 9 O1-9 y-1Z 12 Z-€1 $-Sz | 612 8-62 8-FI £9 0zI-0 O19 OF S404 j 6-6 68 | 9820-0 fL£> % % % ye v % | % % gzez | Oz ezez ozoz | sLzee% Z122 0602 | £802 a 2 “7 ut | A a Jo + STIOS UNDA NVICNI sajomied J Bor] Jo JoyotTeIp JO WUNE) = sanjea Suryry daddn [eoaioay y, O-TE | 9-€¢ Le 9-05 | €-SS | LSS £65 | +29 | HOS UE AvD [eIOL tS-b > Z-I1 | z-61 16 9-€1 | 6°8 OZ | keg | Z-Z1 000-2 PS-F 9 00-5 Se | 8-9 eb | ( ze z8 Ore-0 00-5 ©} 01-9 0-9 | 9-0 Ort O-Z£ +-9F | Leh 0-61 8-6¢ 0zZI-0 01-9 91 EL-g €-01 | O-£ £61 | | $62 ez | 9820-0 L£:L> % | % % % % % % | % BLLT | ISke STZI S16 | 1121 Z16 P8LI | 606 a ur ah SHLUVA MOVIA NVITVULSAV sajonsed jo BOTq0 JOIWUIP JO WUT) sanpea Burpy jaddn yeotja10ay JT, ‘smog anfay upipuy pun syiavg Ywig uoyoasnp autos fo uoyrpaf (oj ayz 1 yuasaad suoysvaf Snorapa fo yunown ay}, Ourmoys a1qv 7, ‘| aavy ‘Plog Jo ‘sus QoT Jod syuayeamba uressyypiyy = *a'S-ur y 175 | | | Sb-0 | 60-0 820-0 9°83 Gro | 61-2 | 9:0 | pdb $°9 0-01 Medios 09-0 | 80-0 | 620-0 | 6-8 £e€ | Ges 9-0 | 1-82 gg | geg a10yEquITOy 98-0 | 90-0 Tr0-0 £-3 L bP 79°2 9-0 | I-lb be | Og tunqun> Zy-0 | S0-0 | 6€0-0 2:8 (Ass £6°2 6:0 | 6-Sb beZ £6 EyUnyIo sy Lb°0 0-0 ¥c0-0 $-6 S-Tp 0S | 9-0 | Ose £-9 ¢-9 Lyyedepe y c£-0 80-0 c£0-0 $6 O-Pb Se-S 8-0 | Fee £9 6:9 wopy | Aouapisarg seapeyy 19-0 60-0 | ¥S0-0 O08 5 = cS belo | 6% od S-01 and3en es-0 80-0 60-0 £°8 e-9 er-0 eI | ges veZ I-0F and3eN sr-0 IT-0 | O0£€0-0 $:8 0-2 0f-+6 O-T | 2-Sb 6°6 6-8 elOyY 19-0 | 90-0 | £S0-0 Lk 9-0¢ SPO 0-1 | £62 op rand peqesueysozy SaoUIAOIg [BI}UID 9F-0 b0-0 820-0 8-8 Q-€9 | §0-0 Oi | 6-25 c-9 =| «(9-0T Lesuuy ve-0 | ST-0 Sr0-0 | 9:8 8-£2 80-0 $-T | 0-19 8-8 cel doyyery 99-0 IT-0 S£0-0 T-8 O-PS 60-0 £:0 9-Sr 09 |} 98 yseorg | Aouapisaig Kequiog ; —trpuy 80-0 #S-0 80-0 9-9 re 00-0 fe £98 £01 9-01 ueised]] Te-0 Sc-0 £T-0 $-9 7 00-0 e-S S°LP be 8°6 uviied|y 9b-0 ££-0 61-0 $-9 9-6 | 00-0 94 Ley 9-01 ¥:8 ueled]y ££-0 ST-0 cT-0 ££ 9-29 60-0 €-€ £-¢¢ 9-6 POT Ipun INN Wl Sb-0 ¥I-0 60-0 £3 S-19 8e°S Oo | Shs cel Fel EMILIO A be-0 0£-0 £1-0 £9 — 00-0 ge 6°66 O-TT 6-01 quexed cb-0 Te-0 Si-O | O-8 g°£9 £0°0 6-¢ e+e 6-OT | ell yyeyeq | sayeaq yng Many zé-0 | z0-0 | €90-0 | 2-8 8-29 | 72-0 pe £:65 £9 6ZI usazuog 9F-0 40-0 OT-0 | 0-6 wT 6r-T L T+TS 8-8 Fl auodTeg 61-0 ¥0-0 60-0 2°83 1-96 yS-0 S:¢ 9-05 9°£ --OT uo se-0 | sto | 21-0 | 5-8 — | soo | be | gss | z-6 | tet e101 9-0 £T-0 21-0 8-3 8-29 Tr-0 Ore $-29 v-6 ral BIOIUIYY Z$-0 | ZI-0 91-0 | S-Z a 91-0 Gb. 6SE 8-8 PO AayjeA uosmeq TS-0 OT-0 ST-0 8-9 Pi 00°0 Iv O-TE 9-¢ es AayeA uosMmecy 95°0 0T-0 $1-0 9-L oi 50-0 Ze $-9P £:8 0-8 AayeA uosme v1-0 £0°0 60-0 LL FBZ £0-0 Le £-09 2:6 c-el sumo UOlIO cre 90-0 ae ce Bi ae 4 2-85 €-8 | €-21 sumog 109}27q * 02-0 . s i | 60-0T €-O1 9-€£ T-1z T-eT Jeq ysteypn urjsugen % | % | % | na [assum] oe | oo | 9 | me | fgg, | hee Seino Saat oR osx °0"d N uoloray | saseg arge | fo00rD qa}He YW | ARQ woIyUsy | 91njsIo PL Extiny a1eig pue s1yUN0g yseiog laieqdsoyg| usF03}1N -asueyoX |azeuoqse9 DUeZIQ HO ssO’T Top | apie ALITVIO1 ‘saqdmivs aapfans fo pyog poykjup fo uostapduoD ‘Tl alavl 176 material from which they are formed, seldom falls below that of a medium clay. Of the Australian soils, sample number 1221 having the texture of a clay loam, is the subsoil of a skeletal profile and is composed mainly of decomposing basaltic material. Figures 2B and 2p, in which the clay and silt are plotted together, bring out more clearly the high content of the fine-grained constituents. The low percentage of coarse sand, virtually absent in most soils, is to be noted. An excep- tion to this rule is seen in certain of the Indian soils. PERCENTAGE’ SUMMATION 7.0 7.73 8.10 | 5,0 4.54 7.54 0.54 2.54 LOG. SETTLING VELOCITY Fig. 3. Summation Curves, illustrating mechanical analyses of Australian black earths. In order 1o obtain more complete information on the particle size of the con- stituents of the clay, further fractionation by long sedimentation was carried out on certain of the soils, with the results given in Table I. The complete mechancial com- position of the mineral fraction free from calcium carbonate of these soils, rang- ing from the heaviest to the lightest variations for the Australian and Indian soils, is illustrated graphically by the mechanical analysis summation curves in figures 177 3 and 4, respectively. he very high content of the colloidal fraction is to be noted in. four of the five Australian soils analysed, where approximately 75 per cent. of the clay particles have a theoretical radius of less than 0-1, the particle clay size of maximum frequency of occurrence. The sample from Chudleigh Park (No. 3,451), however, has a much smaller content of this colloidal material, and in this respect shows more similarity with the Indian soils in which there is a more even distribution of the particles with a log V (cms./sec.) less than 4°54, 100 PERCENTAGE SUNMAT 1 ON LOG. SETTLING VELOCITY Fig. 4. Summation Curves, illustrating mechanical analyses of Indian regurs. For all soils there is, however, a rapidly decreasing content of the particles having a log V (cms./sec.) less than 6-0, Extrapolation of the curves indicate a final lower limit for the logarithmic settling velocity bewteen 7-0 and 75, a lower limit suggested by Robinson (1932) for all soils. The constancy of the mechanical composition of the mineral fraction of the soil throughout the profile, above the C. horizon, is clearly shown by the data in the various tables in the appendix. Taste III. Comparison of Typical Australian and Indian Profiles. oneg 178 elf sl sl eA L Si Pes ey ea rl JIATL oO — De) nN mo co co a toma —_ me fn . oS Ne) wn _ i —) —) wor} @ St] all sll sli oll wll sll iG Ns) a) Ne) ro) N im 7 ~S 8 0) ™ 00 Ne) wn on wd | FM aq — rm re) a Q WOTFEANIVS Maen 5 | & | ay | | & | | cs ] | 3 | | 3 | | | . oN + fo) oe) N + “4 wern| 2 ell =¢ll all sll all ell ell SN st Oo n wn uw neh eine | a | Q | io) i) i) N uonvey a Nt Rin RDO NNO Vtt OBA COA ‘ Ge PRESEN 900000 COCOA NINN COD DH HD GHG GD sasegaiqe | *; tAN BON NMG OMON DAV WOM DOM -oF UR OX ab CO COIN owt HOO Net ase NO eas en nun 1230. 2 RBNN win ©SS Coo IMA NAS NetteRants) if 0900 69 ~t Oo 00 aoe AQ Anm CON Uw NOD ee, BR SSS Wat SH4 SON Ssé0o S$S0 s9d0 GDP) S665 San wot $66 SSO SSO SooS _ BIA) . MBO Was SAN GOT HOS WtT ocooo o1uesIO ANS ANA MAF MMN COG FAN Foie ONO ONG MINN MTtO OOt OND Antes AqI0) SM S00 265 ton MtTO MHN BOS Nont XO un 69 WWW) LO LQ <> min Ww tos oo 0.00 un xt LO wnwst| 9 Vt STD Ate VTr SoM HOM ATT wo oT) BAAD NNO ANMW ARA Wwlrn wad wWwOww TRE th E ti NQtA TON ttt TAN CDA AND OONO anys 1oyy eo nee nea a ye SS a oe ts mike te aye : Rane C2OCO AAD COM MOM ANH COSCO = et td mot et Cs oe oe A oe Bt oe ol aarti O aa ao oO Q Q [aa] uozHOH tm ttm mm atm am ttm Aacam 2B ag poe et 8 aSQ aSR aSB ahQ oh nS ott | bal Ll me Cn awe | gdeqd |) = 1 | | | | 3 4dd ddd ddd ddd ddan ddd ddin 1 er] — ssa heel we E oar mt re Cee ny... are Rae w fs! Ss e 3 ah 5 S £ A sd o o os) had a e a el oD . S 5 o A oO a ap 4: 5 = ies c 3 = 'S = te Oo 3 °o a kL = an “al u _ a ae o Oo 4 = ra =< < a i a r 3 Ww) = a 3 cr) 3 a 6 | § S B a 7) a DH se = = = a 4 5 Ay b | a ni =e 3 So 3 E 2 — 4 s EQ z | 8 v 5 Atal 5 = < a Milligram equivalents per 100 gms. of Soil. * m.g.e 179 (2) Catcrum CARBONATE, The distribution of calcium carbonate throughout the profile has been dis- cussed in an earlier section. The actual content shows a wide range in both the Indian and Australian soils examined, the range being illustrated in Tables II and ITI of the text and in the various tables of the appendix, The range may vary even in restricted areas, but excepting where the soils are formed over sedimentary rocks mainly of a calcareous nature the values are usually low throughout the profiles, especially over basaltic parent material, where a definite layer of accumulation may be entirely absent. In Australia the highest values appear to occur at the extreme northern and southern limits, but otherwise there is no marked distribution in relation to geographical distribution. On the other hand, from the figures obtained for the soils examined, and from a con- sultation of other data, it is apparent that the content of the soils from the Bombay Presidency, in the Western Districts of Peninsular India, of trappean origin, show the lowest content, while those from the Madras Presidency and the Deccan Plateau, over calcareous and shaley sediments, show quite appreciable quantities even in the surface. Calcium carbonate may be entirely absent not only from the surface layer but also to varying depths in the profile; on the other hand, it may rise to quite appreciable values at depths shallower than nine inches, in which case it is present in quite large amounts in the lower layers. To what extent the calcium carbonate is replaced by magnesium carbonate has not been investigated. (3) Nirrocen, OrGanic CARBon AND ORGANIC MATTER, Under the treeless grassland conditions associated with the Australian soils, the source of supply of the organic matter consists mainly of gramineous and herbaceous plants, characterised by drought-resisting perennial grasses. Humi- fication proceeds to a much greater extent than under woodland conditions and the organic matter produced in the soil is particularly homogeneous in com- position, there being little, if any, woody material present. Free charcoal of such frequent occurrence in most Australian soils is almost, if not entirely, absent. The conditions are also ideal for the retention of this material, and consequently the soils are well supplied with organic matter to a depth of several feet. There is, however, a gradual falling off in the content with depth, With the aid of a conventional factor the content of the organic matter has been calculated from the organic carbon obtained from these soils. In general the amount in the surface appears to range from 2 per cent, to 5 per cent., although values as low as 1 per cent. and as high as 10 per cent. have been obtained. In the subsurface the limits in the range are about 1 per cent. lower, with only a slight further decrease in the subsoil, In contrast with the Australian soils, and despite the similar black colour, the content, as illustrated in the various tables, is exceedingly low in the Indian regur soils; in few of those examined does it rise above the lower limit of the former soils. The content in the surface ranges from only 0-5 per cent. to 1°5 per cent. with a mean valuc of less than 1 per cent. In the four profiles examined in detail, the content averaging 1:2 per cent. in the surface persists practically unaltered to about 4 feet, where there is a slight falling off in this amount to 0-8 per cent. Although the values are in general above 1°0 per cent. in the northern regions, it would appear that throughout the southern portion of the peninsula they do reach even this low figure. In previous records values as high as 10 per cent. have been given for regur soils. Such values evidently and solely iaken from the figures for loss on ignition are obviously unreliable. 180 In the surface the nitrogen content for Australian soils ranges from as low as 0°05 per cent. to about 0°2 per cent., although in the surface sample from Chudleigh Park a value as high as 0-45 per cent. was obtained. Most of the values fall between 0°08 per cent. and 0°18 per cent. The values for the sub- surface are somewhat lower, ranging from 0-04 per cent. to 0°18 per cent. Practically all the subsoil values are found between the narrow limits of 0-03 per cent. and 0:08 per cent. For regur soils the nitrogen content lies between the narrow limits of 0-028 per cent. and 0-054 per cent. (the lower limit of the former type), with a mean value of about 0.04 per cent. There is only a slight decrease in the content with depth, at about 4 feet, the mean value being about 0-03 per cent. NITROCEN(N) PERCENTAGE () 1.0 2.0 3.0 . 4.0 ORGANIC CARBON(C) PERCENTAGE Fig. 5. Illustrating the relationship between the carbon and nitrogen content of the black soils. Circles—Australian black earths; Squares—Indian regur; Block figures—Surface samples; Open figures—Subsoil samples. (One black earth not plotted contained 5-95 per cent. carbon and 0:44 per cent. nitrogen.) The relationship between the organic carbon content and the nitrogen content of the soils is illustrated graphically in figure 5, and in the form of frequency distribution in Table IV. As would be expected from a soil under grassland conditions, the ratios of carbon to nitrogen for the Australian soil covers a some- what restricted range, the values varying only from 13°5 to 1 to 18°5 to 1 in the surface, though widening somewhat in the subsurface and subsoils. The theoreti- cal frequency distribution curve (Hosking, 1935), calculated from the data for surface samples, is of the symmetrical type and shows the ratio of maximum frequency to occur at the mean value 16°2:1. For regur soils, the range from 181 | | oie | | 8£0-0 | pS0-0 | 820-0 | Zbz-0 | 098-0 zZs-0 S€0-0 | OST-O | 220-0 (¥) —-a9eyans. in3oy ueipul | | | 00-0 | O1T-0 | 290-0 | 911-0 | zs9-0 re-0 | 820-0 | 10r-0 | s80-0 (Omg) —_osqns €£0-0 | 8T-0 | 880-0 180-0 | ¢£9-0 gf-0 | 820-0 | 0s9°0 11-0 (OF @¥) s.8Emsqns | qyysed £50-0 | Ipr-O | ZET- 840-0 | £F9-0 Pr-O | «Fz0-0 | ZbS-0 e1-0 (V) —-aRyang | ~RTG ueyEysny % % % % | % % % % % {- | | f.2,1 | ak a5 uN | Xe ugayy uy | CXeyN | uray UA | xey ues] 1K | r? | Et NOZINOH “IIOS (x) (O°) Co%a) NGODOULIN HSVLOd GIOV DJINOHdSOHd ; “paumunxg snos anboy pun syravy yI0jq ut : UushoaN pup ysojog puv pip r4soydsoyg ajqnjos pip fo abuny puv anjp 4 uvayy ‘A dave =. A me = aes : I erp | OE eae ee ig ee ee a |e — | 7 } — Oa@% ag) _ fesqns Z alles ee I — | -— |) = | — |(€o gy) eeyimsqns | i =," 2 rad eee Z i Falinial g I an BE: (Vv) soBjmg | IMBaY uerpUy Se le lee eae Zs BY r | t I tr |— |---| — |] t j@aea) — posqng | aa Dl ree ne ¢ € zg I —-—{[7 }]— | — | — (a gy) exepnsqns | qyseg ca = if é ¢ 9 £ T I — om eae — _ (v) aoepnsg | you ueypensny st ar ae 4 | - i | of | of | er | 4t | ot | st | tt f et | at | wm | or} 6 | 1Z O}4 fos Ol Q} Oo} oO} fox} QO} oO} 0} 0} Oo} 0} mao! oz | of | gt | Zt | 91 | SE i +L | 2b dat | It | ot | 6 8 NOZINOH | FAAL ‘TLOS (1=N) OLLVY NADOULIN OL NOdUuvo ‘unbay wolpuy pun Syany yonjig uDYDsjSnP ayy fo owny uaboan 0} uogsny ayy fo ajqny uoungiysiq Kouanbaay ‘AI STIvV L 182 8:3 to 21-3 for the surface is somewhat wider than for the former type, although the mean value is lower, occurring at 14-1 to 1. There is a slight increase in this ratio with depth. Although at first sight the divergence in the organic matter content would appear to constitute a distinct bar to a favourable comparison of the two types, a consideration of certain differences in the climatic factors would appear to make this difference a natural one. It must, however, be understood that nearly all Indian regurs have been cultivated for centuries, whereas all the Australian samples were taken in uncultivated country wherever practicable. On the average the organic matter content of the Australian soils is approximatcly four times that in the Indian soils. Applying the formula of Jenny (1928) for the amount of organic matter to be expected in soils of the semi-arid type, the difference in the mean annual temperature of the sites sampled would appear to account for a 50 per cent. lower content in the regur soils. Owing to this much higher tempera- ture in India, chemical decomposition as apart from microbiological activity would also become marked. The combined effect of these two factors might, therefore, conceivably be able to account for this large difference. (4) Reaction. As would naturally be expected from the content of calcium carbonate and a study of the replaceable bases, the soils are essentially alkaline. Where the content of calcium carbonate is virtually absent, and despite the high content of replaceable bases, the Australian soils are, on occasion, owing to the high buffer- ing action of the organic matter, found to be neutral to slightly acid in reaction, with the values as low as pH 6°5, Since the organic content of the Indian soils is invariably low, no such effect would appear to occur, and the lowest reaction value observed is pH 7:7. Despite the low values for certain of the Australian soils, the maximum frequency of occurrence shows the same range as do the Indian soils, from pH 7'5 to 9-9. There is generally a slight increase in the pH] values with depth, but occasionally, and despite the fact of an increasing calcium carbonate content the pH value may be slightly lower in the subsoil of the Aus- tralian soils. For the Indian soils there is a maximum frequency of occurrence between pH 8-0 and pH 9-0, with only a slight increase in the alkalinity with depth. For surface samples the medial value is pH 8°6. Owing to the occurrence of the more acid soils the medial value for Australian soils is lower, lying between pH 7-8 and pH 8-0, with corresponding values of pH 8:1 and pH 8-4 for the sub- surface and subsoil samples. Individual pH values for the various soils are given in Tables If and ITI of the text and in the tables in the appendix. (5) Hyprocutorrc Acip Extracts. PrHospioric Acip anp PoTasH, Considering the high content of clay in both the Australian and Indian soils, a notable feature is their relatively low and variable content of potassium. Normally this latter value is a function of the clay content, but in these soils the ratio of K,O to clay varies from the extremely low figures of 0°2 per cent, to a maximum of 2:1 per cent. With the clay content varying in general from 50 per cent. to 70 per cent. much higher values were expected. Manganese was also determined on all samples from a point of view of interest, and a relatively high content is to be noted. While phosphoric acid is characteristically high in the Australian soils the values for the Indian soils are much lower. Like the potash, no correlation exists between the phosphate or the manganese and the clay content, and none between the nitrogen and the phosphate content. It is interesting to note that the immature soil from Ilparran in New South Wales shows an extremely high phosphate 183 content of over 0°6 per cent., whereas the potash content of 0-08 per cent. is a minimum. Although the variation in the potash content appears to be general through- out the soil areas in both countries, the values for phosphate and manganese appear to be distinctly higher in the lower latitudes than in the higher ones. The range of values for total phosphoric acid and potash as well as for total nitrogen are given in Table V. - (6) ExcHANGEABLE BASES, The most important characteristic, apart from the physical composition and colour of these black soils, lies in the high degrce of base saturation. Whilst a high proportion of replaceable calcium is to be noted in the Indian soils this is not always the case in the Australian samples examined, where a relatively high proportion of magnesium to calcium frequently occurs. In the Darling Downs soils a certain degree of sodium saturation below 9 inches appears to be characteristic. While a high figure for sodium is to be observed in two of the Indian soils also, potassium, as usual, plays an almost negligible part in all the soils examined, The total bases, as would be expected from the high clay plus organic matter content, are extremely high, varying from 50 to 80 milligram equivalents per 100 gms. of soil, and the soils vary from high calcium to calcium magnesium types. A proportionately lower figure is to be noted in the more sandy soils of the regur type. In general, and despite a variation not only in the clay content but also in that of the organic matter, the total amount of replaceable bases remains fairly constant throughout the profile. This is typically illustrated in the Australian soils from Meteor and Orion Downs, where despite a drop of over 20 per cent. in the clay content below 18 inches the total amount of replaceable bases remains practically the same, On the other hand, a decrease in the total replaceable bases is to be noted in the profile from Chudleigh Park, along with the decrease in the clay content. Even in those soils which are acid in reaction, the high degree of base satura- tion persists. In the profile from Ilparran, with a reaction throughout of from pH 6°5 to pH 6-7, and although the clay content varies from only 40 per cent. to 47 per cent., and the organic matter from 4-6 per cent. to 3 per cent., the total replaceable bases amount to over 50 milligram equivalents per 100 grams of soil, whereas in red loams, examined in this laboratory, with a similar reaction value, from 4 to 6 per cent. organic matter and from 50 per cent. to 70 per cent. clay, the total bases vary from only 11 to 23 milligram equivalents. It is rather interesting to observe that where the proportion of calcium to magnesium is above the ratio of approximately 60 to 40 in the surface, this ratio invariably remains practically constant throughout the profile, but where this proportion falls below this ratio in the surface, the magnesium, and in some cases the sodium with it, rises considerably with depth at the expense of the calcium. The Indian soils being of the high calcium type retain the proportions of bases practically unchanged throughout the three profiles examined, whereas in the calcitum-magnesium types in Australia the magnesium rises rapidly in descending the profile. In one Australian profile the change is most marked; whereas the surface soil falls in the calcium-magnesium group, below 18 inches a magnesium- sodium type is to be observed. The high proportion of magnesium to calcium appears to be a characteristic of Australian soils generally. These black soils peptise readily, in spite of the presence of calcium carbonate, and are readily impervious to water. Where the degree of sodium saturation becomes marked, illuvial horizons of an even heavier texture than the surface soil 184 are formed and solonisation takes place. Figures 6 and 7 summarise graphically the exchangeable base determinations of the Australian and Indian soils, respec- tively. 1047 Orion Downs 8) QTE 1048 Queensland 9-18" WITTE 2 1049 ea) DEE 1044 Meteor Downs Q- 9” a | 1045 Queensland 9-18" a a AO A A 1046 18-27" COT tv site 1211 Murrurundi o- 9” VT I IT F2SSa|} 1212, N.S.W. 9-19" A aN | a 1213 Bo QT Sai rae ee oot Ae A an———— 1216 N.S.W. 9-18" A a aa 1 1217 13-27" AA || et 1207 Dalkeith, N.S.W. 9-9" AAA A A A | | i, | SET |Z SET pI UINIssE Og 6S ZO-ce | pS 2-62 | Gh 62-22 5 — ra = | OZ-T¢ | Zr £zZ-8Z 3 wnisauseyW | S& pS-eT | ff 6c-8l | fh Pore | — = mx | L9-be | BSF 9O°2E ie) tanfoyer) | | :saseq sqeasueyoxy x Mom]; xe Beam, x gwsu I fam | x oar ones £91 | 9-81 6°91 8-02 6-02 8:9 | 8-21 e°ST N/3 wasoIN :uOqieD $9-0 6I-T £b-1 Se-l 69-1 86-T | £-1 OL°1 3 uoqgies suedIg 6£0°0 | 790-0 280-0 $90-0 | 180-0 | 8TT-0 | ££0-0 SIT'0 N waSOIN cIl0 ZOT-0 001-0 6FT-0 | FeI-O | SPIO i TIT+O 6II-0 rotuUN apixo asouesueW Stc-0 -0c-0 C810 90€-0 | Z0€-0 | 9FE-0 | €€9-0 £r9°0 Oa ysejog £20°0 620-0 5£0-0 QTT-O0 | 6FI-O | €ST-0 | 21-0 £z1-0 *O*d ple soydsoyg | :eyep yeomuosys) 6°83 teZ Q-2 $-8 6°83 26 6-8 | £8 $6 uous! UO sso’y Z-01 9-01 +01 $-€T g-e] T-e7 6-21 | e-eT 9-21 aInjsloyW 2. | c.g Lz ib ¢ OE ¢- ter ie yUdsUI} P97} plow uo sso'T = ‘ar 0-2€ 7 oa LEP, <3 | mR €-05 $ A SO] 03 wor oes; [eproyjoD Tos | 6-05 9-05 b-SS 6-9 £°SS 6-69 | b-#9 S°29 Aza, T-9t | pst 9-21 O-4T| #91] 6-91) €6 | 96 6-11 31S ana 6°FT $ST €-8 GL z-8 oS | 9° £-9 pues ould Te and £°¢ P-0 #-0 6:0 e+) | ¢-0 0 pues os1v04 rsisAjeue [BITUeYyIAIT | 1-1 Le 4 eZ 6-2 pe 1-Z #2 O-€ 19H EU IULBIO 8b-Z OTT ¥S-0 Be-T 82-0 £0-0 fr-Z | $6-0 Ir-0 #9989 ayeuoqies uIna[e) % | % | % % % % % % | % $-8 $°8 £8 1 €:8 £6 $8 9-8 ¥-8 8-8 Hd voOnseey a adv Vv a av Vv q av Vv woz0yy Zz-81 | 81-6 6-0 22-81 | 81-6 | 60 Le-81 B1-6 6-0 sayour ul w3deq £16 | 916 S16 +16 | £16 Z16 116 016 606 JaquinN dures uo BIOUV tBIOMSIT JO "| sap Z ‘Bsro9any SNMOG ONITYVG NYALSVA ‘punjsuaan?) wmoaf Syysogy yIvjg fo DIog pwomtayD pun saskjpupy jwnuDyray AypE.0'_T *(ponuyuos) [TA aaVvL 193 ‘saseq ay} JO uorpsodutos a8ujuaoI0g = x ‘TIOs Jo “studs OOT dod Sjuaeainbs wessyyw = "3 ‘uoqies s1ue310 Wor payndui0g , | = | AGTIVA NOSMVC | | | | = ee eee el | s-zt{ st] 9-911 9-8 | o-et o-orl z-er| Fbt | O-st es-o | pz | co-zloc-o | s6-0 | sez! ee-0 | ot | Liz zrO-0 | 080-0 | 6SI-0 [se0-0 | €20-0 | ZbI-0 90-0 | LOT-O | SbI-0 390-0 | $80-0 | e¢t-0 pe0-0 | £2£0-0 | 6St-0 lFoT-o | SII-0 | ThT-o 825-0 | 225-0 | S9S-0 irsb-0 | Té6b-0 | eTS-0 gIS-0 | zIs-0 | 095-0 390-0 | 580-0 | bzt-0 \¢Z0-0 | s60-0 | +60-0 9F0-0 | 90-0 | FOT-0 es | og | ge] er | #s | oe go | oz! ze £9 | gL 9| oS | £5 | ZS) 88 | po | 28 eet (BEd seer get ct] a3 | +6 | 0-8 — — —| = “+ eel G2 | pe | pe Bib! 6-Sr | 6-sel a-Ie] se] o-rel 0-05] O-1S | $-9b Z-ST | 912! 9-6z| O-ZE| Zor} s-9z| S-oz| zz} 1-92 poe | 0-61] 6-6t) p8f) S-6z} gs-szl ost | G6-IL] FST os | oz | Pel terl 228 | os] of 60 | Zt | 6-0 | Ez | se] s-0 | OT tp | pT ge ilo. gee 81-0 70-0 | 91-0 | 80-0 ine — | 00-1 &2Z-0 60-0 % % if % % % % % % os | re | sz ¢8 | te | 89 | o8 | O8 | OF Od d Vo) Oa a av | oa q V zor | zz-6 | 60 | zroc! oc-6 | 6-0 | zrsz| uze | $0 eszt_ | zezt | teZt | o8Zt | 6LL1 | gzzt | Ltzt | 9221 | Seer aiopoay L ais QO 10-0 G$ Ore é 9I-T Ob LL-8C Lb £8-6¢ x foul #ST 18-0 €50-0 99T-0 TzS-0 +20°0 m4 DOcenmomamn SATAUMNL moO 001 20729 | OOT £Z-19 | GOI 62-Z9 0 10:0 |0 10-0 Il 88-9 | £ SEP Z ZT |Z OT S$ T7-ee | Z Ole ee $£:0Z | 6€ IZ-€2 x Boum |x Mom | c-Z1 | 0-91 €$-0 | 2£:0 0€0-0 Sr0-0 e¥T-0 €ST-0 $95-0 bzs-0 820-0 820-0 ZZ GL €-€T Zl ¢ ge $-09 0-19 9-21 211 £8 5-6 $+0 9-0 6-0 Z1 SS-T £9-T % % r-8 ¢-8 q av Ze-0E O£-ZT 9841 SgZI soseq [80], Uy asouedueyy tN anrpos Pk WINISSE}Og 3W WHIssuse yy BD UINID,e7) :saseq a[qeodueyoxy N/O ones uassOIIN :uogse) 9 uoqies 31UesI_Q N uasOIinT ‘Oru apixo ssouesurypy OP YsSeiog °O"d ppe s0ydsoyg :eyep peormay’) uous: UO sso’yT dANISIOP, jual} ead} plog uo sso'T § A BO] 0} UoroeIy TEpIoyjog 7 ae) Ws pues aul pues asievoy iSISA[VUR JeoUeYydsa jy gi3}JUUL DIURSIO | 7036 18) ayeuogied wWnIo[e) Hd uooeey uozLIo yy sayoul ur yydaq Jaquinny efduirs uaaduog ‘INT SNMO7 ONITAVG NAALSAM AyypeooT ‘punjsuaanG) worl syjavgq yonjg fo vypq poommay puv saskup joomoyrajy * (anumuos) TWA Fav 194 ‘saseq oY} JO UuOTTIsOdwOD aBzjus0Ied = x ‘los "stwaB ONT ted syuazeamba wessypyw = %’au "Uoqies) DINesIGQ, Moly paynduloy , OOT 1Z-$9 OOT 82°19 Q0T 95-29 | 001 20-09 OOT 62-09 OOT SP-19 — O01 SF-Z9 saseq [210], 0 90-0 0 80-0 0 2t-0 0 10-0 0 10-0 0 20-0 <= 0 90-0 uA asouesueyy € 6-1 Z Fe-l Z el b LE-Z £ 69-1 Z eel | + Zz “el e@N wipes L 98-0 Z 10-1 zoel Z tet z ¢0-1 Z Feel = Z OI x WINISSE}OT ze @e-0z O€ 7Zz-8I 62 S8-Z1 69 OF-Ir €9 SI-8E 9G ZIbe | a Zr 80-82 aW wuintsause yy 9 00-IF 99 §I-Ir £9 96-1 SZ 00-ST Ze 8e-6! Ob £9-+Z | oa bS $8-9€ ie) wine) x Yow x of our x Baul x Osu x Bo UW x Boar | x fo UU isaseq aquasueyaxg | I-Z1 9-ST 9-S1 T-ZT S-Z1 est | 8-ST Z-ST N/D oryed | uasolyINN :uoqie Or-T €L-1 68-1 02-0 ra ZLe1 / 20-2 82-2 ) uoqgied s1ued1C 780-0 TIT-0 1Zt-0 TP0-0 £90-0 P60-0 | 821-0 6b1-0 N uaSOIIN SIT-0 BET-0 OFT-0| T8T-0 98T-0 $1z-0 | C0E-0 P8T-0 FOCUL «— BPIXH ssouesaey 1£z-0 pie-0 1Z¢-0 1Ze-0 eer ZsF-0 | 6£¢-0 Zz -0 Ox ysejog ZET-0 StI-0 ¥ST-0 6S1-0 OrT-0 9€1-0 j; o0¢-0 OI€-0 °O"d pre d10ydsoyq | :eyep peortoay) 1-6 b-6 9:6 SET #21 zzt 0-11 6-01 uous uo ssoT ZI 8-01 +-01 P-01 Pll pit | 6-01 €+IT aINzSIOWL = 6+ 0-s I: I T-¢f 9-O1 i 6S TZ JUSUI}LII] poe UO SsO'T = = p-OF seme = — — —_ SA BO oO} UOIPITAL [eploy]oD 8-95 $-S £-6S o+Gb Seg g-rs 6:55 €-¢S ARID $-01 8-21 9-01 O-€T ZI 0-21 S-el LET MUS 9-01 PII 9-11 0-6 8-8 Z°6 €-1l S-O1 pues suLy er ep Ly z-0 £0 ¥-0 ST Fl pues asiez0y TSISApeuE yeormeyso py $2 i O-¢ €-€ Zz 6-1 O-€ ce 6-e 410) 2UT ITURSIQ 1Z-0 Z0-0 60-0 60-¢1 0£°8 8E°S | ee €0:0 FOOD ayeuoqie) umMpoyeD % % % % % % % % BL ZL LL 0°6 6-8 Leo aL 0-8 yd uoHaeay d av Vv fers | d av Vv Vv wozloH £2-81 81-6 6-0 £z-81 81-6 6-0 | &I-0 ZI-0 soyour ur yydeq clel ZIZI IIzt OT 6021 8021 bIZI LO0ZT Jaquinn adures IpuninsInjy PMOL Sljissey YWayed Ajtye30 GNVTMON aANVaSIud HOTIa POO] MSN moat syiang yong fo vq JorMMayD pun saskpup onuoyra py THA Fav 195 “SaSEq oy} jo uorlsoduos adeyuedsed = x POs ‘sud QOT Jed szuayeainba wei8ypmu = %-a‘ur “GOqIRD BUvaIQ) Woy paynduoy , nay | ra = a 0OT 98-2¢ OOT 29-95 OOT 6S°¢¢ saseq [810], — | aa =< ra 0 60:0 0 80-0 0 02-0 uN asouesue yy = | = = = Z 06:0 IT 19-0 I 0F-0 ®N WINIpOS om i a par — T £9-0 € ££:0 f elel Ww uInIssE}Og a | =] re 7 OF Pe-IZ o£ 61°éz OF Sr-IZ 3W lunisaude yy = | = ap = | £§ 00-0€¢ 8S 96-ZE ZS Zr-0€ eB) unpye) x Maw xX Wow x foul :saseq aqeadueyoxy 6-rT | cSt c-ZI LZ Lt 9-CT S-F1 £-r1 N/O onei UadoIIN imoqiey 6r-0 O£-T SI-c 90-°€ IZ: TZ-T £9-2 e) UOgIeD d1URsIO) ££0-0 ¥80-0 ccI-0 £L1-0 OIT-0 SIT-0 981-0 N uasoTiN cf£e:0 c61-0 Te!e-0 09¢-0 Sez-0 T1Z-0 82e:0 FOUN, SPIxXO asauesueyy 180-0 820-0 9Pz-0 90£-0 Z6z-0 Ore-0 6SP-0 Own ysejog 099-0 crs-0 6Z£°0 9bZ-0 TOr-0 80F-0 8ze-0 5O%d pre sroydsoyg :Peyep [eotuayy) G8 £01 9-01 Pil £8 £6 9-OT UOMUs! uO sso'T €-TT 9-01 28 8-6 8:6 T-OF #8 oI PSlOyy e-¢ cr cs aes £9 ¢-9 1-9 JUSTE IL pise go ssov'y ay | = = rz = 9-6 § A 30] 0} wo!}De23 [eprojyo") Z:02 £-9¢ 8-98 S-Lb Z:0b FLb Lev ARID 8°E1 8-61 £:S¢ 0-81 £-61 6-61 9-12 WIS €+Sp £°9¢ P91 £-é1 8-81 6-£1 0-+FI pues 3uly 0°S 9-¢ ee 6-¢ 8° £-T £-T pues os1e0y :sisAyeue [eoUEYyII WW 6:0 | tara LE g-¢ O-¢ O-€ 9-F xI9}}RUL IULBIO —_ — = aie 10-0 —_— — 7 O18 128) syeuogies UINI3 ey) % % % % % % % b-9 | 9-9 £9 $°9 9-9 £9 a) Hd uoreoy od av oa Vv DG al Vv | WOZ1I0H PI-9 -0 81-6 6-0 £702 02-9 9-0 seyour ur yidaq Téel 0zZ1 6tel SIZt Z12t OTe! Sidl Joquinny aydwesg Wessed]y ~ - AQIBIO'T HDNOD ASN Utost sya yonjg fo pivg [DIIMayy pun saskjoup jpaiunysapy (panuryuod) IIA a1avy ‘uondiosed PPM « “A[UO [OS 3dVJ -INg ‘ANBay 10 jlos uoz09 Ae | ‘yeseq uloiy Aysow pedliap pure ainjeu [eIAnTe we jo wae AaTpeA If6l | aIUIAOI yoy | BpeqieN wor pos yreyq Aavayy |) ‘dy uewsg “fA. orZ2 266 peqesueysoy | = [edoug pesuaa “Aa ABT | pue yos ‘ypeq pue doep S10 | 91k sjlos ssoyy, “ASoyoer) UvIpUy jo syvor yo wojshs uolsuedy (ered | Jo Jemieyq 94} JO sysiyos ear uonounf Zepery -[HaA = uIMYyS10G) | pue ss10[Yo ‘Kea JO uorlperZo1 ut : Jo sea SopIut pT | remof pue u0}302 | -SIP 94} Wosy Paalsop St JOS SUL % co 1602-0602 | O£1Z qas10Uy rea eqq “9TH I9F pue your ‘Aafeya> ‘yoetq sf [10s ayy ‘Woosuow 3y} Suinp séo] -[eA ay} our spooy Aq sarszjune) i WH WWM | puejdn ay} Wolf; UMOpP Pposysem uoneyol Ul uo} | pue des} 9Yy} Wo1j Pouioy 918 -JOD SMOIZ (9183 | AayT, “AaTTeA BUYSIIST SY} JO STs S -na winyss0S) | yoryq jo 39q PeoIq ay} UE punoj ™ remof dots aJdeqS | sjtos yoRTG By} syuasaidar jlos S14 L, ot | . 6R0Z-E90Z | ODEZ | UOeBseL JON | BIBTES “PO1TVSIP yeo1g 34} JO Sfios ay} jo 9AN -ejuasaiday ‘yIS UMOIq YSIMoT[aA e o} sasueyo po alayM “UL $¢ jo yjdap e 0} yoejq Pue AosEyO pue yrs st plos ayy, ‘ssjua pue oyuerds wor yueyxa UIE} -199 B 0} ynq ‘“Weseq Wosy Ay]som paaliap ole pue ‘sindol 10 sjlos u0}}09 YoeVjq se uMOUY pues HIzEIqG pue doap ase Asyy ‘addy 9105 -ues-opuy JO jou jnq [ernye 212 | (ase3 | ajdures sry} Aq poyuesaidar sylos (Ray wie et | -[NMA wINGBsoS) | ay} pue ‘vale (qyeseq) dei] ay} jo Ie6I eyppnq -uauqiedaqd 934} aeMof pue U0}}07) | YIJOU ay} Wosy Wdxe} St [IOS PUL ‘yoreyy «= -eIseyes "1 “d| Zg0Z—-9402 | Sel | {yoeolg I83N yourosg] Aequiog [ gaursip | Souapisasg 4uOlIe}93aA JO dora sHondoseq [10g aed Aq papayjos ‘SON 3994 Ur ans 4 ajdmirs oS yon Ayrpeso-T Baal ‘snos anbay uvipuy fo wordisosoq puo Agyn20T "XJ Fav 197 ‘nondisaqd PPT y vay, puke oseqgoy o29ego ], W070) u0}}05) uo}}oD woo) u03}07) wo0%) u0}}09 4001}2}989A4 IO dosy ‘sayNpouTeY7) pue sayuess JO BIB WOI] [IOS uoO}j}09 YyoRYG ‘sassiousd pue ojueld jO Bale WOI} j1Os 0}}09 Hoe” “sa] els pue sayeys Wor] sjros u0}J02 xoeT gq ‘QUO]SOIUT] pue soreYys sno ade] 7) Woy s]los uw03309 yorg_ “sapeys yedeppns) wory sjios woyjoo ye g "eare ayueIg Wolf [IOS oO}}09 Yselg ‘yeseq Wojiy patios ‘sured ind -BeN 24} wor Aelo yor;q Aavazy “(yeseq) der) uvooaq wor patio; ‘ATUO [Ios aDejinS -andseN jo surejd ofl}i9y 34} se UMOUy Uode1 BY} WoOIay [Jos Yoe[q Aaeoyy ‘A[UO [IOS BdeJINSG *“}yeseq WOly paulsoy ‘ainjzeu yeLanyye ue jo inday IO [los u0}}09 yIeIq AAeaTT ,UOHndtiossq] jIog i Z 62EC 009T Wjedjioyy | Afjeaouury 7 cs ezez «| OST | «= seg TerUED P4OJeqUIIOD * : lzsz | GbIE umnquin) i yy 9z¢z £26 epunypoy | loony ” - ZeZ | «OP8T ieceper.)| *APuEOY ystutays) Ig61 eanynoisy ‘sunf JUSIUUIVANL) CZEZ oLbl 1wopy Axelpg seapey Wey 2 . 060€-680E | ZI0T eyuoutsadx gy a i Z122 £101 indseyy | = Indseny | TE6T wWIey goUTAOIg dy uewdid ‘fa 11Zz S26 dV LlOHV e189 g | yezywag “SON yooy ul pUISICL AoW pisalg aeg Aq p2199fj0D ites _ 40H ens ‘ ajdures “BAIA £pEIO'T ‘snos anbay upipuy fo uoudisssag pun AyypnI207 ‘(penunues) yy] alavy 198 ‘saseq ay} Jo uorisoduios adejus01ed = x [los ‘suB OOL tod sjuaeamnba wes8ypru = %‘ocur ‘uoqied o1uesIG) Woy paynduro| , OOT ZI-€Z | OOT 96-£2 | OOT 8Z-E2 4 = Ww = OOT SS-€S | DOT 88-ZS | OOT S6-ES soseq [BOL 0 ‘AL 0 ‘aL, 0 ‘IL — | — — — —- I. 16 “IL 0 Pap uy asouesuey b £82 & 90-2 IT £2£:0 bias | = = £ O¢-T T 89-0 1 8b0 EN tunipos tT 09:°0 | IT £9-0 tT 10-1 — | = = a IT $9-0 c 60-T e lé-T w UINISSEIOT ce 6T-f2 | If 86-c¢ | TE 99-ce re —T a ia bo LZ8-cl | fe ET-CI | ce Fe-el 3 winisouse Wy £9 OF-9b | $9 62-8 | £9 BE-6r — | a on aaa ZZ €Z:8¢ | FZ 80-6£ | PZ ZO-OF eB) wane x Yam|x eau | x oT | x Yaw|[ x wou) x eau rsaseq a[qvadueyoxy | 9-02 | 8-61 0-61 a8 O-II | 8-T1 £11 £-21 £-21 BIT N/D ones | uaso0aIN :woqie) £08°0 Te8-0 ¢$8-0 $0c-0 Ore-0 cre-0 ese-0 0Z¢-0 69¢-0 £Tr:O 2) uoqied s1Ues1¢) 6£0°0 cr0-0 $+0-0 $c0-0 6c0-0 620-0 0£0-0 0£0-0 0£0-0 Sco-0 N UwasOIyN prl-0 cht -0 8rt-O FST-0 frl-0 91-0 ZET-0 651-0 651-0 SSt-0 ‘Ory apixo ssouesur yw 8£z-0 82Z-0 crc-0 119-0 899-0 899-0 899-0 6¢9-0 969-0 649-0 Om yseyod orl -0 | PrT-0 Ost-0 c80-0 960-0 260-0 $60-0 £60-0 cOl-0 SOTO °OFd phe sioydsoyg | | | :eyep peorurey’) 6-8 9-8 8-8 Ls 0-9 6-S 8-5 B.S 0-9 09 UOI}UsE uO ssor7y 6°IT cel cel $3 0-6 6°83 6:8 6°38 88 9-8 9INYSTO TL “L¢ 6 oF 9: | Og 9. 9-2 0-2 | O-7 £2 JUS} 291] PIO UO sso'T a _ Z:9fF _ i —_— — — — — 6-SZ G A BO] 0} WoTPIeIy [epIopjoD 0-09 $-09 0-19 9-0¢ Fer Z:9b 8-24 t-LP 8-ZLP 9-CP = ARID c-6r | 0-61 8-Z1 I-42 | p82 $22 £-02 z-1Z +12 1-€% HIS oe 9-¢ Be 9-T€ SIZ £-61 0-61 I-61 1-61 c:61 pues oul e-0 £-0 £-0 I:0 Z:0 Z-0 £-0 z-0 ZO od pues 981807) | ISISA[eUe [BOTUeYIaT tel tl S-1 $-0 | $-0 9-0 9-0 9-0 9-0 £0 19} EWE DULBZIO £0°0 90-0 80°0 60-0 ec0 | cl: IT-0 | $0°0 60-0 06-0 70D") eyenogies Wino) 6:8 8°83 9-8 c°8 ¥-8 $8 $3 $8 ¥:8 1-8 Hd UOr;IeOY a av Vv od d q ad i a av Vv UOZIIO LH $c-91 9I-Z £0 09-+S Po-8P 8r-9L 98-42 'o-E1 ZI-9 9-0 sayour ur yidaq $802 802 £802 80d T3802 0802 6202 820€ | L£L0Z 9L02 ‘ON aydmes uorssey ‘doyxery “IN yoeoig ays BIR}ES yoeoig pLISI AYYRIO'T AVANOd UOISTAIC] ‘pipuy ‘Kouapisatg uoqie) cre-d Zte"0 gcero 06¢°0 g9e"0 L960 zoo 8BL°0 118°0 z08" 0 ozs T8s°0 9 woqies o1esIO 8z0°0 6Z0°0 1¥0°0 6£0°0 ezoro ~=— | £00 £20°0 $r0'0 +50°0 6+0"D ogo-0 $50°0 N waS0s}IN ozt'o £50°0 2£0°0 $20'0 990°0 £40°0 SsT-0 ££1°0 gIz"a zst-0 rST'0 SII*O Fou apixo osauesue yy £sb"0 66570 098°0 eZb-0 997"0 oze'0 959° £29°0 z19°0 £25"0 | 9bb0 z19°0 Ox yseiod #50°0 6£0°0 190°0 sr0°0 rs0-0 9£0°0 €80°0 £20°0 £60°0 $20°0 | Boro T9070 ( (as pre oproqdsoyd 1 reyep peoruey) s°9 gs $8 pee £°9 £9 9°2L Stk ee aa 6°6 sty wortusr 10 Ssor'y oror g°s Ly rn a ae s°9 6°L 3° crtt S*Ot ror |) 68 ze ainistoW vor 69 £°6 Ivs ee oe) t6r rs Orr oF / seit EE quauyven ple uo SsO'T =\ ¥°lZ 6° 1% im =e erel — or > 8°62 ae eelZ g A Sof 0} wOHSTIy plonled rele 1°82 tp 6°S¢ ose ree sec | BrSP ag e788 zsh £62 oe saa #tIL $°8 z°8t zrlz esr |) Zt L°1e £792 P92 £102 Brlz 9°02 UES S*rt 9°22 €° 22 brit 9°eL pol 6 | 98 OrEL £76 rae Z°L2 pues auld | 4 a 2 4 0°% s*¢ L°8e Ors grt 9°1 Le £°2 £0 9°ST pues asizo) | psiss[eue yeorueysa YL 9*0 9°0 9°0 6°0 9°0 8°0 s°0 an Pr el orl | orl ,sapeur 91ueBIO 61°Z gers zor £6°% +0°S $z's Bsr Ll Ze'z so*t fro Of'6 Sb-0 F999 ayeuogies WHpPle) 9°8 6°38 £°8 £3 $°6 v6 z°8 ors 0-8 e7g og LL Hd wo!yoeey uv av | av av av av oa a Vv Vv av Vv woz10 HT goeying aoepIng VdepINS SoBpINg DOE RING | aoRpINg / -—8P St-rz g-0 aoe}INS ! 2oeying aorpns sayoul ur yideqd 6262 gzez LUEz ocez [rand £ZEE T60¢ 060 680€ Z1ez tizz iste” | ‘on, aydures | medpoy | wey "ued mnquing EL UNAOyy tyedepry | Tuopy wieg ejuomtiedxg j ory I peqesue aus | | | -as0H yeasuury, [sstoyequiroy jooumnsy indejueuy Alelpeg aind3e eiag { “yedoug 1 yornsiqy AypEDO'_T AQNGCISAUd SVUCVN SHONIAOUd TVYLNAD WOISTAICT ‘pipuy ‘svapoyy fo Kouapisacd pup Sarusdorg [p4iua) 2Y} most sos anBaoy fo vyocy joormay) pity Saskpoupy pwmUuy2a fe ‘TX aTavy AN EXAMINATION OF THE BROWN COAL OF NOARLUNGA PART II. BY W. TERNENT COOKE, D.Sc., A.A.C.1. Summary In a previous paper (1) it was mentioned that the bulk coal contains two easily visually distinguishable types of material, a jetty black and a dull brown, which were designated for convenience "A" and "C," respectively. An intermediate type "B" was also included; this last type is material which cannot definitely be classed with "A" or "C." Work on the types "A" and "C," and some further observations on the bulk coal, form the subject matter of this paper. 201 AN EXAMINATION OF THE BROWN COAL OF NOARLUNGA PART IT. By W. Ternent Cooxe, D.Sc, A.A.CLI. [Read August 9, 1935.] In a previous paper (1) it was mentioned that the bulk coal contains two easily visually distinguishable types of material, a jetty black and a dull brown, which were designated for convenience “A” and “C,” respectively. An intermediate type “B” was also included; this last type is material which cannot definitely be classed with “A” or “C.” Work on the types “A” and “C,” and some further observations on the bulk coal, form the subject matter of this paper. The material “A.’--This occurs mixed indiscriminately with “C” as separate lumps, not in layers, as is the case with the bright and dull layers of black coal. Analyses of ordinary specimens are given (Analysis No. 1), and of specially selected clean specimens (No. 2). The analyses refer to moisture-free samples. For the sake of comparison an analysis of the bulk coal is given (No. 3). “A” is seen to be much lower both in ash and sulphur than the bulk coal. The ash is almost white, and an analysis gave— Insoluble in acid ... 3°2%, containing 1°25% SiO, Tron and alumina ... 27°7% CaO ees 180% MgoO .... Girt wr 84% 1 ee i wee 41°2% 98°5% The SO, content is very nearly equivalent to the sum of the lime and the magnesia. The nature of “A.”—The material is jetty black, brittle, with a conchoidal fracture, and these features suggest its possible derivation from a gum or resin. For the sake of comparison an analysis of a sample of xanthorroea gum (X. Tatei from Tunkalilla), is included (No. 4). The figures hardly support the above supposition. When crushed to a fine powder and examined by the microscope the grains are found to show typically conchoidal fracture, with curved edges; they show a clear structure, and are translucent, the transmitted light being amber coloured. Polished surfaces were prepared for microscopic examina- tion by reflected light. With a magnification of about 80 no definite individual constituents were detected, except what appeared to be particles of grit, nor was any definite structure visible. The surfaces were examined as polished, and after etching with a flame or with caustic soda solution. The above tests, plus evidence cited later (see humic acids), indicate that “A” is a coalized colloid gel. 202 The material “C.”—This when air dried is of a light brown colour, amorphous and friable, no definite structure being visible. Under a low power it is seen to have small fragments of “A,” and bright pieces of quartz disseminated through it. This would seem to indicate that “A” and “C” have been formed by separate agencies, transported and deposited together, or originate from quite distinct parts of the plant material. Random samples of “C” vary somewhat in appearance and composition, as shown in Analyses 5 and 6. Distribution of Sulphur Contents, Table II. The materials “A’’ and two samples of “C” were examined by Powell’s method (2) to find the relative amounts of sulphur present, respectively as sulphate, pyritic, and organic sulphur. The method includes estimations of the iron content of the sulphate and the pyritic fractions, and a comparison of the iron values found with those calculated on the assumption that the sulphur has originated from pyrites. Figures for a sample of the bulk coal are reproduced for sake of comparison. The figures show that “A” is the richest proportionally in organic sulphur, although its total sulphur content is the lowest. It may have originated from those parts of the original vege- tation richer in sulphur than the bulk of the plant material, or it may be representative of a more completed stage of the process of coalification. The Humic Acids. Twenty-five grammes of the bulk coal were boiled for eight hours with a solution containing 20 grammes of caustic soda in 200 grammes of water. After filtering and acidifying, the precipitate, the so-called humic acids, was filtered off, and well washed. On drying the dark brown cake so obtained, it darkened and shrank greatly in bulk, breaking up with a marked conchoidal fracture. The yield of material, dry, was 57°5% of the original coal. Its composition (Assay 7) decidedly recalls that of the material “A,” especially in the low ash and sulphur content. This similarity suggests that “A” is essentially a coalified humic acid. Stach (3) states that “bright” or “pitch- like” brown coal is formed by pressure on swollen humic acid gel. Samples of “A” and “C” were examined quantitatively for their humic acid contents. The two materials were boiled repeatedly (five to ten times), with fresh lots of dilute sodium carbonate solution, and from the combined extracts the humic acids were precipitated by acidifying. The precipitates were dried, weighed, ashed, and the weight of ash (about 1% in each case) deducted from the first weight. “A” was found to contain 5%, and “C” 14% of humus material. Gravity Separations of the Coal Constituents. Another series of tests, on the “float and sink” principle have been made, starting with about 600 grammes of bulk coal, using a solution of magnesium chloride. Three fractions, light, intermediate, and heavy, were first obtained ; the middle fraction was then further resolved into light and heavy fractions. Analyses Nos. 8, 9, 10 and 11 are, respectively, light, intermcdiate light, intermediate heavy, and heavy. The heavy fractions contain the bulk of the ash and sulphur in the coal. The light material and the material “A” (Assay 1) are very similar in ultimate composition. All analyses (except 9) are the mean of at least two closely agreeing results. 203 Tas_e I. Moisture contents are sometimes given, but the figures for carbon, etc., are for dry material. The figures are also recalculated to ash-free material. No. Moisture. 1a .... Bq... fe 24 .... 4 (4-2-1) SA. (69) (6-7) batt a at, 1. S. found Cc, 59-9 65°7 60-08 65°48 54°81 66°5 41-09 59-53 67-0 2. S., calc to Fe 3. Fe found it S42 Sample I—1 2 3 Oh Sample [I—1 2 3 Bulk Coal 1 2 3 MWBAWObhAU pS H. 5:17 Gon oN ao tnd 6O tn Go NT s. O. N. Ash. 3-61 22-57 0°32 8-77 3-96 24:75 0-35 — 3-61 23-44 — 4-75 3:93 25-55 — — 5*65 16:62 +3 = 6°85 20:08 — — 0 52:53 — 0-7 3-9 20-17 — 11-18 Ce a a 5-14 — 0-2 23:7 5-51 es Eh * 3-10 28-43 — 2:0 3-16 29°04 — _ 4-4 22-300 — 7 4:74 240 — = 5-83 21-51 — 11-0 6°55 24-0 = = 12-62 10:71 — 34-65 19-32 16°37) — — 12-07. 12:24 — 35-74 18-9 19-0 = = TABLE II, SULPHUR DISTRIBUTION Total, Sulphate, Pyritic, a. b. c 3-61 0-208 a 1-247 — — Bil? — 0-182 a 1-09 — —_ B 1-02 — 0-262 a, 0-50 f — B0-58 3-90 0:28 1:9 — 0°24 1°66 —_ 0-89 2-32 5+44 0-75 3-26 —_ 0:66 2-85 — 8-88 3-13 6°62 0-57 3-78 —_ — 3°31 _— — 3-96 REFERENCES. (1) Tus Journat, vol. lvi, 1932, p.48. (2) U.S. Bureau or Mines, Technical Paper, 1921, No. 254. (3) Sracu, Brit. Chem. Abs. B., 1933, p. 610. C:H Ratio B.T.U. 12-4 11180 “A” Ordinary 12-4 — “A” selected 10-6 9741 Bulk samples 7°2 — Xanth. gum 11-4 ae as Onl | Ls. we br firatd 2 14-1 — Humic acid 1-5 — “Light” 12-4 — “Intermediate me — light” 11-9 — “Intermediate — —_ heavy” 11-0 ens “Heavy” Organic, Found. Calcul. a~—(b+c). 2-48 2-16 68:7% — 1:94 1-72 49-79% —_ 2-07 1-43 38% _— 2-2 2-25 32-2% _ A NEW BULBOPHYLLUM FROM NORTH QUEENSLAND. BY R. S. ROGERS, M.A., M.D., F.L.S, AND W. H. NICHOLLS Summary Bulbophyllum (§ Polyblepheron) cilioglossum, Rogers et Nicholls, sp. nov. Planta pusilla. Rhizoma repens, dense radicans. Pseudobulbi parvi, obconici, oblique depressi, circa 5-6 mm. alti, truncatti. Folia sessilia, apiculata, singula, elliptica vel falco-elliptica, acuta, circa 6-7 cm. longa, circa 1-3 cm. lata. Inflorescentia uniflora, ad latus pseudobulbi, post folium, circa 1.5 cm. longa. gracilis, glabra ; bractea acuta vaginata prope basin pedunculi, bractea floralis similis prope ovarium. Flos minutus, subcarneus cum virgis subrufis longitudinalibus. Sepalum dorsale erectum, oblongo-ovatum, 3-nervium, leviter concavum, circa 4 mm. longum; sepala lateralia aequilonga, latiora, 3-nervia, leviter concava, falco-ovata, columnae pedem adnata mentum obtusum formantia; petala anguste oblonga, obtusa, erecta, 1-nervia, circa 2 mm. longa. Labellum ovatum, indivisum, carnosiusculum, apice obtusum, mobile, ad apicem columnae pedis tenuiter articulatum, recurvum, carneum, superne concavum, subtus longitudinaliter sulcatum; marginibus subrufis elevatis ciliatis. Columna erecta, perbrevis, basi in pedem longum obliquum producta, superne utrinque appendice lineari subulata antheram multo excedente instructa. 204 A NEW BULBOPHYLLUM FROM NORTH QUEENSLAND. By R. S. Rogers, M.A., M.D., F.L.S., and W. H. Nicholls, [Read August 9, 1935.] Bulbophyllum (§ Polyblepheron) cilioglossum, Rogers et Nicholls, sp. nov. Planta pusilla. Rhizoma repens, dense radicans. Pseudobulbi parvi, obconici, oblique depressi, circa 5-6 mm. alti, truncati. Folia sessilia, apiculata, singula, elliptica vel falco-elliptica, acuta, circa 6-7 cm. longa, circa 1-3 cm. lata. Inflorescentia uniflora, ad latus pseudobulbi, post folium, circa 1-5 cm. longa, gracilis, glabra; bractea acuta vaginata prope basin pedunculi, bractea floralis similis prope ovarium. Flos minutus, subcarneus cum virgis subrufis longi- tudinalibus. Sepalum dorsale erectum, oblongo-ovatum, 3-nervium, leviter con- cavum, circa 4 mm. longum; sepala lateralia aequilonga, latiora, 3-nervia, leviter concava, falco-ovata, columnae pedem adnata mentum obtusum formantia; petala anguste oblonga, obtusa, erecta, l-nervia, circa 2 mm. longa. Labellum ovatum, indivisum, carnosiusculum, apice obtusum, mobile, ad apicem columnae pedis tenuiter articulatum, recurvum, carneum, superne concavum, subtus longi- tudinaliter sulcatum; marginibus subrufis elevatis ciliatis. Columna erecta, perbrevis, basi in pedem longum obliquum producta, superne utrinque appendice lineari subulata antheram multo excedente instructa, A small plant with creeping rhizome and numerous fibrous roots. Pseudo- bulbs obliquely obconical, sessile, truncate at apex, slightly concave on one side, about 5-6 mm. high. Leaves sessile, rather narrowly elliptical or falco-elliptical, arising singly from the apex of the pseudobulb, acute at the apex, attenuating towards the base, about 6-7 cm. long, about 1-3 cm. wide in the middle, upper surface channelled, convex below. Scape single, 1-flowered, arising behind the leaf at the base of the concave side of the pseudobulb, slender, glabrous, about 1-5 cm. long; an acute sheathing bract near the base of the peduncle, the floral bract similar below the ovary. Flower minute, pinkish with darker reddish longi- tudinal stripes. Dorsal sepal erect, oblong-ovate, 3-nerved, slightly concave, about 4 mm. long; lateral sepals about the same length, wider, falco-ovate, 3-nerved, slightly concave, attached to the foot of the column so as to form an obtuse mentum; petals narrowly oblong, obtuse, erect, l-nerved, about 2 mm. long. Labellum ovate, entire, rather fleshy, obtuse at the apex; mobile, delicately articulated at the apex of the foot of the column; recurved, pink, concave above, longitudinally sulcate below; margins reddish, raised, ciliated. Column erect, very short, obliquely produced at the base into a long foot; provided abave on each side with a linear subulate appendage greatly exceeding the anther in height. North Queensland. Mount I’ox, Mr. A. Glindeman. Flowered in Mel- bourne, March, 1934. The section to which this new plant belongs was established by Schlechter and apparently has its centre of dispersion in New Guinea, where it is well repre- sented in the Mandated Territory as well as in the Dutch portion of the Island. It has not, however, yet been reported from Papua. It is represented in the Celebes and Moluccas and by B. tortuosum Lindl., in Java. Quite recently the latter species has been reported by J. J. Smith from Sumatra, which may be regarded as the most westerly distribution of the section. Hitherto only a single Fig. 1. Bulbophyllum cilioglossum, sp. nov. (Rogers and Nicholls), Mount Fox, via Ingham, North Queensland. Cultivated in glass house, Melbourne. Figure A about twice natural size; all other drawings greatly enlarged. A, Typical plant in flower; B, Flower; C, Bracts, ovary, etc.; D, Column from side; E, Column from front, apices of wings not shown; F, Pollen-masses, various aspects; G, Labellum from side (margin ciliated); H, Petal. 206 representative has been known in Australia, viz., B. Macphersonii Rupp, pre- viously known under the names of B, purpurascens Bail., and Osyricera pur- purascens Deane. To this the new species is now added. Rupp’s species is well illustrated in Fitzgerald’s Australian Orchids, and is so very distinctive in its floral structure that it would appear unnecessary to institute a further comparison. For this plant, as well as for a quantity of other valuable orchidaceous material, we are deeply indebted to Mr. A. Glindeman, who has displayed keen scientific interest in forwarding living orchids from little known and inaccessible parts of the Commonwealth. ON SOME NEW SPECIES AND RECORDS OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND COLLEMBOLA. BY H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S. Summary Description.-Length, 1¢15 mm. Colour, uniform brownish-black. Facies normal. Antennae shorter than head ; ratio of length of segments I: Il: WI: IV = 15: 15: 15: 20, IV with 4-5 olfactory setae, III with normal sensory organ. Claws without inner tooth; tibiotarsus with one long dorsal clavate seta; empodial appendage absent. Furca absent. Integument strongly granular; clothing of sparse but fairly long setae, which are rather blunt at the tip. Ocelli, 8 on each side on dark fields, equal. Postantennal organ present, smaller than a single omma and with four peripheral lobes around a central boss. 207 ON SOME NEW SPECIES AND RECORDS OF AUSTRALIAN AND NEW ZEALAND COLLEMBOLA. By H. WomERsLey, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum. [Read September 12, 1935.] Suborder ARTHROPLEONA Borner, 1913. Superfamily PODUROIDEA Womersley, 1933. Family HYPOGASTRURIDAE Borner, 1913. Genus BRACHYSTOMELLA Agten, 1903. Brachystomella granulata, sp. nov. (Text fig. 1, a-b.) Description—~Length, 1-15 mm. Colour, uniform brownish-black. Facies normal. Antennae shorter than head; ratio of length of segments]: II: III: IV =15: 15: 15: 20, IV with 4-5 olfactory setae, III with normal sensory organ. Claws without inner tooth; tibiotarsus with one long dorsal clavate seta; empodial appendage absent. Furca absent. Integument strongly granular; cloth- Fig. 1. a-b Brachystomella granulata, sp. nov. c-t Odontella trispina, sp. nov. ing of sparse but fairly long setae, which are rather blunt at the tip. Ocelli, 8 on each side on dark fields, equal. Postantennal organ present, smaller than a single omma and with four peripheral lobes around a central boss. R Locality —From a fungus in small numbers at Wartook, Victoria, 14/5/34 .V.S.). 208 Remarks—In the absence of the furca this species is closely related to B. afurcata Womersley, but differs in having only a single clavate tibiotarsal seta and in the more granular integument, as well as the finer body sctae. BRACHYSTOMMELLA AFURCATA Womersley, 1933. I have recently received a large number of specimens of this species from Veitch, South Australia, 7/35 (R. L.), and from Temby, Victoria, 7/35 (R. T. M. P.). BRACHYSTOMELLA GENICULATA Womersley, 1934, Originally described from South Australia, examples of this species have been received from Darlington, Western Australia, from leaf mould, 7/35 (M. E. S.). Genus OponTE.ia Schaffer, 1897, Odontella trispina, sp. nov. (Text fig 1, c-i.) Description —Length, 0°55 mm, Colour, purplish-brown. Antennae short, only three-fourths the length of head; ratio of segments I: TI]: HI: V= 10: 6:6: 12, olfactory setae on IV three or four, sensory organ on III not deter- mined. Ocelli, 5 on each side, equal, on dark fields; postantennal organ large, slightly larger than a single omma, triangular with 3 lobes. Tibiotarsus without clavate setae; claws strong and short, without inner tooth; empodial appendage absent. Furca well developed, mucro and dens subequal, mucro with apical and subapical teeth and inner lamella with prominent median triangular lobe, dens with 3 setae. Anal horns three, the middle one long and on long papillae, the horn itself as long as claws; lateral horns adjacent to median papilla and on smail papillae, Cuticle finely granular with spare but fairly long and fine setae. Locality.—Several specimens from moss from Myponga, South Australia in April, 1935 (R. V.S.). Remarks—This species is abundantly distinct in the structure of the anal horns and of the mucro. The only other species known from Australia is O. lamellifera Axels., which is possibly an introduction. Genus ParAnura Axelson, 1902. This is a rare genus only represented by two species, namely P. sexrpunctata Axels. with its variety claviseta Axels. from Europe, and P. sexpunctata var. colorata Mills. and P. ceeca Folsom from America. It has not, hitherto, been found in Australia, Paranura australasiae, sp. nov. (Text fig. 2, a-d.) Description—Colour in spirit white. Length, 1:27 mm.; width, 0°55 mm. Antennae slightly shorter than head, tapering, ratio of segments I: II : Il]: IV = 3:3: 24 : 4, 1V with 6-7 curved olfactory setae, sensory organ III as described for other species. Ocelli, 2 on each side of a large central head boss of raised tubercles, unpigmented. Claws small, simple, without inner tooth; empodial appendage small and tuberculate, Cuticle coarsely granular, the granules arranged in bosses or clusters similar to those of Achorutes hirtellus var. cirratus Schott. ; on the head is a large triangular boss and on each side a moderately large one, and subposteriorly a pair of smaller bosses; abdomen IV carries 4 bosses and V 2. The anal scgment is without bosses, and those on the anterior abdominal segments are indeterminate. Segment VI of abdomen visible from above, simple, ea bilobed. The clothing is of long, fine, simple setae. Furca and anal horns absent. 209 Locality.—A single specimen from You Yang Mountains, Victoria, 9/31 (Miss J. R.). Remarks.—This species has superficially the facies of Achorutes hirtellus var. cirratus Schott. except for the simple sixth abdominal segment, shape of antennae and arrangement of tubercular bosses. Its nearest relative is P. sex- punctata var. claviseta Axels., from which it differs in the absence of clavate tibiotarsal setae and the presence of the tubercular bosses. ae ce % nae € : Oya ie Fig. 2. a-d Paranura australasiae, sp. nov. e-h Achorutes hirtellus var. cirratus Schott. t cs, of var. schéit., n. var, Genus AcHoruTEs Templeton, 1834; Borner, 1906. ACHORUTES HIRTELLUS Borner, 1906, var. crrratTus Schott, 1917, Syn. Achorutes cirratus Schott, 1917. Achorutes hirtellus Handschin, 1926. Achorutes cirratus Womersley, 1933. Achorutes sp. sub. hirtellus Handschin; Denis, 1933. (Text fig. 2, e-h.) Handschin (Treubia, 1926), in his description of Javanese specimens which he referred to Borner’s species, notes that they differed in the absence of the inner tooth to the claw. He also suggested that should the granular fields be 210 localised on the integumentary bosses in Schott’s species, A. cirratus, then this species would be synonymous with Borner’s. Denis (Boll. Lab. Zool. Portici 27, 1933), in his valuable key to the world species, points out that Handschin figures 3 eyes on each side, although 2 only are referred to in the text. Because of this discrepancy he refers Handschin’s material to a subspecies of hirtellus Borner, but refrains from attaching a name. Denis does not, however, mention that Handschin also shows the ocelli as distinctly pigmented, although his text gives them as unpigmented. A re-examination of all the Australian material which I have hitherto placed as A cirratus Schott convinces me that they agree entirely with Handschin’s diagnosis of hirtellus, except for the discrepancies referred to above, One can only conclude, therefore, that these are errors; in fact, a scrutiny of the figures rather gives this impression. With regard to Handschin’s query as to the granular fields, all the material I have studied of cirratus shows them as localised on the bosses. In addition, cirratus also lacks the inner tooth to the claw as in Handschin’s hirtellus. It seems undoubted, therefore, that the Javanese specimens which were placed by Handschin as hirtellus Borner are the same as Schott’s cirratus from Australia, although both differ from firtellus of Borner in lacking the tooth to the claw. The Australian cirratus Schdtt (= hirtellus Handschin nec Borner) is, therefore, a varietal form of hirtellus Borner, It remains to be remarked, however, that while Schdtt’s figures, especially of the apical abdominal segments, do not agree with those of Handschin, they are by no means convincing. The line around the granular fields, which apparently represent the integumentary bosses, must surely be more or less imaginary; in fact, it does not exist on any specimens which I have been able to study. The setae are also not at all like those seen by Handschin and myself on the dorsal surface. On some of the anal segments, particularly ventrally, there are, however, some setae which are pointed and tapering and furnished with com- paratively short ciliations, which may be similar to those figured by Schott. Var. schotti, var. nov. (Text fig. 2, i.) Two specimens found in a fungus from Millbrook Reservoir, South Australia 6/35 (R. V. S.), do not differ from the preceding except that the dorsal setae are all tapering to a point and are entirely without ciliations, being only minutely serrated, Another specimen, previously recorded as cirratus Schott, from Kumara, New Zealand (E. M. M., 1930), has also such setae. Both these examples I place as the above new variety. ACHORUTES NEWMANI Womersley, 1933. Additional records for this species are:—Belgrave, Victoria, 11/31 (H. G. A.) ; Sherbrook Falls, Victoria, 11/31 (D. C. S.) ; Waterfall Gully, South “ue 9/33 (R. V. S.); Mount Gambier, South Australia, 5/34 Remarks—The specimen from Waterfall Gully, South Australia, 9/33 (R. V. S.), is remarkable in that when first placed in spirit the eyes were deeply pigmented. Key TO THE AUSTRALIAN AND NEw ZEALAND SPECIES OF ACHORUTES. 1. Three ocelli on each side. 2 Two ocelli on each side. Colour white or pinkish, the latter soluble in spirit. 3 2. Colour in life, creamy. Claws without inner tooth. Tubercles as in A. muscorum Tmopl. Setae strong, blunt with fine indistinct serrations. Octlar bosses with three setae. : A, newmani Womersley, 1933 211 Colour blue, pigment insoluble in spirit. Claw without tooth. Segment VI visible from above, V not much longer than IV, lobes of VI separated, Vi with four well separated bosses. No granular fields. A. muscorum Templeton 3. Cuticle without distinct granular fields around the bosses. Claws without inner tooth. Dorsal setae smooth, simple. Colour in life, rose pink. A, rosaceus Schott Cuticle with distinct fields of granules around the bosses. Dorsal setae at least with minute serrations. Claw without inner tooth (except A. hirtellus Borner, 1906; f.p.). 4. All dorsal setae tapering and pointed, with minute serrations. A, hirtellus var. schétti var. nov. All dorsal setae ciliated, those on dorsal bosses brush-like. A, hirtellus var. cirratus Schott Family ONYCHIURIDAE (Lubb., 1867) Borner, 1913. Subfamily TuLtrercrnag Bagnall, 1935. Genus TuLLBERGIA Lubbock, 1876. Tullbergia gambiense, sp. nov. (Text fig. 3, a-c.) Description—Colour, white. Length, to 1-5 mm. Antennae slightly shorter than head, ratio of segments I: II : II] : IV=10: ll: 17: 20, IV with apical knob and apparently no olfactory setae, sensory organ on III with 2 long free but not stout blunt setae, the outer one slightly curved, the inner straight, III is apparently also without a mediolateral sensory seta. Postantennal organ with 60-80 tubercles. Claws stout with fine inner tooth just beyond the middle; empodial appendage present, stout at base and gradually tapering to a point which reaches the inner tooth of claw. Anal spines two, short, three-fourths the length of claw. Pseudocelli large, 20 » in diameter and atranged as follows: ant. base I, base of head 1-1, th. I-II 0-0, III 1-1, abd. I 0-0, II-V 1-1, VI 0-0. Cuticle granular. Locality—Numerous specimens from moss and humus from Mount Gambier, South Australia, 16/5/34 (R. V. S.). Remarks.—Bagnall (Ann. Mag. N. Hist. v. 15, ser. 10, Feb., 1935, pp. 236- 242) has recently revised the old genus Tullbergia Lubb., raising it to subfamily rank and resurrecting the old and lapsed genera Stenaphorura Absolon, 1900, and Mesaphorura Borner, 1901. In the genus Tullbergia s. str., he places all the Antarctic species with the exception of T. spinosissima Wahlgren, 1906. As so restricted he regards the genus as essentially an Antarctic one, but he has over- looked my records of T. trisetosa from South Australia and Victoria (Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., vol. lvii, p. 68, 1933) and my description of T. australica from Western Australia and Victoria (loc. cit., p. 68). The species described in this paper is another member of the genus, which now comprises five species, of which three are Australian forms. ‘Their relationships are best given by the follow- ing key :— Key To THE SPECIES OF TULLBERGIA (Luss., 1876) s. str. BAGNALL, 1935. 1, Empodial appendage absent. Antennae III with 3 rod-like clubs to sensory organ; without accessory mediolateral rod-like club. Large species up to 4-0 mm. : ; T. antarctica Lubb., 1876 Empodial appendage present. Smaller species. 2 2. Accessory mediolateral rod-like seta on antennae III absent; sensory organ on antennae IT] with only 2 rod-like setae. Postantennal organ with 60-80 tubercles. Anal spines three-fourths the length of claw. Claws with fine medial inner tooth. T. gambiense sp. nov. Accessory rod-like seta on antennae III present, . 3 212 3. Sensory organ on antennae TIL with 3 rod-like setae. Anal spines large, twice the length _ of claw. T. trisetosa Schaffer, 1897 = quadriseta Willem, 1902 Sensory organ on antennae IIT with only 2 rod-like setae. 4 4, Anal spines longer than claws. Postantennal organ with 70-80 tubercles. T. bisetosa Borner, 1903 : = T. insularis Wahigren, 1906 Anal spines smaller, about one-fourth length of claw. Postantennal organ with 60 tubercles. T. australica Womersley, 1933 Genus Mesapuorura Borner, 1901. MESAPHORURA KRAUSBAUERI Borner, 1901. This European species, which is widely distributed in many parts of the world, has been sent to me from leaf-mould from Darlington, Western Australia, in July, 1935 (M. E. S.). Genus DrnapHorura Bagnall, 1935. This generic name has been proposed by Bagnall (loc. cit., p. 241) for the interesting form, Tullbergia spinosissima Wahlgren,. 1906, from the Antarctic. The genus is characterised by the anal segment having nine horns, of which the two anal ones are long and strongly curved, the others not being so strongly chitinised. In this paper two further species are described which must be placed gO Fig. 3. a-c Tullbergia gambiense, sp. nov. d-i Dinaphorura diversispina, sp. nov. j-k 4 novae-gealandeae, sp. Nov. in the same genus. From a study of these additional species, the following features of probable generic value must be noticed: the characteristic sensory organ of the antennae which is normally on the third segment is placed latero- medially on segment IV, segment III only carrying the solitary accessory club which is subapical and sublateral in position. The postantennal organ also is relatively short, with few tubercles, and these inclined to the long axis. 213 Dinaphorura diversispina, sp. nov. (Text fig. 3, d-i.) Description—Length, to 1°95 mm. Colour, white, except for the major anal horns which are yellowish. Antennae as long as the head, ratio of segments I: II: II: WV=20: 20: 15 :25, IV witha small apical knob and 5-6 long olfactory setae and a complex sensory organ at the middle of the outer edge, which is homologous with that usually found on the third segment in other genera of Tullberginae,; this organ consists of a pair of stout curved rods, one on each side of a cuticular prominence or fold, and a guard seta behind; III with only a single stout curved rod on the inner side. Postantennal organ as figured with about 20 inclined adpressed lobes. Legs without clavate tibiotarsal setae; claws simple, without inner tooth; empodial appendage absent or represented by a minute stump. Anal spines 9, arranged as follows: a pair of long, well-chitinised posterior spines on large papillae; a blunt, spine-like process on each side, immediately behind these is a row of four similar but smaller processes, ventrally and between the anal spines a single small process. All segments of thorax and abdomen to V with a posterior sublateral pair of large pseudocelli; in addition there is one on each antennal base and two on the back of the head. Clothing of rather long but sparse setae. Locality—In small numbers under stones along the bank of the Onkaparinga at Mylor, South Australia, 23/10/34 (H. W.). Remarks-—From D. spinosissima (Wahlgren) this species differs in the anterior row of anal spines or processes being smaller than the others. Dinaphorura novae-zealandeae, sp. nov. © (Text fig. 3, j-k.) Description—Length, 0°9 mm. Colour, white. Antennae as long as the head, ratio of segmentsI : II : IIT: IV=10: 10: 10: 15, IV with 4-5 strong olfactory setae and at one-third from apex with a complex sensory organ as in the preceding species, III with a single stout curved rod placed medio-laterally. Claws simple, without inner tooth; empodial appendage wanting; clavate tibio- tarsal setae wanting. Anal spines 9, as follows: a pair of strong posterior normal anal spines on stout papillae and the spines plus papillae half as long again as the claws, an anterior row of four blunt stout spine-like processes the middle pair of which are smaller than the lateral ones, between this row and the posterior spines is a small process on each side, and ventrally between the posterior spines is a small process. Pseudocelli large, 12 » in diameter, arranged as follows: one on each antennal base, a pair on the back of the head and a pair on each thoracic and abdominal segment to V. Clothing of sparse, long and fine setae. Postantennal organ as in the preceding species. Locality.—This species differs from the preceding in that the intermediate lateral anal processes are very much smaller than the posterior lateral ones. In D. diversispina these processes are much larger and about as long as the posterior anal spines. In Wahlgren’s species the medial and posterior lateral processes are equal and about half the size of the posterior anal spines. Superfamily ENTOMOBRYOIDEA Womersley, 1934. Family ISOTOMIDAE (Schaffer, 1898; Bérner, 1913). Genus IsoromopEs Propuctus (Axels., 1907). This well-known European species, previously recorded by the writer from Australia, has now been sent to me from Christchurch, New Zealand,. 6/35 (L. M.). 214 Genus Fotsomipes Stach, 1922. FoLsoMIDES ExIGUUS Folsom, 1932. (Text fig. 4, a-d.) Locality——-A number of specimens from moss taken at Fish Falls, Wartook, Victoria, 30/12/34 (R. V. S.). J Remarks—lIt is extremely interesting that a representative of this genus should occur in Australia, and, particularly so, that it should agree with the species described by Folsom from Hawaii. Altogether five members of the genus are known: the genotype F. parvulus Stach. from Europe, the remainder from the New World and Australia. In his description of F. parvus and I’. exiguus Folsom, unfortunately, does not clearly indicate the specific differences. In correspondence, however, he has been kind enough to furnish me with drawings and further details, so that in the following key, which is an elaboration of that given by Mills (Collembola of Iowa, Collegiate Press, 1934, p. 43), all the known species can now be dealt with dichotomically. KEY TO THE SPECIES OF FOLSOMIDES STACH. 1. One eye on each side. 2 Two eyes on each side. 3 2. Empodial appendage very short, not extending beyond one-fourth of length of claw. F, americana Denis, 193] : Costa Rica. Empodial appendage from one-third to one-half the length of claw. F. stachi Folsom, 1934 U.S.A, 3. A long tibiotarsal seta present. Ratio of antennae I: IT = 1: 2. Postantennal organ bent. Mucro separated from dens. F. parvulus Stach, 1922 Europe. No long tibiotarsal seta. 4 4, Eyes unequal, posterior one the smaller. F. exiguus Folsom, 1932 Hawaii, Australia. Eyes equal. F.. parvus Folsom, 1934 U.S.A. Genus ASTEPHANUS Denis, 1927. This genus was erected by Denis for the species A. linnantemi Denis. from Italy (Annals. Sci. Naturelle). His generic characters may be translated thus — “Tsotomid facies, with a tendency to that of Cryptopygus, provided with a well recognisable pronotal plate, granular integument, furca, empodial appendage and a very complete antennal organ III flanked by two olfactory setae. Differs from Anurophorus Nicolet in the granular integument and the presence of a furca and empodial appendage. Differs from Pseudanurophorus Stach in the more granular integument, the absence of anal papillae and the presence of the furca. Differs from Tetracanthella Schott in the granular integument and the absence of the anal spines. Differs from Proctostephanus Borner in the six abdominal segments, its less Cryptopygus-like facies, the more primitive antennal organ III and the absence of the anal crown of tubercles. Differs from Bornerella Denis in the complete furca, less Cryptopygus-like facies and the more complex antennal organ III.” The species described below from Australia closely approaches the solitary member of the genus in its general facies, eye formula, distinct and fully-developed furca, presence of an empodial appendage, structure of antennal organ III and the presence of a distinct pronotal plate, although the last is perhaps not so distinct as in the genotype. The six abdominal segments are all distinct, and the anus is terminal or only slightly ventral in position. It differs from the generic characters given by Denis in the lack of cuticular granulations, but this does not warrant a generic separation. Fig. 4. a-d Folsomides exiguus Fols. e-t Astephanus denist, sp. nov. j-l Proisotoma brisbanensis, sp. nov. m-p Isotoma decemoculata, sp. nov. Astephanus denisi, sp. nov. (Text fig. 4, e-7.) Description—Length, to 0°6 mm. Colour almost entirely bluish-grey, under high magnification the pigment is seen to be roughly arranged hexagonally. Cuticle smooth, not granular, Antennae as long as head, ratio of segments I: I: Wl: WV=5: 7: 7: 15, IV apparently without olfactory setae, IIT with sensory organ as described for A linnaniemi Denis. Ocelli, 6 on each side on a patch of pigment (cf. fig.) ; postantennal organ quite twice as long as an anterior ocellus, broadly elliptical. Dorsal pronotal plate distinct. Claws with- out inner tooth; empodial appendage present and similar on all feet, with inner and outer lamellae; tibiotarsus without clavate setae. Furca well developed; manubrium half as long again as the mucrodens, with three ventral setae; mucro not demarcated from dens but appearing as a small apical rounded lobe or knob; dens with two ventral setae and one subapical dorsal seta which overreaches the tip of mucro, Rami with.3 barbs, tenaculum with a strong seta. All abdominal segments distinct, IT] and IV subequal. Anus terminal or slightly ventral. Cloth- ing of fairly numerous short fine setae. Locality—In numbers from moss from Fish Falls, Wartook, Victoria, 30/12/34 (R. V. S.). Remarks. —Differs from the genotype in lack of granular cuticle, absence of the long nonclavate tibiotarsal seta, and in the structure of the mucro. It is dedicated to my colleague, Dr. J. R. Denis, of the University of Dijon, France. Genus Prorsotoma Bérner, 1906. Proisotoma brisbanensis, sp. nov. (Text fig. 4, 7-1.) Description.—Length, to 0°5 mm. Colour, bluish-black, lighter ventrally and on legs and furca. Antennae blue-black, as long as the head, ratio of segments I: 1: WI: WV= 12: 17: 20: 40, antennal sensory organ not observed. Eyes, 6 on each side on dark fields, equal; postantennal organ broadly elliptical, doubly contoured with slight indications of lateral notches, as long as 2 ocelli. Claws alike on all legs, simple without inner tooth; empodial appendage as figured, 216 ending in a short style; tibiotarsal clavate setae one. Furca short, barely reaching ventral tube, dens ventrally with 7 rounded bosses and 6-7 setae ; mucro bidentate, in distal half with a large basal half-moon shaped lamella. Ratio of abdomen Ill : IV=5: 8. Clothing of numerous short, fine, simple setae. Locality—In numbers on surface of water of Chippeway Bore drains, St. George, Brisbane, Queensland, 9/34 (A. R. B.). Remarks—This species closely resembles P. fitchi Denis, 1934, from Costa Rica, in the form of the mucro, but differs in having only 6 ocelli instead of 8 on each side. It also has a single clavate tibiotarsal seta instead of two, while it further differs in that the claws and empodial appendages are alike on all feet. Genus Isoroma Borner, 1906. Isoroma RAFFI Womersley, 1934. This species was originally described from specimens from the You Yang Mountains, Victoria, Numerous specimens have since been taken in moss from Mount Osmond, South Australia, 6/34 (H. W.), 7/34 (R. V. S.). Jsotoma decemoculata, sp. nov. (Text fig. 4, m-p.) Description—Length, to 1:0 mm. Colour, whitish. Ocelli, 5 on each side on two adjacent but separated patches of pigment. Facies rather that of Folsomia, but abdomen IV separated from V and VI. Antennae half as long again as head, II barely half as long again as I, III slightly shorter than II, IV quite as long as If and III together, almost elliptical and with terminal knob. Postantennal organ elliptical, twice as long as the two anterior ocelli together, doubly contoured and slightly notched. Claws untoothed; empodial appendage with narrow lamella, not reaching to half the claw; tibiotarsus without clavate setae. Furca rather short, not reaching ventral tube, dens twice as long as manubrium, mucro bidentate. Body setae fine simple and fairly long, somewhat longer on apical segments, each abdominal segment with some straight upstand- ing setae. Locality-——A number of specimens in moss from Glen Osmond, South Aus- tralia, 4/34 (R. V. S.), 7/34 (H. W.). Remarks.—Differs from all other species in the number and arrangement of the ocelli. JsoTOMA GEORGIANA Schaffer, 1891. In 1934 (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. lviii, p. 105) the writer recorded this Subantarctic species from the Coorong, South Australia. In June, 1935, I was fortunate in obtaining several specimens from moss at Mount Compass, South Australia, and it has also been brought to me from a fungus from Mill- brook Reservoir, South Australia, 6/35 (R. V. 5.). Family ENTOMOBRYIDAE Borner, 1913, Genus Lermocyrtinus Borner, 1903. Lepidocyrtinus queenslandiae, sp. nov. (Text fig. 5, a-c.) Description—Length, 1:25 mm, Colour, uniformly deep brownish-black; legs and furca rather lighter. Ocelli, 8 on each side on dark fields. Antennae two and a half times as long as head, ratio of segments I : IT: Wl: IV=6: 9 10: 15, IV and distal part of III annulated, I and II scaled. Thorax III dorsally half as long again as IL; abdomen IV three times as long as III. Claws strong, with 3 inner teeth besides the apical tooth; empodial appendage reaching second tooth of claw. Furca long, reaching ventral tube; manubrium shorter than mucrodens, mucro falciform with basal spine. Clothing of normal setae 217 and scales, latter varied in shape but never acutely pointed, dark-brownish with numerous short longitudinal striations. Locality —A single specimen taken at Mount Edwards, Brisbane, Queens- land, in March, 1934 (A. R. B.). Remarks.—This is the first species of this genus to be recorded for this country. Fig. 5. c Lepidocyrtinus queenslandiae, sp. nov. Mesira brunnea, sp. nov. h Arrhopalites aurantiaca, sp. Nov. é “ha. = = -m Katianna pescotti, sp. nov. Genus Mesrra Borner, 1903; nec. Schtscherbakow, 1898. Mesira brunnea, sp. nov. (Text fig. 5, d-e.) Description—Length, 1°8 mm. Facies rather that of Lepidophorella. Colour, golden-brown, antennae legs furea and slightly laterally on segments bluish. Eyes, 8 on each side on dark fields connected by an anterior dark line. Antennae two and half times as long as head, ratio of segments I: I: Ill: 1V —5-: 15:15: 23, 1Vannulated. Claws with two inner teeth besides the apical tooth; empodial appendage as figured. Furca long, reaching ventral tube, manubrium subequal to mucrodens, mucro bidentate with basal spine, apical tooth much smaller than preapical tooth. Thorax II twice as long as II. Body very densely covered with brown scales of varied shape and heavily marked with short longitudinal striations; abdomen IV 5-6 times as long as III. Locality—Two specimens taken on Poinsettia foliage at Brisbane, Queens- land, 23/5/33 (A. R. B.). Suborder SYMPHYPLEONA Borner, 1913. Family SMINTHURIDAE Lubbock, 1870, Genus SmiInTuuripes s, str. Borner, 1903, SMINTHURIDES AQUATICUS (Bourlet, 1843). In 1932 I recorded the variety Jevanderi (Reuter) of this species from Western Australia. The typical form has now been taken in some numbers on the surface of a pond at Aiberton, South Australia, 4/35 (J. G.), and I have had a large number sent to me from Apsley, Victoria, 7/35 (R. T. M. P.). H 218 Genus ARRHOPALITEs Borner, 1913. Arrhopalites aurantiaca, sp. nov. (Text fig. 5, f-A.) Description—Length, to 0'7 mm. Colour, of a light to dark-brownish orange, the sides of a rather dirtier shade; legs and furca white to bluish. Antennae about twice as long as head, ratio of segments 1: II] : II] : IV = 10: 20: 23; 70, IIL with indefinite wart, IV with 8-9 subdivisions, of which the first and Jast are twice the length of the others; antennal setae fairly fine and uniform in length. Eyes, 8 on each side on dark fields. Claws long, without inner tooth; empodial appendage with basal inner angular lamella and narrow outer lamella, I and I with long apical bristle which over-reaches tip of claw and is doubtfully clavate; no clavate tibiotarsal setae. Furca long, ratio of mucro to dens = 15 : 40, mucro with 9-10 teeth and an inner lamella. Anal segments with one, abdomen with three long fine sensory setae on each side. Locality —In moss from Waterfall Gully, South Australia, 5/34 (R. V. S.); Mount Barker, South Australia, 6/34 (H. W.). Remarks.—Very distinct in colour and in having 8 eyes on each side of the head. Genus SMINTHURINUS Borner, 1903. SMINTHURINUS OCULATUS Schott, 1917. Locality.—A single specimen from Christchurch, New Zealand, 6/35 (1.. M.). Remarks.—Apart from Schott’s original description of this species from the Queensland material collected by the Mjoberg Expedition to Australia it has not again been met with in this country. It is therefore of interest that it can be recorded from New Zealand. Having only a single specimen, as yet, it is not possible to add anything to Schott’s diagnosis. Genus KatTiannaA Borner, 1906. Katianna pescotti, sp. nov. (Text fig. 5, 7-2.) Description —Length, to 1°5 mm. Colour, yellowish with dark eye-fields, apical antennal segments bluish. Antennae twice as long as head, ratio of seg- ments I: IT: WL: 1V—=2:4: 5: 124, II] with long strong setae and stout outer peg-like organ, [V about twice as long as LI with 12-14 divisions. Eyes, 8 on each side on dark fields. Legs with 2-3 clavate tibiotarsal setae. Claws with single inner tooth; empodial appendage with broad inner angular lamella and narrow outer lamella, with apical or subapical bristle which is long and reaches tip of claws on | and II but is shorter on III. Furca normal, dens about three times the length of mucro, mucro as figured. Female genital appendage as in figure. Genital segment with one, abdomen with three long fine sensory setae. Locality.--A few specimens from Port Fairy, Victoria, 7/35 (R. T. M. P.). Remarks —Dedicated to the finder, Mr. R. T. M. Pescott, of the Victorian Department of Agriculture. KKATIANNA OCEANIA var, SCHOTTI Womersley, 1933, A number of specimens of this form were obtained from moss from the National Park, Belair, South Australia, 5/35 (H. W.). Genus PARAKATIANNA Womersley, 1932. PARAKATIANNA SPINATA Womersley, 1932. This species has hitherto been known only from Western Australia. Two specimens have recently been obtained from moss from Adelaide, South Aus- tralia, 5/35 (H. W.). AUSTRALIAN FUNGI: NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS. - NO. 11. BY J. BURTON CLELAND, M.D. Summary Description in English of the following species have already appeared in the author’s “Toadstools and Mushrooms and other Larger Fungi of South Australia. Part II,” Government Printer, Adelaide, 1935. To make these species valid, according to the Rules of Botanical Nomenclature, Latin descriptions must be supplied. 219 AUSTRALIAN FUNGI: NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS.—No. 11. By J. Burron Cretanp, M.D. [Read October 10, 1935.| Descriptions in English of the following species have already appeared in the author’s “Toadstools and Mushrooms and other Larger Fungi of South Aus- tralia. Part II,” Government Printer, Adelaide, 1935. To make these species valid, according to the Rules of Botanical Nomenclature, Jatin descriptions must be supplied. 620. Cantharellus attenuatus Clel—-Pileus 1°8-2°5 cm., campanulatus vel convextig et subumbonatus, vel subinfundibuliformis, vinaceo-luteus. Lamellae perdecurrentes, subdistantes, angustae, marginibus subcrassis, interdum furcatae vel vinculis venosis, carneo-cremaceo-alhidae, Stipes 5-6°2 cm., tenuis, deorsum perattenuatus, “matt” vel subfibrillosus, solidus, subvinaceo-luteo-albidus. Caro alba. Sporae pyriformes, 5 X 2°5p. S.A—National Park, Mount Lofty. 621. Dictyolus cinnamoneus Clel—Pileus 1:8 * 1-2 cm., flabelliformis, sub- convexus vel concavus, usitate lobatus vel laceratus, aurantio-cinnamoneus vel cinnamoneo-luteus. Lamellae dccurrentes, angustae, marginibus subcrassis, interdum furcatae, subferruginoso-cinnamoneae. Stipes lateralis, 10-12 mm., sub- aequalis, subfarinaceus, subcinnamoneo-pallidus. Sporae angustae, albae, 7°5 X 2°5-3°5 4. Plantae interdum stipite ramoso et pileis pluribus. 5.A—Mount Lofty. 622. Fomes robustus Karst. var. Melaleucae—Varietas tubulorum oribus circa 3 in 1 mm. (F. robustus typicus in Australia circa 5-6 in 1 mm.) et sporis hyalinis vel interdum brunneis, 8-9°5 ». South Australia—De Melaleucae halmaturorum truncis, Inman River. 623. Fomes Lloydii Clel—Pileus plus vel minus ungulatus, 10 X 10 ¥ 5cm.,, irregulariter convexus, plus vel minus nodulosus, velutinus, “buckthorn brown.” Tubulae 1:2 cm., oribus circa 4 in 1 mm, “buckthorn brown” vel “Dresden brown, in juventate “yellow ochre.” Substantia dura sed non ponderosa, flavior quam “yellow ochre”. Sporae subsphericales, brunneae, 4-4-8». Nullae setae, S.A—-De Eucalypto rostrata, National Park. 624. Ganoderma polymorphum Clel—Sporophorae saepe irregulares et abortae, noduloso-digitatac vel loboso-flabelliformes, ete, ileus 10-15 * 6°2- 10 em., irregulariter planus vel convexus, obscure concentrico-sulcatus, irregu- lariter rugosus, crusta dura sublaccata inter “Rood’s Brown” et “Vandyke Brown,” margine rotundo irregulariter lobato et infra laccato, Tubulae 8-9 mm., avellaneae vel carnco-lutaceae, oribus 4-5 in 1 mm., rotundis. Substantia 3-8 mm., firmo-suberosa, zonata, “Sayal Brown,” “Snuff Brown” vel carneo-lutacea, levis. Stipes lateralis, brevis ct crassus, 2°5-7°5 1-1-8 cm., saepe irregularis et podagri- formis, laccatus, brunneus. Sporae pyriformes, truncatae, verrucosae, brunneae, 10-10°5 X 6:5 ~ 7:54. S.A—Moorilyanna. 625. Irpex epitephrus Clel—Plantae resupinatae vel subpileatae, in gregibus disseminatis parvis, aliquot mm. - 2 cm., de ligni projecturis parvis. Tubulae irregulares, irpiciformes, circa 0°5 mm., decurrentes, carneo- vel cinnamoneo- luteae. Sporae ?, 5-5 X 2-5, S.A.—National Park. 626. Laschia fusca Clel.—Planta poculiformis, 3-5 mm., crassus | mm., dorso-lateraliter annectata. Pileus convexus, glaber, fusco-niger. HWymenium 220 concavum, fuscum; tubuli 2-3 in 1 mm.; pori faviformes, usitate subirregulares ; dissepimenta tenuia. Caro gelatino-firma, Sporae subsphericales, 6-5». S.A— National Park. 627. Clavaria subrugosa Clel—Plantae albidae vel subcinero-albidae vel circa “cartridge buff,” 3-1-5 cm., basibus tenuibus, sursum subexpansae, interdum complanatae, simplices vel irregulariter ramosae furcis filiformibus vel com- planatis, irregulariter rugosae, solidae, subgregariosae. Sporae subsphericales, 5'6-7°5 ». S.A—Mount Lofty, National Park. 628. Lentinus dactyloides Clel.—Pileus 3:7 cm., convexus, centro plano vel subdepresso, margine inverso, subtiliter tomentosus, corio crasso, avellaneus. Lamellae adnatae, deinde subsecedentes, confertae, subundulatae, marginibus tenuibus, integrae, 2 mm. altae, cremaceae. Stipes 4-3 cm., in medio 1-5 cm. crassus, infra lamellis 1-2 cm., deorsum attenuatus, conferto tomentosus, vinaceo- luteus. Care alba, tenax, in exteriorem partem attenuata. Sclerotia larga, ad 17-5 X 17:5 cm., processibus digitatis deorsum directis. Sporae elongatae, obliquae, subfalcatae, albae, 9-13 X 5°5-7 4. S.A—Halidon, NOTES ON SOME VICTORIAN MAMMALS BY H. H. FINLAYSON Summary Few animals have been so obscure as to their status on the mainland as the Potoroo. Its former presence in the south-eastern district of this State is attested by the specimen in the British Museum and by the accounts of settlers, and by occasional bone fragments in cave deposits, but it does not seem to have been a common form west of the Glenelg, at the time of settlement. In Victoria, though better known than here, there have been few explicit references to it in the literature, which would enable one to judge as to how it was faring in the struggle for survival, until Mr. Brazenor,‘” in 1933 stated that "though very uncommon it still persists . . . in the north-eastern district, in the Grampians, and probably in the Otway Ranges,” and he has since confirmed its presence in the last locality by personally collecting it there. 221 NOTES ON SOME VICTORIAN MAMMALS. By H. H. FIntayson, Hon. Curator of Mammals, South Australian Museum, [Read October 10, 1935.] PLATE I. Pororous TRIDACTYLuS (Kerr). Few animals have been so obscure as to their status on the mainland as the Potoroo. Its former presence in the south-eastern district of this State is attested by the specimen in the British Museum and by the accounts of settlers, and by occasional bone fragments in cave deposits, but it does not seem to have been a common form west of the Glenelg, at the time of settlement. In Victoria, though better known than here, there have been few explicit references to it in the literature, which would enable one to judge as to how it was faring in the struggle for survival, until Mr. Brazenor,™ in 1933 stated that “though very uncommon it still persists . . . in the north-eastern district, in the Grampians, and probably in the Otway Ranges,” and he has since confirmed its presence in the last locality by personally collecting it there. I am able to add two other localities to these, viz., French Island in Western Port, and the Portland area in the western district, and to state that in the latter, at least, it is still plentiful. Its apparent scarcity is due, I believe, largely to its choice of dense undergrowth, frequently in heavily forested country where timber-getting is the only occupation, and it is only when clearings are made in it, or upon the fringes, by settlers, that it begins to come under notice, through being taken in rabbit traps. It is then usually reported as a handicoot—the long snout and rather obese build deceiving all but the more observant. In 1927 a rabbit-trapper, near Gorae, stated that he took over twenty of these “bandicoots” in a short season, and this I was able subsequently to prove, by overhauling the skulls at his dumps, which contained neither isoodon nor perameles, but numerous potorous. In the summer of the following year I took it myself near Heywood and had further reports of it, and again in the winter of the same year on French Island, and that no disaster has overtaken it since then is vouched for by several correspondents, and very recently (for the western district) by Professor Wood-- Jones (in Witt.). Skulls of potorous, apparently identical with the modern tridactylus, are very numerous in cave deposits, from the east bank of the Glenelg. As it is proposed to review the characters of the animal elsewhere, in con- nection with a Tasmanian series, dimensions of a single male and female only are appended; the former from the western district at the P®M® stage, and the latter from French Island, with P4#M4, . Head and body (4, 2), 336°5, 325- tail, 235, 225: pes, 78, 73; ear, 40 X 24, 39 X 24; weight m grammes, 850, . Skull Dimensions —Basal length, 64:0, 68:0; zygomatic breadth, 37°5, 37-0; nasals length, 33°5, 380; nasals greatest breadth, 11:0, 11:5; constriction, 15-5, 16:0; palate, length, 43-0, 45:5; palate, breadth (ins., M2), 11:0, 14:0; diastema, 11:0, 13-5; facial index, 264, 263; M28, 13-5, 13-5, @) The Victorian Year Book, 1932-33. 222 PETAURUS AUSTRALIS (Shaw). Messrs. Brazenor) and Fleay) have recently recorded the taking of two specimens of this animal at Mount Wills in East Gippsland at 4,800’. It is not a common animal anywhere in south-eastern Australia, and the extent of its occurrence in Victoria is still uncertain. It is interesting, therefore, to be able to record it from the western district, within a few miles of the South Australian border. In 1930 I reported‘ the presence of Petaurus breviceps in south-eastern South Australia, about 30 miles west of the border, and it is possible that its larger relative also may prove to occur in this State. The specimen is an adult male and was taken in October, 1928, in stringy-bark country near Gorae. Though it comes from a coastal plain but little above sea level, its general colouration seems to agree with those from Mount Wills; there are some minor divergences from the distribution of the markings as recorded by Mr. Fleay, and the pelage is evidently less profuse than is indicated in his photographs, but it differs from the New South Wales animal, as described by Thomas, in the clear black and grey tones of the dorsum (almost free from brown suffusion) and in its pale lemon-yellow ventrum (as against orange or tan), though this last evidently varies in New South Wales also. There is a well-marked coronal gland patch of brown hairs, cemented by resinified exudate, Reliable flesh measurements are not available, but the animal is evidently quite as large as those on the east coast. The skull gives figures agreeing closely with those quoted by Thomas, thus: Basal length, 49-0; zygomatic breadth, 38-9; nasals length, 20-6; nasals greatest breadth, 12-7; constriction, 11-1; palate, length, 28-0; palate, breadth, inside M2, 11-6; M8™48, 7-7; P4, 2:2, PSEUDOCHIRUS LANIGINOSUS (Gould). Between Thomas’s var. notialis from the Mount lofty Range and Matschie’s var. victoriae [rom the Otway Ranges, there is a hiatus in the records for laniginosus. Fortunately, this does not correspond to a complete hiatus in the distribution of the animal, since there are numerous, though dwindling colonies of it in the lower south-eastern district of this state, and across the Glenelg in Victorian territory, The authors of the above names evidently considered that they had to deal with distinct races, which could be distinguished from the long known laniginosus of New South Wales by a slighter dentition and colder dorsal colouration and less markedly rufous limbs. In the case of Thomas's name this is not a very satisfactory conception of the characters of the South Australian ringtail, and it is proposed to amend it shortly by an analysis of an adequate series. Of Matchie’s victoriae I have no examples which can safely be regarded as topotypical, but observations on the West Victorian animal reveal such extra- ordinary differences co-existing in one and the same colony, that it seems desirable to publish them for the information of those who have opportunity of working on the animal further east. The observations were made in January, 1928, in the scrubs of the Surry River, where the animal was very plentiful in the titree. By the simple expedient of shaking the stems the occupants of the nests could be induced to come into the open, where, in many cases, drowsy in the afternoon sun, they could be viewed at leisure at distances of a few feet. In the course of a few days, 50 or more were @) Aust. Zoologist, vol. viii, pt. 1, p. 54. @) Victorian Naturalist, June, 1933, p. 35. ( Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. liv, 1930, p. 177. 223 examined in this way, and examples representing the three main types of coloura- tion were selected with certainty and preserved. Young animals were found to be generally much greyer than adults, the dorsum in these being usually a dark monotone slightly sooty grey, which continues down the sides without much change to meet the white belly fur. Their forearms, hips and lower tail bases are variably tinged with dull rust colour, and they correspond perhaps with Matschie’s victoriae. The adults, on the other hand, generally differed strikingly from this colour scheme, in that the whole dorsum from crown to tail base is strongly reddened and at the same time more distinctly grizzled. The arms, legs, sides and lower tail base are a rich, bright orange-cinnamon, similar to but richer than the colour of the limbs in the Queensland var. oralis, but, of course, not contrasted with the body colour as in that form, The reddening involves even the markings of the head; the orbital ring and ear patch being dark rufous brown instead of black, as in young animals, Between these extremes are many inter- mediate stages, showing an increasing grizzling of the dorsum, and increased richness and widening diffusion of the red element in the colouration. In all, the belly remains pure white, and in the red individuals it is in sharp and elegant contrast with the orange sides. The reddest individuals were invariably large, but the change is not strictly correlated with age, and is quite independent of sex. The seasonable influence is still to be determined. Its dimensions and other characters will be dealt with elsewhere in connec- tion with South Australian series. PHASCOLARCTOS CINEREUS (Goldfuss). In checking the characters of a series of Queensland koalas recently, against material from New South Wales and Victoria, | have been impressed again, as on first visiting the place, with the richness of colouring and uniformly large size of the animal on French Island. It is a curious fact that, although brownish specimens were apparently sent to Europe at a very early stage, none of the standard descriptions of the animal contain a definite statement that (aside from the pale abraded rump patch) the dorsum sometimes has two contrasted colour zones. In the two most recent general accounts of the animal by Wood-Jones and Le Souef and Burrell, the back is said to be variably grey, and although Mr. Noel Burnet in his beautifully illustrated booklets refers to the existence of brown individuals, the fact of the dorsum being frequently deep brown and not grey does not scem to have found its way into formal descriptions. The condition occurs in a small proportion of individuals even in the North Queensland adustus, and there is some evidence to show that it is an additive character, the intensity and frequency of which increases from north to south, and that the South Victorian animal represents the final term in the series. So far as my observations on some score of living animals on French [sland may be trusted, both sexes there, at all ages, are decidedly brown from the crown of the head to the middle of the back. The colour varies, but is usually a rich, deep, rather purplish chocolate with very little grizzling of lighter hairs, and is so strongly and suddenly contrasted with the ashy grey of the lower back, that the animal might fairly be said to be pied. The brown arcas of the dorsum have a broad axiliary extension into the parallel costal lines, which are also very richly coloured and so extensive that in some examples almost the whole of the sides and belly are brown also. The white gulo-sternal area is extensive and not infrequently is prolonged up on the nape, forming a complete collar. The sternal @) Trans. and Proc, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. Iviii, 1934, p. 221. 224 gland is present in both sexes but is small and inconspicuous, and at this time was not fringed with pigmented hairs. In May, 1928, the whole pelage was profuse and sparkling, the colony then being evidently in a thriving state, In spite of the enthusiasm which now exists for the koala, and the ease with which observations can be made, it is still a very poorly described species. The opportunity of making good the deficiency has gone, so far as the greater part of its range is concerned, and there is the greater need, therefore, for accurate statements of its characters in the south, while there is yet time. From the point of view of nomenclature alone the present position is unsatisfactory, since the locus of the typical variety is evidently middle or northern New South Wales, and to leave the island form unnoticed, is to imply that it differs less from the true cinereus than the mid-Queensland adustus does, and that, | think, detailed statistics by Victorian naturalists might show not to be the case, A further point of interest is the origin of the island colony. Mr. F. Lewis states that they were introduced to the island from Corinella on the mainland 20-30 years ago. Mrs. R. H. Bennetts, who is well informed on the island history, dates the first introduction in 1890, but others of an older generation while not disputing this “planting,” maintain that “bears” were present on the island prior to this. Some koala pelts which I have seen in the western district, near the South Australian border (where it is now very rare), were much greyer and less strongly bicolor than the French Island animal, and interesting comparisons might be made with the still existing animal of Wilson’s Promontory, since it is possible that the strongly bicolor dorsum and large size in the island animal may have been quite recently acquired as a result of the slight change from the mainland to the island environment. A relevant example of such a change, brought about in a very short time (though under much more extreme conditions), is provided by Mr. Keith Min- chin’s successful experiment in establishing a colony of the Queensland adustus in the Barossa Range of South Australia, with FE. rostrata as their chief food tree. These koalas show marked pelage changes from their original condition, the coat having become denser and longer, and with a profuse, even overlay of the white- tipped hairs, practically obliterating all markings. Dimensions —Range in three adult males and one adult female from French Island (measured in the flesh). Head and body (along curves), 800-830; 730. Head and body (between perpendiculars), 725-745; 645. Chest (girth), 430-480; 400. Middle girth, 550- 630; 500. Manus, 95-108; 91. Pes, 103-111; 97. Ear, 60-70; 62. Weight, 26-31 Ibs; 194 Ibs. Skulls of the same —Greatest length, 154-0-161:0; 130°5. Basal length, 139-0-145:2; 118-3. Zygomatic breadth, 87°5-96°0; 74-0. Nasals length, 46-1- 48:7; 39'0. Nasals breadth, 43-5-44-5; 34-0. Constriction, 24°6-25-7; 24-5. Palate, length, 72°2-75°7; 61-6 . Palate, breadth inside M2, 21-6-22-2; 19-8. Anterior palatal foramina, 4°9-5-8; 5-0. P4, 7°2-7°3; 68. Ms1-3, 23-0-23-4; 22°2. M514, 29-7-30-0; 29-2 RaTTus LuTREOLA (Gray), Waite, in 1900, noted the variability in coat colour of this rat, but his remarks hardly prepare one for the very striking differences which exist. If mixed series from New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia and Tasmania are examined, it is seen that they fall into two camps—the one having a dorsal colour of rufous (9) Since this note was prepared Mr. Troughton has published the name victor for the Victorian koala. Aust. Nat., vol. ix, pt. 6, p. 137. ) Victorian Naturalist, July, 1934, p. 74. 225 brown of varying richness, and the other a much colder blackish tone, which on closer inspection is seen to be associated also with a rather more conspicuous grizz- ling of the coat and a slightly softer texture of the fur. There is some intergrad- ing but the great majority of individuals can be sorted at sight, and though there appear to be no structural differences, the extremes exhibit differences of coloura- tion greater than those shown by some accepted species; considerably greater, for example, than those separating the western fuscipes from the brown type of its eastern ally, lutreola, So far as available data goes, the differences are not seasonal ones, and the sexes are coloured alike. Since Professor Wood-Jones described ‘®) a single example from South Aus- tralia in 1924, other specimens have come to hand from Lake Albert, the Coorong, and the lower south-east of the State, where they link up probably (though this is not properly established) with the series of Victorian colonies which extend to Western Port and possibly into East Gippsland. All the South Australian and, until recently, all the Victorian cxamples which had been examined showed the blackish colouration, and as Gray’s specimen was evidently from Adelaide, it at first appeared probable that the dark form repre- sented the true lutreola, and that the more richly coloured animal of Tasmania and New South Wales should be separated subspecifically. Recently, however, evidence is to hand to show that this cannot be done—at least on the grounds of coat colour alone. In New South Wales, Mr. Troughton states (in litt.), an example is known which somewhat resembles in colouration the French Island (Victorian) specimens; further, a beautiful series from the highlands behind Cape Otway, taken by Mr. Brazenor last year, makes an approach to my own series from Tasmanian highlands; and thirdly, a single specimen from the mouth of the Arthur River, at sea level, in west Tasmania, resembles French Island specimens rather than those from the plateau. The differences, therefore, are not territorial in the ordinary sense, but may yet be found to be correlated with altitude, since all the cold-toned blackish examples of South Australia, Victoria and Tasmania, at least, were taken at or near sea level and in coastal districts. Both in Victoria and Tasmania /utreola is common in accessible localities, and as official solicitude for the fauna does not extend to rats, it should not be difficult, with the aid of local Field Naturalists, to build up large series of it, and trace the origin of the entire range of varia- tion, shown. As the New South Wales animal appears to reach considerably larger maximum dimensions (pes up to 37 mm.) than the form further south, flesh measurements of a large male and female from French Island, Victoria, are appended. Head and body ( #, 2), 160, 163; tail, 102, 92; pes, 30, 27; ear, 20, 17. Skulls (of same)—Rasilar length, 31-6, 31:7; zygomatic breadth, 20, 20°9; breadth of brain case, 16°6, 16°3; constriction, 4°8, 4-9; palatilar length, 18-3, 18-3; ant. palatal foramina, 6°9, 6°0; nasals length, 13-9, 13-6; nasals greatest breadth, 4:1, 3-5; upper molar series, 7'5, 7-3. In Mr. Brazenor’s series from the Otway, a length of pes of 33 mm. is reached, and a basilar length of 32:7 mm. Both in females, HyYDROMYS CHRYSOGASTER (?) (Geoffroy). In view of the great variability in coat colour of water rats, even in quite restricted localities, it is difficult to escape some scepticism as to the validity of some of the species and subspecies which have been named by overseas systematists —sometimes with very scanty material and data, (*) Mammals of South Australia (1922-1924), p, 299, 226 In South Australia the rather dull-coloured type with palish belly and little white on the tail tip, which Gould distinguished as fulvolavatus, passes imper- ceptibly into a much more richly-coloured phase with long white tail tips, and making some approach to the very brilliant chrysogaster of Tasmania. As to what range of colour is shown by water rats in Western Victoria, I have insufficient data to determine, but two specimens obtained on French Island obviously represent Gould’s leucogaster and exhibit such a totally different condi- tion from anything I have seen as yet in South Australian series, as to arouse curiosity as to what is the exact status of this form and its relation to the normal red individuals. The specimens were both males and were taken in the winter of 1928, in a locality where normally coloured individuals are the rule. The loss of the rufous element in the coat is almost complete and involves not only the ventrum, but the back and sides as well, so that both are a cold, dark grizzled grey dorsally and greyish-white ventrally, with (in one) a faint yellowish wash surviv- ing. Dorsally they are scarcely distinguishable from the western fuliginosus, though they differ decidedly from it ventrally, and in having a liberally white tipped tail and some white mystical vibrissae. Their resemblance (fide descrip- tions) to H. caurinus from the Kimberlies, is still closer. Unfortunately, accurate measurements are not available and only the skull of the smaller was preserved, but they appear to be somewhat smaller than average adults of the normally coloured form, without being correspondingly immature, and in particular the hind foot is conspicuously small, having a length, in the larger, of 52 mm. Gould’s leucogaster from the Clarence River, New South Wales, was also distinguished by a small foot. The skull of the smaller gives :—Basilar length, 46 mm.; zygomatic breadth, 23°5; upper molar row, 6-9. The molars are appreciably slighter than in South Australian animals, and careful comparisons with older individuals might reveal other structural differences as well. Field (or even cage) observations on these white-bellied individuals might lead to interesting results. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS, For courtesies of various kinds I am much indebted to Mr. E. le G. Troughton, of the Australian Museum, Sydney; Mr. C. W. Brazenor, of the National Museum, Melbourne; Mr. L. Glaucrt, of the Perth Museum; Mr. F. Lewis, Chief Inspector of Fisheries and Game in Victoria, and to numerous residents of that State, EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. Fig. 1. Dorsal and ventral colouration in (a) Phascolarctos cinereus from Mount Koolon, North Queensland, two years after transference to the Barossa Range, South Aus- tralia; (b) Phascolarcios cinereus from French Island, Victoria. (Both in winter coat.) Fig. 2, Upper posterior premolars and molars, of the left side, in Thalacomys minor miselius * 5. P*tis shown in a buccal view; MP* in buccal and crown views, and the molars in oblique lingual view. Teeth from three individuals, to show the unworn crown patterns. Fig, 3. Lower posterior premolar and molars of the right side in Thalacomys minor miselius x 5. All teeth shown in oblique buccal view. Teeth from three individuals, to show the unworn crown patterns. ON MAMMALS FROM THE LAKE EYRE BASIN. PART II -THE PERAMELIDAE. BY H. H. FINLAYSON Summary This peculiar pale and diminutive bilby was described by the writer in 1932” and attention drawn to its probable identity with Th. leucurus (Thomas), represented by a single unlocalized specimen in the British Museum which was acquired from an employee of the South Australian Museum prior to 1887. Apparently to this form also may be referred the specimen identified as Th. leucurus by A.S. L.eSouef,”? which was taken at Mungerani in 1924, within the area now under consideration. 227 ON MAMMALS FROM THE LAKE EYRE BASIN. PART II@)—THE PERAMELIDAE. By H. H. Finrayson, Hon. Curator of Mammals, South Australian Museum. [Read October 10, 1935.] THALACOMYS MINOR var. MISELIUS (Finlayson). This peculiar pale and diminutive bilby was described by the writer in 1932) and attention drawn to its probable identity with Th. leucurus (Thomas), repre- sented by a single unlocalized specimen in the British Museum which was acquired from an employee of the South Australian Muscum prior to 1887. Apparently to this form also may be referred the specimen identified as Th. leucurus by A. S. LeSouef,“@? which was taken at Mungerani in 1924, within the area now under consideration. By the Wonkonguroo the animal is called Yallara, and is evidently a wide- spread and well-known form. All the specimens obtained, however, were taken near Cooncherie, where it was plentiful. Its burrows are found only in the sandhills, never on the flats, and as the entrance is blocked with loose sand when the animal is within, they are never easy to locate, and in periods of wind are indicated only by a shallow dimple on the sloping surface of the dunes. At such times the tell-tale tracks disappear also, but even with this added difficulty the Wonkonguroo boy, who obtained most of the specimens, was never long in locat- ing a site, being guided thereto partly, I believe, by topographical peculiarities in the ridges, though these were not of an obvious kind. He seldom returned without two or three after a morning’s work, and I suspect many found their way to the cooking fires of the horse boys as well. In the digging-out process most of the turns and twists of the burrow are anticipated by the diggers, who take short cuts over or across the loops, and as the entrance was usually on the steeply sloping face of the ridge, which is blanketed with drifting sand, the making of a complete section of a gallery called for more time and labour than was available. From the entrance the burrow descends steeply for about two feet, and then turns sharply, sometimes in a horizontal, sometimes in a vertical plane, On two occasions the distance from the entrance to the end was eight to ten feet in a straight line, and though there were several turns in both planes, the resultant course would not be a complete spiral. In the case of minor it has been recorded that the animal lies up within a few feet of the entrance, and that the blacks capture it by stamping in the burrow behind it and thus save much of the work of digging. Whether this habit is shared by miselius at any time of the year is not certain, but in the two cases referred to the animal was taken at the extremity of the gallery and was evidently extending it by frantic digging when seized, and the situation of the burrows and their depth would, in most cases, defeat the stamping-in ruse. So far as could be ascertained the burrows are never provided with pop holes or ventilating shafts, and no nest or dwelling chamber was seen. @) Part I. The Dasyuridae. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., vol Ivii (1933), p. 195. @) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. lvi (1932), p. 168. ®) Aust. Zoologist, vol. vi, pt. ii (1930), p. 110. 228 The animals completely belied their delicate appearance by proving them- selves fierce and intractable, and repulsed the most tactful attempts to handle them by repeated savage snapping bites and harsh hissing sounds, and one member of the party, who was persistent in his attentions, received a gash in the hand three- quarters of an inch long from the canines of a male. On subsequently placing this male in a wire cage trap, already occupied by a large specimen of the pallyoora—the local pseudomys—the rat was immediately attacked and killed by the Yallara. Like all the local mammals—with the exception of the kangaroo—it is strictly nocturnal and was never seen abroad. The stomachs of those which were dug out (usually in the early morning) contained large quantities of the skin and fur of rodents (but no bone fragments), seeds of a solanum (?), and some sand. No insect fragments could be made out. No external parasites were taken upon them, and they lacked the strong and persistent tinpleasant smell of Th. lagotis. As regards reproduction, it would appear that two young are usually reared at a time. The mammae are six in number and are arranged in two longitudinal rows of three a side, and of these two only have functional teats; and these are apparently the first and last in opposite rows. Of the three adult females taken, one was accompanied by two half-grown young still suckling, another with functioning mammae was unaccompanied by young, and the third carried a single naked pouch embryo. External Characters, On this head there is little to add to the original description. The maximum size reached may be somewhat less than in the true minor. Linear dimensions of the two sexes when fully adult are much the same, but males are considerably more bulky. The tail length shows rather a wide range, but fortunately the series include several examples comparable to the type of lewcurus in point of im- maturity, and these show that the differences in this respect are not important. Careful comparison of the palms of manus and soles of pes of an immature example of miselius (in alcohol) with the figures for leucurus, shows a very close agreement. In the pes the main interdigital pad is surmounted by three smooth, raised tubercles—two much larger than the other. he largest is nearly round, basally situated on the pad, and has a diameter of 2°5 mm, The second, adjoin- ing it distally, is smaller and oblong, and the third, lying internal to them, is only about twice the size of the granules of the epidermis. In the manus there are small but distinct smooth, round tubercles at the base of digits 2, 3, 4, 5, and on the functional digits 2, 3, 4 an intermediate tubercle lies midway between the apical and basal elements. These features not only agree with leucurus, but alsa with the only spirit specimen of the true minor, which I have seen—an adult male from Charlotte Waters, This specimen shows also a very distinct rhinal callous. A single example of miseltus shows a rudi- mentary hallux. Skull, Knowledge of the cranial characters of minor has until now depended entirely upon the type skull of the typical variely, and as doubts have been expressed ‘#? as to the constancy of some of its characters, a detailed comparison of the present series of nine skulls with Spencer’s figures has been made, This has shown, first, that the two varieties are virtually identical and, second, that minor shows a much smaller range of variation, both individual sex and age, than is normal in the races of lagotts. () Troughton, Aust. Zoologist, vol. vii, pt. iti (1932), p. 232. 229 Owing to the assumption of the full dentition long before maximum body size is attained, to the differing rates of molar wear, and to the slow closing of the cranial sutures, the assignation of the “adult” condition is subject to con- siderable vagueness amongst bandicoots, and this has been a fruitful cause of confusion in the present genus. For reasons which have just been mentioned, the age factor is less important with minor than with the other bilbies, but in drawing up diagnoses of the different species it seems desirable to use only those skulls in which the fourth molar shows distinct signs of wear. Although this phasc of the dentition may not be reached at corresponding ages ini the different forms, it nevertheless represents a stage at which a much closer approach to per- manency in cranial structure is attained than in the conventionally “adult” examples, and its adoption would do something to clarify the definition of an already obscure group. Most of the distinctions listed by Spencer have been confirmed in this present series, examination of which, however, brings to light some additional points. The smoothly rounded brain case and absence of muscular crests and ridges from its surface, even in aged examples, is a good distinction from the races of lagotis, and is shown alike by the whole series; the oldest skull, in which all trace of cusps has disappeared from the molars, being quite like in this respect to one in which the tooth change is in process. In aged males slight temporal impressions are to be seen, but they do not fuse to form a sagittal crest. There is no reduction of the lambdoid, however, which is well developed in both sexes. The interorbital constriction is certainly less than in lagotis, but proceeds further than in the type skull. It is slightly greater in males than females. In a lateral view the muzzle shows a slight concavity centred above the infra- orbital foramen, and in the superior and palatal views is less abruptly constricted in the region of the premolars than is Jagotis. In adults (worn M*) the ratio, greatest length over greatest breadth, varies from 4-8 to 5°6. The interlacrymal line is not easily drawn, owing to the poor visibility of the foramina from above, but the posterior point of the nasals falls short of it by an interval which varies from 2°0 to 4-0. The variation is individual and not due to age Or Sex, The large median palatine vacuities extend from about the hinder margin of P* to the front or middle of M*; never as far as M3, as stated, The posterior series consists very constantly of four vacuities (a fifth small outlier in two skulls), which are arranged symmetrically about the mid line of the palate at the four corners of a square. They average about 2 mm. in diameter and are per- sistent. The anterior vacuities are absent in three skulls, represented by a single perforation in one skull, and in the rest by a collateral pair (2-4-5 mm. long ) between the canine and first premolar, The relative position of the fourth molar, with reference to the posterior margin of the palate, appears to be entirely an age character in all the species, and most of the diagrams of this region, which have been published as illustrating specific characters, can be matched in any one species by selecting suitable growth stages. In the present series of miselius, when M‘ first appears above the bone its hinder margin is distinctly posterior to the palation; by the time it is functioning it is level with that point, and when denuded of cusps is 2°5-3°0 mm. in advance of it. M+, however apparently never attains so advanced a position as in the large taces of lagotis, and the posterior palate remains pyriform in outline throughout life and never assumes a pronounced rotundity by an outgrowth of the maxillae, as in the larger species. The anterior root of the zygoma, premaxillae and paraoccipital process are constantly as described by Spencer. The condition of the former does not seem to differ appreciably from the other species, but in the paraoccipital it is highly characteristic of minor, being distinctly inflated and broadened and smoothly 230 moulded upon the mastoid bulla, so that none of its margins or extremities are available for muscular attachments. In the region of the bulla, it may be noted also that the foramen lacerum medium is more conspicuots than in other peramelidae, and is not partially over- lain by the posterior extension of the pterygoid plates. Teeth. The upper series of one individual has been figured by Spencer“ but, as all the teeth show considerable wear, some details of crown patterns are lacking as well as the characters of the lower tecth and of the deciduous premolar. Of the present form, the series of nine skulls covers a wide developmental range, giving a much clearer insight into the rationale of age changes than was formerly possible, and providing individuals at the same stages as Spencer’s animal on the one hand, and Thomas’s lewcwrus on the other. As a result of the bilateral comparisons which have thus been made possible, little doubt exists as to the specific identity of all three, and there is a strong probability (on the grounds of dentition alone) of the complete identity of var. miselius with leucurus. The incisor formula is constantly $, the absence of the upper central pair in the type skull being due apparently to accidental loss. Canines are well developed in both sexes, but attain much larger dimensions in old males than in old females—one of the few sexual distinctions to be observed in the skull. The premolars decrcase markedly in antero posterior length, from before backwards. ‘The posterior premolar in the upper jaw is a relatively larger and more massive tooth than in any of the forms of lagotis, and departs widely from the laterally compressed triconodont condition of the anterior and median premolars, and resembles somewhat the corresponding tooth in Isoodon macrourus and I, obesulus. Its chicf clement is a tall sharp-eged pyramid, projecting well below the level of M3}, and reinforced at the base, postcro-internally by a shelf, antero-externally by a very small single cusp, and postero-externally by a rather larger cusp, which is sometimes duplicated. The lower P* is similar but weaker and narrower. The deciduous premolar in the upper series is a minute but broad-crowned, three- cusped tooth of decidedly trigonal pattern, and its lower homologue is similar but narrower. The tooth change apparently coincides with the first appearance of M+4 above the bone, and occurs at a time when the animal has attained about four- fifths of its body length and about half of its ultimate bulk. The tooth change seems to he slightly later than in the western lagotis, but insufficient cases of the latter have been examined to establish that properly. The molar series of aged examples agree well with the type as figured, but the combined length of molars 1-3 is (in males) 9°5-10°3 mm. as against 12°0 mm. in Spencer’s description of the type. Spencer’s figures, however, give values for this measurement of 9-5-10°3 mm. also. ‘The height of the molar cusps and their persistence as secant sLructures until late in life are conspicuous features of mimor, and, owing to the immaturity of the type, bulk large also in the descriptions of the supposed species leucurus. In the present series of var. miselius, when M* appears above the bone, the points of the cusps of M1! are almost intact, whereas in a lagotis sagitta at the same stage (living side by side, as it were, with miselivs) the crown of M* and M?* are already smooth and concave, and M® retains only a remnant of its original pattern. It is important to note, however, that the final stage of minor is much as in dagotis, the molars becoming thin and shell-like, with crown surfaces sloping steeply to the lingual margins and conveying, by their obliquity, an erroneous impression of an increase in the transverse diameter of the tooth. The curvature of the molar rows, however, remains fairly constant. (*) Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict., vol. ix, pl. ii (1896). 231 Comparison of completely unworn molars of the present series with those of Jeucurus, as figured by Bensley,‘® reveal an exact correspondence in every detail of pattern, even to the presence of a rudimentary hypocone in the upper M?*. The same rudiment is evidently present in two older individuals, where it is represented by a conspicuous enamel fold, closing the main transverse valley of the tooth on the lingual side, though it is no longer discreet, merging anteriorly with the spurs of the protocone. The fourth upper molar (unknown in leucurus ) is reduced, subtriangular in section, and functionally bicuspid, the lingual cusp representing the protocone and the buccal the first mesostyle (style “B’), the paracone having been suppressed. In the newly-erupted crown there is a well- marked antero-internal shelf, connecting externally with a small, low-level (para ?) style, and a rudimentary rounded talon representing the metacone of Mst3, The lower molars also agree well with Bensley’s figures. It is to be noted, however, that the reduction of the paracone is complete only in M2 and M3. ‘The fourth lower molar (unknown in leucurus) has a well-developed anterior lobe, consisting of a complete trigonid with a broad antero-external shelf. The posterior lobe is much reduced and consists of a single functional cusp, evidently the endoconid, flanked buccally by two rudiments at the cingulum level. The conspicuously cuspidate character of the molar crowns of minor and leucurus have given rise to suggestions that these “two” species represent a more insectivorous type of dentition and a less degree of divergence from the parent perameline stem, than is shown by the forms of Jagolis. So far as their present feeding habits are concerned, it is evident that there has been a lapse in the omnivorous habit, but this is reflected in the dentition chiefly by the long per- sistence of the cusps and the early closing of the apical foramina and not by any structural approximation to Perameles. The unworn molar crowns of all the bilbies exhibit an essentially similar pattern and differ chiefly in the height of the cusps. All show in about the same degree the fundamental characters which separate Bensley’s subfamily Thylacomyinae from the Peramelinae proper—viz.: (1) great enlargement of the twin mesostyles at the expense of the outer styles; (2) absence of a functional hypocone; (3) displacement of the metacone inwards; (4) suppression of the paraconid. Such evidence as is available from the feed- ing habits of var. miselius, would tend to show that the long persistence of the cusps and their spurs may be partly due to a recently assumed and increasingly carnivorous habit, rather than to a return to an insectivorous one, since the latter, in fossorial forms, leads to the ingestion of a large proportion of grit and correspondingly greater attrition, In the latest work of the genus,“ Th. leucurus is held to be a good species differing from the typical race of minor in the following respects: (1) smaller body size; (2) much longer tail; (3) different foot pads; (4) different molar crowns; (5) absence of a rhinal callous; (6) wholly white pes and tail and unicoloured ventral fur. Examination of the var. miselius of minor disproves the existence of the first four, which were the most important of the structural distinctions. The matter of the rhinal callous remains uncertain, It is evidently a somewhat variable character in the smaller bilbies, and in the series of miselius, though it can be seen in all, its development is slight in some examples, and there still seems a possibility (fide plate) that it may be present in the type of leucurus. The remaining differences, therefore, have to do entirely with colouration of pelage. The type of leucurus was an alcohol preserved specimen, and though © A. B. Bensley, Trans, Linn, Soc. (London) (1903) (2) xi, ph v, fig. 11, pl. vi fig. 14, ©) Troughton (Joc. cit.). 232 there is nothing in the records of the $.A. Museum which throws any light on its origin, it is possible that it may have been many years in spirit before coming into Thomas’s hands, and actually represented only a faded version of the original colouration. To test the effect of preservation in alcohol upon the colouration under conditions favourable for bleaching, a half-grown specimen of miselius has been kept in a glass container in 50% alcohol and exposed for the greater part of the day to diffused sunlight. After three years, considerable change has taken place—change which brings the colouration appreciably nearer to that of leucurus, as described. The pinkish tint has been largely discharged and the tone of the dorsum is distinctly yellower than in fresh-made skins, More important, how- ever—the dark-furred areas of the upper surface of the tail and sole of foot have faded from slate to pale buff. When immersed in spirit they are still noticeably darker than contiguous areas, but on drying are scarcely differentiated. The dark basal zone of the under-fur on dorsum and ventrum is practically unchanged, so that bicolor belly fur is practically the only distinction remaining, and though only direct comparison with the type of leucius will finally decide the question, the probability of the identity of the two seems to me to be very great. It is interesting to note in passing that the specimen of the true minor referred to above from the type locality, which has been kept in alcohol in the S.A. Museum for 30 years, has also faded considerably, but even so retains a much darker and richer colouration than in the fresh miselius, and the dark areas of pes and tail are still conspicuous on drying, Mr. Troughton (loc. cit.), in discussing the possible distribution of leucurus, remarks: “. it seems highly probable that leucura is the most northern representative of the genus. That it inhabits the more sandy central region is supported by the paler colouration . . .” Th. lagotis in a dark blue phase occurs at least 500 miles north of the location of the present series, and it is much more probable that the pallor of miselius (= leucurus) is an adaptive response to the bleached sands of the eastern Lake Eyre Basin, and is analogous to that of chaetocercus, dasyuroides, sminthopsis and caloprymnus in the same area. Tae I. External Dimensions in mm. of the forms of Thalacomys minor. *8 *8 Range in Range in | Minor | 3 4 of var.|2 9 of var. | pe +° *8 +10 imuselius with|miselius with Range in Range in Imm. ¢ Type of ' worn M* | wornM‘ | 2 @ adult.) 3 9 adult.! miselins, |lewcurus 8. Head and body .... 241-250 247-250 245-270 200-240 160 142 Tail vee ae one}: 155-167 142 127-160 , 118-152 115 116 Pes wi tras ot 73-75 68-69 65-73 | 57-62 59 55 Fourth Toe wal 27-29 27 — — 22 — Nail of Fourth toe. 7-9 9 | — — — — Ear (length) ...) 65-74 62-68 | 87-92 71-85, 49 63 (+) Ear (max. brdth.) 20-28 19 —- _ 14 — Rhinarium to eye 39-43 36-40 37-41 31-39 28 — Eye to ear... 53-55 51-53 — a 38 — Weight (in grms. 362-435 310-312 — — 125 — * (®) Taken from freshly killed animals. + @) In alcohol—Spencer. + ©) In alcohol—Thomas. + This includes the tubular portion of the auricle below the tragoid notch and is not comparable with the rest of the series. 233 Tasre II. Skull Dimensions in mm. of the Forms of Thalacomys minor. 5 Range in Range in 34 of var.|39 of var. misclius withimiselius with) Type of ¢ |Imm. ¢ of] Typeof | worn M*, worn M* minor. var. miselius.| leucurus. Basal length 0 we 62°2-66°1 | 60°5-62-2 i 66 44-0 45 Greatest length ... ... 68-5-71:5 | 65°5-66-8 | as —_ 4 Greatest breadth ... ... 31-0-33-3 | 28-9-29-2 34 — 22-5 Nasals length ... ... ... | 29°0-32-2 28+ 3-29-60 32 19°6 18 Nasals greatest breadth 5:6-5-9 5-7-6-1 6:5 4-3 4°5 Constriction 2... 0 1. ne 9-3-10-3 | 10-7-11-0 11 9-6 10 Palate length ... 2. +. 38°9-40-9 | 36°2-37-2 Al 25:8 | 27-7 Palate: breadth inside M’ 9-1-10-1 Y-1-9-3 10:5 8 ae Anterior palatal foramina 5+2-6°0 4°6-5-6 7 —_ 5-2 Facial index 0. 0 ww. 218-245 225-229 Pon —_ me APSR ee bce eae caw dawg 9-8-10-3 | 9-2-9-8 |9+5 or 10:3)Ms™ 6-80") 10 | or 12 Front of canine to back of Mf oe 26+9-29-0 | 25-1-26-5 28-0 — =e, Pp Aire WO wae act. 2-8-2-9 2°7-2°9 3 2:6 3 y* ah | gels cage 2-4-2:8 2+3-2°7 3 = af @2) Third molar has been lost in preparation. THALAcoMys LAcoTIs sAciTTa (Thomas). Known to the Wonkonguroo as Thulka, and to the Dieri as Kapita, this animal was less plentiful than the Yallara, though by no means uncommon, and sts burrows were exclusively confined to the clay pans and the less stony of the loam flats, and were never found in the sandhills. [ was never free to watch the complete excavation of a burrow from beginning to end, but the blacks say that it is further distinguished from that of the Yallara in that, when occupied, it is left open at the immediate entrance and blocked at a point some feet down. It appears to be quite as nocturnal and furtive as the smaller species, and details of its life history and habits are difficult to obtain by direct observation. The single sub-adult female taken (December) was accompanied in the burrow by two large furred pouch young, with head and body length of about 170 mm. and still apparently dependent on the mother. Six specimens were obtained, all from the Goyder’s [.agoon area, about 150 miles north of the type locality. They are the first to be examined in the flesh since Mr. Hillier took the British Museum specimen in 1903,¢®) and are of considerable interest, as showing that the type was not adult (or not mature) and that the animal attains much larger dimensions, both external and cranial, than was formerly supposed. Thus, the largest male obtained has a head and body length, and pes, of 385 mm. and 104 mm., respectively, as against 316 mm, and 91 mm. for the type (also a male) ; and in the skull a basal length of 91-7 as against 76°5 mm. More- over, the two examples which come nearest to the type in general dimensions (3) The animal was first obtained on Prof. J. W. Gregory’s reconnaissance of the Basin in 1902, a year prior to this, and some measurements of an “adult” female, published by Mr. Dow (The Dead Heart of Australia (1906), p. 355). He comments on the small size of the animal as compared with the true lagotis, but his specimen, though a female, js as large or larger than the type male, Some of his measurements, however, are evidently not comparable to those conventionally used. 234 have an unworn M‘, and remnants of cusp pattern on M® as well as the juvenile character of M+ being in line with the posterior palate margin, and both are obviously fairly young animals, The male affording the above measurements is identical in colouration and general characters with the rest of the series, and is evidently not of great age, as it lacks the great expansion of the temporal fossae, crest development and widening of molar crowns, characterising that condition. The oldest female obtained is at a considerably earlier stage of tooth wear than this male, so that it is not possible to determine certainly the relative size of the sexes, but evidently there is a great disparity in favour of the male. External structural characters are much as in the typical lagotis; the rhinal callous is well marked even in pouch young; the substance of the upper portion of the ear is not dappled; the tail is somewhat compressed from side to side, and in older specimens terminates in a horny spur. The pelage, however, in adults and sub-adults is much shorter, more sparse and slightly coarser than in the typical lagotis. ‘Vhe general colour of the dorsum is a curious purplish shade, paler and more uniformly rufous than in lagotis typicus, a pale vinous wash suflusing all Fig. 1. the upper surface from crown of head to base of tail, and not concentrating on the shoulders and rump as in that animal. Belly fur pure white to base and the transi- tion to the dorsal colour rather more gradual. The pale wedge-shaped burs before and behind the hip, quite obsolete. These distinctions do not apply to all growth stages, however, and one young example (H. & B. 212 min.) has a coat very similar to the western animal. In all, the black of the tail is intense and sharply 235 defined from the white. In defining his sagitta, Thomas wrote :—“Black band of tail is shorter instead of longer than the white end, and the feet, are paler below, the black only extending about one-third of their length under the heel.” The relative length of the colour zones of the tail have been repeatedly quoted by writers in distinguishing the different forms, but never with any reierence to which aspect of the tail was meant. In all the bilbies of the Jagotis group I have examined in the flesh, the black is irregularly disposed on different surfaces, but is more extensive below than above, In the present series there is considerable variation, the black on the upper surface being equal to, greater than, or less than, the white, while below it is constantly about 50% longer than the white. The colouration of the sole is equally variable; the black ranging from less than one-third to more than two-thirds of the total length, but the colour is less intense than in the typical lagotts. Skull Characters. When compared with skulls of lagotis of corresponding age and sex, from south-western and west central localities, those from the lake lyre basin are in each case smaller, and have decidedly smaller molars, but structurally the correspondence is very close and the supposed distinctions in the palate region are not valid. Pending analysis of large scries of bilbies from the western centre, however, further comment on the skull is deferred. Sagilta was originally described as a full specics, but subsequent writers have taken different views of its status: Wood-Jones,“) in 1923, concurring in Thomas’s estimate; Longman,“®) in 1930, evidently considering it to be a sub- species of lagotis only, and Troughton,“ 1932, taking the same view. [Except for the additional skulls mentioned by Professor Wood-Jones, which evidently did not include an adult example, these estimates appear to have been based upon the distinctions which have already been published. The present series by greatly reducing the importance of these distinctions particularly in the matter of size, upon which Thomas chiefly relied, leaves little doubt as to its subspecilic alliance with the western lagotvs. It is necessary to stress, however, that in colouration the differences, so far as they are shown by summer skins, are quite distinct—more so than might be inferred from the original description, and are of a similar kind to those which separate Th, minor miselius of the same district from the typical variety. These two bilbies were the only members of the Peramelidae, of which definite records and specimens could be obtained. From a single still unsophisti- cated Wonkonguroo, however, and from an old man of the Dieri, accounts were obtained of two other animals, which are said still to be in the country; one of them possibly a small perameles, and the other, more definitely indicated by the peculiarities of its manus (and nesting habit ?), as Choeropus castanotis, Amongst the remaining polyprotodonts, two notable absentees seem to be Myrmecobius fasciatus and Notoryctes typhlops, both having a wide distribution west of the Basin. It is unsafe, of course, to definitely write them down as un- represented here, without much more investigation, but it is significant that in a long residence in the country Mr, Reese, and others, have been unable to obtain definite accounts of these two highly peculiar forms from the natives, In a general account of south-west Queensland, a recent writer“ speaks of a mar- G#) Rec. S. Aust. Mus., vol. ii, No. 3 (1923), p. 333. (®) Memoirs. Q. Mus., vol. x, pt. 1 (1930), p. 63, @%) Lot. cit. @) Mrs. Duncan Kemp—“Our Sandhill Country,” Angus & Robertson Ltd., Sydney, 1933. 236 supial mole (Kakoma, of the local blacks) as having been common in the Moora- berrie district about 120 miles north-east of Birdsville in 1916, but scientific con- firmation is lacking, and notoryctes was not listed as a Queensland mammal by Longman in 1930. Tasie III. External Dimensions of Thalacomys lagotis sagitta (in wim.) at various growth stages (from freshly killed anwnals). | @s) 13g 2g | 34 [Types] 49 5¢@ | 69 M* M* M? ? M* M? ? Teeth oo... uu a.) | worn funworn slightly worn Head and body... 385 298 212 316 291 172 340 sai le Me tc, Wee icy Poe gs 245 212 160 215 187 120 196 Pete fare cece wie eh ome 104 92 | 68 91 81 60 75? Fourth toe whee "tana oa 36 31 —_ —_ 31 — — Nail of fourth toe... ... 12 10 — — 10 [| — — Far (length) 0... 84 78 56 79 | 78 42 74 Ear (max. breadth) i 27 25 — — | 23 2s = Rhinarium to eye ... ... [55 48 34 — | 45 29 52 Eye tocar. ee 60 51 38 —_— 50 28 — Weight in grammes .. | 1557 |! 662 | 210 — 660 112 — C*®) As recorded by Dow. Taste IV. Skull Dimensions of Thalacomys lagotis sagitta at various growth stages (in mem). | 8) | 1¢ 28 3g [Type 6} 49 59 69 Teeth vee ee vee oe) 6] M4‘ worn M* M? ig M* M? ? unworn | slightly | worn Basal length |... ou... 91-7 68-8 = 76°5 70°9 43-0 | 78 Greatest length |... .... | 100-0 78-1 are 85 79°2 49-5 — Greatest breadth .... ... 47-1 34-0 — 38 34-9 =y 34-5 Nasals: length ... .. 45-9 34-7 25°1 40 37-0 21-0 37 Nasals: greatest breadth 9-0 6-0 5-5 7°5 6:0 4-6 3-3 Constriction . Sa i 10:8 121 11-4 13 11-2 10-9 — Palate: length ... .... 58-6 47°55 — 50 48-9 29+2 45-5 Palate: breadth ins. M? 14-2 12-0 — — 11-8 | 6:8 ai Ant. palatal foramina .... 6-8 7-8 5+9 — 7+0 a B65 Facial Index .... 229 263 — 240 278 =| 278 — Ms? 12-2 12-1 = 12:5 12-7 = 11:5 C-M* 40:9 34-2 | — 36 34-3 eee MX: | P he 3°9 3:7 355 _ 4-0 = 3-2 Ps 2:9 2°8 1:7* 2-6 1-9* 3 (8) As recorded by Dow. *M.P4 PLANT REMAINS OF LOWER OLIGOCENE AGE FROM NEAR BLANCHE POINT, ALDINGA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., F.G.S., ETC. Summary On October 24, 1932, Sir Douglas Mawson sent me, for examination, two blocks of pipe-clay covered with more or less fragmentary leaf-impressions. His note, which accompanied them, states that: "The sand beds in which this material occurs rest upon late Palaeozoic quartzite, etc., and underlie the Janjukian of Blanche Point, Aldinga.” Sir Douglas also remarks that the age of the sands is doubtful and that the beds attain several hundred feet in total thickness. 237 PLANT REMAINS OF LOWER OLIGOCENE AGE FROM NEAR BLANCHE POINT, ALDINGA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. By FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., F.G.S., ete. (Commonwealth Palaeontclogist). [Read October 10, 1935.] PLATE IT, On October 24, 1932, Sir Douglas Mawson sent me, for examination, two blocks of pipe-clay covered with more or less fragmentary leaf-impressions. His note, which accompanied them, states that: “The sand beds in which this material occtirs rest upon late Palaeozoic quartzite, etc., and underlie the Janjukian of Blanche Point, Aldinga.” Sir Douglas also remarks that the age of the sands is doubtful and that the beds attain several hundred feet in total thickness. On a sample of the overlying bed of greensand, received from Sir Douglas Mawson on October 24, 1932, I have made the following notes :-— Glauconitic and marly sand-rock, Blanche Point, Aldinga. This rock largely consists of glauconite grains embedded in a marly matrix and contains casts and impressions of the larger fossils, of species common to those of the Lower Alidingan Scries, held to be of Upper Oligocene age, The fossils recognised are:—A polyzoan, Adeonellopsis obliqua MacGillivray, and the pelecypods, Arca dissimilis Tate, A (Barbatia) celleporacea Tate, A. (B.) limatella ‘Yate, Cardita alata (Tate), Venericardia sp. and Callanaitis cainozoica (T. Woods). Of the above species, Arca dissimilis is confined to the Lower Aldingan Series ; A, limatella is L. Aldingan but also occurs in the Lower Miocene of Table Cape, Tasmania ; Cardita alata is J., Aldingan but also Lower Miocene at Balcombe Bay and Torquay (Bird Rock). When this glauconitic marly rock is washed down it leaves a green to reddish glauconitic sandy residue, the grains of which are highly wind-polished. Some of the grains resemble the brick-red casts of foraminifera found in the South Pacific and also near the Great Barrier Reef, Queensland (see Murray and Renard, Deep Sea Deposits, in “Challenger Report,’ 1891, pp. 169 and 390, pl. xxiv, fies. 3, 4). Many of the glauconite casts from Blanche Point, Aldinga, are recognisable as foraminiferal infillings of the tests, whilst others are replacements of ovoid pellets variously ascribed to the excreta of worms, echinoderms or fishes. These pellets are similar to those found in the glauconites and marls of Upper Oligocene age in the borings at Lakes Entrance, Gippsland. Description of the Leaves from the Bed underlying the Glauconite Rock. Plant remains, consisting of compressed, broad stems, rhizomes or rootlets, and leaves, are abundant in the pipe-clay series of Aldinga, The pipe-clay layers in which they occur are intercalated with the more sandy or gravelly portion; these layers are not so laminated as could be desired, for it is difficult to obtain entire leaves when splitting the rock. In many cases the leaves seem to have been dried and strongly wrinkled or shrivelled before they were finally deposited on the clayey sediment, and in such cases the venation is often obscured or quite obliterated. 238 The following are the determinations :--~ GYMNOSPERMEAE. Natural Order CONIFERAE. Genus CaALuirris Ventenat, 1808. ? CaLutrs sp. PI. ii, fig. 1. Several examples of linearly-grooved twigs with short bracteate or scale-like leaves at long intervals on the margin and scattered along the face of the branch, may belong to this genus. One example measured 4 mm, in width. A comparison can be made with Callitris prisca Ettingshausen (1888, p. 95, pl. viii, figs. 3, 4), from the Rose Valley Lead, New South Wales; this [orm resembles our specimens in its general characters. ANGIOSPERMEAE. MONOCOTYLEDONES. Nat. Order GRAMINISAE. Genus Poacitrs Schlotheim, 1820. Cf. Poacrres sp. Pl. ii, figs. 2a, b, and 3. ‘To this fossil genus may be referred numerous grass-like leaves in short or long fragments. ‘The lamina is thin, sometimes flexuous and with about ten parallel veins. The fragments usually have a width of 2-4 mm., but broader ones are occasionally seen, having a width of about 8 mm. Similar forms were found by Ettingshausen (1888, p. 105, pl. ix, figs. 2, 2a) in the Old Rose Valley Lead, New South Wales, and named by him Poacites australis. DICOTYLEDONES. Nat. Order MORACEAE, Genus Frconium Ettingshausen, 1883. Ficoxtcum SoLanbert Ettingshausen. TP. ii, figs. 4, 5. Ficonium Solanderi Ettingshauscn, 1888, p. 38, pl. ii, fig. 4. Chapman, 1926, p. 186, pl. xiti, fig. 9. The two figured cxamples, of the undersurface of leaves, exactly match the type specimen in the shape of the leaf and angle and habit of venation. From Magnolia, to which it bears some resemblance, it is distinguished by its more narrowly ovate-acuminate leaf. In Mr. Henry Deane’s copy of Ettingshausen’s work on the Tertiary Flora of New South Wales (now in my library), Deane has appended a note to the figure of Piconium Solanderi, indicating a probable affinity to Flindersia. That genus, however, has long-ovate leaves arranged pinnately, whereas the present exainples, and others met with in various fossil leaf beds, show no other evidence than that they were borne along the branch at fairly wide intervals. Ettingshausen’s species of Ficonium came irom the leaf-bearing sandstone of Dalton, near Gunning, New South Wales. This species has also been recorded from Narracan, Gippsland, in pre-Older-basaltic sandstones (Chapman), whilst a smaller leaved form, under the name of I*icontum nitidum, has been described by Miss H. T. Paterson from the pre-Older-basaltic clays of Pascoe Vale, near Melbourne. 239 Nat. Order RHAMNACEAE. Genus Pomaperrts Labillardiére, 1804, Pomaverris, ci. BANKs1r Ettingshausen. Pl. ii, fig. 6, Pomaderris Banksn FEttingshausen, 1888, p. 165, pl. xiv, fig. 10; pl. xv, figs 1, la, 2. Paterson, H. T., 1934, p. 267, pl. xiv, fig. 11. Observations.—The present example shows about two-thirds of the underside of an elongate-ovate leaf, having alternate, secondary venation, forming an angle with the midrib of about 50°. These secondary veins are acute and slightly curved, The midrib is stout. A strong oblique light directed upon the surface of the fossil shows the fine transverse tertiary venation figured by Ettingshausen. The species has been recorded from Vegetable Creck, New South Wales, and it has lately occurred in a pre-Older-basaltic leaf bed at Pascoc Vale, near Melbourne. This species differs from Pomaderrites Banksti Ettingshausen (1888, p. 66, pl. vi, fig. 4) by its alternate secondary venation. Nat. Order ELAEOCARPACEAE, Genus ELarocarpus Burmann, 1737. ELAEGCAREUS PRAEOBOVATUS, sp. nov. Pl. ii, fig. 7. Description—Leaf elongate-ovate, broader towards the base than in the upper third; apex bluntly acumimate. Margin of leaf roundly denticulate, with each secondary vein entering the point of the denticle. Secondary veins arising at a moderately acute angle from a fairly thick midrib, curving upwards and at regular intervals. Tertiary venation not well preserved. Length of leaf when complete, not including petiole, cir. 55 mm.; greatest width of leaf, 28 mm.; space beiween secondary veins, 7 mm. Observutions——This leaf approaches the living Elaeocarpus obovatus G. Donovan from New South Wales and Queensland, in form and_ structural characters. From the genus Nothofagus it differs in the curved secondary veins, as distinct from the straight venation of the former. Nat. Order STERCULIACEAE, Genus STERCcULIA Linné., 1747, STercuLia, cf. Hauscuitptr Chapman. Pl. ii, fig. 8. Stereulia Hauschildti Chapman, 1926, p. 184, pl. xii, fig. 2. Observations.—Portions of leaves with a strong midrib, widely divergent and almost straight secondary veins, may be compared with the above species. To the genus Slerculza may be referred certain species of “Acer,” so called by Ettingshausen (A. subintegrifolium and A. subproductum), as well as “Arahia”’ (A, prisca and A. Oxleyi). These Sterculia-like forms are frequent in the Deep Leads of Vegetable Creek and other localities in New South Wales. Slerculia Muelleri Deane is another fossil species of Flame Tree that occurs at Pitfield Plains, Victoria (Miocene), whilst S. Hauschildti was first recorded from the Lower Oligocene of Narracan, Gippsland, Victoria. Nat, Order VERBENACEAE. Genus CLERODENDRON Linné., 1737, Cf. CLERODENDRON sp. PI. ii, fig. 9. Observations—A broadly ovate leaf, with entire margin, straight and strong midrib, with widely curved secondary veins, is tentatively referred to this genus. 240 Another type of leaf, bearing a strong resemblance to the present example, is that of Cordia tasmanica, which Henry Deane suggested might be compared with Clerodendron tomentosum. Dimensions of the present specimen, two-thirds of lamina, length, 52 mm. ; greatest width, 42 mm. C ordia tasmanica was described by Ettingshausen (1888, p. 54) from the leaf beds of the Derwent Basin, Hobart, and from Muddy Creek, Launceston, ‘Tasmania. The genus Clerodendron has occurred fossil in the Eocene of Alum Ray, Isle of Wight and the Lower Oligocene of Fisleben, Germany. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Craprman, F., 1926—New or Little-known Fossils in the National Museum, pt. xxix. On Some Tertiary Plant Remains from Narracan, South Gipps- land, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., vol. xxxviii (N.S.), pp. 183-191, pls. xii, xi. ETriNGSHAUSEN, C. von, 1888—Contributions to the Tertiary Flora of Australia. Mem. Geol. Surv. New South Wales. Palaeontology, No. 2. Paterson, H. T., 1934—Notes on Some Tertiary Leaves from Pascoe Vale. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., vol. xlvi (N.S.), pt. il, pp. 264-273, pls. xii, xiv. EXPLANATION OF PLATE IL. Fig. 1. 2? Callitris sp. Fragment of stem. Blanche Point, Aldinga. Nat. size. Fig. 2. Cf. Peaciles sp. 2a, a broad grass-like leaf; 2b, a narrow, more deeply furrowed leaf. Aldinga. Nat. size. Fig. 3. Cf. Poacites sp. A decply grooved and sinuous blade, Aldinga. Nat. size, Fig. 4. Ficonium Solanderi Ettingshausen, Under surface of leaf. Aldinga. Nat. size. Fig. 5. F. Solanderi Ettingshausen. Under surface of another specimen. Aldinga. Nat. size. Fig. 6. Pomaderris, cf. Banksii Ettingshausen. Under surface of leaf. Aldinga. Nat. size. Fig. 7. Elacocarpus fpraecobovatum sp. nov Upper surface of leaf. Holotype. Aldinga. Nat. size. Fig. 8. Sterculia, cf. Hauschildtt Chapman. Aldinga. Nat. size. Fig. 9. Cf. Cleredendron sp. Upper surface of leaf. Aldinga. Three-quarters nat. size. THE OCCURRENCE OF A LOWER-MIOCENE FORMATION ON BOUGAINVILLE ISLAND. BY FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., F.G.S., ETC. Summary Geological knowledge of the Solomon Islands Group, and particularly of Bougainville, which is geographically the largest and most northerly member of that island chain, is still very limited. Hence there is special interest in certain rock specimens from that locality submitted to us for examination. These specimens and field notes relating thereto were obtained by Mr. C. C. Deland, of Adelaide, when on a recent prospecting expedition into the interior of Bougainville Island. 241 THE OCCURRENCE OF A LOWER-MIOCENE FORMATION ON BOUGAINVILLE ISLAND, By Sir D. Mawson, D.Sc., and F. Cuapman, A.L.S. [Read October 10, 1935.] Pirate ITI. Geological knowledge of the Solomon Islands Group, and particularly of Bougainville, which is geographically the largest and most northerly member of that island chain, is still very limited. Hence there is special interest in certain rock specimens from that locality submitted to us for examination. These specimens and field notes relating thereto were obtained by Mr. C. C. Deland, of Adelaide, when on a recent prospecting expedition into the interior of Bougain- ville Island. Bougainville is a large and elevated island, From information available it appears to be composed, for the most part, if not entirely, of Tertiary marine formations, now elevated to heights exceeding 4,000 feet, intruded and capped by great volcanic effusions, chiefly andesitic. Outstanding features of the landscape are the two active volcanoes, Balbi, 10,250 feet in height, and Bagana, 6,000 feet. At the present time the latter is the more active. A number of extinct volcanic centres are also recognisable, some with water-filled craters of considerable size. A traverse inland from Kivi on the east coast following the valley of the river which, near its mouth, is known as the Orovavi, but when further inland is styled the Varovi, reveals an interesting section. A deltaic alluvial plain extends inland for about six miles before rocks are encountered, Following along the valley of the river and gradually rising inland the rocks traversed appear, from descriptions furnished, to be mudstones with igneous contributions, the latter largely andesitic. On arriving at an elevation of 500 feet above sea level, a decided change in the character of the rock was recorded. Specimens collected at this stage are a compact foraminiferal limestone of a light buff colour. This forma- tion, which appears to be horizontally disposed, is strongly out-cropping until an elevation of quite 1,500 feet is reached, It would appear, therefore, to be of the order of 1,000 feet in thickness. Specimens of this foraminiferal limestone, sectioned and examined microscopically, reveal a finely comminuted matrix, con- taining fragments of calcarcons algae and foraminifera; the cement is finely granular and calcitic. The organic contents include branches of calcareous algae (Lithethamnium), tests of foraminifera (Lepidocyclina) and occasional frag- ments of polyzoa. The contained forms have been determined by one of us (Chapman) as follows :— Lithothamnium sp.; Lithothamnium ramosissimum, Reuss; Lithophyllum sp.; Carpenteria sp.; Cycloclypeus sp.; Spiroclypeus sp.; Miogypsina mamillata, Yabe and Hanzawa; Miogypsinoides sp.; Miogypsinoides dehaartti (Van der Vlerk), var, formosensis; Spiroclypeus sp., Yabe and Hanzawa; Lepidocyclina brouweri, Rutten; Lepidocyclina melanesiana, Hanzawa; Lepidocyclina douvillei, Yabe and Hanzawa; Lepidocyclina sumatrensis, Brady; Lepidocyclina sumatrensis var. inornata, Rutten; Lepidocyclina sumatrensis (Brady) var. minor, Rutten; Lepido- cyclina verbeeki, Newton and Holland. This fossil evidence determines the age of the formation as Lower Miocene. It is apparently the first record of foraminiferal limestone of this age from the Solomon Islands. It is of particular interest from the fact that no hard fora- miniferal limestones have been recorded from Bougainville, though they have 242 been recorded from New Georgia, Ugi and Florida Islands, but the exact age of these latter occurrences has not been determined. lt is probable that the existence of this Lower Miocene formation will be found to extend widely through the Solomon Islands. As the type locality now established is the Orovavi River, this name is suggested as a designation for the formation. The approximate position of the locality where these beds are well developed is latitude 5°50’S and longitude 155°5’E. Continuing up the Orovavi River above the 1,500-fect level a softer formation was encountered which, from the description furnished, appears to be a marine calcareous mudstone with igneous contributions. At the 2,000-tect level more hard limestone was encountered. Qn another traverse across country, between the east coast and Balbi at some 15 to 20 miles further to the north than the Orovavi occurrence, hard, dense, buff-coloured limestones similar in general appearance, though differing in fossil contents, were collected by medical assistant, Foulkes, and forwarded by Dr. C. M. Deland. This locality is about 15 miles from the east coast. One specimen collected there at an elevation of 4,000 feet, is found on examination in microscope slide to be of a brecciated nature with fragments of massive coral showing tabulae and dissepiments. The fragments are not confined to coralline matter for one large piece, 5 inches in length, is a calcareous foraminiferal rock. The whole is, therefore, a dense recrystallised breccia composed of fragments of coral and of foraminiferal limestone. Another specimen from this same elevation and locality is a calcareous and recrystallised calcareous mud. The microscope slide reveals the presence of radio- laria and foraminifera (Globorotalia, Globigerina and ? Planorbulina), These limestones from the 4,000-feet level are evidently of later age than the Orovavi beds. The latter correspond to the upper division of the Lower Aitape series of New Guinea and to a great development of calcareous and tuffaceous Lepidocyclina-hearing foraminiferal beds recorded“ in the New Hebrides. This New Hebridean formation was located by one of us (Mawson) first in the vicinity of Taleppe on the island of Malekula, and later on the west coast of the island of Espiritu Santo. It is, therefore, suggested that so far as applies to the New Hebrides, this Lower Miocene formation be distinguished as the Laleppe series. From the trend of the beds in the various localities met and the physio- graphic features of Mallicola and Santo, it is clear that the island of Mallicola and the western portion of Santo are constituted in great measure of a fold ridge of these Lower Miocene Laleppe beds. For the most part they dip steeply to the west, where the sca floor plunges precipitously to great depths. From New Guinea a great [old chain, involving these Miocene beds, extends through the Solomon Islands and the New Hebrides. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE IIt. Fig. 1. Microphotograph of a section of Lower-Miocene Lepidocyclina limestone from the Orovari River, Bougainville Island. The upper cross section is that of L. verbecki; that in the left-hand lower corner is L. melunesiana: magnified 20 diams. Fig. 2. A further section of the same limestone, figuring L. douvillei? magnified 20 diams. Fig. 3. Photograph of a microscope section of the Lower Miocene Lepidocyclina limestone from the Orovari River, Bougainville Island: maguified 8 diams. () “The Geology of the New Hebrides,” by Dr. Mawson, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W,, vol. xxx, pp. 400-485. Also “Notes on the Older Tertiary Foraminiferal Rocks on the West Coast of Santo, New Hebrides,” by F. Chapman, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., vol. xxx, pp 261-274. Also “On the Tertiary Limestones and Foraminiferal Tuffs of Malckula, New Hebrides,” by F. Chapman, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., vol. xxxii, pp. 745-760, NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.-NO. 4. BY ERNEST H. ISING Summary Stypandra glauca R. Br. Prod. 279. A leafy perennial with stems on a creeping rhizome, sometimes low and tufted, or weak and ascending, under 30 cm. high, sometimes 60 to 100cm. high, woody and branched at the base. Leaves distichous, the sheaths usually concealing the stem, sometimes flattened with an acute keel, or almost terete, the blade erect or spreading, linear or lanceolate, usually 7*5-10cm. long, but sometimes twice that length and varying from 4-8 mm. in breadth. Flowers in a loose terminal dichotomous cyme usually leafy at the base, the branches very spreading, the filiform pedicels recurved, varying from 12-25rnm. long, mostly solitary but sometimes two together at the ends of the branches, without subtending bracts except sometimes a leafy one under the lowest. Perianth blue, the segments very acute, 5-nerved, about 12mm. long. Stamens very much shorter; filaments filiform and twisted in the lower half, with a dense oblong tuft of hairs under the anther; anther shorter than the filament, much recurved, almost spiral after the shedding of the pollen. Capsule oblong, 6-8 mm. long. Seeds, several in each cell, flattened, smooth but not shining. 243 NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.—No. 4. By Ernest H, Isrnc. [Read October 10, 1935.] LILIACEAE, Stypandra R. Br. [Referring to the tuft of hairs or tow under the anther.] Bentham’s key (8) is as follows :— Series II. Capsulares. Fruit dry, capsular or rarely of 1-3 indchiscent l-seeded nutlets. Tribe TX. Anthericeae. Perianth segments free or very shortly united at the base, Style undivided, with a small terminal entire or slightly 3-dymous stigma. Stock not bulbous. Flowers racemose paniculate or umbellate, rarely solitary. Bracts thinly scarious, usually hyaline or none, not glumelike. Sub-tribe Chlorophyteae. Perianth not twisted, persistent round the fruit, unchanged or withering. Flowers loosely racemose cymose or paniculate .Anthers 6, opening in slits. Filaments bearded or with adnate appendages under the anther. Anthers recurved after flowering. Seeds flattened. Flowers in a very loose cyme a : on . rw Stypandra The genus can be placed in the key in the Flora of South Australia (9) in the following position :— D. Perianth segments not twisted after flowering. G. Filaments bearded. Flowers yellow es a ae oa 44 ‘s rw -» Bulbine Flowers purple or whitish .. ; 0 ot ee Arthropodinm Flowers bluc .. ie rd ae A iy 4 2 -- Stypandra Stypandra glauca R. Br. Prod. 279. - A leafy perennial with stems on a creeping rhizome, sometimes low and tufted, or weak and ascending, under 30 cm. high, sometimes 60 to 100 cm. high, woody and branched at the base. Leaves distichous, the sheaths usually concealing the stem, sometimes flattened with an acute keel, or almost terete, the blade erect or spreading, linear or lanceolate, usually 7°5-10 cm. long, but sometimes twice that length and varying from 4-8 mm, in breadth, Flowers in a loose terminal dichotomous cyme usually leafy at the base, the branches very spreading, the filiform pedicels recurved, varying from 12-25 mm. long, mostly solitary but sometimes two together at the ends of the branches, without subtending bracts except sometimes a leafy one under the lowest. Perianth blue, the segments very acute, 5-nerved, about 12 mm. long. Stamens very much shorter; filaments filiform and twisted in the lower half, with a dense oblong tuft of hairs under the anther; anther shorter than the filament, much recurved, almost spiral after the shedding of the pollen. Capsule oblong, 6-8 mm. long. Seeds, several in each cell, flattened, smooth but not shining. Wudinna Hill, September 1, 1935, and Carapee Hill, September 2, 1935, both Eyre Peninsula. First record of the genus for South Australia; coll., C. Johns and E. H. I. The habitat was similar in both cases, i.¢., the plants were growing at the base of both of the hills at the foot of the granite, of which both these outcrops are composed, where the soil is well watered by the run-off from the bare rock. The plants are not rare in their habitat, but are very limited in their distribution. It is now found in all the States, except Tasmania. 244 PROTEACEAE, Hakea ulicina R. Br. var. flexilis J. M. Black. Near Butler, Eyre Peninsula, August 24, 1935, E. H. I. This constitutes the first record of the variety for Eyre Peninsula. AMARANTHACEAE, Trichinium obovatum Gaud. On further examination of some specimens collected and recorded by me (2) as T. incanum, I have now decided that they belong instead to T. obovatum. The short tomentum, ovate leaves, bracts and bracteoles usually hairy only at the base, cylindrical heads and ovary hairy at the summit (glabrous in No. 1,628) are distinct characters of the latter species. PoRTULACACEAE, Montia L. (After Joseph de Monti, Professor of Botany at Bologna.) The distinguishing characters of this genus are set out in the following key (10) — Ovary half inferior, Petals and stamens perigynous + is .. Portulaca Ovary superior. Petals and stamens hypogynous. Petals frec. Stamens 5, opposite the petals and inserted on their base xd .. Claytonia Stamens indefinite, often numerous, rarely and irregularly reduced to § .. Calandrinia Petals united in a simple corolla, split open on one side. Stamens 3to5 Montia Montia verna Neck. Delic. Gallo-Belg. I (1768) 78. A weak glabrous annual growing in damp situations, prostrate and rooting at the nodes, ends of branches erect ; leaves 8-18 mm. long, spathulate, opposite, slightly connate, entire, somewhat fleshy, obtuse and tapering at the base; flowers in short axillary drooping racemes up to 7-flowered with two solitary flowers at its base; sepals 2 persistent ovate, very obtuse, 2 mm. long; corolla white, 5-lobed, split open on one side, slightly longer than calyx; stamens 3-5, inserted in the top of the corolla tube; ovary free, 1 celled with 3 ovules; capsule separating into 3 ovate valves which become involute after shedding the seeds; seeds black, dull, tuberculate, flattened and round.—M. minor Gmel. Fl. Bad. 1 (1805) 301 and numerous other synonyms given by Ascherson and Graebner (13). Aldgate, Mr. A. K. Newbery’s property, October 5 and 12, 1935. First record of the genus for South Australia. Assistance in the identification was kindly given by Miss C. M. Eardley and Mr. J. M. Black. ‘The few plants collected were growing in a damp gully which had, at one time, been cultivated and then abandoned to blackberries. Mr. Newbery has, however, recently cleared the land, and this species has since made its appearance. It is very difficult to decide whether the plant is introduced or indigenous, but it is probably the latter, as it is recorded by Bentham (1. ¢. 177) from Tasmania, by Ewart (11) from Victoria, and by Maiden (12) from New South Wales as a native plant. It is near M. fontana L., but that species has leaves free and seeds shining of a pale colour. LEGUMINOSAE. Cassia artemisioides Gaud. Central Australia: Horse Shoe Bend, August 24, 1931 (No. 3,138). This specimen is near to C. Sturtii R. Br., but the leaflets and pods are narrower and the pcduncles are shorter. Coglin Creek, August 26, 1931 (No. 3,142). Macdonald Station, August 30, 1933 (Nos. 3,162 and 3,163) ; the latter specimen has leaflets which appear terete on account of the im- rolling of the margins and forming a slender channel down the centre, sometimes the leaflets are reduced to two pairs. These are definite localities for Central 245 Australia, as Ewart (1) only refers to it as “recorded in the National Herbarium Census from North Australia.” C. desolata F. v. M. Central Australia, Further localities to those already recorded are:—Macdonald Station, August 26, 1933 (No. 3,168), with flowers in terminal or axillary peduncles; Coglin Creek, August 26, 1931 (No. 3,122); Horse Shoe Bend, August 24, 1931 (No. 3,128); Burt Plain, August 21, 1933 (Nos. 3,154 and 3,155). A puzzling form was collected at Macdonald Station, August 30, 1933 (Nos. 3,148 and 3,149), which had a distinct aspect; the leaficts appear to be concave, the racemes are few flowered, although an old peduncle was 55 mm. long and showed bases of 16 flowet pedicels, sepals glabrous, pods only 5-6 mm. wide, thin and dark brown. C. eremophila A. Cunn, Central Australia: Coglin Creek, August 26, 1931 (No. 3,126). This specimen seems to be nearest to this species although it differs in the leaflets often wider and thinner, glands are shortly but distinctly stipitate. Amongst the species with stipitate glands it differs from C. australis in the leaflets fewer and longer, flowers racemose, and in the appressed hairs. From C. Chatelainiana in having a pubescent clothing, leaflets fewer longer and thinner, gland capitate, flowers racemose. From C, suffruticosa in the leaflets pubescent fewer and much narrower, glands capitate and flowers in definite racemes, From C. retusa it differs in the sparse pubescence and in most of the characters as shown under C. suffruticosa, It is also near C, Sturtii but differs in the straight hairs, leaflets longer and chieflly narrower, and the stipitate glands, South Australia: Snake Gully, near Pedirka, September 1, 1932 (No. 3,135). A variety having a sparse appressed pubescence, leaflets wider and with a distinct keel formed by the midrib. This form is certainly a strong departure from the type and may be worthy of a varietal name if further specimens from other localities are obtained. There are many intermediate forms between C. eremophila, C. artemisioides and C. Sturtit, and if distinct forms can be obtained from various localities it would assist in reducing the confusion which now exists between the above species, C. glutinosa DC. Central Australia: Macdonald Station, September 2, 1933 (No. 3,147). A species of rare occurrence, and only one or two shrubs were seen over an area of some hundreds of square miles. C. pleurocarpa F. v. M. Central Australia: Horse Shoe Bend, August 24, 1931 (No. 3,119); Macdonald Station, August 28, 1933 (No. 3,151), seldom recorded in Central or South Australia. South Australia: Pedirka, in sandhills, August 26, 1932 (No. 3,120), leaflets almost always in 7 pairs. C. pruinosa F. v. M. South Australia: Pedirka, August 29, 1932 (No. 3,118), leaflets up to 7 pairs, glands present between the lowest three pairs, pods to 6 cm. long and 13 mm. wide. Central Australia: Macdonald Station, August 28, 1933 (No. 3,150). C. Sturtii R. Br. South Australia: Bloods Creek, August 29, 1931 (No. 3,146) ; this specimen has the aspect of C. artemisioides but differs in the wider leaflets and in glands between the lowest one or two pairs. Abminga, August 28, 1931 (No. 3,137) ; although this specimen has longer leaflets (up to 34 mm.) than the type and approaches C’. artemisioides in this and in the glands between the lowest pair only, it cannot belong there as the leaflets are wider (2-34 mm.) and are linear-lanceolate; the pod is sometimes 8 cm, long and 13 mm. wide. Central Australia: Macdonald Station, August 30, 1933 (No. 3,165) ; a variation from the type occurs in this specimen, as the leaflets are up to 50 mm. in length and are glabrous at a very early stage and quite green, Another specimen pS. 3,164) from the same locality has the typical vestiture of white hoary curly airs, 246 C. Sturtii R. Br. var. involucrata J. M. Black. South Australia: Previously this variety was only known by two collections from (a) Birksgate Range, R. Helms, July 6, 1891 (the type), and from (b) Musgrave to Mann Ranges, Tindale and Hackett, July, 1933, and thus has been imperfectly known. I have collected specimens from the following localities:—~Pedirka, August 29, 1932 (Nos. 3,130, 3,131, and 3,134) ; Abminga, August 28, 1931 (No. 3,134a). Specimens from Bloods Creek (No. 3,123), Snake Gully (Nos. 3,125 and 3,129), and Abminga (No. 3,127) belong to a series with leaflets narrower than usual, from oblong to lanceolate and from two to five times long as broad. The aspect of these specimens is so different from the broader type, particularly No, 3,123 with leaflets 20-33 mm. long and 44-6 mm, wide and concave. They cannot be included under C, desolata because of the narrow leaflets and they appear to be forms intermediate between it and C. Sturti. Central Australia: Horse Shoe Bend, August 24, 1931 (Nos. 3,132 and 3,133), and Macdonald Station, August 28, 1933 (No. 3,169). These are the first records for Central Australia, and the localities now recorded extend its range very considerably, practically 500 miles across the centre of the continent. The description may be amplified in the following:—Plant hoary or densely pubescent and becoming glabrous in age; leaflets 1-4 pairs, mostly 2-3 pairs, Sbovate to cuneate 10-24 mm. long, 5-15 mm. wide; 1-3 filaments longer than others; pod sometimes pubescent when young, glabrous in age, 17-20 mm. wide ; flowers sometimes slightly racemose. RUTACEAE, Boronia inornata Turez. A specimen of this dainty species has been collected at Avon by Mr. J. 1. Robert, July and August. Several shrubs were observed in the railway reserve, and probably the species is now rare in this district where it has not been previously recorded. Black’s Flora (3) gives its occurrence as from Yorke Peninsula to Port Pirie; Murray Lands and Eyre Peninsula. It is certainly very plentiful on Eyre Peninsula, from Arno Bay through Darkes Peak and at Butler, where I recently saw it widely spread and the numerous shrubs were flowering in August and September this year. B. pilosa Labill. In some specimens from near Penola (5 miles along the Casterton Road, Mrs. E. M. Petherick) the leaflets are up to 16 mm. long and the filaments are flattened. RITAMNACEAE, Cryptandra tomentosa Lindl. Near Binnum (per Mrs. E. M. Petherick), July 9, 1935 (No. 3,182). This is the first record of any species of Cryptandra for the South-East. I have compared the above specimen with those in the Tate Herbarium, Adelaide University, and with those in Mr. J. M. Black’s Herbarium from numerous localities, and they agree perfectly. The flowers are strongly and sweetly scented. DILLENIACEAE. Hibbertia virgata R. Br. Near Butler, Eyre Peninsula, August 24, 1935, E. HI. This is the first record of this species for Eyre Peninsula. Hibbertia virgata R. Br., var. crassifolia (Benth.) J. M. Black. Darkes Peak, August 6, 1935, per Pastor A. P. H. Freund. This is the first record for Eyre Peninsula. VIOLACEAE, Viola Sieberiana Spreng. This species can now he recorded from the South- East, where I collected it at “The Springs,” 10 miles west of Mount Gambier, October 22, 1934. It is a rare plant in this locality, but its congener (V. hederacea) was very abundant in favourable situations in the stringybark forest. 247 MyYRrTACEAE, Darwinia micropetala (F. v. M.) Benth. The recorded locality for this species in the South-East is near Yallum. I have collected it between Stewarts and Lucindale in that district, where there are many acres of it. It appears to prefer the sandy soil and was flowering in October, 1934. D, homoranthoides (F. v. M.) J. M. Black. Eyre Peninsula is the only part of the State from which this specics is known, and I have collected it (August, 1935) at Arno Bay, near the swampy edge of a small creek. EPACRIDACEAE, Styphelia adscendens R. Br. Some years ago Mr. W. Burdett, of Basket Range, collected seeds of this species from plants growing in scrub 16 miles east of Beachport, and was successful in raising a plant. This plant flowers freely, and seedlings have now appeared near the parent. As this species grows in the Grampians, western Victoria (I have seen a specimen from this locality in the Tate Herbarium) there is now every reason to believe that it is a native of our South-East, and this constitutes the first definite record for the species in South Australia. Black (5) refers to an unauthenticated record for the South-East and gives a short description, but the above specimen is more robust with leaves and flowers longer and the five tufts ef erect, dense hairs are situated at the base of the corolla tube. The hypogynous scales are ovate and slightly bifid. Brachyloma daphnoides (Sm.) Benth. Near Bangham, South-East, Decem- ber 12, 1934. The only known record of this species in our State is that recorded by Bentham (6) as being collected by Tennison Wood in the Tatiara district. Bangham is in the Tatiara, and the species also occurs across the border into Victoria at this spot in similar class of country, which is a whitish sand. There is no specimen from South Australia in the Tate Herbarium, nor in Mr. J. M. Black’s Herbarium. Flowering October to December, Leucopogon Clelandii Cheel. Square Waterhole, April 25, 1934 (No. 3,188). This is a new locality for this rare and inconspicuous plant. It was in full flower in April, but on account of the drooping habit of the flowers they are unobserved until the branches are lifted up. [Leaves 15-6 mm. long, ciliolate, smallest ovate and passing into oblong and obovate, old ones with a pubescent patch at the base on the top surface, veins prominent below. MyovoracEAk, Myoporum montanum R, Br. Roseworthy, August, 1934, per G. H. Clarke. This is the most southerly record for this species, as Spalding is given in the Flora (7) as the limit to its distribution in the south. CAMPANULACEAE, Lobelia gibbosa Labill. Having collected this species at Lucindale, December 13, 1934 (No, 3,184), this makes the first record for the South-East. Plants up to 60 cm. in height and often with several branches, leaves up to 40 mm. long, linear to lanceolate and usually with several linear teeth, the three lobes of the lower lip of the corolla are obtuse. The species was not uncommon on flats and rises, GOODENIACEAE, Dampiera rosmarinifolia Schlechtd, Cootra, near Waddikee Rock, Sep- tember 2, 1935, First record for Eyre Peninsula, 248 COMPOSITAE, Quinetia Urvillei Cass. Wudinna Hill and Carapee Hill, September 2, 1935. First record for Eyre Peninsula. Both the hills mentioned above are gramite outcrops, and these tiny plants were found in the small patches of earth formed in cracks on the slopes. Ceratogyne obionoides Turcz. Wudinna, Eyre Peninsula, October, 1935, C. W. Johns. This is a definite locality record for this species which can now be included in the flora of the State. A note by Black (14) states -—“Recorded by Tate for the district between Lake Torrens and the New South Wales border; no specimen in his herbarium.—Central New South Wales; Victoria (Underbool, east of Pinnaroo); West Australia. An Australian genus of one species.” REFERENCES. Ewart and Davres, Flora of the Northern Territory (1917), 135. E, H. Isinc, These Transactions, vol. xlvi (1922), 596. J. M. Brack, Flora of South Australia (1924), 339. Ibid. Ibid (1927), 446. Bentiram, Flora Australiensis, vol. iv (1869), 173. J. M. Brack, Flora of South Australia (1929), 519. Bentuam, Flora Austr., vol. vii (1878), Dt Biack, J. M., Flora Sth. Austr. (1922), 106. 10. Bextra, Flora Austr. I (1863), 168. 11. Ewart, A. J., Flora Vict. (1930), 485. 12. Maen, J. H., Cens. N.S.W. PL. (1916), 75. 13. AsctiEersoN und GRaEBNER, Syn. Mittel-Europ. Flora, v (1919), 431. 14. Brack, J. M., Flora S. Austr. (1929), 606. SOON AUR ONE SOME AQUATIC HEMIPTERA FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. BY HERBERT M. HALE Summary Mr. M. E. Solomon, of the Department of Biology at the University of Western Australia, has submitted for identification a small series of aquatic bugs collected by him in his State. Included is a single specimen of a most elusive Australian Notonectid. I am indebted to Mr. Solomon for the opportunity of examining this material. 249 SOME AQUATIC HEMIPTERA FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA. By Hergpert M. Hate, Director, South Australian Museum. (Contribution from South Australian Museum.) [Read October 10, 1935.] Mr. M. E. Solomon, of the Department of Biology at the University of Western Australia, has submitted for identification a small series of aquatic bugs collected by him in his State. Included is a single specimen of a most elusive Australian Notonectid. I am indebted to Mr. Solomon for the opportunity of examining this material. Family CORIXIDAE. AGRAPTOCORIXA EURYNOME (Kirkaldy). Corixa eurynome Kirk. Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), xx, 1897, p. 54. Porocorixa ewrynome Hale, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., ti, 1922, p. 318, fig. 343. Agraptocorixa eurynome Lundblad, Arkiv. f6r Zool., xxA, No. 6, 1928, p. 3, fig. 1-5. This species was not previously known from Western Australia, although another member of the genus, A. parvipunctata (Hale), was taken by Dr. Mjoberg in the Kimberley district. Loc.—Butler’s Swamp, Claremont (June 24 and August 19, 1934). MircroneEcTa ropusta Hale. Micronecta robusta Hale, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., ii, 1922, p. 325, fig. 347. Loc.—Butler’s Swamp, Claremont (July 29, 1934). Family NOTONECTIDAE. ANIsops poRrIs Kirkaldy. Anisops doris Kirk., Wien. Ent. Zeit., xxiii, 1904, p. 112; Hale, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., ii, 1923, p. 402, fig. 364. A species not before taken in Western Australia. Loc—Butler’s Swamp, Claremont (July 29 and August 19, 1934); Hovea (Jan. 23, 1934). ANISOPS HYPERION Kirkaldy, Anisops hyperion Kirk., Wien, Ent. Zeit., xvii, 1898, p. 141, and xxiti, 1904, p. 113 (part ?) ; Hale, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., ii, 1923, p. 403, text fig. 365 and pl. x, fig. 2-4 and pl. xi, fig. 1-10. Loc.—Butler’s Swamp, Claremont (June 24, July 29 and August 19, 1934). Notonecta (ENITIMARONECTA) HANDLIRSCHI Kirkaldy, Notonecta handlirschi Wirk., Trans. Ent. Soc., London, 1897, p. 408, and Wien. Ent. Zeit., xxiii, 1904, p. 132; Hale, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., ii, 1923, p. 418; Hutchinson, Ann. S. African Mus., xxv, 1929, p. 363. Notonecta (Enitharonecta) handlirschi Hungerford, Ann, Ent. Soc., America, xxi, 1928, p. 143, pl. ix, fig. 6, and Bull. Univ. Kansas, xxi, 1933, p. 27, pl. iv, fig. 2, viii, fig. 4, and 1x, fig. 7. This species was previously known only from three males, two in the Vienna Museum and one, known to have been taken in Western Australia, in the British Museum. Mr. Solomon now submits a single female and, despite searching, has found no further specimens of the species. I 250 The length of this female is 10°75 mm., and the width of the pronotum 3-3 mm. ‘The colour is as described and figured by Hungerford (1933), the hemelytra being nearly black and the clavus very dark reddish-brown. The keel of the abdomen is not bare on any of the sternites and the last sternite is slender and elongate, slightly constricted and with the tip narrowly rounded (fg. 1, A). Fig. 1. Female of Notonecta handlirscht Kirk. A, ventral view of abdomen (x 11); B, lateral and, C. anterior (ventral) view of last tergite and ovipesitor (x15); D-G, the three separate gouging components of ovipositor (all x40); D, posterior face of middle piece and E-E’, Ieft and right side picces, slightly tilted so that the view is postero-lateral; F, latcral and, G, anterior aspects of median component; in G it is slightly flattened and distorted. The ovipositor is of unusual interest, as it is extraordinarily developed for the insertion of the eggs into plant tissues. The gouging apparatus is complex, consisting of a middle highly chitinized part with strong teeth on the posterior —or when flexed dorsal—face, and with a pair of subapical oval sensory bodies (fig. 1, D, F, G). On each side of this median structure and in contact with it antero-laterally, is a narrow scraper (1°87 mm. in length) slightly curved and with 251 a row of strong teeth on the apical third. Although the lateral components are closely attached to the middle piece by tissue, they can be separated quite readily. Loc.—Hovea (Jan. 28, 1934). Family PLEIDAE. PLEA BRUNNI Kirkaldy. Plea brunni Kirk. Wien. Ent. Zeit, xvii, 1898, p. 141 and xxiii, 1904, p. 128; Hale, Rec. 5. Austr. Mus., ii, 1923, p. 421, fig. 371; Lundblad, Arch. Hydrobiol., Stuttgart Suppl. 12, 1933, p. 142, fig. 47. Plea australis Horvath, Ann. Mus. Nat. Hungarici, xvi, 1918, p. 145. The specimen figured by me (ut supra) is from Gladstone, (Jueensland, not far from the type locality; this and other specimens on which my description of the species was based have metathoracic wings and the hemelyira not aborted. However, a Plea was collected by me at Myponga Swamps in 1923, when the above-mentioned paper was in press, and this locality was added to those listed. In 1933 Lundblad pointed out (loc. cit. p. 144, fig. 48) that these Myponga examples, some of which I had sent him, lacked claval suture and metathoracic wings and could be separated readily from P. brunni; he proposes the name P. halet for this Myponga form, which I have seen from nowhere else. Loc.—Butler’s Swamp, Claremont (July 29, 1934). Family MESOVELIIDAE. MESovELIA HUNGERFORDI Hale. Mesovelia hungerfordi Hale, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., iii, 1926, p. 198, fig. 82. Not previously recorded from Western Australia, but no doubt quite common in that State. Loc.—Butler’s Swamp, Claremont (June 24, July 29 and Aug. 19, 1934). Family VELIIDAE., MICROVELIA PERAMOENA Hale. Microvelia peramoena Hale, Archiv. f. Zool, K. Svenska Vet.-Akad., xviiA, 1925, p. 8, fig. 5, and Rec. S. Austr. Mus., iii, 1926, p. 213, fig. 88. Loc—Hovea (Jan. 23, 1934). HALOVELIA MARITIMA Bergroth. Halovelia maritima Berg., Ent. Month Mag., xxix, 1893, p. 277; Hale, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., iti, 1926, p. 203, fig. 84, a-c; Esaki, Ann. Mus. Nat. Hungarici, xxiii, 1926, p. 162. This little water-strider was found in Western Australia by the late Mr. A. M. Lea nearly forty years ago; his specimens were taken at Pelsart Island. Mr. Solomon has now secured examples considerably further south. Loc.—North-west end of Garden Island, off Fremantle; on a sheltered rock- pool (March 11, 1933). ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. NO. 33. BY J. M. BLACK, A.L.S. Summary Eragrostis minor, Host. Mt. Harriett (S. of the Musgrave Ranges), Jan., 1934, H. H. Finlayson. If this grass is really an introduction from the old world, as is usually supposed, it is strange that it should so often be found in our Far North and Far North-west (and near Broken Hill, N.S.W.) and not in any southern district. Eragrostis Basedowii, Jedw. in Bot. Arch. 4 : 328 (1923). Annual, 15 cm. high, slender; orifice of leaf-sheath villous, blades narrow-linear, folded, to 4 cm. long and 1% mm. broad, glabrous; panicle loose, subcylindrical, obtuse at summit. reddish, to 4 cm. long and 15 mm. broad, the branches very short, erect-spreading, forming a few clusters of sessile spikelets; spikelets elliptical, very flat, about 12-flowered, to 8 mm. long; outer glumes 1-nerved, smooth, the lower one to 2 mm., the upper to 3 mm. long; flowering glumes minutely scabrous near summit of keel, closely imbricate, to 3 mm. long; paleas much shorter, ciliate with long hairs on the 2 keels.-Flinders Range, H. Basedow. 252 ADDITIONS fO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. No. 33. By J. M. Brack, A.L.S. [Read October 10, 1935.| Priates 1V anv V. GRAMINEAE, *Eragrostis minor, Host. Mt. Harriett (S. of the Musgrave Ranges), Jan., 1934, H. H. Finlayson, If this grass is really an introduction from the old world, as is usually supposed, it is strange that it should so olten be found in our Far North and Far North-west (and near Broken Hill, N.S.W.) and not in any southern district. Eragrostis Basedowii, Jedw. in Bot. Arch. 4 : 328 (1923). Annual, 15 em. high, slender; orifice of leat-sheath villous, blades narrow-linear, folded, to 4 cm. long and 14 mm. broad, glabrous; panicle loose, subcylindrical, obtuse at summit, reddish, to 4 cm. long and 15 mm. broad, the branches very short, erect-spreading, forming a few clusters of sessile spikelets; spikelets elliptical, very flat, about 12-flowered, to 8 mm. long; outer glumes 1-nerved, smooth, the lower onc to 2 mm., the upper to 3 mm. long; flowering glumes minutely scabrous near summit of keel, closely imbricate, to 3 mm. long; paleas much shorter, ciliate with long hairs on the 2 keels.—Flinders Range, H, Basedow. Appears to be near EF. concinna, Staud., with leaf-blades rather narrower, spikelets usually shorter and of a reddish tinge. Eragrostis laevigluimis, Jedw. in Bot. Arch. 5 : 209 (1924), seems to be the same as FE. japonica (Thunb.) Trin., the only differences which I can see being that the flowering glume is described as “smooth” (instead of minutely ciliate on the upper part of the midnerve) and the palea as much shorter than the flowering glume (“‘paleae superiores praecedentibus bene breviores’’), instead of very slightly shorter, as it is in all our specimens.—Central Australia (without exact locality). HH. Basedow, The types of these 2 species were collected by the late Dr. Herbert Basedow, sent to Germany and described by E. Jedwabrick in the Botanisches Archiv. | owe the copies of the original descriptions to the courtesy of Dr. L. Diels, Director-General of the Botanic Garden and Museum of Berlin. It appears that no co-ltypes were retained in Australia. 1 have not seen the “Eragrostis specierum conspectus,” published by Jedwabrick in the Bot. Archiv of 1924, which may throw fresh light on the affinities of E. laevighuais. Amphibromus recurvatus, J. R. Swallen in Amer. Journ. Bot., vol. xvifi (1931). Stems erect, to 50 cm. high; leaf-blades involute-subulate or flat towards base; ligule 5-10 mm. long; panicle narrow and rather dense, 8-15 cm. long, the lower branches erect, 1-3 cm. long; spikelets 7-10 mm. long (without the awns), 4-7-flowered; first empty glume 34 mm., the second 44 mm. long; flowering glumes 4-5 mm. long, minutely scabrous, the summit usually reddish and con- sisting of 4 small lanceolate subequal ciliolate teeth; palea about 2 as long; awn bent, reddish, 10-15 mm. long (pl. v, fig. 4). Between Mounts Burr and McIntyre; also near Mt. Gambier, S.E. (specimens in Tate Herbarium). 253 This identification is due to Mr. P. F. Morris’s ‘‘Notes on the genus Amphi- bromus,” published in the “Victorian Naturalist” for 1934. The species is found also in Tasmania. Amphibromus Neesti, Steud, Syn. Glum. 1 : 328 (1855).—Avena nervosa, R. Br. Prodr. 178 (1810) non Lamk. Illustr. n. 1115 (1791) ; Danthonia nervosa (R. Br.) Hook. f. Fl. Tasm. 2: 121 (1860); “Amphibromus nervosus, Nees,” Hook, f, Ic, (1860), J. M. Black Fl. S, Aust, 73, fig. 18. Differs from the pre- ceding in taller stature (to 1 m. or more), longer and looser panicle (15-35 cm. long), the first glume 4-5 mm. long, the second 5-6 mm, long; flowering glumes 6-7 mm. long, the summit ciliolate, almost entire or bearing 2-4 very short unequal] bristles, the back scabrous or scabrous-papillose, palea 4-2 cm. long; awn 12-24 mm. long, bent. Belair; Buckland Park; Encounter Bay; Murray Flats; Wilpena; Ka- langadoo.—Victoria; New South Wales; Tasmania. Urochloa praetervisa (Domin) Hughes, in Kew Bull, 1923, p. 319. Stems 18-60 cm, high; leaf-sheaths pubescent or becoming glabrous, villous at orifice, rather loose, about as long as the blades, which are lanceolate, more or less dilated and cordate at base, 3-12 cm. long, 4-15 mm. broad, flat, scabrous-ciliolate and often minutely undulate on margin, sparsely pubescent or glabrous on the faces; panicle rather loose, 5-10 cm. long, with 3-7 alternate branches (racemes), of which the lowest are 2-6 cm. long and simple or again shortly branched near base, scabrous and sometimes with a few long hairs below the spikelets; rhachis triquetrous, about 4 mm. broad; spikelets plano-convex, glabrous or almost so, 34-4 mm. long, rather distant and almost appearing in one row, mostly abaxial, the lower ones usually in pairs, one subsessile, the other on a pedicel of 2-3 mm., the upper ones solitary; first glume subtruncate, 14-14 mm. long, 3-5 nerved; second glume as long as spikelet, 7-nerved; third glume as long as second, 5-nerved and containing a flat barren oblong hyaline palea nearly as long; fruiting glume 34 mm, long, faintly rugulose, with a mucro 4-4 mm. long. (PI. iv, fig. 1) — Panicum adspersum, Benth. Fl. Aust. 7 + 481 (1878) non Trin.; P. Helopus, Black Fl. S. Aust. 60 (1922) pro parte, non Trin.; P. praeterzisum, Domin in Bibl, Bot. 85 : 309 (1915); Brachiaria praetervisa (Domin) C. E, Hubbard in Kew Bull. 1934, p. 309. South Australia—Lake Eyre, Lewis; Mt. Lyndhurst, Max Koch; Cordillo Downs, J. B. Cleland ; Oodnadatta, Miss Steer; Lake Frome, S. A. White; Depot Creek (E. side of Lake Torrens) R. Tate; Mulgunyarie Station and Koonamore, T. B. Paltridge. Central Australia—River Finke, R. Tate. This grass, which has been misunderstood for a jong: time, appears to be common in the North. The term “abaxial spikelet” means that the flat face of the spikelet (which displays the back of the small first glume and the back of the third glume) is turned away from the axis (rhachis) of the spike or raceme. As the spikelets in this species are mostly abaxial, in spite of considerable irregularity in their orientation, I think it should be placed in Urochloa, not Brachtaria, which has adaxial spikelets (flat face and back of first and third glumes turned towards the rhachis). Mr. P. F. Morris, agrostologist of the Victorian National Herbarium, has, as the result of an independent examination, arrived at the same conclusion. Brachiaria Giles (Benth.) Chase in Contrib. U.S. Nat. Herb, 22 : 35 (1920). Leaf-sheaths rather loose, with scattered hairs seated on tubercles; orifice hairy; blades flat, broad- lanceolate, somewhat dilated at base, almost glabrous except for scattered tubercle-seated hairs near the margins, which are also minutely scabrous-ciliolate; panicles short and dense, scarcely exceeding the leaf, the branches (spikes) alternate, 14-24 cm. long; spikelets adaxial, solitary, nearly 254 5 mm. long, plano-convex, subsessile in 2 dense rows along the scabrous narrow triquetrous rhachis of the panicle-branches or spikes; first glume subtruncate, scarcely 4 mm. long, obscured by a ring of long hairs at its base; second glume 44 mm, long, 9-nerved, ciliate near margin; third glume slightly longer, 5-nerved, pubescent and with long cilia near the margin of the lower half, containing a flat oblong hyaline barren palea nearly as long; fruiting glume slightly and trans- versely rugulose, with a minute mucro, (PI. iv, fig. 2.)—Panicum Guest, Benth. Fl. Aust. 7 : 477 (1878) ; Urochloa Gilesu (Benth.) Hughes in Kew Bull., 1923, p. 319, Central Australia—Charlotte Waters, E. Giles; Finke River, Kempe. New South Wales—Coonamble, French (fide Miss Hughes). Although collected so close to our border, this species has not yet been found in our State. It is chiefly distinguished by its long-haired third glume and short panicles partly concealed in the leaf-sheath, The drawing is trom the Finke River specimen, kindly lent by the Victorian Government Botanist, Mr. F. J, Rae. Brachiaria notochthona (Domin) Stapf in Fl. Trop. Afr. 9 : 597 (1920). Resembles the preceding in foliage and short few-branched panicle, which has a looser appearance, but the 2-rowed spikelets which form the dense spikes are glabrous; first glume subtruncate, about 4 mm. long, ciliolate, faintly 3-nerved; second glume sub-9-nerved; third glume also as long as spikelet (44 mm.), sub- 7-nerved, containing a lanceolate hyaline barren palea nearly 2 as long; fruiting glume transversely rugulose, with a short mucro (pl. iv, fig. 4).—Panicum Helopus, Benth. Fl. Aust. 7 : 476 (1878) pro parte, non Trin.; P. notochthonum, Domin in Fedde Report 10 : 60 (1911) ; Urochloa notochthona (Domin) Hughes in Kew Bull., 1923, p. 319. New South Wales—Darling River, Dallachy; between the Darling and Cooper’s Creek, Neilson (both in Vict. Nat. Herb.). Also recorded for Queens- land and W. Australia and probably occurs in N.E. part of S, Australia. Digitaria coenicola (F. v. M.) Hughes has sometimes the panicle-branches to 20 cm. long and the spikelets woolly, giving it a resemblance to D. ammophila (F. v. M.) Hughes, but the latter has rather shorter, ovoid, silky spikelets (2-24 mm. long), the nerves of the second and third glumes are 3 and 5, respec- tively, and the lateral nerves are curved, while the flowering glume is barely 2 mm. long; in D. coenicola the spikelets are oblong, 34-44 mm. long, the second glume is 5-7-nerved, the third glume 7-9-nerved, with almost straight nerves, and the flowering glume 3 mm. long. *Cynosurus echinatus, L. Near Mount Gambier, 4. G. Edquist. A new locality. *Agrostis tenwms, Sibth. Fl. oxon. 36 (1794). Mount Compass, J. B. Cleland; Tintinara, S.E., R. Scott; near Millicent, S.E., BE. S. “Alcock; Robe, S.E., M. Domaschenz. Agrees with A. alba, L. in the panicle-branches naked towards the base and the palea only half as long as the flowering glume, but differs in the short truncate ligule (1-2 mm. long), that of A, alba being oblong, rounded at summit and 4-8 mm. long —Victoria; Furope; North America. More commonly known hitherto as A. vulgaris, With. Arr. Brit. Pl. ed. 3, 132 (1796). *Polypogon maritimus, Willd. Robe, Oct., 1910, C. D. Black; Beachport, Nov., 1917, J. M. B. Very like small, short-panicled specimens of P. monspeliensis, but differs from that species in the panicle not lobed, usually tinged with pink and only 1-5 cm. long; the outer glumes arc bifid for quarter of their length and the 2 lobes this formed are twice as long, more acute and more densely ciliate than in P, monspeliensis—Coasts of the Mediterranean region. Brachyachne ciliaris (Benth.) C. E, Hubbard in Kew Bull., 1934, p. 448.— Mount Paisley Station, N. of Kingoonya, May, 1935, H. K, Woods—Cynodon ciliaris, Benth. 255 This is the second occasion on which this grass has been found in South Australia. The genus Brachyachne, Stapi (1922) has the flowering glume much shorter than the 2 outer glumes, whereas in Cynodon it is much longer than they are. ” Triodia longiceps, J. M. Black nov. var. minor. Variat spiculis brevioribus, circa 10 mm. longis, 8-10-floris, gluma florifera ad basin fere glabra. Western Australia—Gorge of Tarns, Rawlinson Range, Feb.. 1935, H. H., Finlayson; “a very luxuriant spinifex, of medium size and thick needles.” The typical form came from Central Australia. Pollinia fulua (R. Br.) Benth. (1878). Spikes 2-3, often unusually long (5-11 cm); spikelets 5-54 mm. long, the first glume 2-nerved; the second nerve- fess; awn of flowering glume 15-18 mm. long—Saccharum fulvum, R. Br. (1810) ; P. Cumingiit, Nees (1850). Rawlinson Range, W.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. CYPERACEAE. Carex inversa, R. Br. Western River, K.1., A. B. Cashmore. First record for the island. Cyperus pygmaeus, Rottb. Specimens from the Murray and Far North-East have occasionally some of the compound heads sessile on the ground, the others raised on stems to 3 cm. long; the glumes, which are imbricate in about 3 rows round the rhachilla, are l-nerved, with hyaline sides. Cyperus tenellus L. £. Cygnet River, K.1., 4. B. Cashmore. First record for the island. Fimbristylis diphylla, Vahl, Sladen Water, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. LILIACEAE. *Ornithogalum thyrsoides, Jacq. Sometimes called “Black-eyed Susan” on account of the dark-green ovary in the middle of the white flower. This hand- some plant from South Africa has now thoroughly established itself in several gullies cf the Mount Lofty Range. It is distinguished from O. arabicum, L., which has been found at Robe, by more numerous flowers in the raceme, the ovary somewhat lighter in colour, and 3 of the filaments dilated and 2-toothed towards the base. It flowers Oct.-Nov. MOoRACEAE. Ficus eugenioides, F. v. M. Desolation Glen, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson —Also York Sound and Queensland. PROTEACEAE, Grevillea lavandulacea, Schlechtd. var. sericea, Benth. Between Kingscote and American River, K.I., 4. B. Cashmore. G. Wickhamii, Meissn. W. end of James Range, C.A., Dec., 1934, H. A. Finlayson. “Shrub 1-14 m. high.” Leaves microscopically appressed-pubescent, with a prickly tooth at the angle of each of the 4-6 rounded shallow lobes which terminate the upper half of the ovate-cuneate leaf; pistil only about 4 mm. long, erect and almost straight, shorter than the perianth,which is rusty-red with minute appressed hairs and 54 mm. long; style thick, about 3 mm. long minutely pubescent; ovary glabrous, SANTALACEAE, Santalum lanceolatum, R. Br. E. of Gorge of Tarns, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. The typical form, but with rather thin leaves. 256 Eucarya acuminata (R. Br.) Sprague et Summerh. Sladen Water, Rawlin- son Range, W.A., Feb., 1935. The collector (Mr. H. H. Finlayson) says: “The centre of the flower has a brown fleshy disk; small butterflies were clustered thickly on the sprays, which gave off a distinct putrescent smell. Have caten quantities of the kernels of quondong nuts and found them good, without any ill effects, but the blacks hereabouts say they are ‘weea’ and will on no account eat them.” CHENOPONTACEAE, Kechia tomentosa (Moq.) F. v. M. var. platyphylla, Ising. Redbank, 20 miles N.E. of Mt. Sonder, C.A.; Mareeni Plain, MacDonnell Ranges, C.A., Feb., 1935, H, H, Finlayson. K. ciliata, F, vy. M. Specimens collected by Prof. Cleland near the Diaman- tina River and Cooper’s Creek have the fruiting perianth with 5 radiating wings, which make it resemble, when viewed from above, the perianth of Bassia brachyptera. It is distinguished by the silky hairs and the flat-winged base. Bassia quinquecuspis, F. v. M. In addition to Ising’s first record for South Australia (at Pedirka, in 1932), may now be noted J. B. Cleland’s discovery of the same plant on the flood plain of the Diamantina at Pandie Pandie in Aug., 1934, Rhagodia spinescens, R. Br. Sladen Water, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. “Straggly shrub 1-14 m. high; thick clusters of small, brilliant vermilion fruits.” AMARANTHACEAE. Alternanthera nana, R. Br. Sladen Water, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson, Amaranthus Mitchellu, Benth. var. grandiflorus, J. M. Black. Pernatty (W. of Lake Torrens) B. J. Murray; Frome Downs, T. B. Paltridge; S. of Chambers Pillar, C.A., H. H, Finlayson, Trichinium nobile, Lindl. Seven miles S.W. of Ernabella, Musgrave Ranges, H, H, Finlayson. A new locality. The fruiting spikes vary from 9 to 15 cm. in length. PoRTULACACEAE, Calandrinia balonnensis, Lindl. Near Mt. Harriett (S. of Musgrave Ranges), Jan., 1934, H. H. Finlayson, This appears to be the first record for South Australia, although this parakeelya has been frequently collected in Central Australia and near Broken Hill. N.S.W. The single specimen is only 15 cm. high, and is either annual or flowering in its first ycar. The species is distinguished by its thick flattish l-nerved leaves, radical and along the stems, oblong-lanceolate, tapering at both ends, slightly channelled above, 4-11 cm. long, 6-20 mm. broad; flowering pedicels about 2 cm. long, fruiting pedicels 24-4 cm. long; stamens 50-80, with pale-yellow oblong anthers 1-14 mm. long; seeds very dark-red, con- centrically rugulose, 1 mm. diam. The plant is figured in these Transactions, vol. ivi, pl. 2, fig, 1. CARYOPHYLLACEAE, Scleranthus diander, R. Br.. This species, hitherto uncertain for our State, appeared at the Wild Flower Show of Oct., 1934, without assured locality, but probably from the South-East. It differs from S. minusculus in less rigid leaves, in the flowers sessile in the clusters, in the broader (ovate-lanceolate) calyx- lobes about as long as the tube and with conspicuous scarious margins. It appears to be always perennial_—Eastern States and Tasmania. 257 CRUCIFERAE, Lepidium Muelleri-Ferdinandi, Thell. Near Cooper’s Creek and Diamantina River, Aug., 1934, J. B. Cleland, Central Aust. (without exact locality) T. Strehlow, Resembles L. papillosum, but the short hairs are linear, not clavate or obovoid, and the stem-leaves taper towards the base and are sometimes patiolate; not stem-clasping by 2 basal auricles as in L. papillosum. In both species the petals are obsolete, but the 2 stamens in L. Muelleri-Ferdinmandi and the 4 in papilosum are constant, *Cakile maritima, Scop. var. pinnatifida, Paoletti. Antechamber Bay, KI, A. B. Cashmore. *Diplotaxis tenuifolia DC. This weed has now been found at Penneshaw, K.1., Dr. H, Rischbieth, LEGU MILOSAE, Swainsona phacoides, Benth. nov. var. oocarpa. Variat legumine ovoideo vel ovaideo-oblongo, 15-20 mm. longo, 8-12 mm. lato, Central Australia—Hermannsburg; Mt. Hay; Irukaru Creek (tributary of River Bundey); Mt. Liebig; Macdonald Downs; all collected by J. B. Cleland; Redbank (N.E, of Mt. Sonder), coll, T, Strehlow. Has all the characters of S. phacoides, the hairs all along the style, but decreasing in length towards the tip, the 2 prominent calli on the standard, etc., but the pod is shorter, broader and more or less ovoid, In all the specimens cxamined the inner margin of the wing is ciliate in its lower half, a character which does not seem to be so constant in the type. Swainsona adenophylla, J. M. Black. Lake Warburton (Flinders Range) ; Diamantina River (both in Tate Herb.) ; Farina, S. A. White. Swainsona microcalyx, J. M. Black. Between Wirrulla and Yardea, E.P., J. B, Cleland; near Broken Hill, N.S.W., A. Morris. Acacia umbellata, A, Cunn. On stony hills, Sladen Water, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson, “About 1-3 m. high.” The specimen is the upper part of a flowering branch; phyllodes 3-5 cm. long, 12-15 mm. broad, very stiff, with 3-7 more prominent among the parallel nerves and a callus tip, hoary; spikes sessile, twin, 3-4 cm, long; calyx hoary, shortly 5-lobed, half as long as the petals which are glabrous, incurved, with prominent midribs; ovary hairy at summit. Recorded by Mr. C. A. Gardner, Enum. pl. Aust. Occ. 53 (1931) as A. acradenia, F. v. M. Maiden considered them conspecific. Cassia venusta, F. v. M. Desolation Glen, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. “Only one plant seen, nearly 3 m. high; foliage evil- smelling.” Previously recorded from N.W. part of W. Australia, MacDonnell Ranges, C.A., and Arnhem Land, N.A. Burtonia polyeyga (F. v. M.) Benth. E, of Gorge of Tarns, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. Acacia Kempeana, F. v. M. Same place and date; “2-24 m. high.” The phyllodes are minutely appressed-hoary, a character I have not scen in specimens from further east. This is a puzzling specimen, for it has the shortly 5-lobed calyx of A. Kempeana and the pubescent phyllodes of A. aneura var. latifolia. There are no pods. Tephrosia sphaerospora, F. vy. M. Blood’s Range, C.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. “Plant 30 cm. high.” Leaflets 3-7. Petalostylis spinescens, E. Pritzel in Fedde Repert. 15: 357 (1918). A shrub very distinct from P. labicheoides in its tomentose clothing and its small almost orbicular leaflets, 4-5 mm. long and nearly as broad, flat, 9-33 in number, 258 slightly notched at summit, more thickly tomentose below than above; sepals 5, tomentose, broadly lanceolate, 10-12 mm. long; petals bright orange, 15-20 mm. long; the large oblong petaloid style about 15 mm, long; ovary hairy on margins, with 4-6 ovules; pod unknown. Loam flats near Blood’s Range, C.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. The type was collected in 1903 in “Tate’s district C’ (our Far North) by Dr. TH. Basedow, and is presumably in Berlin. It has not been found in our State since then. The leaflets are caducous and the terminal one, or several, are usually missing on the older leaves. Pritzel appears to have seen only such, and there- fore described the rigid rhachis or common petiole as terminating in a short spine. Glycine sericea (F. v. M.) Benth. On creek flats, Sladen Water, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. “Flowers pale pink.” OX ALIDACEAE, *Oxalis flava, L. Glen Osmond; Victor Harbour, Miss C. M. Eardley— South Africa, EUPHORBIACEAE, Euphorbia Finlaysonii, nov. sp. Erecta, glabra, rigida, oirca 30 cm. alta, facie E. eremophilae; folia opposita (saltem superiora), decidua, brevissime petiolata, lincari-lanceolata, canaliculata, remote denticulata, 2-3 cm. longa, circa 1 mm. lata; involucra (cyathia) 2 mm. longa, subsessilia, in cymas pedunculatas dichotomas foliatas disposita; glandulae 4-5, appendice lato flavido fimbriolato marginatae; capsula ovoidea, 44 mm. longa, laevis; semina laevia, 3 mm. longa, carunculo magno coronata (pl. v, fig. 1). Central Australia—Sandhills W. of Chambers Pillar, near Finke River, Dec., 1934, H. H. Finlayson. Named after the collector, who recently made extensive botanical collections in the N.W. of S. Australia, in Central Australia and in the Rawlinson Range, W.A. Although with somewhat the aspect of E. eremophila, it differs in narrower leaves, the involucral glands not entire but with a broad fringed sprcading appendage, and the seeds smooth, not granular, TILIACEAE. Triumfetta appendiculata, F. v. M. Desolation Glen, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. “Small shrub.” Clothing densely tomentose ; leaves ovate-cordate, thick and soft, 5-nerved, 3-9 cm. long, 2-5 cm. broad; sepals 9 mm. long, somewhat recurved in flower, with a deltoid toothed spreading her- baceous appendage 2 mm. long and broad, and shortly spurred at its base, the appendages forming a small rim at the summit of the cylindrical bud; petals, shorter, oblanceolate, ycllow; stigmas 3, subulate; ovary-cells 3, each with a median partition, so that there are 6 l-ovulate cells in all; prickles hooked and hairy at base. MALVACEAE, Sida pedunculata, A, Cunn, Sandhills 7 miles N. of Meteorite Crater, near Henbury, Finke River, C.A., Dec., 1934, H. H. Finlayson. This plant, with its large, softly tomentose leaves, long peduncles bearing short racemes in their upper part, and broad fruits, appears worthy of specific rank.—S. corrugata, Lindl. var. pedunculata (A. Cunn.) J. M. Black. Hibiscus Sturtti, Hook. var. Muelleri, Benth. Parke’s Running Water, Finke River, C.A., Dec., 1934, H. H. Finlayson. “Undershrub 30-35 cm. high.” Calyx, with deltoid teeth, 8-9 mm. long, rather longer than the involucral cup, 259 which has 8 rounded teeth; corolla 16-18 mm. long, purplish; seeds pubescent, 6 in each cell of capsule. STERCULIACEAE, Keraudrenia integrifolia, Steud. var. velutina (Steetz) Benth. Blood’s Range, C.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. “Shrub 30-75 cm, high.” The leaves are somctimes notched at summit. K. nephrosperma (F. v. M.) Benth. Mt. Esther, near Central Mt. Stuart; near Haast’s Bluff Spring, C.A., T. Strehlow. Brachychiton Gregoru, F. v. M. Mt. Solitary (western end of MacDonnell Ranges), C.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. “Very often associated with the broad-leaved mallee.” Leaves 3-lobed; calyx only about 7 mm. long, yellowish when dry. Commersonia crispa, Turcz. Marceni Plain, MacDonnell Ranges, C.A., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson, The leaves are 2-3 cm. long, sometimes orbicular, on patioles 5-10 mm. long. New for Central Australia, FRAN KENIACEAE, Frankenia cordata, J. M. Black. Central Australia (without definite locality), T. Sirehlow, VIOLACEAE, Hybanthus enneaspermus (L.) IF. v. M. James Range, near Finke River, C.A., Jan., 1935, H. H, Finlayson, ‘THY MELAEACEAE, Pimelea flava, R. Br. The typical form, with yellowish flowers and flat leaves 8-12 mm. long, has been found by Professor Cleland at Vivonne Bay, K.I. This appears to be its first discovery in South Australia. The form usually met with here, which has white flowers and smaller and more rigid leaves, 3-7 mm. long, often concave above and imbricate, is var. diosmifolia, Meisn. in Mohl et Schlechtd. Bot. Zeit., 1848, p. 396. The variety also grows on the island. If it should ultimately be considered advisable to treat our white-flowered plant as a distinct species, its name would be P. dichotoma, Schlechtd. in Linnaea 20 : 581 (1847), which is earlier than P. parvifolia, Meisn. (1853-55) or P. diosmifolia, A. Cunn. (1856-57). MYRTACEAE. Eucalyptus ochrophylla, Maiden et Blakely = E. incrassata, Labill, var protrusa J. M. Black. Westward from Whyalla to Ooldea, 70 miles S. of Birks- gate Range. Also in W. Australia. Eucalyptus bicolor, A. Cunn. (&. largiflorens, F. v. M.) var. xanthophylla, Blakely. in watercourse, Ernabella, Musgrave Ranges, $.A., Aug., 1933, J. B. Cleland—“bark of stem rough with hanging shreds; branches smooth, spreading; small trees to 5 m. high.”—On stony foothills near Mt. Russell, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson—‘“a typical mallee in habit; height about 3m.” New for W. Australia. Differs from the type in smaller stature, in leaves rather thicker, yellowish- green at least when dry, 14-3 cm. broad, the nerves less prominent. Also in S.W. Queensland and North Australia. The identification was kindly made by Mr. Blakely. Baeckea crassifolia, Lindl. Deep white sand near Stokes Bay, K.1., July, 1933, A. B. Cashmore. First record for Kangaroo Island. “Petals pale-violet, some drying yellow.” B. crassifolia, Lindl. nov. var. pentamera. Stamina constanter 5, petalis opposita; cactera omnia ut in typo. 260 Kangaroo Island, A, B. Cashmore, This variety differs from the type in having constantly only 5 stamens, which are opposite the petals. HALORRITAGIDACEAE, Hadlorrhagis Gossei, F. v. M. W. of Chambers Pillar, MacDonnell Ranges, C.A., Dec., 1934, H. H. Finlayson (pl. v, fig. 2). BoRRAGINACEAE, *Heliotropium supinum, L, First recorded at Blanchetown in 1924; dis- covered in March, 1935, near Red Hill and Koolunga by Worsley C. Johnston. Heliotropium tenuifolium, R. Br. W. of Livingstone’s Pass, Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. Leaves narrow-linear, 2-4 cm. long, scarcely 1 mm. broad, 1-furrowed above, margins recurved, but the midrib showing below; calyx 4 mm. long; corolla 7 mm, long and (in these specimens) quite glabrous inside. SOLANACEAE. Solanum diversiflorum, F. v. M. Flowering calyx 12-15 mm. long, the linear lobes much longer than tube; fruiting calyx with broad tube about 8 mm. long and lanceolate lobes 12-16 mm. long, enclosing or finally spreading below the globular fruit, which is about 20 mm. diam., yellowish-green; the male upper calyxes are sometimes unarmed, the fertile ones (near base of raceme) are very prickly; corolla purple, 2-3 cm. diam.; anthers yellow, 6-8 mm. long; seeds orbicular, black, punctulate, 3-34 mm. diam.—“Large pale-yellowish-green fruit ; the outside is eaten; the pulp and seeds are thrown away” (collector’s note). On rocky ground near Mt. Liebig, C.A., Aug., 1932, J. B. Cleland. Native names: “narkutja” (Aranda); “kurra” (Luritja). The type came from North Australia; the plant has not yet been found in our State. *Hyoscyamus niger, L. Common Henbane. Wolseley (1921); Murray Bridge (1927); Jamestown stockyards (1935). A poisonous plant of Europe and Western Asia, whose leaves are used in medicine. Another species, H. albus, L., has been recorded in Victoria since 1908. H. niger differs chiefly in stem- clasping leaves with sharp conspicuous lobes. Solanum eremophilum, F, v. M. Loamy flats near Rawlinson Range, W.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. Native name “kadagura”; fruit edible. New for W. Australia. Solanum lasiophyllum, Dun. Sladen Water, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. Nicotiana occidentalis, H-M Wheeler, Plant covered with short spreading gland-tipped hairs; stems erect, branching; stem-leaves oblong-lanceolate, obtuse, 2-10 cm. long, 7-25 mm. broad, clasping the stem by 2 broad rounded auricles, the lower oncs more or less fiddle-shaped, finally becoming almost glabrous, the upper ones gradually smaller on the flowering branches; flowers racemose; pedicels erect, 5-10 mm. long, mostly extra-axillary, sometimes almost leaf- opposed; calyx 10-12 mm, long, the 5 lobes very obtuse, 3 mm. long; corolla funnel-shaped, 34-4 cm. long, the tube slender, about 3 cm. long; 4 of the filaments equal, about 1 mm. long, the 5th filament 2 mm. long, affixed a little lower; capsule glabrous, as long as calyx, seeds pale, wrinkled (pl. iv, fig. 3). South Australia—Pundi (S. of Musgrave Ranges), Jan., 1934, H. H. Finlayson. Agrees with N. Gossei in the leaves stem-clasping by broad auricles and the lower ones more or less fiddle-shaped, but differs entirely in the glandular cloth- 261 ing, the shorter calyx with very obtuse lobes, the very short subequal filaments and the leafy flowering branches. The base of the specimen is missing. ‘This species grows also in Western Australia. ACANTHACEAE, Justicia procumbens, L. Sladen Water, Rawlinson Range, W.A., Feb., 1935, H. A, Finlayson, MYoporacEAE. Eremophila Gibsonu, F. v. M. Mt. Harriett (S. of Musgrave Ranges), Jan., 1934, H. H. Finlayson. A new locality. VERBENACEAE, Clerodendron ovalifolium (A. Juss.) Bakhuizen in Bull. Jard. bot. Buitenz. 3:95 (1921) —C. floribundum, R. Br. Prodr, 511 (1810); Ovieda ovalifolia, A. Juss. in Ann. Mus. Par. 7 : 76 (1806). Four miles N. of Parke’s Running Water, Finke Riv., C.A., Feb., 1934, H. H. Finlayson. “Considerable colonies of these trees further up stream.” Dicrastylis Gilesii, F. v. M. W. of James Range, C.A., Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. “Plant 60 cm. high.” Leaves lanceolate, flat, 3-8 cm. long, 1-24 cm. broad; petioles 4-8 mm. Jong; terminal conical panicle 2-9 cm. long, 2-4 cm. broad, axillary panicles shorter; the naked panicle-branches (peduncles) which support the dense head-like cymes are 3-15 mm. long. RUBIACEAE. Dentella pulvinata, Airy-Shaw in Kew Bull., 1934, p. 299. H. K. Airy-Shaw has revised the Australian specimens of Denteila, and as a result has described 4 new species, of which the above is one. It differs from the true D. repens (L.) Forst. et f. by the short erect (not spreading) hairs of the receptacle and capsule and by the dense cushion-shaped clusters of leaves and flowers along the prostrate stems, It has so far been found only in our State and in S.W. Queensland. D. repens, as now defined, occurs in the coastal regions of the Northern Territory and Queensland, in India and Malaya, and is not South Australian (pl. v, fig. 3). Plectronia linearis (E. Pritzel) n. comb. 5S. of Sladen Water, Rawlinson Range, W. Aust., Feb., 1935, H. H. Finlayson—Canthiwm lineare, E. Pritzel in Fedde Repert. 15 : 359 (1918). The type came from the Finke River, C.A., and this shrub has now been found in Western Australia, some 400 miles further west. ‘The linear leaves are 4-7 cm, long, 3-5 mm. broad, stiff, with incurved margins, the midrib prominent below, the lateral nerves concealed; the small berry-like 1-seeded drupes, about 6 mm. diam., at first dark-green, drying black, bear some resemblance to black currants, They are eaten by the kangaroos; the natives call them “illiku.” *Coprosma Bauert, Endl., instead of C. lucida, Forst., as recorded in Fi. S.A. 535. This correction is due to the success of the late Dr. R. H. Pulleine in cultivating both these New Zealand species. C. Baueri differs in the leaves drying black, the flowers clustered at the ends of very short simple (not branched) peduncles and the drupes orange-yellow, not reddish-orange. CAMPANULACEAE, Wahlenbergia Sieberi, A, DC. Waterfall Gully, July, 1934, and foothills near Adelaide, Feb., 1935, J. B. Cleland. Victoria—Sea cliffs near Port Campbell, Jan., 1935, Miss C. M. Eardley, These are more southerly stations than any previously recorded. Some of the Victorian specimens are only 7 cm. high, with slender simple stems. 262 COMPOSITAE. Pedocoma nana, Ewart et White. Koonamore, 1925, coll. Prof. T. G. B. Osborn. The most easterly station yet recorded in our State, connecting with the habitat of this plant in Western New South Wales, In the heads examined the pappus-bristles were in 1 row, and about 4 mm. long, the achenes smooth and glabrous. Calotis lattuscula, F. v. M. FE, of Gill’s Pinnacle, Schwerin Mural Crescent, W.A,, Jan., 1935, H. H. Finlayson. New for W. Australia. N. 8S. Turczaninow. Part of the multifarious work of the late Mr. J. H. Maiden was a series of “Records of Australian Botanists,” arranged chiefly according to States. These records include not only Australian botanists in the strict sense, but all botanists who have dealt with our flora. In the records for Western Australia no biographical information is given about Turczaninow, the Russian botanist who described a number of genera and species which are found throughout the southern States of Australia. Most of the following particulars have been obtained through the courtesy of Mr. V. Nikolayev, botanist of the Acclimatization Garden at Sukhum, Transcaucasia, where he has succeeded in cultivating a large number of useful Australian eucalypts and acacias, Nikolai Stepandévitch Turtchaninév (who in his Latin writings spelt his name “Turezaninow”) was born in 1796 in the village of Nikitovka, Government of Voronezh, and died in 1863 at Kharkov. He held positions in the Ministries of Justice and Finance in St. Petersburg, and in 1830 he was elected a corresponding member of the Academy of Sciences, with the title of “scientific traveller between the Altai and the Eastern Ocean.” After serving from 1837 to 1845 as President of the Governmental Board of Yeniseisk, in Siberia, he retired from public life and lived in Taganrog and Kharkov. In the forties of last century he purchased part of the great collections made by James Drummond in Western Australia, and from these and specimens otherwise obtained he described a number of new Australian species in the Bulletin of the Imperial Academy of Sciences of St. Petersburg and the Bulletin of the Imperial Society of Naturalists of Moscow. His herbarium, comprising some 52,000 specimens, was given in 1859 to the Kharkov University. His Russian botanical researches dealt chiefly with the Siberian districts beyond Lake Baikal, and his greatest work is the Flora baica- liensis dahurica. DESCRIPTION OF PLATES, Prate IV. Fig. 1. Urochloa practervisa:—A, panicle; B, part of panicle-branch; C, flowering glume. Fig. 2. Brachiaria Gilesti: D, flat face of spikelet, showing backs of first and third glumes; E, panicles; /’, second glume; G, third glume; 4, barren palea. Fig. 3—Nicotiana occidentalis:—I, inside of corolla spread open; J, lower stem-leaf; K, flowering branch. ‘ Fig. 4. Brachiaria notochthona:—L, flat face of spikelet; M, panicle; N, back of upper part of spike. Piate V. Fig. 1. Euphorbia Pinlaysonii:—A, cyme; B, seed; C, flowering involucre. Fig. 2. Halorrhagis Gosset:—D, raceme; E, fruit; F, bud; FH, part of stem and root. Fig. 3. Dentella pulvinata:-—I, stem; J, bud; K, fruit; L, seed. Fig. 4. Amphibromus recurvatus:—M, spikelet; N, back of flowering glume spread open. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS Summary 263 ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (Incorporated). FOR THE YEAR FROM NoveMBeER 1, 1934, ro Octoser 31, 1935. ORDINARY MEETING, NovEMBER 13, 1934. The President (Dr. T. D. Campbell) and 23 members present. Minutes of Annual Meeting confirmed. Nominations as FreLttows.—Martin T. Winkler, B.A., Clergyman, Con- cordia College, and 20 Austral Terrace, Unley, S.A.; Frank Trigg, Superinten- dent, Government Printing Office, Adelaide. Parers.—‘Petrographic Notes on Intrusions of the Houghton Magma in the Mount Lofty Ranges,” by H. N. England, B.Sc., read by Sir Douglas Mawson, D.Sc., FLR.S. Exuisit.—Mr. E. H. Ising exhibited nine eggs, laid on November 3, of the mountain devil (Moloch horridus), from 947 miles post, E.-W. Railway. Dr. Chas. Fenner announced the need for curtailments of papers owing to the financial position of the Society. Orpinary MEETING, Aprit 11, 1935, The President (Dr. T. D. Campbell) and 33 members present. Minutes confirmed. ‘The President extended a welcome to Professor J. A. Prescott on his return from abroad, and to Messrs. W. W. Goodhart and F. Trigg as new Fellows. Nomrnation as Associate—Frank John Fenner, Medical Student, 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park. ELECTION oF FELLOws.—Rev. M. T. Winkler, B.A., 20 Austral Terrace, Malvern; Frank ‘Trigg, Esq., Superintendent, Government Printing Office, Adelaide. Pavers.—‘Notes on the Geological Sections obtained by several Borings situated on the Plain between Adelaide and Gulf St. Vincent, Part I,” by Professor Walter Howchin, F.G.S. “Mammal Bone Beds of Probable Pleistocene Age, Rocky River, K.I.,” by N. B. Tindale, B.Sc., F. J. Fenner, and F. J. Hall. “Climate in Relation to Insect Ecology in Australia,” by James Davidson, D.Sc., read by Mr. D. C, Swan. Exuipits—lDr, Chas. Fenner exhibited (a) a cylindrico-cornute stone, broken, from Mootwingee, N.S.W. (8) Incrustation of 4 cm. of lime carbonate (? aragonite) deposited from warm bore water in the decp artesian area at Eromanga, Queensland. It was considered to have been deposited within two years. (c) Supposed limonite concretion of peculiar type found in the district beyond Kalgoorlie, W.A. Mr. W. H. Selway exhibited a specimen of volcanic scoria, 264 Orpinary MEETING, May 9, 1935. The President (Dr. T. D. Campbell) and 25 members present. Minutes confirmed. Erection or Associate.— Frank John Fenner, Medical Student, 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park. Papers.—‘Australites, Part II, Numbers, Forms, Distribution, and Origin,” by Chas. Fenner, D.Sc., illustrated by slides. “The Pertatataka Series in Central Australia, with Notes on the Amadeus Sunkland,” by Chas. Chewings, Ph.D., F.G.S. Orpinary MEETING, JuNE 13, 1935. Held in the Physics Lecture Theatre, University of Adelaide. The President (Dr. T. D. Campbell) and 97 members and visitors present. Minutes confirmed. The President referred to the sudden death of Dr. Robert H. Pulleine, and gave a bricf resumé of his activities and services to the Society. The President expressed the pleasure of the Society at the presence of the Vice-Chancellor (Professor Sir Wm. Mitchell) and the large attendance of members and visitors. — Nominations As Fetrows. — Arthur Geoffrey Strickland, M.Ag.Sc. (Melb.), Chicf Horticultural Instructor, Department of Agriculture, Adelaide; David Bonar Adam, B.Ag.Sc. (Melb.), Plant Pathologist, Waite Agricultural Research Institute. Lecture demonstrations were given by Professor Kerr Grant, assisted by Mr. W. Iliffe, on “Photo-Electricity,” and Mr. R. 5S. Burdon, M.Sc., assisted by Mr. Lillywhite, on “Surface Tension Phenomena.” Other demonstrations were given in the adjoining laboratories of Cathode Ray Oscillograph, Electrocardio- graph, Geiger-Muller Electron Tube Counter, Liquid Air, High Vacuum Pumps, Stroboscope, Large Electro-magnet and Measurements of Time of Reaction. Orpinary MEETING, Juty 11, 1935. The President (Dr. T. D. Campbell) and 36 members present. Minutes confirmed, The President referred to the death of two Fellows, Dr. A. A. Lendon, who was elected a Fellow in 1884, and Mr. Harold Pank, elected a Fellow in 1929. . Ex.ections As Fettows.—Arthur Geoffrey Strickland, M.Ag.Sc., Chief Horticultural Instructor, Department of Agriculture, Adelaide; David Bonar Adam, B.Ag.Sc., Plant Pathologist, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. Paper.—‘Remarks on the Cestode Genus Porotaenia,’ by Professor T. Harvey Johnston, M.A., D.Sc. An illustrated lecture, entitled “Congenital Colour Blindness,” by Wm. Christie, M.B., B.S. Exuipirs.—Mr. E. H. Ising exhibited (a) the pale-coloured flowering branches of Ploughshare Wattle (Acacia vomeriformis). The short, coriaceous, pungent phyllodes, and the diffuse habit are characters of arid plants, although it grows in the wettest part of the State with an average annual rainfall of 44 inches. Its habitat is on high parts of the sandstone (freestone) formation at Mount Lofty, where the rock is porous. This must create dry conditions for the plant in summer, hence the adaptations to meet them (b) A Eucalyptus sp. from Binnum with variegated foliage. (c) An example of Hybanthus floribundus (Family Violaceae) from Binnum, South-Kast. (d) Rinorea australasica (Family Violaceae) from Daintree River, North Queensland, 265 Dr. Chas. Fenner exhibited a cast of an australite, prepared by Dr. L. J. Spencer, Keeper of Minerals, British Museum. The original was found near Lake Grace, Western Australia, and was reported to have been seen to fall in 1934. Prof. J. A. Prescott was elected to fill the casual vacancy on the Council created by the death of Dr. R. H. Pulleine. Orpinary MEeErinc, Aucusr 8, 1935, The President (Dr. T. D. Campbell) and 27 members and visitors present. Minutes confirmed. NoMINATION as FELLOw.—James Oliver Garnet Glastonbury, B.A., B.Sc., Dip.Ed., S.A. Education Department, and 4 Mornington Road, Unley. Papers.—‘A Comparative Study of the Black Earths of Australia and the Regur of India,” by J. S. Hosking, B.Sc. “An Examination of the Brown Coal of Noarlunga, Part II,” by W. Ternent Cooke, D.Sc, A.A.C.I. “A New Bulbophyllum from North Queensland,” by R. S. Rogers, M.A., M.D., F.L.S., and W. H. Nicholls. Mr. H. M. Hale delivered an illustrated lecturette on “Fish and Fishing.” Orpinary MEETING, SepTEmMuER 12, 1935. The President (Dr. T, D. Campbell) and 31 members and visitors present. Minutes confirmed. NomMINnaTION as FEeLLow.—Harold Goldsack, Horticulturist, Coromandel Valley. ELecTIon as FELLow.—James Oliver Garnet Glastonbury, B.A.. B.Sc., Dip.Ed., Education Department, S.A., 4 Mornington Road, Unley. PaPeR.—“On Some New Species and Records of Australian and New Zealand Collembola,” by H. Womersley, F.R.E.S., A.L.S. Exuizits.—Mr. E. H. Ising exhibited letters received from Baron Ferd, von Mucller by J. G. O. Tepper. Mueller was born in 1825, and died October 10, 1896. Also a copy of an Adelaide German paper, “Australische Zeitung,” dated October 14, 1896, with an article on Baron Ferd. yon Mueller. Dr. Chas, Fenner exhibited portion of a slab of Pre-Cambrian quartzite with so-called fucoid markings, from the Back Creek Gorge near Port Germein. Samples of pseudo-australites (button, annular, and dumbbell shapes) from Central Australia; specimens are hard limonite concretions, often wind-abraded. Also a dummy mourning cap found buried in an aboriginal grave at Ketchowla Station, 30 miles east of Terowie, in sandhill country. This locality is near the western boundary of distribution of the mourning cap custom. It is made of iron-stained gypseous clay. The specimen was about 2 feet deep in friable soil, Lecture.—Mr. lL. G. Morris, on “The Human Eye, and How We Sce.” ANNUAL MEETING, Ocrozer 10, 1935. The President (Dr. T. D. Campbell) and 38 members present. Minutes confirmed. ANNUAL Report.—The report was read and adopted. FINANCIAL Report.—Received and adopted. Thanks were expressed to the Treasurer (Dr. W. Christic) and the Hon. Auditors for services rendered, ELECTION OF OrFicEers.-—Dr. C. T, Madigan, President: Mr. H. M. Hale, Dr. J. Davidson, Vice-Presidents; Mr. N. B. Tindale, Secretary; Dr. Wm. Christie, Treasurer; Dr, Charles Fenner, Editor: Professor J. G. Wood, Dr. 266 T. D. Campbell, Members of Council; Messrs. O. Glastonbury and W. Champion Hackett, Auditors. Dr. Chas, Fenner explained the reasons for nominating the retiring Presi- dent back on to the Council. Councit.—The resignation of Dr. L, Keith Ward was received with regret, and Prof. J. A. Prescott was elected to fill the vacancy. Nominations as Frertows——Herbert George Andrewartha, M.Ag.Sc., , Research Worker, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond; (Mrs.) Hattie Vevers Andrewartha, B.Ag.Sc., M.Se., Research Worker, 28 Eynesbury Avenue, Mitcham. ELection or FeLLow.—Harold Goldsack, Horticulturist, Coromandel Valley. Prof. T. Harvey Johnston moved that a vote of thanks be recorded in the minutes to mark the services rendered by Mr. Ralph W. Segnit as Secretary. Professor J. A. Prescott expressed appreciation of Fellows to Dr. T. D. Campbell for the progress which has marked his year of service as President. Vexrco MEDAL Sus-Commitrer.—The President announced that the Council had received a recommendation that an award be made to Professor T. Harvey Johnston. Adopted. Parers.—“Australian Fungi, Notes and Descriptions, No. 11,” by Professor J. Burton Cleland, M.D. “Notes on Some Victorian Mammals,” by H. H. Fin- layson.” “Mammals from the Lake Eyre Basin, Part I,” by H. H. Finlayson. “Plant Remains of Lower Oligocene Age, from Blanche Point, Aldinga, S.A.,” by Frederick Chapman, A.L.S.; read by Sir Douglas Mawson. “The Occurrence of a Lower Miocene Formation on Bougainville Island,” by Sir Douglas Mawson and Frederick Chapman, A.L.S.; read by Sir Douglas Mawson. Dr. Fenner said that in Baker’s Gully fossil casts of the leaves of Magnolia and other plant remains are found. “Notes on the Flora of South Australia, No. 4,” by E. H. Ising. “Some Aquatic Hemiptera from Western Australia,” by H. M. Hale. “Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 33,” by J. M. Black, A.L.S. Oruer BustNgess.— Mr. W. H. Selway referred to the trees in the National Park which are being felled because of attack by mistletoe. Prof. J. B. Cleland said that it was necessary to do this to protect neighbouring trees. Moved by Mr. W. H. Selway: “That the incoming President be asked to bring Lo the notice of the proper authorities the need for the preservation of the flora.” Adopted. Dr. C. T. Madigan said that he had met Jimmy Andrews, a member of the Giles Expeditions, 1872-4; he collected plants for Baron von Mneller. ANNUAL REPORT. PRESENTED AT THE ANNUAL MEETING on OcToper 10, 1935. The average attendance of Fellows at the meetings held during the year has been 39. Dr. L. Keith Ward and Dr. Chas. Fenner were elected as the delegates of this Society to the Meeting of Representatives of the Royal Societies in Australia, held in Melbourne during the meeting of the A.N.Z.A.A.5, Dr. C. E. Tilley, of Cambridge University, a former Fellow ol this Society, was elected as the Representative Delegate of the Society to the Centenary Celebrations of 267 the Geological Survey of Great Britain. Miss E. Fisher, of the Department of Botany, University of Melbourne, was elected as the Representative Delegate of this Society to the International Botanical Congress, held in Amsterdam. Mr. Frank Trigg received the congratulations of the Society on having been appointed Government Printer. Mr. J. M. Black, as Past President of the Society, received the thanks of the Society for donating £20 to the Endowment Fund. The June Ordinary Meeting was held in the Physics Lecture Theatre, Uni- versity of Adelaide, and took the form of a Conversazione. Lecture Demonstra- tions were given by Professor Kerr Grant, assisted by Mr. W. Iliffe, and Mr. Roy S. Burdon. During the year three special illustrated lecturettes were delivered, At the July Meeting, Dr. Wm. Christie gave a lecture on Congenital Colour Blindness”; at the August meeting Mr. H, M. Hale lectured on “Fish and Fishing” ; and at the September meeting Mr. L. G. Morris delivered a lecture on “The Human Eye, and How We See.” PaPers.—Geological papers were read by Professor Walter Howchin, Dr. Chas. Fenner, Dr. Chas. Chewings, Sir Douglas Mawson, Dr. W. Ternent Cooke, Mr, Frederick Chapman, a joint paper by Sir Douglas Mawson and Mr. Frederick Chapman, and a joint paper by Messrs. N. B. Tindale, F. J. Fenner, and F. J. Hall. Papers by Mr. P. S. Hossfeld and Mr. A. N. England were presented by Sir Douglas Mawson. A paper on Climatology by Dr. James Davidson was presented by Mr. D. C. Swan. Zoological papers were read by Prof. T. Harvey Johnston, two by Mr. H. II. Finlayson, and Mr. H. M. Hale. A Soil Survey paper was read by Mr. J. S. Hosking. Botanical papers were read by Dr. R. S. Rogers and Mr. W. H. Nicholls, Prof. J. Burton Cleland, and Mr. E. H, Ising. An Entomological paper was read by Mr. H. Womersley. During the year the Society suffered loss by death of four Fellows. Dr. A. A. Lendon, who was elected as a Fellow in 1884; Mr. Harold Pank, who was elected in 1929; Mr. H. Lipson Hancock, A.M.I.C.E., M.I.M.M., elected 1916, and Dr. Robt. H., Pulleine, of whom an Obituary Notice will be found elsewhere in this volume. The Membership of the Society shows a decrease. The number of Fellows elected during the year being 5; 11 Fellows resigned, and 4 died. The Membership Roll at the close of the financial year is: Honorary Fellows, 4; Fellows, 160; Associates, 1. Total, 165. SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL Summary 268 THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL. The Council, on August 23, 1928, having resolved to recommend to the Fellows of the Society that a medal should be founded to give honorary distinction for scientific research, and that it should be designated the Sir Joseph Verco Medal, a motion was submitted to the Society at the evening meeting of October 11, 1928, and a later meeting, held on November 8, 1928, the recommendation of the Council was confirmed on the following terms :— REGULATIONS. XI—“The medal shall be of bronze, and shall be known as the Sir Joseph Verco Medal, in recognition of the important service that gentleman has rendered to the Royal Society of South Australia. On the obverse side of the medal shall be these words: ‘The Sir Joseph Verco Medal of the Royal Society of South Australia,’ surrounding the modclled portrait of Sir Joseph Verco, while on the reverse side of the medal there shall be a surrounding wreath of eucalypt, with the words: ‘Awarded Bs crate Cveane cise breddepred ial aphlea dh ooh gi dedapra st heeesgersy for Research in Science,’ the name of the recipient, and the year of the award. The Council shall select the person to whom it is suggested that the medal shall be awarded, and that name shall be submitted to the Fellows at an Ordinary Meeting to confirm, or otherwise, the selection of the Council, by ballot or show of hands. The medal shall be awarded for distinguished scientific work published by a Member of the Royal Society of South Australia.” AWARDS. 1929. Pror. Wauter Howcritn, F.G.5. 1930 Jouw McC. Bracg, A.L.S. 1931 Pror. Str Dovcras Mawson, B.E., D.Sc., FR. 1933. Pror, J. Burton Creranp, M.D. 1935 Pror. T. Harvey Jounston, M.A., D.Sc. BALANCE SHEETS Summary "Seer ‘Z FOqOINE ‘epIepepy ‘ssoyipny § ILAAOVH NOIGWVHOD “M “uOTT Lowrav “STWv ‘AUNGNOLSVI9 ‘Oo ‘waINSeIIT, “UOT ‘ALLSINHD M *yoa1103 punoj pue peipny 1 € 6b0'IF T €& 6P0‘TF OT 63 62 yp 8 TOr ols “ anbays) ‘Surpuejsing ssa7 QI poly ~ .Biseyeyjsny jo yueg 9 It 82¢ - “W'S Jo Yue sBurres —seé6l ‘Of Jaquiajdag ‘aaurjeg “ 0 S$ Pre 0 OT 802 puny yerousd 0 st se eljuoy sad sy ——pun.y JusuMopuy ss 00 tf puny yoivasey “ ¢ 6 8ST ¢ +l tr 9 OT ZPI Pune Mewmopuy Wo1y patiojsuesy, 0 O10 3 yur 6 ZISI yunosdy yueg sures 0 Sst 9 aoUeINsUy —jysara}Uy ct @ £19 $9119 g 0 ST Se 9 Of 02 £s2009835 pue saseidod ‘Bulut 0 SI ct “g ps uoTseduoy JeqUIsPL e}'T 8S OL Sunysry pue surueayy 60002 uonenog ‘peg ‘Wf AW —selipuns “ —(edju0y) puny JuoUMOpUy ee 0 O1 6£ uerresqry “ I @t ST IT £1 682 Zz 6 0 jay oi ie ‘aya ‘adueyoxy “ I ZI Ot Surysyqnd 10 207 7 suoeargng Jo aes * 0 SI IF surjesjsnyy 028 a : 8a}}8190$ aye Aq wooy yo asg “ O11 ££@ Bunun 9 9 Z£SI a suondisosqns “ —suorjoesuesy Ag ¢ 0 zg9 4 : S61 ‘T 19q0}IQ ‘aouRTeEg OL Pos F P'S F ps ¢ PS F ‘SLNAWAVd ‘SLdI aOR SE6L ‘OE Joquieidag papus eax 94} JoF sjusmiAeg pue sjdiscsy (GALVYOdUOIN]) VITVULSNVY HINOS AO ALAIDOS TVAO’ 270 ‘emseaiL ‘UOH “AILSIMHD “M ‘OPIE[BPY “YOOIS Pequiosuy jo sarnysBayY oy} 7 syIo}S juauuaaoy ayy poylaaa sary 3AA ‘sioupny { “UOFT q _ LLAMOVH VIAV “ST VV ‘AYNANOLSY1ID ‘O “CLOT ‘Z 2890390 ‘apreppy NOI NVHO “MM ‘yoalIod punoy pue paypny 0 0 9F 0 0 OF 0 0 9 A 0otT "W'S jo yueg ssuLAeG—ooureg 009 00S ato 7 uosceluly ‘HCH 0 OT oy oe puny Jeroueg * —YIOAA YIsvosay Jo pry ul JuRiy Ag 0 os “weg Jo yueg sSuraes—oourjeg oy Piro Pe Sa oF “GL6T pS F¥ ‘P'S F ‘OE Jaquiaydes—peg] “SE6I ‘OE Jaquiaidas ye se QNNOA HOUVASHA (4) p OT £50'SF by OT £80‘SF € 6 8ST Pedraaay ysarojuy “ 9 2 L9¢ : 0 OT 802 puny [eisuary “ 9 LI Zz Oo13 A arop US ayey ajeysq “ 0 SI ST uortjdiiasqns sJaquray ary “ 0 0 02 “STV oper “Woof NW “ £ 8t Teer T 1 668‘r os ¢ RisEelsny jo yueg I IT 02 ‘W'S 10 yuRg ssuraes £ Sl or “W'S JO yUeg sBuraes 0 OL 828'P APIS payeplosu0’) ueyersny “ 0 0 O8z‘r 4203S pajyepyosuoy uvyesisny € 6 8ST “" Junossy anuaaay Ag —aourleg oy, ‘Og tequiaidag—¢re] ‘T QOD O—FL6T ps F pS F PS F “P'S F : “CPL ST 668'bF eade) . ~ “SE6I ‘OE Toquinidas ye se CNOA LNAWMOACNG (®) (GALVAOdYOOND VITVULSAV HINOS AO ALAINDOS IVAOU ENDOWMENT FUND Summary 271 THE ENDOWMENT FUND. 1902.—On the motion of the late Samuel Dixon it was resolved that steps be taken for the incorporation of the Society and the establishment of an Endowment and Scientific Research Fund. Vol. xxvi., pp. 327-8. 1903.—The incorporation of the Society was duly effected and announced. Vol. xxvii., pp. 314-5. 1905.—The President (Dr. J. C. Verco) offered to give £1,000 to the Fund on certain conditions. Vol. xxix., p. 339. 1935.—The following are particulars of the contributions received and other sources of revenue in support of the Fund up to date :— SUMMARY OF THE ENDOWMENT FUND (30/8/35). (Capital... ... £4,900 lls. Id.) Donations— £ s. d £ s. d. £ s. d 1908, Dr. J. C. Verco Acts 1,000 0 0 1908, Thomas Scarfe tes 1,000 0 0 1911, Dr. Verco _ 2s, 150 0 0 1913, Dr. Verco vise aaa 120 0 0 Mrs. Ellen Peterswald A 100 0 0 1934, Prof. Walter Howchin, F.G.S. sal Ae 40 0 0 “Anonymous” .... seh if. 5 5 0 Small Sums __.... Bees Dy. 6 0 0 1934, J. M. Black, A.L.S. mn 20 0 0 2,441 5 0 Bequests— 1917, R. Barr Smith bits 1,005 16 8 1920, Sir Edwin Smith oa 200 0 0 1935, Sir J. C. Verco rag 322 17 6 ——1,528 14 2 Life Members’ Subscriptions .... =e .. 24015 0 4,210 14 2 Total Subscribed Capital ie £4,210 14 2 Additions from the Current Account have been made at various dates. These have enabled the Society to purchase Government Stocks amounting to (face value) £4,880. Cash in Savings Bank on account of the Endowment Fund amounts to £20 lls. ld. The total capital of this Fund is, therefore, £4,900 11s. 1d. GRANTS MADE IN AID OF SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH, £ os. d. 1916, G. H. Hardy, “Investigations into the Flight of Birds” = _ 15 0 0 1916, Miss H. A. Rennie, “Biology of Lobelia gibbosa” fuss au ay 22 0 1921. H. R. Marston, “Possibility of obtaining from Azine precipitate samples of pure Proteolytic Enzymes” Jt .e ae 30 0 0 1921, Prof. Wood Jones, “Investigations of the Fauna and Flora of Nuyts Archipelago”... ns on i &: si sh ox Fits 4416 7 1934. H. H. Finlayson, “Mammals of Central Australia” oo fi 3 10 0 90 1934. T. T. Colquhoun, M.Sc., “Regeneration of Vegetation after Bush-fires” 5 0 0 1935. H. H. Finlayson, “Mammals of Central Australia” W. CHRISTIE, Hon. Treasurer. 272 ROYAL SOCIETY LIBRARY. List of Governments, Societies and Editors with whom Exchanges of Publications are made. AUSTRALIA. Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, Melbourne. Bureau of Census and Statistics, Canberra. Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Melbourne. Library of Commonwealth Parliament. SOUTH AUSTRALIA. Botanic Garden, Adelaide. Mines Department, Adelaide. Public Library, Museum, and Art Gallery of South Australia. Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (S.A. Branch). South Australian Institutes Association, Adelaide. South Australian Museum, Adelaide. South Australian Naturalist, Adelaide. South Australian Ornithologist, Adelaide. South Australian Parliamentary Library. University of Adelaide. Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. NEW SOUTH WALES. Australian Museum, Sydney. Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Department of Agriculture, Sydney. Geographical Society of New South Wales, Sydney. Linnean Society of New South Wales. Mines Department, Sydney. Public Library of New South Wales. Royal Society of New South Wales. Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales. School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney. Technological Museum, Sydney. University of Sydney. QUEENSLAND. Department of Agriculture, Brisbane. Geological Survey, Brisbane. Queensland Museum, Brisbane. Public Library of Queensland, Brisbane. Royal Society of Queensland, Brisbane. University of Queensland, Brisbane. TASMANIA. Government Geologist, Mines Department, Hobart. Public Library of Tasmania, Hobart. Royal Society of Tasmania, Hobart. University of Tasmania, Hobart. 273 VICTORIA. Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria, Melbourne. Government Botanist, National Herbarium, Melbourne. Mines Department, Melbourne. National Museum, Melbourne. Public Library of Victoria, Melbourne. Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne. University of Melbourne. WESTERN AUSTRALIA, Geological Survey Department, Perth. Public Library of Western Australia, Perth. Royal Society of Western Australia, Perth. University of Western Australia, Perth. ENGLAND, British Museum Library, London. British Museum (Natural History), South Kensington. Cambridge Philosophical Society. Cambridge University Library. Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Geological Society of London. Geologists’ Association, London. Imperial Institute, South Kensington. Imperial Institute of Entomology, London. Linnean Society of London. Liverpool Biological Society. Manchester Literary and Philosophical Soctety. National Physical Laboratory, Teddington. Rhodes House Library, Oxford. Rothamsted Experimental Station, Harpenden. Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew. Royal Empire Society, London. Royal Entomological Society of London. Royal Geographical Society, London. Royal Microscopical Society, London. Royal Society, London. Science Museum, South Kensington. Zoological Museum, Tring, Herts. - Zoological Society of London. SCOTLAND. Edinburgh Geological Society. Geological Society of Glasgow. Royal Society of Edinburgh. IRELAND. Royal Dublin Society, Royal Irish Academy, Dublin. ARGENTINE REPUBLIC. Academia Nacional de Ciencias, Cordoba. Universidad de Buenos Aires. 274 AUSTRIA. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Vienna. Geologische Bundesanstalt, Vienna, Naturhistorisches Museum, Vienna. Zoologisch-Botanische Gesellschaft, Vienna. BELGIUM. Académie Royale de Belgique, Brussels. Institut Solvay, Brussels. Musée Royale d’Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Brussels. Société Entomologique de Belgique, Ghent, Société Royale de Botanique de Belgique, Brussels. Société Royale des Sciences de Liége. Société Royale Zoologique de Belgique, Brussels. BRAZIL. Instituto Oswaldo Cruz, Rio de Janeiro. Museu Paulista, Sao Paulo. CANADA. Canadian Geological Survey, Ottawa. Department of Agriculture, Ottawa. National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa. Nova Scotian Institute of Science, Halifax. Royal Canadian Institute, Toronto. Royal Society of Canada, Ottawa. University of British Columbia, Vancouver, CEYLON. Colombo Museum, Colombo. CHINA. Geological Survey of China, Peiping. Institute of Biology, National Jibrary of Peiping. Metropolitan Museum of Natural History, Nanking. Science Society of China, Nanking. Shanghai Science Institute, Shanghai, Sun Yatsen University, Canton. CZECHO-SLOVAKIA. Ceskoslovenska Botanicka Spolecnost, Prague. DENMARK. Conseil Permanent International pour l’Exploration de la Mer. Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening. Copenhagen. Kobenhavyn Universitets Zoologiske Museum. K. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, Copenhagen, ESTHONIA. Universitas Tartuensis, Tartu (Dorpat). FEDERATED MALAY STATES. Royal Asiatic Society, Malayan Branch, Singapore. FINLAND. Academia Scientiarum Fennica, Helsinki. Societas Entomologica Helsingforsiensis. Societas Scientiarum Fennica, Helsingfors. 275 FRANCE. Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris. Société Bourguignonne d’Histoire Naturelle et de Préhistoire, Toulouse. Société des Sciences Naturelles de ’OQuest de la France, Nantes. Société Entomologique de France, Paris, Société Géologique de France, Paris. Société Linnéenne de Bordeaux. Societe Linnéenne de Normandie, Caen. GERMANY. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Miinchen. Berliner Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie, und Urgeschichte. Botanischer Garten und Botanisches Museum, Berlin. Deutsches Entomologisches Institut, Berlin. Fedde, F.: Repertorium specierum novarum regni vegetabilis, Berlin. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Géttingen. Gesellschaft fiir Erdkunde zu Berlin. K. Leopoldinische Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher, Halle. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Freiburg. Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin, Senckenbergische Bibliothek, Frankfiirt a. M. Zoologisches Museum, Berlin. Zoologisches Staatsinstitut und Zoologisches Museum, Hamburg. HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu. Hawaiian Entomological Society, Honolulu. HOLLAND, Musée Teyler, Haarlem. Rijks Herbarium, Leiden. HUNGARY. Hydrological Dept., Hungarian Geological Soc., Budapest. Musée National Hongrois, Budapest. INDIA. Government Museum, Madras. Geological Survey of India, Calcutta. Royal Asiatic Society, Bombay Branch, Bombay. Zoological Survey of India, Calcutta, ITALY, Laboratorio di Entomologia, Bologna. Laboratorio di Zoologia Agraria, Milan. Laboratorio di Zoologia Generale e Agraria, Portici. Societa di Scienze Naturali ed Economiche, Palermo. Societa Entomologica Italiana, Genova. Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali, Milan. Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali, Pisa. JAPAN. Hiroshima University. Kyéto Imperial University. . Ohara Institute for Agricultural Research, Kurashiki. Osaka Imperial University, Osaka. Tathoku Imperial University. Tokyo Imperial University. 276 MEXICO. Instituto de Biologia, Chapultepec. Instituto Geoldgico de Mexico. Sociedad Cientifica “Antonio Alzate,” Mexico. NEW ZEALAND, Auckland Institute and Museum. Dominion Museum, Wellington. Royal Society of New Zealand, Wellington. Otago University Museum, Dunedin. Philosophical Institute of Canterbury, Christchurch. NORWAY. Bergen Museum, Bergen. Botanisk Museum, Oslo. Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs, Trondheim: Tromso Museum, Tromso. PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. Philippine Journal of Science, Manila. POLAND. Société Botanique de Pologne, Warsaw. Société Polonaise des Naturalistes “Kopernik,” Lwow. RUSSIA. Académie des Sciences, Leningrad. Comité Géologique de Russie, Leningrad. Institut des Recherches. Biologiques de Perm. Institute of Plant Industry, Leningrad. Leningrad University. Université de L’Asie Centrale, Tachkent. SPAIN. Academia de Ciencias y Artes, Barcelona. Instituto Nacional de Segunda Ensenanza de Valencia. SWEDEN. Entomologiska Féreningen i Stockholm. Geologiska Foreningen, Stockholm. Stockholm’s Hégskolas Bibliotek, Stockholm. Regia Societas Scientiarum Upsaliensis, Upsala. SWITZERLAND. Institut National Genevois, Geneva. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Basel. Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de Geneve. Société Neuchateloise des Sciences Naturelles, Neuchatel. Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles, Lausanne. Zentralbibliothek, Zurich. UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA. Albany Museum, Grahamstown. Geological Society of South Africa, Johannesburg. Royal Society of South Africa, Cape Town. South African Museum, Cape Town. South African Association for the Advancement of Science, Johannesburg. 277 UNITED STATES. Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Academy of Science of St. Louis. American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Boston. American Chemical Society, Columbus, O. American Geographical Society, New York, American Microscopical Society, Manhattan, Kans. American Midland Naturalist, Notre Dame University, Ind. American Museum of Natural History, New York. American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. Arnold Arboretum, Jamaica Plain, Mass. Biological Survey of the Mount Desert Region, Bar Harbour, Me. Boston Society of Natural History, Boston, Mass. Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco. Californian State Mining Bureau, San Francisco. California, University of, Berkeley, Cal. Chicago Academy of Sciences. . Citrus Experiment Station, Riverside, Cal, Connecticut State Library, Hartford, Conn. Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y. Denison Scientific Association, Granville, O. Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago, Ill. Franklin Institute of the State of Pennsylvania, Philad. Harvard Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass. Illinois State Natural History Survey, Urbana, Ill. Illinois University Library, Urbana, Ill. Indiana Academy of Science, Indianapolis. Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md. Kansas University, Lawrence, Kans. Marine Biological Laboratory, Wood’s Hole, Mass. Maryland Geological Survey, Baltimore. Md. Michigan University, Chicago. Missouri Botanical Garden Library, St. Louis, Mo. Missouri, University of, Columbia. National Academy of Science, Washington, D.C. National Geographic Society, Washington, D.C. New York Academy of Sciences, New York. New York Public Library. New York State Library, Albany, N.Y. Ohio State University Library, Columbus, O. Princeton University, Princeton, N,J. San Diego Society of Natural History, San Diego, Cal. Smithsonian Institution and Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, United States Department of Agriculture, Washington, D.C. United States Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. United States National Museum, Washington, D.C. Wagner Free Institute of Science, Philadelphia, Pa. Washington University, St. Louis, Mo. West Virginia University, Morgantown, W. Va. Yale University Library, New [aven, Conn. URUGUAY. Museo de Historia Natural, Montevideo. LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC. Summary 278 LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC. AS EXISTING ON NOVEMBER 30, 1935. Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's Transactions. Those marked with a dagger (7) are Life Members. Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary. Note.—The publications of the Society will not be sent to those whose subscriptions are in arrear. Pete ot Honorary FELLows. 1910. *Bracc, Sir W. H, O.M., K.B.E., M.A. D.C.L., LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., Director of the Royal Institution, Albemarle Street, London (Fellow 1886). 1926. *Cuarman, F., A.L.S., National Museum. Melbourne. (898. *Meryricx, E. T., B.A. F.R.S., F.Z.S., Thoruhanger, Marlborough, Wilts, England. 1894. *Witson, J. T., M.D. ChM., F.R.S., Professor of Anatomy, Cambridge University, England. FELLowSs. 1926. ApeLt, L. M., Chapman Camp, British Columbia. 1935. Apam, Davin Bonar, B.Ag.Se. (Melb.), Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. 1925. Aprey, W. J. C.M.G.. 32 High Street, Burnside, 5.A. 1927. *Anperman, A. R., M.Sc., F.G.S., West Terrace, Kensington Gardens, S.A. 1931. Anorew, Rev. J. R., Methodist Mission, Salamo, via Samarai, Papua. 1935. ANDREWARTHA, Herpert Grorcr, M.Ag.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Instiitute, Glen Osmond. 1935. AnnrewartHa Mrs. [artre Vevers, B.Ag.Sc., M.Sc., 28 Eynesbury Avenue, Mitcham. 1929, Awncet, Frank M., 34 Fullarton Rd., Parkside. 1895. }*Asupy, Enowin, F.L.S., M.B.O.U,, Blackwood, S.A—Council, 1900-19; Vice- 1902. 1933. 1926. 1932. 1928. 1928. 1931. 1930. 1934. 1907. 1924. 1923, 1921. 1922. 1907. 1931. 1929. 1930. 1895. 1929, 1930. 1907. 1929. 1924. 1929. 1928. 1927. 1930. President, 1919-21. *Baxer, W. H., Ningana Avenue, King’s Park, S.A. *Barnes, T. A. B.Sc, 13 Leah Street, Forestville. Becx, B. B., 127 Fullarton Road, Myrtle Bank, S.A. Becc, P. R., D.D.Sc., L.D.S., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide. Best, R. J., M.Sc. A.A.C.L, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. *Best, Mrs. E. W., M.Sc., Claremont, Glen Osmond. Brrcu, H, Mcl., M.R.C.S., M.R.C.P., D.P.M., Mental Hospital, Parkside. Birks, W. R,, B.Sc., 7 Kensington Road, Kensington. Brack, E. C., M.B., B.S., Magill Road, Tranmere. *Biack, J. M., A.L.S., 82 Brougham Place, North Adelaide—Sir Joseph Verco Medal, 1930; Council, 1927-1931; President, 1933-34; Vice-President, 1931-33. Browne, J. W., B.Ch., 169 North Terrace, Adelaide. Burvon, Roy S.. B.Sc., University of Adelaide. Burton, R. J.. Ward Street, Kalgoorlie, W.A. *CampBELL, T. D., D.D.Sc., Dental Dept., Adelaide Hospital, Frome Road, Adelaide— Rep.-Governor, 1932-33; Council, 1928-32, 1935: Vice-President, 1932-34; Presi- dent, 1934-35, *Cuarman, R. W., C.M.G., M.A, B.CE., F.R.A.S., Professor of Engineering and Mechanics, University, Adelaide—Council, 1914-22. *Curwines, CHas., Ph.D., F.G.S., “Alverstroke,” Claremont Road, Glen Osmond, Currstiz, W., M.B., B.S., Education Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide— Treasurer, 1933-. Crarke, G. H., B.Sc., Agricultural College, Roseworthy. *CLELAND, Joun B., M.D., Professor of Pathology, University, Adelaide—Sir Joseph Verco Medal, 1933; Council, 1921-26, 1932-; President, 1927-28; Vice-President, 1926-27. Ciutanp, W. Paton, M.B., B.S., Dashwood Road, Beaumont. *CotguHoun, T. T., M.Sc. University, Adelaide. *Cooxr, W. T., D.Sc. A.A.C.I., Lecturer, University of Adelaide. *Cotton, Bernarp C., S.A. Museum, Adelaide. per Crespicny, C. T. G, D.S.O., M.D, F.R.C.P., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide. Davinson, James, D.Sc. Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond—- Council, 1932-35; Vice-President, 1935-. Daviss, J. G., B.Se., Ph. D., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. *Davres, Prof. E. Haron, Mus.Doc., The University, Adelaide. Dix, E. V., Glynde Road, Firle. 279 Date of Election. 1915. 1932. 1921, 1931. 1933, 1902. 1918. 1925. 1917, 1927. 1929, 1929. 1931. 1923. 1932. 1935. 1919, 1923, 1927. 1935. 1934. 1925. 1880. 1910. 1933, 1933, 1933. 1904, 1934. 1916. 1927. 1922, 1930. 1922, 1924. 1927, 1933. 1930. 1924. 1883. 1928. 1928. 1918. 1918 1910. 1934. 1921. 1929, 1920. 1918, 1933, 1915. 1930. 1922. *Dopp, Avan P., Prickly Pear Laboratory, Sherwood, Brisbane. Duwnstong, H. E., M.B., B.S, J.P., 124 Payneham Road, St. Peters. Dutton, G. H., B.Se., 18 Austral Terrace, Malvern. Dwyer, J. M., M.B., B.S., 25 Port Road, Bowden. Earoiey, Miss C. M., B.Sc., 68 Wattle Street, Fullarton Estate. *Evguist, A. G., 19 Farrell Street, Glenelg, *Etston, A. H., F.E.S.. “Llandyssil,” Aldgate. *EncLAND, H. N., B.Sc, Commonwealth Research Station, Griffith, N.S.W. *Fennwer, Cuas. A. E.. D.Se., 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park—Rep.-Governor, 1929-31 ; Council, 1925-28; President, 1930-31; Vice-President, 1928-30; Secretary, 1924-25; Treasurer, 1932-33; Editor, 1934-, *Fintayson, H. H., The University of Adelaide. Freney, M. RAPHAEL. Freney, M. Ricuarn. Frewin, O, W., M.B., B.S., 68 Woodville Road. *Fry, H. K., D.S.O., M.B.. B.S., B.Sc., Glen Osmond Road, Parkside—Council, 1933-. *Ginson, E. S. H., B.Sc., 297 Cross Roads, Clarence Gardens. GLastonBuRY, JAMES OxiveR GarNeT, B.A., B.Sc., Dip.Ed., 4 Mornington Road, Unley, +GLasronrnury, O, A., Adelaide Cement Co., Brookman Buildings, Grenfell Street. Grover, C. R. J., Stanley Street, North Adelaide. Goprrey, F. K., Robert Street, Payneham, S.A. *GoLpsack, Harotp, Coromandel Valley. GoopHart, W. W., 7 Harrow Road, St. Peters. 7Gosse, J. H., Gilbert House, Gilbert Place, Adelaide. *GoypEr, Grorce, A.M., B.Se., F.G.S., 232 East Terrace, Adelaide. *Grant, Kerr, M.Sc., Professor of Physics, University, Adelaide—Council, 1912-15. Gray, JAMes H., M.B., B.S., Adelaide Hospital. Gray, James T., Orroroo, S.A. Greaves, H., Director, Botanic Garden, Adelaide. GrirritH, H., Hove, Brighton. Gunter, Rev. H. A. 33 Kensington Terrace, Norwood, Hacxetr, W. Cuamprion, 35 Dequetteville Terrace, Kent Town. *Hacxett, Dr. C. J., c/o Bank of Adelaide, London. *Hare, H. M., The Director, S.A. Museum, Adelaide—Couneil, 1931-34; Vice- President, 1934-, *Haty, F. J., Adelaide Electric Supply Coy., Ltd., Adelaide, *Ham, WILLIAM, F.R.E.S,, 112 Edward Street, Norwood. Hawker, Captain C. A. S., M.A., M.H_R., Dillowie, Hallett, South Australia. Hoxpen, E. W., B.Sc., Dequettevilie Terrace, Kent Town, S.A. Hosxine, H. C., B.A., 24 Northcote Terrace, Gilberton. *Hoskine, J. S., B.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. *Hossretp, Paur S., M.Sc., Office of Home and Territories, Canberra. T*HowcuHin, Proressor Water. F.G.S., “Stonycroft,’ Goodwood East—Sir Joseph Verco Medal, 1929; Rep.-Governor, 1901-22; Council, 1883-84, 1887-89, 1890-94, 1902-33; President, 1894-96; Vice-President, 1884-87, 1889-90, 1896-1902; Editor, 1883-88, 1893-94, 1895-96, 1901-1933. Hurcomse, Miss J. C., 95 Unley Road, New Parkside. Irounp, Percy, Kurralta, Burnside. *Isinc, Ernest H., c/o Comptroller’s Office, S.A. Railways, Adelaide—Council, 1934-. *Jennison, Rev. J. C., Goolwa. *Jonnson, F. A., M.D., M.R.C.S., Town Hall, Adelaide. Jounston, J., A.S.A.S.M,, 32 Fisher Street, Norwood. *Jonnston, Proressor T. Harvey, M.A., D.Sc. University, Adelaide—Sir Joseph Verco Medal, 1935; Rep.-Governor, 1927-29; Council, 1926-28: Vice-President, 1928-31; President, 1931-32, Jounston, W. C., Government Agricultural Inspector, Riverton, *Jonrs, Prorrssor F. Woon, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.S,, L.R.C.P., D.Sc., F.R.S., University, Melbourne—-Rep.-Governor, 1922-27; Council, 1921-25; President, 1926-27: Vice- President, 1925-26. snes, W. J., 28 Second Avenue, Joslin. *KreemMan, A. W., M.Sc., 12 Ningana Avenue, Kings Park. *Lauriz, D, F., Agricultural Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide. Le Messurigr, D. H., B.Se., 133 Mills Terrace, North Adelaide. Lennon, Guy A., M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., North Terrace. 280 Date ot Election, 1930. Louwycx, Rev, N. H., The Rectory, Yankalilla. 1931. *Luprsoox, Mrs. N. H., M.A., Elimatta St. Reid, F.C.T. 1922. *Manpican, C. T., M.A, B.E., D.Sc. F.G.S., University of Adelaide—Council, 1930-33; Vice-President, 1933-35; President, 1935-. 1923. MarsHa.t, J. C.. Darrock, Payneham. 1928. *Magrcraity, B. G., M.B., B.S., Magdalen College, Oxford, England. 1930. Macarey, Miss K. ne B,, B.A., B.Sc, 38 Winchester Street, Malvern. 1932. Mann, E. A., C/o Bank of Adelaide, Adelaide. 1929, Martin, F. C, M.A., Technical High School, Thebarton. 1905. *Mawson, Sir Doveras, D.Sc., B.E., F.R.S., Professor of Geology, University, Adelaide Sir Joseph Verco Medal, 1931; Rep.-Governor, 1933-; President, 1924-25; Vice- President, 1923-24, 1925-26. 1919. Mayo, Heten M., M.D., 47 Melbourne Street, North Adelaide. 1920. Mayo, Hersert, LL.B., K.C., 16 Pirie Street, Adelaide. 1934. McCroucury, C. L., B.E., A.M.LE. (Aust.), 271 Melbourne Street, North Adelaide. 1929. McLaucuuin, E., M.B., B.S. M.R.C.P., Adelaide Mospital. 1907. Metrose, Ropert T., Mount Pleasant. 1930, Mrcrer, J, I, 18 Ralston Street, Largs Bay. 1925. +¢MircHett, Professor Sir Wituram, K.C.M.G,, M.A,, D.Sc., The University, Adelaide. 1933. MrrcHett, M. L.. B.Sc.. Fitzroy Terrace, Prospect. 1924. Morrson, A. J., Deputy Town Clerk, Town Hall, Adelaide. 1930. Morrrs, L. G., Bechive Buildings, King William Strect, Adelaide. 1925. {+Murray, Hon. Sir Georce, K.C.M.G., B.A., LL.M., Magill, S.A. 1925, Norra, Rev. WM. O., Methodist Manse, Netherby. 1930, Ocxenven. G. P., Public School, Streaky Bay, S.A. 1932. Outpuant, H. R., University, Adelaide. 1913. *Oszorn, T. G. B., D.Sc., Professor of Botany, University, Sydney—Council, 1915-20, 1922-24: President, 1925-26; Vice-President, 1924-25, 1926-27, 1927, Patrrmce, T. B., B.Sc., Koonamore, via Waukaringa, S.A 1929. Pautt, Aztec, G., B.A., B.Sc., 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton Estate. 1924. Perkins, Proressor A. J., Director of Agriculture, Flinders Street, Adelaide. 1928. Purpes, Ivan F., Ph.D., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. 1926. *Prrer, C. S. M.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. 1925. *Prescort, Prorrssor J. A., D.Se., A.I.C., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond—Council, 1927-30, 1935-; Vice-President, 1930-32; President, 1932-33. 1926. Price, A. Grenrert, CMG. M.A, LittD., F.RGS., St. Mark’s College, North Adelaide. 1925. Rrcnarvson, Professor A. E. V., M.A., D.Sc., “Urrbrae,” Glen Osmond, S.A. 1926, *Rippett, P. D., Technical College, Newcastle, N.S.W. 1911. *Roacu, B. S., 81 Kent Terrace, Kent Town—Treasurer, 1920-32. 1925. Rocrrs, L. S., B.D.Sc., 192 North Terrace, Adelaide. 1905. *Rocrrs, R.S., M.A. M.D., F.L.S., 52 Hutt Street, Adelaide—Council, 1907-14, 1919-21 ; President, 1921-22; Vice-President, 1914-19, 1922-24. 1931. Rupp, E. A., 10 Church Street, Highgate. 1928. ' Scorr, A. E,, B.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. 1934. Swrnxrtep, R. C., Meteorological Bureau, West Terrace, Adelaide. 1933. Scunemper, M., M.B., B.S,. 175 North Terrace, Adelaide. 1924. *Secnit, Rarvu W., M.A,, B-Sc., Assistant Government Geologist, Flinders Street, Adelaide—Secretary, 1930-35. 1891. Serway, W. H., 14 Frederick Strect, Gilberton—Council, 1893-1909. 1925. *SHrarn, Harorp, Nuriootpa. 1928. SuoweL, H., 27 Dutton Terrace, Medindie. 1920. Srmprson, A. A., C.M.G., C.B.E,, F.R.G.S., Lockwood Road, Burnside. 1924. Srupson, Frev. N., Pirie Street, Adelaide. 1925. ~Smitu, T. E. Barr, B.A., 25 Currie Street, Adelaide. 1927. Srapreron, P. S., Henley Beach, South Australia. 1935. Stricktann, ARTHUR GEoFFREY, M.Ag.Sc. (Melb.), 14 Stirling Street, Tusmore- 1922. Sutton, J., Fullarton Road, Netherby. 1932. Swan, D.C, B.Sc, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. 1924, Symons, Ivor G., Church Street, Highgate. 1929. *Tavror, Joun K., B.A. M.Sc. Waile Agricutural Research Institute, Glen Osmond. 1933, Tavytor, Miss V., 40 Eton Street, Malvern. 1929. Tre, Sipney F., Adelaide Hospital. 1923. *Trnpa.x, N. B., B.Sc., South Australian Museum, Adelaide—Secretary, 1935-. 1935, Trioc, Frank, Government Printing Office, Adelaide. 1804. *Turwer, A. Jerrrers, M.D., F.E.S., Wickham Terrace, Brisbane, Queensland. 1925. Turner, Duprey C., National Chambers, King William Street, Adelaide. 281 Date of Election. 1933. 1924. 1929, 1912. Wa .egtey, A., B.A., B.Sc, Ph.D., 20 Urrbrae Avenue, Myrtle Bank. Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; President, 1928-30; Vice-President, 1927-28. Watxer, W. D., M.B., B.S., B.Sc., c/o National Bank, King William Street. Watters. Lance S., 157 Buxton Street, North Adelaide. *Warp, L. Kerry, B.A., B.E., D.Sc., Govt. Geologist, Flinders Street, Adelaide— Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; President, 1928-30; Vice-President, 1927-28. 1930. WuutELaw, A. J., B.Sc, High School, Naracoorte, 1930. Wirxinson, Proressor H. J., B.A. Ch.M., M.D., University, Adelaide. 1931. Witson, Cuas. E. C., M.B., B.S., “Woodfield,” Fisher Street, Fullarton. 1920. *Witton, Professor J. R., D.Sc., University of Adelaide. 1935. Winker, Rev. M. T., B.A., 20 Austra! Terrace, Malvern. 1930. *Womerstey, H., F.R.E.S., A.L.S., S.A. Museum, Adelaide. 1923. *Woop, J. G. D.Sc, Ph.D., Professor of Botany, University of Adelaide—Council, 1935-, ASSOCIATE, 1935. *FENNER, FRANK Jonn, 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park. PAST AND PRESENT OFFICERS OF THE SOCIETY. PRESIDENTS. 1877-79 Pror. Rare Tate, F.G.S., F.L.S. 1922-24 R,. H. Putrerne, M.3., Ch.M. 1879-81 Curer Justice [Sr] S. J. Way. 1924-25 Str Doucras Mawson, D.Sc, B.E,, 1881-82 [Str] CHarves Topp, C.M.G., F.R.A.S. F.R.S. 1882-83 H.T. Warrrett, M.A..M.D.,F.R.M.S. 1925-26 Pror. T. G. B. Oszorn, D.Sc. 1883-84 Pror. H. Lamp, M.A.,, F.R.S. 1926-27 Pror, F. Woop Jones, M.B,, B.S., 1884-85 H. E. Mats, M.LC.E. M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., D.Sc., F.R.S. 1885-88 Pror,E.H.Renniz, M.A.,D.Sc., F.C.S. 1927-28 Pror. Joun B. Cretanp, M.D. 1888-89 [Str] Epwarp C. Srirtinc, C.M.G, 1928-30 L. Keiru Warn, B.A. B.E., D.Sc, M.A., M.D. (Cantab.), F.R.C.S., P.GS.A. FE.R.S. i 1930-31. Cuas. Fenner, D.Sc. 1889-91 Rev. THomas BLacksurn, B.A. 1931-32 Pror. T. Harvey Jounston, M.A., 1891-94 Pror. Ratpw Tare, F.G.S., F.LS. D.Sc. 1894-96 Pror. WaLter Howcurn, F.G.S. 1932-33 Pror. J. A. Prescott, D.Se., A.LC. 1896-99 W.L. CLeranp, M.B. 1933-34 J. M. Brack, A.L.S. 1899-03. Pror.E.H.Renniz, M.A., D.Sc. F.C.S. 1934-35 T, D. Camreett, D.D.Sc., 1903-21 Sir Joseru C. Verco, M.D. F.R.C.S. 1935- C. T. Manpican, M.A. B.E., D.Sc., 1921-22 R. S. Rocers, M.A., M.D. F.G.S. SECRETARIES. 1877 W.C. M. Finniss. 1896-09 G. G. Mayo, CE. 1877-81 Water Rutt, C.E. 1909-12, R. H. Purrerne, M.B., Ch.M. 1881-92 W. L. Creranp, M.B. 1912-24 Watrter Rutt, C.E. 1892-93 W. C. Grassy. 1930-31 CHas. Fenner, D.Sc. 1893-94 W. B. Poorer. 1925-30 R. H, Putrerne, M.B., ChM. 1894-95 { W. L. Crecanp, M.B, 1930-35 Ratru W. Secnit, M.A, B.Sc. UW. B. Poorer. 1935- Norman B. Tinpare, B.Sc. 1895-96 W. L. CLeLanp, M.B. TREASURERS. 1877 J. S. Luovp. 1909-20 W. B. Poorer. 1877-83. Tuomas H. Smeaton, 1920-32 B.S. Roacu 1883-92 Water Rutt, C.E. 1932-33 Cras, FENNER, D.Sc. 1892-94 W. L. CLeLann, M.B. 1933- W. Cureistiz, M.B., B.S. 1894-09 Watrer Rutt, C.E. EDITORS. 1877-83 Pror. Ratpu Tarr, F.G.S., F.L.S. 1894-95 Pror, Ratpu Tarte, F.G.S., F.LS. 1883-88 Pror. Warter Howcain, F.GS. 1895-96 Pror. Watter Howcnrn, F.G.S. 1888-93 Pror. Ratrpu Tare, F.G.S., F.LS 1896-00 Pror, Ratpu Tarts, F.GS., F.LS. 1893-94 { Pror. WALTER Howcarn, F.G.S. 1901-33 Pror. Warter Howcutn, F.G.S. ) Prov. Ratpu Tate, F.G.S., F.LS. 1934- Cuas, Fenner, D.Sc. REPRESENTATIVE GOVERNORS. 1877-83 [Str] CuHares Topp, C.M.G.,F.R.A.S. 1922-27 Pror. F. Woop Jones, M.B., etc. 1883-87 H.T. Wurrretr, M.A.,M.D.,F.R.M.S. 1927-20 Pror. T. H. pammothiny M.A., D.Sc. 1887-01 Pror. RarpH Tare, F.G.S,, F.L.S. 1929-31 Cras. Fenner, D.Sc. 1901-22 Pror. Watrer Howcurn, F.G.S. 1932-33 T. D, Camprett, D.D.Sc. 1933- Sir Doucras Mawson, D.Sc., F.R.S. GENERAL INDEX Summary 282 GENERAL INDEX. [Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described are new to science.] Acacia Kempeana, 257; umbellata, 257 Achorutes newmani, 210; hirtellus, 208 Adelaide Series, 25, 32 Agraptocorixa curynome, 249 Agrostis tenuis, 254 Aiston, G., Australites, 127 Alderman, A. R., 24 Aldgate District, Houghton magma, 10 Alternanthera nana, 256 Armaranthus Mitchellii, 256 Ameria pyramidatus, 104 Amphibolite, Yankalilla, 5 Amphibromus Neesii, 253; recurvatus, 252 Analyses, Igneous rocks, 14 Andalusite, 42 Angaston, 40 Augen gneisses, 51, 25 Anisops doris, 249; hyperion, 249 Annual Report, 266 Antigona dimorphophylla, 85; propinqua, 84 Arca trapezia, 105 Ardrossan, 79 Arltunga, 142 Arrhopalites aurantiaca, 218 Arthropleona, 207 Arunta, 142 Asbestos, 45, 58 Astephanus, 214; denisi, 215 Astrangia tabulosa, 86 Australia, rainfall-evaporation ratio, 113-124 Australian Black Earths, 168 Australian Fungi: Notes and Descriptions. —-No. 11, J. Burton Cleland, 219 Australites distribution, 133; F. FE. Suess, 140; forms and structures, 129; Map of distribution, 134; mode af origin, 136; Part IJ, numbers, forms, distribution, and origin, C. Fenner, 125 Baeckea crassifolia, 259; var. pentamera, 259 Barossa Ranges, 36, 25; scries, 22 Barassian, Houghton Magma, 3 Rarytes, Dutton, 58 Basalt, Tlundred of Dutton, 54 Basic Intrusions, Barossa, 53 Bassia quinquecuspis, 256 Belvidere, 40; grits, 49 Benson, W. N., 1 Beryl, 59; pegmatite, 54 Billitonites, 125 Black Earths, 168; analyses, 194, 195; of Austratia, The, and the Regur of India, a comparative study, J. S. Hosking, 168 Black Forest, 72; geological section, 78 Black, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia, 252 Blanche Point, 237 Boronia inornata, 246 Bougainville, 241 Brachiaria notochthona, 254 Brachychiton Gregorii, 259 Brachyechne ciliaris, 254 Brachyloma daphnoides, 247 Brachystomella afurcata, 208 ; geniculta, 208 ; granulata, 207 Breccias, Belvidere, 51 Brooklyn Park, 80, 101 Brown Coal, Noarlunga, 201; sulphur, 203 Building Stones, Angaston marble, 59 Bulbophyllum (Polyblepheron) from North Queensland, R. S. Rogers, and W. a. Nicholls, 204; cilioglossum, 204 Bullock’s bore, 72 Burdon, R. S., lecture, 264 Burtonia polyzyga, 257 Cakile maritima, 257 Calandrinia balonnensis, 256 Calatis latiuscula, 262 Callitris, 238 Cantharellus attenuatus, 219 Carex inverga, 255 Cassia artemisioides, 244; desolata, 245; eremophila, 245; glutinosa, 245; pleoro- carpa, 245; pruinosa, 245; Sturtu, 245; involucrata, 246; venusta, 257 Ceratogyne obionoides, 248 Cestade: Porotacnia, 164 Chaetophallus, 164; musculosus, 165 Chapman, TF, 241; plant remains of lower oligocene age from near Blanche Point, Aldinga, South Australia, 237 Chernozems (black earths), 168 Chewings, Charles, The pertatataka series in Central Australia, with notes on the Amadeus Sunkland, 141 Chlamys asperrimus antiaustralis, 83; den- nanti, 83 Christie, Wm., lecture, 264 Chronological successions, geology, Nth. Mt. Lofty Ranges, 62 Cideris, 74 Clausinella subroborata, 84 Clavaria subrugosa, 220 Cleland, J. B., 219 Clerodendron, 239; ovalifolium, 261 Climatic factors and soil types, 171 283 Climate in relation to insect ecology in Aus- tralia; mean monthly temperature and pre- cipitation-evaporation ratio, J. Davidson, 107 Collemhola: on some new species and records of Australia and New Zealand, EL. Womersley, 207 Commersonia crispa, 259 Copper, Truro, 56 Coprosma Baueri, 261 Cooke, W. Ternent, an examination of the brown coal of Noarlunga, Part II, 201 Corbula (Notocorbula) ephamilla, 85 Corixidac, 249 Cotton, B. C., Conchology, 70, 106 Cotton, Prof. L, A., 34 Crawford, Mount, 29 Croydon hore, 79 Cryptandra tomentosa, 246 Cucullaca corioensis, 85 Cymatium armatus, 85 Cynosurus echinatus, 254 Cyperus pygmaeus, 255; tenellus, 255 Dampiera rosmarinifolia, 247 Darling Downs, 168 Darwinia homoranthoides, 247 David, Sir Edgeworth, 143 Davidson, J., 107 Deering Fault, Central Australia, 153 Dentalium acriculum, 74; (Entalis) mantelli, 74 247; micropetala, Dentella pulvinata, 261 Desert sandstone, 142 Dicrastylis Gilesii, 261 Dictyolus cinnamoneus, 219 Digitaria coenicola, 254 Dinaphorura, 212; diversispina, 213; novac- Ecalandeac, 213 Diorite, Yankalilla, 5; Barossa, 12; Noar- lunga, 11; Kuitpo, 9; Moorooroo, 13 Diplotaxis tenuifolia, 257 Diprotodon, 105 Distribution of Australites, Map, 134 Divaricella quadrisuleata, 84 Dodwell, G. F., 127 Dolerite, Moorooroo, 13; Myponga, 8 Dry Creek, 70 Dunn, E. J., 127 Mount Compass, 9; Eden Valley, 40 Elaeocarpus, 239 Entomobryoidea, 213, 216 Eragrostis Basedowii, 252; minor, 252 Eremophila Gibsonii, 261 Eucalyptus bicolor, 259; ochrophylla, 259 Eucarya acuminata, 256 Eucrassatella Kingicoloides, 83 Fuphorbia Finlaysanii, 258 laeviglumis, 252; Examination of the lunga, Part II, W. Fault basins, 19 Pelspar, 58 Fenner, Charles, 125, 263, 265 Fenner, F. J., 103 I“bularia gregata, 71 Ficonium, 238 Ficus eugenioides, 255 Fimbristylis diphylla, 255 Finke River, 142 Finlayson, H. H., 106, 221, 227, Flinders Chase, 103 i of South Australia, Ernest H. Ising, Brown Coal of Noar- Ternent Cooke, 201 Folsomides exiguus, 214 Fomes Lloydii, 219; robustus var. melaleucae, 219 Frankenia cordata, 259 Ganoderma polymorphum, 219 Gawler Plain, 20 ‘reolagical Sections West of Adelaide, 68 Geology, Central Australia, 142 Glacial deposits, 40 Glanville bore, 101, 97, 87 Glauconite pellets, 76 Glycine sericea, 258 Glycymeris convexa, 85 Gneisses, Moorooroo, 27 Gold. Barossa, etc., 56 Goyder’s Springs, 150 Granite, Tanunda Creek, 28; Jutland, 54 Graphite, Barossa, 59 Greenock, erratics, 41 Grevillea lavandulacae, 255; Wickhamii, 255 Haematite, 39 Hakea ulicina var. flexilis, 244 Hale, H. M., 265; Some aquatic hemiptera from Western Australia, 249 | Hall, F. J, 103 Halorrhagis Gossei, 260 Halovelia maritima, 251 Heavitree Gap, 147 Heliotropium supinum, 260; Hibbertia virgata, 246 Hibiscus Sturtii, 258 Hiltonia bore, 101, 73 Hosking, J. S., the Black Earths of Australia and the Regur of India, 168 Hossfeld, Paul S., 16 Houghton Magma, 1 Howchin, W., 19, 10, 68 Humbug Scrub, 22 Humidity and insect ecology, 107 Hybanthus enneaspermus, 259 tenuifolium, 260 | Hydromys chrysogaster, 225 | Hypogastruridae, 207 Hyoscyamus niger, 260 284 Igneous intrusions, 51; rocks, analyses, 14 Ilmenite, 57 Indian regur soils, 168 Insect Ecology, 107 [ron oxides, 57 Irpex epitephrus, 219 Ising, E. H.: Exhibit, 263, 264, 265; Notes on the Flora of South Australia, 243 Isotoma decemoculaia, 216; Isotoma georgiana, 216; raf, 216 Isotomidae, 213 Isotomodes productus, 213 Jack, Dr. R. L,, 45 Johnston, T. Harvey, Remarks on the Cestode genus Porotaenia, 164; Verco Mcdal, 266 Justicia procumbens, 261 Kangaroo Island, 103 Kaolin, 58 Katianna oceania, 218 Katianna pescotti, 218 Keith Ward, Dr. L., 68 Ree ein integrifolia, 259; nephrosperma, 9 Kerr Grant, Prof. lecture, 264 Kitchener, Mount, 29 Kochia ciliata, 256; tomentosa, 256 Kyanite, 59 Lacustrine deposits, 51 Lacroix, A., 125 Lake Mackay, 159 Larapinta, 142; residues, 162 Laschia fusca, 219 Laterite, 49 Leda leptorhynchus, 74 Lendon, A. A., 264 Lentinus dactyloides, 220 Leocopogon Clelandii, 247 Lepidocyrtinus, 216 Lepidium Muelleri-Ferdinandi, 257 Lepidocyrtinus queenslandiae, 216 Liotia mayana, 76 Lobelia gibbosa, 247 Lower-Miocene formation on Bougainville Island, by Sir. D. Mawson and F. Chap- man, 241 Lower Pliocene, Adelaide, 101 Lower Pliocene (Kalimnan), 68 MacDonnell Ranges, 148 Madigan, C. T., 143 Macropus, 106 Mammal Bone Beds of Probable Pleistocene Age, Rocky River, Kangaroo Island, N. B. Tindale, F. J. Fenner, and F. J. Hall, 103 Mammals from the Lake Eyre Basin, Part TI, H. H. Finlayson, 277 1 Map, Mount Lofty Ranges, 2 Maps, rainfall-evaporation ratio, Australia, 113-124 | Marbles, Angaston, ctc., 43; Barossian, 31 Marine gravels, 49 Mawson, Sir Douglas, 143, 241, 6, 237 Mechanical analysis of soils, 173 Meretrixsphericula, 84 Mesaphorura krausbaueri, 212 Mesira brunnea, 217 Mesovelia hungerfordi, 251 Micronecta robusta, 249 | Microvelia peramoena, 251 Miltha (Milthoidea) grandis, 84 Miocene (Janjukian), 95 Mitchell, Sir William, 264 Moldavites, 125 Monthly precipitation-cvaporation ratio, 108 Montia, 244; verna, 244 Mount Compass, 7 Mount Crawford, 11 Mount Gould, 37 Mount Kitchener, 52 Mount Lofty Ranges, 68, 1, 2, 101, 16, 19 Mount Olga, 148 Mount Palmer, 151 Murray Plains, 20 Muscovite, 58 Myoporum montanum, 247 Myponga, 3, 6 Narcoota Series, 34, 47 Neodiastoma provisi, 85, 88 Nicholls, W. H., 204 Nicotiana occidentalis, 260 Noarlunga, Brown Coal, 201 Notes on the geological sections obtained by several borings situated on the plain between Adelaide and Gulf St. Vincent, Prof. W. Howchin, 68 Notonectidae, 249 Notonecta (Enitharonecta) handlirschi, 249 Nototherium, 105 Odontella trispina, 208 Qnychiuridae, 211 Opal, 59, 31 Orhitolites duplex, 81 Origin of Australites, 136 Ornithogalum thyrsoides, 255 Orovavi River, 242 | Ostrea (?) hyotidoidea, 82 Oxalis flava, 258 Palmer, 40 Pank, Harold, 267 Parakatianna spinata, 218 Para Series, 34 Para Wirra, 24 Paranura australasiae, 208 285 Plant remains of lower Oligocene age from near Blanche Point, Aldinga, South Aus- tralia, Frederick Chapman, 237 Pegmatite, 7, 8 Pelicaria coronata, howchini, 85 Peneplain, 20 Permo-Carboniferous, 3 Pertaknurra, 145 Pertaoorta, 161, 142 Pertatataka, 141, 142, 157 Pertnjara, 146 Petalostylis spinescens, 257 Petaurus australis, 222 Phascolarctos cinereus, 223 Physiography, 19 Pimela flava, 259 Pinctada (Margaritifera) carchariarum, Pitjentara, 146 Platytrochus hastatus, Plea brunni, 251 Plectronia linearis, 261 Pleidae, 251 Pleistocene, 69 Poacites, 238 Podocoma nama, 262 Poduroidea, 207 Polinices subvarians, 86 Pollinia fulva, 255 Polypogon maritimus, 254 Porotaenia, Remarks on the Cestode Genus, T. Harvey Johnston, 164 Port Adelaide river, 69 Pomaderris, 239 Post-Narcoota, 53 Potorous tridactylus, 221 Pre-Cambrian, 1 Prescott, J. A., 169, 187 Proceedings of Society, 263 Profiles, Australian soil, 188 Proisotoma brisbanensis, 215 Protemnodon, 105 Psendochirus laniginosus, 222 Pulleine, Dr. Robert H., obituary, 264 83 76 Quartz, 59 Quartzites, 28 Queenstownites, 125 Quinetia Urvillei, 248 Rainfall-evaporation ratio, 113-124 Rattus lutreola, 224 Recent (Marine), 70 Regur (black soils), 168, 186, 196, 197 Report, Annual, 266 Rhagodia spinescens, 256 Rizalites, 125 Rack Phosphate, 57 Rocky River, K. 1., 103 Rogers, R. S, A new bulbophyllum from North Queensland, 204 Rubies, 59 Rutile, 57 | Santalum lanceolatum, 255 Schists, 27 Schokalsky, Regur soils, 168 Schonites, 125 Scleranthus diander, 256 Selway, W. H., exhibit, 263; 266 Senkungsfeld, 68 Serpentine, 31, 59 Shaw collection, Australites, 125 | Sida pedunculata, 258 Silver-lead, 56 Sminthurides aquaticus, 217; oculatus, 218 Smynthurus viridis, 108 Soils, Analyses, 173 Soil Profiles, Australian, 189; types, 171 Solanum diversiflorum, 260; eremophilum, 260; lasiophyllum, 260 Solomon Islands, 241 Solomon, M. E., 249 Some aquatic hemiptera from Western Aus- tralia, H. M. Hale, 249 Some Victorian Mammals, H. H. Finlayson, 221 South Para, 24 Sterculia, 239 Stokes Pass, 153 Stypandra, 243; glauca, 243 Styphelia adscendens, 247 Suess, F, E., 140, 125 Swainsona adenophylla, 257; microcalyx, 257; phacoides, 257 Syenite, 8, 4 Symphypleona, 217 Tanami, 157 | Tanunda Creek, 52; District, 12 Tapley’s Hill, 40 Tellina aequilatera, 84 Temperature in Australia, 107 Tephrosia sphaerospora, 257 Terebratelia, 71 Tertiary Limestones, 49 | Tetrabothrius, 165; fragilis, 165; kowalewskii, 165 Thalacomys lagotis sagitta, 233, 236; minor, 233; minor var. miselius, 227 Thersites moorundiana, 103, 106 Tillite Horizon, 41 Tindale, N. B., 103 Trichinium nobile, 256; obovatum, 244 Triodia longiceps, 255 Triumfetta appendiculata, 258 Tullbergia, 211; gambiense, 211 Tullberginae, 211 Turezaninow, N. S., 262 Turritella aldingae, 73, 79 Upper Pliocene—Adelaidean, 69 Urochloa practervisa, 253 Veliidae, 251 Verco Medal, award, 266, 268 Verco, Sir Joseph, 70 Victoria River, 157 Viola Sieberiana, 246 Wad, 59 Wahlenbergia Sieberi, 261 Werrikooian, 69 Williamstown, 37 Witton Bluff, 80 286 ‘| Womersley, H., on some new species and records of Australian and New Zealand Collembola, 207 | Wood Jones, F., 103 Wooinough, Dr., 21, 22 | Yankalilla, 3, 5 | Zeacrypta (crepidula), 86 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1935. Vol. LIX, Plate I. Gillingham & Co. Ltd., Adelaide Trans, aud Proc. Roy Soc. S, Austr., 1935, Vol. LIX, Plate TT, Tertiary Leayes, Blanche Point, Aldinga, C. photy Gillingham & Co. Ltd, Adelaide Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1935. Vol. LIX, Plate TUT. Fig. 1. Microphotograph of a section of Lower:Miocene Lepidecyclina limestone from the Orovari River, Bougainville Island. The upper cross section is that of [.. verbeeki; that in the left-hand Inwer corner is L. melanesiana: magnified 20 diams. Fig, 2. A firther section of the same limestone, figuring L. douvillei: magnified 20 diams. g. 3. Photograph of a microscope section of the Lawer Miocene Lepidoeyclina limestone fram {he Orovari River, Bougainville Island: magnified 8 diams. Gillingham & Co. Ltd., Adelaide Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1935. ol og SS ra me A Ay PETE aA TT IT TES ISPS Se) ‘ % Pye oot ki ah ae a) 4 Ny, Vol. LIX, Plate LV. 1. Urochloa praetervisa. 2. Brachiaria Gilesit, 4. Brachiaria notochthona. 3. Nicotiana occidentalis. Gillingham & Co. Ltd., Adclaide Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1935, Vol, LIX. Plate V. 1. Euphorbia Finlaysonti. 2. Halorrhagis Gossci. 3. Dentella pulvinata. 4. Amphibromus recurvatus. Gillingham & Co. Ltd., Adelaide TT TET tit CONTENTS. Page Oxsrruary Notice: Dr. Robert H. Pulleine. With Portrait a uv Encuanp, H. N.: Petrographic Notes on cs yeas us Houghton ee in es Mount Lofty Ranges 1 Hossretp, P. S.: The Geology of part of the North Mount Lofty Ranges 16 Howcuin, PROF. W.: Notes on the Geological Sections obtained by several ae situated on the Plain between Adelaide and Gulf St. Vincent 68 Trnpate, N. B., Fenner, F. J., and Hatt, F. J.: Mammal Bone Beds of probable Pleistocene ‘Age, Rocky River, Kangaroo Island : 103 Davivson, Dr. J.: Climate in Relation to Insect Ecology in Australia. 2. Mean Monthly Temperature and Precipitation-Evaporation Ratio .. ‘S Rees itr Fenner, Dr. C.: Australites, Part II. Numbers, Forms, Distribution, and Origin .. 125 Cuewincs, Dr. C: The Pertatataka —— in Central seg with Notes on the » Amadeus Sunkland ot Ke j = oe : 5 ‘ -+ 4/41 Jounston, Pror. T. Harvey: Remarks on the Cestode Genus Porotaenia 164 Hosxine, J, S.A Ruan mele Se of the ae = of Agews and us Regur of India = 2 : ng .. 168 Cooxe, W. Ternent: An Examination of the Brown Coal of Noarlunga, Part II 201 Rocers, Dr, R. S., and NicHoLts, yi Bs Redo next Babee from North Queensland e — % = 204 Womerstey, H.: On Some New Species and Records of Australian and New Zealand Collembola ne : = = se! - = = eer CLELAND, Pror, J. B.: Australian Fungi. Notes and Descriptions—No. 11 . 219- Fintayson, H. H,: Notes on Some Victorian Mammals .. PS =a ey 44! Fintayson, H. H.: Sees “Mammals gees the Lake any Basin. eat Il — The Peramelidae _.. : = Pee 4 CuHapMAN, F.: Plant Remains of Lower Sige Age from near Blanche Point, Aldinga, South Australia .. = =e =: “2 = oe < ney Fe Mawson, Sir D., and Cuapman, F.; The Occurrence of a Lower Miocene Forma- tion-on Bougainville Island . : F a gts ee 241 Istnc, E. H.; Notes on the Flora of South Australia—No. 4 . 243 Hatz, H. M.: Some Aquatic Hemiptera from Western Australia 249 Back, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia—No, 33... 3 aeeene ApstRaAct OF PROCEEDINGS ¢ 263 ANNUAL REPoRT 266 Sir JosepH Verco MEDAL oi ca ee ae = ee ae Be .. 268 BALANCE-SHEETS ... ee ae = = oe vi es s% 269-270 EnpowMent Funp = = = oe = a es a “CEL Donations To Liprary IN EXCHANGE 272 List oF FELLows, MEMBERS, ETC. 278 Past AND PRESENT OFFICERS OF THH SOCIETY 281 INDEX oS a = << = z= = = Sera As saints.)